Arihant NEET Objective Physics Volume 2 by DC Pandey 2022 Edition (1) - Unlocked-Compressed-Part - 2

190 OBJECTIVE Physics Vol.
As R 2 and R 3 are in series, their combined resistance Now, R ′′ and 3 Ω are in series,
=2+2= 4Ω 40 79
R ′′′ = R ′ ′ + 3 =+3= Ω
This combination is in parallel with R 5 (= 2 Ω ). 13 13
Hence, resistance between points of B and D is given by Now, R ′′′ and 1 Ω are in parallel, so resistance between A and
1 1 1 B,
= +
R 4 2 1 × 79 /13 79
(R ′′′′ ) = = Ω
1 6 1 + 79 /13 92
⇒ =
R 8
4 Example 3.26 Find the effective resistance between A and B
⇒ R= Ω for the network shown in the figure below
3
C D E
2Ω 2Ω 2Ω
R2 R3 C 4Ω 4Ω
F
2Ω 2Ω
B D 4Ω
R5 A B
R1 R4 2Ω
A E Sol. At points A and D, a series combination of 2 Ω, 2 Ω

resistance (along AC and CD) is in parallel with 4 Ω resistance
Now, resistance R1, R, R 4 form a series combination. So,
resistance between the ends A and E is (along AD), therefore resistance between A and D
4 1
R ′ = 4 + + 4 = 9.34 Ω = =2Ω
1 1
3 +
2+2 4
Example 3.25 In the given network of resistors, find the
Similarly, proceeding this way the resistance between A and F
equivalent resistance between the points A and B and
1
between the points A and D. = =2Ω
1 1
6Ω +
D C 2+2 4
Finally, resistance between A and B
2Ω 5Ω 3Ω 1 4
= = Ω
1 1 3
+
A
1Ω
B 2+2 2
4
Sol. Resistance between A and D, Thus, the effective resistance between A and B is Ω.
3
As we can see from the circuit, 1 Ω and 3 Ω are in series,
⇒ R1 = 1 + 3 = 4 Ω Example 3.27 Find the equivalent resistance between A
and B.
4 × 5 20
Now, R1 and 5 Ω are in parallel, R 2 = = Ω 4Ω 2Ω 1Ω
4+5 9 A
74
Now, R 2 and 6 Ω are in series, R 3 = 20 / 9 + 6 = Ω
9 9Ω 5Ω 1Ω
74
×2 B
37
Now, R 3 and 2 Ω are in parallel, R 4 = 9 = Ω 4Ω 3Ω 1Ω
 74  23
 + 2 Sol. 4Ω 2Ω 1Ω
 9  A
Resistance between A and B,
The resistors AD (= 2 Ω ) and DC (= 6 Ω ) are in series to give a 9Ω 5Ω 1Ω
total resistance R ′ = 8 Ω. The resistance R ′ (= 8 Ω ) and the
resistor AC (= 5 Ω ) are in parallel. Their equivalent B
5 × 8 40 4Ω 3Ω 1Ω
resistance is, R ′′ = = Ω
5 + 8 13
Current Electricity 191
As per the dotted region, 1 Ω, 1 Ω and 1 Ω are in series,

R =1+1+1= 3 Ω B
4Ω 2Ω 6R
A R 9R
(iii)
A O
9Ω 5Ω 3Ω 12R
B
4Ω 3Ω
Sol. (i) The points connected by a conducting wire are at same
In dotted region, 3W and 5 W are in parallel, potential. Then, redraw the diagram, by placing the
Þ R1 = 3 ´ 5 = 15 W points of same potential at one place and then solve for
3+5 8 equivalent resistance.
4W 2W
A
6R X 9R 12R
9W (15/8 )W A B
Y
B
4W 3W
In dotted region, 2 W, 3W and (15/8) W are in series,

Þ R2 = 2+3+ 15 = 55 W 6R Parallel
8 8
4W
A
9R
A, Y B, X
9W 55 W
8
12 R
B
4W
In dotted region, (55/8) W and 9 W are in parallel,
Hence, from the new figure A and Y are at same potential;
55 ´ 9
8 B and X are at same potential.
Þ R3 = = 495 W
55 + 9 127 1 1 1 1 13
⇒ = + + =
8 R eq 6R 9R 12R 36 R
4W
A 36R
R eq = = 2.77R
495 13
W
127 B
B B
4W 2R
In dotted region, 4 W, 4W and (495/127) W are in series, 2R A 2R
(ii) B B
Þ Req = 4 + 4 + (495/127) Þ Req = 1511 W
127
2R
Example 3.28 Find the equivalent resistance between A and B.
B
Similarly, placing the points of same potential at one
(i) A B place, then the equivalent resistance is
6R 9R 12R
2R
2R
A B
B
2R 2R
2R A 2R
(ii)
2R
2R In parallel, Req = 2R = 0.5R
4
192 OBJECTIVE Physics Vol. 2
B 6R V 12 × 3
So, current supplied by battery, I = = = 9A
B R 4
6R
R 9R (ii)
R 2W
(iii) A B A B
O 9R 6W
12R 12 R X Y
4W
B I
1 1 1 1 13 36
In parallel, = + + = ⇒ R′ = R
R ′ 6R 9R 12R 36R 13 1W
20 V
In dotted region, resistances are in parallel,

R 36R/13 4×2 8 4
A B ⇒ R1 = = = Ω
4+2 6 3
36R 49 6W 4/3 W
In series, R eq = R + = R = 3.77R Y
13 13 X
Example 3.29 (i) Determine the current supplied by the
battery in the circuit as shown
4Ω
20 V 1W
12 V 8Ω 4Ω 8Ω
All resistance in the circuit are in series,
4 25
R eq = 6 + 1 + = Ω
3 3
(ii) Find currents in resistances 2 Ω and 4 Ω.
V 20 × 3 12
2Ω ∴ Current supplied by battery, I = = = A
6Ω R 25 5
In order to calculate the current in resistance 2 Ω and 4 Ω,
4Ω we can redraw the circuit as
I1 2W
I = (12/5) A
20 V 1Ω
6W X Y
Sol. (i) Placing the points of same potential as shown
4W I2 4W
I A A A
(16/5) V
12 V 8W 4W 8W
Potential difference across
12  4 16
XY , VXY = IR1 =     = V
 5   3 5
B B B B
2 Ω and 4 Ω are parallel across XY . Hence, they have
All resistances in the circuit are in parallel, same potential.
1 1 1 1 1 V 16 8 V 16 4
⇒ = + + + ⇒ I1 = XY = = A and I 2 = XY = = A
R eq 4 8 4 8 2 5×2 5 4 5×4 5
2 +1+ 2 +1 6 3 Example 3.30 Calculate the current shown by the ammeter A
=
= =
8 8 4 in the circuit shown in figure.
R eq = (4 /3) Ω 4Ω
Now, the circuit becomes 8Ω 8Ω
8Ω 8Ω
I
4Ω +
12 V A
4/3 W
12V
Sol. The given circuit can be redrawn as

8R
8Ω 4Ω 8Ω
4r
8Ω 8Ω P Q
4Ω + 8R
A
All resistances in the circuit are in parallel,

12V 1 1 1 1 R +r
= + + =
From the above figure, the two 8 Ω resistances are connected R eq 8R 4r 8R 4Rr
8×8 4Rr
in parallel, so equivalent resistance, R eq = = 4 Ω. ⇒ R eq = Ω
8+8 R +r
These two combinations are connected in series, so equivalent (ii) Similarly as in (i), we see that there is symmetry about
resistance = 4 + 4 = 8 Ω. PQ and X,Y and Z are at same potential. So, remove
Now, we have resistances of 4 Ω, 8 Ω and 4 Ω connected in resistances between X andY ;Y and Z.
parallel, so Series, 4R
P
1 1 1 1 5 8 2R
⇒ = + + = or R = Ω P
2R
R 4 8 4 8 5 Z
2R 2R
Also, V = 12V (given)
2R
V 12 15
∴ Current, I = = = = 7.5 A 2R 2R 2R 2R
Se
R 8/5 2 Y
rie
2R
s,
2R 2R
4
Example 3.31 Find the equivalent resistance between P and Q.
R
X
2R
(i) 4R 4R Q
2R
R Series, 4 R Q
P Q
2r 2r P
R
4R
4R 4R
4R
(ii) P 2R
4R
2R 2R
2R 2R Q
2R 2R In parallel, Req = 4R W
3
2R Q Example 3.32 Find the equivalent resistance between A and B.
Sol. (i) It can be seen that, this diagram is symmetrical about PQ, R R R
A ∞
so points on the perpendicular bisector of PQ, i.e. X,Y and Z
are at same potential. So, in this type of diagrams, to calculate 2R 2R 2R
the equivalent resistance, we can remove the resistances at
the same potential, i.e. the resistances between X andY ,Y B ∞
and Z, are redundant and can be removed. Sol. R C R R
A ∞
Series, 8R
4R X 4R 4R 4R
2R 2R 2R
R Series, 4r
Y 2r 2r B ∞
P Q P Q D
2r 2r
Here, we have infinite pairs of R and 2R. Suppose, the
R
equivalent resistance is R 0 between C and D, i.e. excluding
4R Z 4R 4R 4R one pair near AB (since, pairs are infinite, equivalent
Series, 8R resistance will remain same, if we include pair near AB).
R R
A
A
Parallel, Terminal potential difference (V )
2R . R0 2R . R0
2R R0 = Terminal potential difference of a cell is defined as the
2R + R0 2R + R0
potential difference between the two terminals of the cell
B B in a closed circuit (i.e. when current is drawn from the
2RR 0 cell). It is represented by V and its unit is volt.
⇒ R eq = R 0 = R +
2R + R 0 Terminal potential difference of a cell is always less than
(R 0 − R )(2R + R 0 ) = 2RR 0 the emf of the cell (i.e.V < ε). In closed circuit, the current
flows through the circuit including the cell, due to internal
2RR 0 − 2R 2 + R 02 − RR 0 = 2RR 0 resistance of the cell, there is some fall of potential.
R 02 − RR 0 − 2R 2 = 0 This is the amount of potential by which the terminal
potential difference is less than the emf of the cell.
R ± R 2 + 8R 2 R ± 3R
R0 = = = 2R or − R Relation between terminal potential difference, emf
2 2
Equivalent resistance between A and B = 2R (Q equivalent and internal resistance of a cell
resistance cannot be negative). (i) If no current is drawn from the cell, i.e. the cell is in
open circuit, then emf of the cell will be equal to the
Cells, emf and internal resistance terminal potential difference of the cell.
An electric cell is a source of energy that maintains a I = 0 or V = ε
continuous flow of charge in a circuit. Electric cell (ii) Consider a cell of emf ε and internal resistance r is
changes chemical energy into electrical energy. connected across an external resistance R.
R
Electromotive force (emf) of a cell (ε)
Electric cell has to do some work in maintaining the I
current through a circuit. The work done by the cell in r

moving unit positive charge through the whole circuit +
ε
–
(including the cell) is called the electromotive force (emf) Fig. 3.10
of the cell. ε
Current drawn from the cell, I = …(i)
If during the flow of q coulomb of charge in an electric R +r
circuit, the work done by the cell is W, then V
Now from Ohm’s law, V = IR ⇒ I = …(ii)
W R
emf of the cell, ε = From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
q
V ε ε 
Its unit is joule/coulomb or volt. = ⇒ r =  − 1 R
R R +r V 
If W = 1 joule and q = 1 coulomb, then ε = 1 volt, i.e. if in
the flow of 1 coulomb of charge, the work done by the cell Charging of cell
is 1 joule, then the emf of the cell is 1 volt. During charging of a cell, the positive terminal (electrode) of the cell
is connected to positive terminal of battery charger and negative
Internal resistance (r) terminal (electrode) of the cell is connected to negative terminal of
battery charger.
Internal resistance of a cell is defined as the resistance
offered by the electrolyte of the cell to the flow of current + –
Charger
through it. It is denoted by r and its unit is ohm. I I
Internal resistance of a cell depends on the following factors ε

(i) It is directly proportional to the separation between Fig. 3.11
the two plates of the cell. In this process, current flows from positive electrode to negative
(ii) It is inversely proportional to the plates area dipped electrode of the cell. From figure above, V = ε + Ir
into the electrolyte. Thus, the terminal potential difference of a cell becomes greater than the
emf of the cell.
(iii) It depends on the nature, concentration and
The potential difference across internal resistance of the cell is called
temperature of the electrolyte and increases with lost voltage, as it is not indicated by a voltmeter. Its value is equal to
increasing the concentration of electrolyte. Ir.
Potential difference (V ) across the Sol. Total resistance = 10 + 2 + r = (12 + r ) Ω

terminals of a cell 10 Ω
(i) When the cell is in open circuit, R
Battery A 2Ω
∴ V = VP − VQ = E , i.e.V = E 2V r
I=0 + E – r
P Q Now, current = 50 mA = 50 × 10−3A and emf = 2 V.
emf
Fig. 3.12 So, resistance =
current
(ii) Discharging of cell when cell is supplying current, 2
12 + r = = 40
∴ V = VP − VQ = E − Ir , i.e.V < E 50 × 10−3
R ⇒ r = 40 − 12 = 28 Ω
Example 3.35 A voltmeter of resistance 994 Ω is connected
I
E across a cell of emf 1V and internal resistance 6 Ω. Find the
P + – Q potential difference across the voltmeter, that across the
r terminals of the cell and percentage error in the reading of
Fig. 3.13 the voltmeter.
(iii) Charging of cell when cell is taking current, Sol. Given, E = 1 V, r = 6 Ω
∴ V = VP − VQ = E + Ir , i.e.V > E and resistance of voltmeter, R = 994 Ω
Source Cell
1V 6 W
E I Voltmeter I
P I + – Q
Fig. 3.14
R = 994 W
(iv) When the cell is short circuited, i.e. external Current in the circuit is
resistance is zero.
E 1
⇒ I = E /r I= = = 1 × 10−3A
R + r (994 + 6)
∴ V = VP − VQ = E − Ir = 0, i.e.V = 0
The potential difference across the voltmeter is
V = IR = 1 × 10−3 × 994
E = 9.94 × 10−1V
+ –
P Q The same will be the potential difference across the terminals
I r
of the cell. The voltmeter used to measure the emf of the cell
Fig. 3.15
will read 0.994 V. Hence, the percentage error is
Example 3.33 The reading on a high resistance voltmeter E −V 1 − 0.994
× 100 = × 100 = 0.6%
when a cell is connected across it is 3 V. When the E 1
terminals of the cell are also connected to a resistance of
4 Ω, then the voltmeter reading drops to 1.2 V. Find the Example 3.36 Find the current drawn from a cell of emf 2 V
internal resistance of the cell. and internal resistance 2 Ω connected to the network given
below.
Sol. Given, E = 3 V, R = 4 Ω and V = 12
. V
A B
As, internal resistance, 1W
E −V   3 − 1.2 1W 1W
r = R  =4  Ω = 6Ω 1W 1W
 V   12 . 
1W
D C
Example 3.34 A battery of emf 2V and internal resistance r is
connected in series with a resistor of 10 Ω through an
ammeter of resistance 2 Ω. The ammeter reads 50 mA.
Draw the circuit diagram and calculate the value of r. 2 V, 2 W
Sol. The equivalent circuit is shown below If external resistance is much higher than the total internal
resistance, then cells should be connected in series to get
1W
A B the maximum current.
1W 1W Note If dissimilar plates of cells are connected together, then their
P Q emf’s are added to each other while, if their similar plates are
1W 1W connected together their emf’s are subtracted. While their
internal resistances are always additive.
1Ω
I C I
D
E1 E2 E1 E2
2V r=2W
Eeq = E1 + E2 Eeq = E1 - E2 (when, E2 < E1)
req = r1 + r2 req = r1 + r2
Resistance in arm AB = 1 Ω Fig. 3.17
1×1 1×1 1 1
Resistance in arm PQ = + = + =1Ω Parallel grouping
1+1 1+1 2 2
Resistance in arm DC = 1 Ω In parallel grouping of cells, all anodes of cells are
These three resistances are connected in parallel. connected at one point and all cathodes of cells are
connected together at other point as shown below.
Their equivalent resistance R is given by
E, r
1 1 1 1 3
= + + =
R 1 1 1 1 E, r
1
or R= Ω E, r
3 I
Current drawn from the cell, R
E 2
I= =
R + r 1  Fig. 3.18
 + 2
3 
If n identical cells of emf E and internal resistance r each
2×3 6 are connected in parallel, then
= = A
7 7 (i) equivalent emf of the combination, E eq = E .
(ii) equivalent internal resistance, R eq = r /n.
Grouping of cells (iii) main current, I =
E
.
R + r /n
Series grouping I
In series grouping, anode of one cell is connected to (iv) current from each cell, I ′ = .
n
cathode of other cell and so on as shown below.
(v) potential difference across external resistance
E, r E, r E, r E, r = potential difference across each cell = V = IR.
If external resistance is much smaller than the total
I internal resistance, then cells should be connected in
R parallel to get the maximum current.
Fig. 3.16 Mixed grouping

If n identical cells of emf E and internal resistance r each, If n identical cells of emf E and internal resistance r each,
are connected in series, then are connected in a row and such m rows are connected in
(i) equivalent emf of the combination, E eq = nE . parallel as shown in Fig. 3.19, then
E, r E, r E, r
(ii) equivalent internal resistance of the combination,
1
r eq = nr . 1 2 n
2
nE
(iii) main current = Current from each cell = I = .
R + nr I m
(iv) potential difference across external resistance,V = IR . V
V
(v) potential difference across each cell,V ′ = . R
n Fig. 3.19
(i) Equivalent emf of the combination, Example 3.38 Find the emf and internal resistance of a
single battery which is equivalent to a combination of three
E eq = nE
batteries as shown in figure.
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance, 10 V 2 Ω
nr
r eq = 6V1Ω
m
(iii) Main current flowing through the load,
nE mnE
I = = 4V 2Ω
nr mR + nr
R+ Sol. The given combination consists of two batteries in parallel
m and resultant of these two in series with the third one.
(iv) Potential difference across load, For parallel combination, we can apply,
V = IR E1 E 2 10 4
(v) Current from each cell, – –
r r2
I E eq = 1 = 2 2 =3V
I′ = 1 1 1 1
n + +
(vi) Potential difference across each cell, r1 r2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
V Further, = + = + =1
V′ = req r1 r2 2 2
n
(vii) Total number of cells = mn ∴ req = 1 Ω
In mixed grouping of cells, the current through the Now, this is in series with the third one, i.e.
external resistance would be maximum, if the external 6V 3V
resistance is equal to the total internal resistance of the 1W 1W
nr
cells, i.e. R = . The equivalent emf of these two is (6 – 3) V or 3 V and the
m
internal resistance will be (1 + 1) Ω or 2 Ω, i.e.
Example 3.37. In the circuit shown in figure, E=3V
E1 = 10V , E 2 = 4V , r1 = r2 = 1 Ω and R = 2 Ω.
Find the potential difference across battery 1 and battery 2. r=2W
E1 r1 E2 Example 3.39 Two identical cells of emf 1.5 V each joined in

r2
parallel provide supply to an external circuit consisting of
two resistances of 17 Ω each joined in parallel. A very high
resistance voltmeter reads the terminal voltage of cells to be
R 1.4 V. Calculate the internal resistance of each cell.
Sol. Given, E = 1.5 V andV = 1.4 V
Sol. Net emf of the circuit = E1 + E 2 = 14 V
Resistance of external circuit = Total resistance of two
E1 r1 E2 r2
resistances of 17 Ω connected in parallel
RR 17 × 17
⇒ R= 1 2 = = 8.5 Ω
V1 V2 R1 + R 2 17 + 17
I 17Ω
R
17Ω
Total resistance of the circuit,
= R + r1 + r2 = 4 Ω I
I 1.5V
∴ Current in the circuit, r
Net emf 14
I= = = 3.5 A
Total resistance 4 1.5V r
Now, potential difference across battery 1,
V1 = E1 + Ir1 = 10 + (3.5)(1) = 13.5 V Let r ′ be the total internal resistance of the two cells.
and potential difference across battery 2, Then,
V2 = E 2 + Ir2 = 4 + (3.5)(1) = 7.5 V E −V  1.5 − 1.4
r′ = R  = 8.5   Ω = 0.6 Ω
 V   1.4 
As the two cells of internal resistance r each have been Multiplying Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
connected in parallel, therefore 0.5 n 2 = 72 or n 2 = 144
1 1 1 1 2
= + or = 36
r′ r r 0.6 r ∴ n = 12 and m = =3
12
or r = 0.6 × 2 = 12
. Ω
Thus, for maximum current there should be three rows in
Example 3.40 Find the minimum number of cells required to parallel, each containing 12 cells in series.
produce an electric current of 1.5 A through a resistance of mnE 36 × 1.5
30 Ω. Given that the emf of each cell is 1.5V and internal ∴ Maximum current = = = 4.5 A
mR + nr 3 × 2 + 12 × 0.5
resistance is 1.0 Ω .
nr Example 3.42 12 cells, each of emf 1.5V and internal
Sol. As, =R
m resistance of 0.5 Ω, are arranged in m rows each containing
n ×1 n cells connected in series, as shown. Calculate the values of
∴ = 30 or n = 30 m …(i)
m n and m for which this combination would send maximum
nE n × 1.5 current through an external resistance of 1.5 Ω.
Current, I = or 1.5 = or n = 60 …(ii)
2R 2 × 30 R =1.5Ω
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

m = 60/30 = 2
m rows
and mn = 120
Example 3.41 36 cells, each of internal resistance 0.5 Ω and
emf of 1.5 V, are used to send maximum current through an (n cells in each row)
external circuit of 2 Ω resistance. Find the best mode of Sol. For maximum current through the external resistance,
grouping them and the maximum current through the
external resistance = total internal resistance of cells
external circuit. nr
or R=
Sol. Given, E = 1.5 V, r = 0.5 Ω and R = 2 Ω m
Total number of cells, mn = 36 …(i) n × 0.5
∴ 1.5 = (Q mn = 12)
For maximum current in the mixed grouping, 12
nr n × 0.5 n
= R or =2 … (ii)
m m or 36 = n 2 or n = 6 and m = 2
CHECK POINT 3.2

1. Calculate the amount of charge flowed in 2 min through a 5. The potential difference between points A and B of the
wire of resistance 10 Ω, when a potential difference of 20 V following figure is
is applied across its ends.
(a) 120 C (b) 240 C (c) 20 C (d) 4 C 5Ω 5Ω
A B
2. If e, τ and m respectively, represent the electron density,
relaxation time and mass of the electron, then the
2V
resistance R of a wire of length l and area of cross-section A 5Ω 5Ω
will be
ml mτ 2 A ne 2τ A ne 2 A
(a) (b) (c) (d) 5Ω 5Ω
ne 2τ A ne 2l 2ml 2mτ l D C
3. Four wires are made of the same material and are at the 2 8 4
(a) V (b) V (c) V (d) 2 V
same temperature. Which one of them has highest electrical 3 9 3
resistance?
(a) Length = 50 cm, diameter = 0. 5 mm 6. In the figure given below, the current passing through
(b) Length = 100 cm, diameter = 1 mm 6 Ω resistor is
(c) Length = 200 cm, diameter = 2mm
6Ω
(d) Length = 300 cm, diameter = 3mm
4. Carbon resistors, used in electronic circuits are marked for
their value of resistance and tolerance by a colour code. A 1.2A 4Ω
given carbon resistor has colour scheme brown, red, green
and gold. Its value in ohm is
(a) 0.40 A (b) 0.48 A
(a) 52 × 106 ± 10% (b) 24 × 105 ± 5%
(c) 0.72 A (d) 0.80 A
(c) 12 × 104 ± 10% (d) 12 × 105 ± 5%
7. In the figure given below, current passing through the 3 Ω 12. In the circuit shown, the point B is earthed. The potential at
resistor is 0.8 A, then potential drop through 4 Ω resistor is the point A is
3Ω 5Ω 7Ω B
4Ω A
6Ω
10 Ω
50 V
+ –
3Ω
(a) 9.6 V (b) 2.6 V (c) 4.8 V (d) 1.2 V
8. Current i as shown in the circuit will be
(a) 14 V (b) 24 V
(c) 26 V (d) 50 V
3Ω
13. A current of 2 A passes through a cell of emf 1.5 V having
internal resistance of 0.15 Ω. The potential difference
3Ω measured in volt, across both the ends of the cell will be
(a) 1.35 (b) 1.50
(c) 1.00 (d) 1.20
i
14. If V AB is 4V in the given figure, then resistance X will be
3Ω 10 V 10 Ω 5V
10
(a) 10 A (b) A (c) zero (d) infinite
3
A B
9. In the figure given below, the current flowing through 10 Ω 2V X
resistance is
20 V (a) 5 Ω (b) 10 Ω
(c) 15 Ω (d) 20 Ω
+ –
15. Two batteries of emf 4 V and 8 V with internal resistances
10 Ω 1 Ω and 2 Ω are connected in a circuit with a resistance of
3Ω 0.5 Ω 9 Ω as shown in figure. The current and potential difference
between the points P and Q are
15 Ω
1Ω 4V 8V 2Ω
P Q
(a) 12 A (b) 1.2 A (c) 0.8 A (d) 0.4 A r1 r2
10. If all the resistors shown have the value 2 Ω each, the
equivalent resistance over AB is 9Ω
A
B 1 1
(a) A and 3 V (b) A and 4 V
3 6
1 1
(c) A and 9 V (d) A and 12 V
9 2
2 2
(a) 2 Ω (b) 4 Ω (c) 1 Ω (d) 2 Ω 16. The current flowing through 5 Ω resistance is
3 3
5Ω
11. The current drawn from the battery in circuit diagram
shown is
2Ω A 7Ω
8V 4V
6V
15 V
6Ω 1Ω
0.5 Ω 9Ω
8Ω B 10 Ω (a) 10 A (b) 1 A
(c) 2.5 A (d) 0.4 A
(a) 1 A (b) 2 A (c) 1.5 A (d) 3 A
KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS Kirchhoff’s loop rule

Many electric circuits cannot be reduced to simple This law states that the algebraic sum of change in
series-parallel combinations. Kirchhoff’s laws (or rules) potential around any closed loop involving resistors and
are used to solve these complicated electric circuits. cells in the loop, is zero. It means that, in any closed part
These rules are basically the expressions of of an electrical circuit, the algebraic sum of the emfs is
conservation of electric charge and of energy. e.g. two equal to the algebraic sum of the products of the
circuits that cannot be broken down are shown in resistances and currents flowing through them. It is also
Fig. 3.20. known as loop rule. i.e. Σ ∆V = 0
R1 E1
A closed loop
A B C D This law is also known as Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law (KVL).
B
R1 R2 R3 R4
R2 E2
The loop rule is based on conservation of energy.
D C E3 Sign conventions for the application of
E1 E2
Kirchhoff’s laws
R3 F
F E I
E G For the application of Kirchhoff’s laws, the following sign
(a)
R5
(b)
conventions are to be considered.
Fig. 3.20 (i) The change in potential in traversing a resistance in
the direction of current is –IR while in the opposite
However, it is always possible to analyse such circuits by direction is +IR.
applying two rules, derived by Kirchhoff in 1845 and 1846. A I R B A I R B
The two terms related to Kirchhoff’s laws are given below
–IR +IR
Junction Fig. 3.22
A junction in a circuit is a point, where three or more (ii) The change in potential in traversing an emf source
conductors meet. Junctions are also called nodes or from negative to positive terminal is +E while in the
branch points. For example, in Fig. 3.20 (a) points D and C opposite direction is −E, irrespective of the direction
are junctions. Similarly, in Fig. 3.20 (b) points B and F are of current in the circuit.
junctions. A E B A E B
Loop
–E +E
A loop is any closed conducting path. For example, in
Fig. 3.23
Fig. 3.20 (a) ABCDA, DCEFD and ABEFA are loops.
Similarly, in Fig. 3.20 (b), CBFEC, BDGFB are loops. To calculate potential difference between two
points by using Kirchhoff’s law
Kirchhoff’s junction rule While using Kirchhoff’s laws to calculate the potential difference, the
The algebraic sum of the currents meeting at a point or at following points should be considered
a junction in an electric circuit is always zero. (i) Start from a point on the loop and go along the loop, either
anti-clockwise or clockwise, to reach the same point again, but
i.e. ∑ i=0 balance currents at junction as per KCL.
(ii) If moving along the direction of the current, there will be
junction
potential drop across a resistance and if moving in the opposite
This law can also be written as, “the sum of all the currents direction, there will be potential gain.
directed towards a point (node) in a circuit is equal to the sum (iii) The net sum of all these potential differences should be zero,
of all the currents directed away from that point (node)”. using the KVL rule.
Now, let us consider a circuit as shown in Fig. 3.24.
This law is also known as Kirchhoff’s Current Law (KCL). E1 E2
A + – B – + C
I2 i1 i2
I1
R1 R3 R4
i1 + i2 E3
I3 i1
I4 F R2 E + − D
Fig. 3.21 Fig. 3.24

In closed loop ABEFA,
Thus, in Fig. 3.21 according to KCL, I 1 + I 2 = I 3 + I 4 . − E1 − (i1 + i 2) R 3 − i1R 2 − i1R1 = 0
The junction rule is based on conservation of electric In closed loop BCDEB,
charge. E 2 + i 2R 4 + E 3 − (i1 + i 2) R 3 = 0
Example 3.43 Find currents in different branches of the (a) Find the potential difference between the points A and B.
electric circuit shown in figure. (b) Find current through 20 V cell, if points A and B are
4Ω B 2Ω connected.
A C
Sol. (i) 9V 8V 7V
3A
2V 4V 6V A B
1Ω 2Ω
When we move from A to B, using KVL,
F D
2Ω E 4Ω VA − 9 − 3 × 1 − 8 − 3 × 2 − 7 = VB
Sol. Applying Kirchhoff’s first law ( junction law) at junction B, ⇒ VA − VB = 33 V
i1 = i2 + i3 …(i) (ii) (a) 2Ω i A 1Ω
P Q
Applying Kirchhoff ’s second law in loop 1 (ABEFA),
A
− 4 i1 + 4 − 2 i1 + 2 = 0 …(ii) 20 V
B
10 V
Applying Kirchhoff ’s second law in loop 2 (BCDEB ), 5V
− 2 i3 − 6 − 4 i3 − 4 = 0 …(iii) 2Ω 2Ω
1Ω
Solving Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get i
S R
i1 = 1 A 1Ω C 2Ω
4W 2W
A B
C No current flows in the branch CB as AB is not connected.
i1 i3
i2
Let current in the circuit APSCRQA be i.
+ 1 - 2 + Using KVL,
2V 4V 6V
- + - VA − i × 2 − 20 − i × 2 − i × 1 − i × 2 − i × 2+ 10 − i × 1 = VA
i1 i3 ⇒10i = − 10 ⇒ i = − 1 A
F D i.e., direction of i is opposite.
2W E 4W
5 8 Now, A to B path will be APSCB,
i3 = −
A ⇒ i2 = A VA − i × 2 − 20 − i × 2 − i × 1 + 5 = VB
3 3
Here, negative sign of i3 implies that current i3 is in opposite VA − VB = 15 + 5i = 15 + 5 × (−1) = 10 V
direction of what we have assumed. (b) Now, if the points A and B are connected.
P 2Ω A 1Ω Q
Example 3.44 In above example, find the potential difference
between points F and C. 20 V 10 V
5V
Sol. Let us reach from F to C via A and B,
VF + 2 − 4 i1 − 2 i3 = VC 2Ω 1Ω 2Ω
∴ VF − VC = 4 i1 + 2 i3 − 2
Substituting, i1 = 1 A S 1Ω C 2Ω R
and i3 = − (5 /3) A, we get
Resistance 2 Ω, 2 Ω and 1 Ω are in series along APSC
VF − VC = − (4 /3) V and resistance 1 Ω, 2 Ω and 2 Ω are also in series
Here, negative sign implies thatVF < VC . along AQRC.
A A A
Example 3.45 (i) Find the potential difference between the points A
A and B. i1
9V 8V 7V 20 V 5V 10 V
3A
A B 55
V
1W 2W 1W 7
5W 5W
(ii) 2Ω 1Ω
B B B B
20 V A 10 V
B
So, the equivalent voltage will be
5V 20 5 10
+ +
2Ω 2Ω
E= 5 1 5 = 4 + 5 + 2 = 11 × 5 = 55 V
1Ω 1 1 1 1+ 5 +1
+ + 7 7
5 1 5 5
1Ω 2Ω
∴ Potential difference between points A and B, When some potential differenceV is applied across a
55 resistance R, charge q flows through the circuit in time t,
VA − VB = V
7 then the heat absorbed or produced is given by
For cell of emf 20 V, V 2t
W = qV = Vit = i 2Rt = joule
VA − VB = 20 − 5 i1 R
55 55 Vit i 2Rt V 2t
= 20 − 5 i1 ⇒ 5 i1 = 20 − −~ 12 A or W= = = cal
7 7 J J JR
∴ Current through cell of 20 V, i1 = 2.4 A where, J is the joule’s mechanical equivalent of heat
(4.21 J/cal).
Electrical energy and power These relations are also called Joule’s law of heating.
Electrical energy and power in electrical circuits or
components are described below. Example 3.46 In the given network of resistors, find the heat
developed across each resistance in 2s.
Electrical energy 6Ω
It is defined as the total work doneW by the source of emf 3Ω
V in maintaining the electric current I in the circuit for a
specified time t. 3Ω
5Ω
According to Ohm’s law, we haveV = IR
Total charge that crosses the resistor is given by q = It 20 V
Energy gained is given by E = W = Vq =VIt Sol. The 6 Ω and 3 Ω resistances are in parallel. So, their
2
= (IR ) It = I R t [QV = IR ] combined resistance is
1 1 1 1
2 2 = + = or R = 2 Ω
V  V t  V R 6 3 2
=   Rt = Q I = 
R R  R The equivalent simple circuit can be drawn as shown.
The SI unit of electrical energy is joule (J), where 3Ω 2Ω
1 joule = 1volt × 1ampere × 1second = 1watt × 1second. 5Ω
Electrical Power 20 V
It is defined as the rate of electrical energy supplied
per unit time to maintain the flow of electric current Current in the circuit,
through a conductor. Net emf 20
i= = =2A
W V2 Total resistance 3 + 2 + 5
Mathematically, P = = VI = I 2R = V = iR = ( 2) ( 2) = 4 V
t R
The SI unit of power is watt (W), where i.e. potential difference across 6 Ω and 3 Ω resistances same
as 4 V. Now,
1 watt = 1 volt × 1 ampere =1ampere-volt. 3W 2W
It can be defined as, the power of an electric circuit is
called one watt, if one ampere current flows in it against V
a potential difference of one volt. The bigger units of i 5W
electrical power are kilowatt (kW) and megawatt (MW)
where, 1kW = 1000 W and 1 MW = 10 6 W. 20 V
Commercial unit of electrical power is horse power (HP),
where, 1HP = 74 6 W. H 3 Ω = i 2Rt = (2)2 (3) (2) = 24 J
V2 (4)2 16
H6Ω = t= (2) =
Heating effects of current R 6 3
J
An electric current through a resistor increases its thermal V2 (4)2 (2) 32

energy. Also, there are other situations in which an H3Ω = t= = J
R 3 3
electric current can produce or absorb thermal energy.
and H 5 Ω = i 2Rt = (2)2 (5) (2) = 40 J
This effect is called heating effect of electric current.
Electricity consumption Power consumption in a

To measure the electrical energy consumed commercially, combination of bulbs
joule is not sufficient. So, a special unit kilowatthour is
used in place of joule. It is also called 1 unit of electrical Series combination of bulbs
energy. 1 kilowatt hour or 1 unit of electrical energy is
the amount of energy dissipated in 1 hour in a circuit, (i) Total power consumed is given by
when the electric power in the circuit is 1 kilowatt. 1 1 1
= + + ....
1 kilowatt hour (kWh) = 3.6 × 10 6 joule (J) Peq P1 P2
P1 P2
Note Resistance of electrical appliance On electrical appliances
(bulbs, geysers, heaters, etc.) wattage, voltage printed are called
rated values. The resistance of any electrical appliance can be
calculated by rated power and rated voltage by using R = VR2 / PR.
Example 3.47 In the following figure, find V

Fig. 3.25 Series combination of two bulbs
10 V 4V
1
(ii) Pconsumed (brightness) ∝ V ∝ R ∝ , i.e. in series
i Prated
combination bulb of lesser wattage will give more
3Ω bright light and potential difference appearing across
it will be more.
(i) the power supplied by 10 V battery,
(ii) the power consumed by 4 V battery and Parallel combination of bulbs
(iii) the power dissipated in 3 Ω resistance.
(i) Total power consumed is given by
Sol. Net emf of the circuit = (10 – 4) = 6 V
Ptotal = P1 + P2 + ....
Total resistance of the circuit = 3 Ω
Net emf 6 P1, V
∴ Current in the circuit, i = = = 2A
Total resistance 3
(i) Power supplied by 10 V battery = Ei = (10) (2) P2, V
= 20 W
(ii) Power consumed by 4 V battery = Ei = (4) (2) = 8 W
V
(iii) Power dissipated in 3 Ω resistance = i 2R = (2)2 (3) = 12 W
Fig. 3.26 Parallel combination of two bulbs
Example 3.48 In the following figure, each of the three 1
resistances, has rating of 24 W and resistance of 6 Ω. Find (ii) Pconsumed (brightness) ∝ Prated ∝ I ∝, i.e. in parallel
the maximum power rating of the circuit. R
6Ω combination, bulb of greater wattage will give more
B 6Ω C
bright light and more current will pass through it.
A
6Ω
Applications of heating effects of current
Sol. To find maximum current i, (i) Filament of electric bulb is made up of tungsten
P 24 which has high resistivity and high melting point.
we use, P = i 2R ⇒ i 2 =
= = 4 ⇒ i = 2A
R 6 (ii) Electric devices having heating elements like heater,
1 1 1 1 geyser or press are made up of nichrome which has
Resistance between A and B is = + = ⇒ R = 3Ω
R1 6 6 3 high resistivity and high melting point.
and resistance between A and C , R eq = 3 + 6 = 9 Ω (iii) Fuse wire is made up of tin-lead alloy, since it
If we make 2 A current flow through the given circuit, 1 A should have low melting point and high resistivity.
will flow through each of 6 Ω in parallel and 2 A through It is used in series as a safety device in an electric
6 Ω in series. This is the maximum current the circuit can circuit and is designed, so as to melt and thereby open
hold. the circuit, if the current exceeds a predetermined
So, power of circuit = i 2R = 2 × 2 × 9 = 36 W value due to some fault.
Example 3.49 Two bulbs having rating of 60W-220 V and Example 3.52 Two coils of power 60 W and 100 W and both
100 W-220 V are joined (i) in series and (ii) in parallel. operating at 220 V takes time 2 min and 1.5 min separately
Which of the two will glow brighter in each case? to boil certain amount of water. If they are joined (i) in series
Sol. Suppose both are used at 220 V supply in both the cases. In and (ii) in parallel, then find the ratio of time taken by them
case of parallel combination, same voltage will be appear on to boil the same water in the two cases.
each bulb, hence heat produced will be proportional to1/R . Sol. When they are joined in series, then total power,
As, bulb of greater wattage will glow more. Hence, 100 W PP 60 × 100
bulb will glow brighter. In case of series combination, same P= 1 2 = = 37.5 W
P1 + P2 160
current flows through each bulb, hence heat produced will be
proportional to R (P = i 2R ). As we know, higher the wattage, When they are joined in parallel, then total power
= 60 + 100 = 160 W
lower the resistance, then 60 W bulb will have higher
Time taken to boil the water will be inversely proportional
resistance. That means more heat will be produced in 60 W
to power, so ratio of time taken in the two cases will be
bulb in this case, so this bulb will glow brighter. 160 : 37.5.
Example 3.50 Two bulbs having rating of 40 W-220 V and Example 3.53 Figure shows three identical bulbs A, B and C,
100 W-220 V are joined in series and alternately, (i) 300 V which are connected to a battery of supply voltage V. When
and (ii) 440 V is applied. Find out which bulb will fuse in the switch S is closed, then discuss the change in
each case.
(i) the illumination of the three bulbs.
Sol. We first have to find out the maximum current each bulb (ii) the power dissipated in the circuit.
can bear. This can be calculated from rating of the bulb,
A B C
40
P = VI ⇒ 40 = 220 I ⇒ I = = 0.18 A
220
This is the maximum current 40 W bulb can bear.
100
Similarly, 100 W bulb can bear = 0.45 A. S
220 V
V2
Now, find out the resistance of each bulb, R =
P Sol. When the switch S is open,
220 VA = VB = VC = V /3
⇒ Resistance of 40 W bulb = × 220 = 1210 Ω
40 and PA = PB = PC
220 × 220
Resistance of 100 W bulb = = 484 Ω ( /3)2 V 2
V
100 = = = P (say)
R 9R
These are joined in series, so total resistance = 1694 Ω
(i) When the switch S is closed, then the bulb C is short
(i) Current in each bulb when joined with 300 V circuited and hence there will be no current through C.
300 So, PC = 0
i.e. I= = 0.177 A
1694 V
VA = VB =
This current will flow in each, so no bulb will fuse as it 2
is less than their maximum permissible current.
( /2)2 V 2 9
V
(ii) When they are joined with 440 V in series then current So, PA = PB = = = P
440 R 4R 4
will be = = 0.26 A.
1694 Therefore, the intensity of illumination of each of the
This current is less than maximum permissible current bulb A and B become 9/4 times of the initial value but
of 100 W bulb but more than that of 40W bulb. Hence, the intensity of the bulb C becomes zero.
40 W bulb will be fused and 100 W bulb will remain (ii) The power dissipated in the circuit before closing the
safe. switch is
Pi = PA + PB + PC = 3P
Example 3.51 In above example, if we join the bulbs in The power dissipated after closing the switch is
parallel and 300 V is applied, which of the two bulbs will
Pf = PA + PB + PC
fuse?
9 9
Sol. When they are joined in parallel and 300 V is applied on = P+ P+0
4 4
them, then both will get 300 V. Since, their rating is 220 V,
9
naturally, current flowing through them will be more than = P
maximum possible value. Hence, both will fuse out. 2
CHECK POINT 3.3

1. The figure shows a network of currents. The current i will 9. The electric bulb have tungsten filaments of same length. If
be one of them gives 60 W and other 100 W, then
3A
(a) 100 W bulb has thicker filament
15 A
(b) 60 W bulb has thicker filament
(c) Both filaments are of same thickness
8A
(d) it is not possible to get different wattage unless the
i lengths are different
5A
10. How many calories of heat will be produced approximately
(a) 3 A (b) 13 A in 210 W electric bulb in 5 min?
(c) 23 A (d) – 3 A (a) 800000 cal (b) 63000 cal
2. In the circuit element given here, if the potential difference (c) 1050 cal (d) 15000 cal
at point B , VB = 0, then the potential difference between A 11. If in the circuit, power dissipation is 150 W, then R is
and D are
R
1A 1.5 Ω 2.5 Ω 2V
A B C D
(a) V A = − 1.5 V, VD = + 2 V (b) V A = − 1.5 V, VD = + 0.5 V
2Ω
(c) V A = + 1.5 V, VD = + 0.5 V (d) V A = + 1.5 V, VD = − 0.5 V
3. Three resistances are connected to form a T-shape as shown
in the figure. Then, the current i in the 2 Ω resistor is 15 V
2W 4W
(a) 2 Ω (b) 6 Ω (c) 5 Ω (d) 4 Ω
20 V 5V
12. A wire when connected to 220 V mains supply has power
i
dissipation P1 . Now, the wire is cut into two equal pieces,
2W which are connected in parallel to the same supply. Power
dissipation in this case is P2. Then, P2 : P1 is
(a) 1 (b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 3
13. Two electric bulbs, one of 200 V-40 W and other 200 V-100
0V
W are connected in series to a 200 V line, then the potential
(a) 0.93 A (b) 4.5 A drop across
(c) 2.5 A (d) 1.57 A (a) the two bulbs is zero (b) both the bulbs is 200 V
4. How much work is required to carry a 6 µC charge from the (c) 40 W bulb is more (d) 100 W bulb is more
negative terminal to the positive terminal of a 9 V battery?
14. Three identical bulbs are connected in series and these
(a) 54 × 10−3 J (b) 54 × 10−6 J together dissipate a power P. Now, if the bulbs are connected
(c) 54 × 10−9 J (d) 54 × 10−12 J in parallel, then the power dissipated will be
P P
5. Two resistors R and 2R are connected in series in an electric (a) (b) 3P (c) 9P (d)
3 9
circuit. The thermal energy developed in R and 2R are in the
ratio 15. A and B are two bulbs connected in parallel. If A is glowing
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1 brighter than B, then the relation between R A and RB is
(a) R A = RB (b) RB > R A
6. The resistor of resistance R is connected to 25 V supply and
(c) R A > RB (d) None of these
heat produced in it is 25 Js −1 . The value of R is
(a) 225 Ω (b) 1 Ω (c) 25 Ω (d) 50 Ω 16. Some electric bulbs are connected in series across a
220 V supply in a room. If one bulb is fused, then remaining
7. Just as electricity is supplied at 220 V for domestic use in bulbs are connected again in series (after removing the
India, it is supplied at 110 V in USA. If the resistance of fused bulb) across the same supply. The illumination in the
60 W bulb for use in India is R, then that of 60 W bulb for room will
use in USA will be
(a) increase (b) decrease
(a) R /4 (b) R /2
(c) remain the same (d) not continuous
(c) R (d) 2R
8. If R1 and R2 are respectively, the filament resistances of 17. Electric bulbs of 50 W-100 V glowing at full power are to be
used in parallel with battery 120 V, 10 Ω. Maximum
200 W bulb and 100 W bulb designed to operate on the
number of bulbs that can be connected, so that they glow in
same voltage, then
full power is
(a) R1 is two times R2 (b) R2 is two times R1
(a) 2 (b) 8
(c) R2 is four times R1 (d) R1 is four times R2
(c) 4 (d) 6
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
FOR CURRENT AND VOLTAGE
There are various instruments like galvanometer, Voltmeter
ammeter and voltmeter which can be used to detect It is an instrument used to measure potential difference and
current and voltage, depending on the range. is always connected in parallel with the circuit element
across which potential difference is to be measured.
Galvanometer Greater the resistance of voltmeter, more accurate will be
It is an instrument used to detect small current passing its reading, as only small amount of current pass through it,
through it by showing deflection. It can be converted into by not changing the circuit current. A voltmeter is said to
voltmeter (for measuring voltage) and ammeter (for be ideal, if its resistance is infinite.
measuring current). Conversion of galvanometer into voltmeter
A galvanometer can be converted into voltmeter by connecting
Ammeter a large resistance R in series with the galvanometer.
It is an instrument used to measure current and is always
R
connected in series with the circuit element through G
which current is to be measured. Smaller the resistance of
an ammeter, more accurate will be its reading, as it will ig
not change the circuit current. An ammeter is said to be
ideal, if its resistance r is zero. V
Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter Fig. 3.28 Voltmeter

A galvanometer can be converted into an ammeter by According to Ohm’s law,V = i g (G + R )
connecting a low resistance (called shunt S) in
V
parallel to the galvanometer of resistance G. or required resistance, R = −G
Hence, only a small amount of current pass through ig
galvanometer and remaining will pass through the shunt.
Example 3.55 How can we make a galvanometer with
G and S are parallel and hence have equal potential G = 20 Ω and i g = 1 mA into a voltmeter with a maximum
difference, i.e. i g G = (i − i g ) S. range of 10 V?
S V
Sol. Using, R = –G
ig
i–ig
10
i We have, R = − 20 = 9980 Ω
ig
G 10−3
Thus, a resistance of 9980 Ω is to be connected in series with the
Fig. 3.27 Ammeter galvanometer to convert it into the voltmeter of desired range.
ig
∴ Required shunt resistance, S = G Wheatstone bridge
(i − i g )
It is an arrangement of four resistances used to measure one
Example 3.54 What shunt resistance is required to make the of them, in terms of the other three as shown in Fig. 3.29.
1 mA, 20 Ω galvanometer into an ammeter with a range of B
0 to 50 mA? i1
Ig=0
Sol. Given, ig = 1mA = 10 –3 A , G = 20 Ω

P Q i1
A C
i = 50 × 10 –3 A G
i2 i2
 ig  R S
Substituting in S =  G i
 i – ig 
D
(10−3 ) (20)
E
=
(50 × 10−3 ) − (10−3 )
Fig. 3.29 A Wheatstone bridge
= 0.408 Ω
The bridge is said to be balanced, when deflection in Sol. The given network is equivalent to the circuit shown in
galvanometer is zero (I g = 0 ), i.e. no current flows through figure below
the galvanometer (branch BD). In the balanced condition, B
P R 1Ω 2Ω
=
Q S A 5Ω C
On mutually changing the position of cell and galvanometer, 2Ω 4Ω

this condition will not change. I D I
Note Different forms of Wheatstone bridge are shown below
P 4V
Q Now, the circuit represents a balanced Wheatstone bridge.

G 1 2
R ∴ =
2 4
S
The resistance of 5 Ω in arm BD is ineffective. The
equivalent circuit reduces to the circuit shown in figure.
3W
P R
Q 6W
P G
G I I
R Q S
S 4V
Fig. 3.30
6×3
Equivalent resistance, R eq = =2Ω
Example 3.56 Find out the magnitude of resistance X in the 6+3
circuit shown in figure, when no current flows through the ∴ Current drawn from the battery,
5 Ω resistor. V 4
I= = = 2A
R eq 2
6V
X 18 W Meter bridge
5W A meter bridge is slide wire bridge or Carey Foster
2W 6W bridge. It is an instrument that works on the principle of
Wheatstone bridge.
Sol. As no current flows through the middle 5 Ω resistor, the It consists of a straight and uniform wire along a meter
circuit represents a balanced Wheatstone bridge. scale (AC) and by varying the taping point B as shown in
X 2 Fig. 3.31, the bridge is balanced.
∴ =
18 6 E K
2
or X = × 18 = 6 Ω
6 S
R D
Example 3.57 Calculate the current drawn from the battery by
the network of resistors shown in figure.
0 Meter scale 100
2Ω
B
A 1Ω 5Ω D 4Ω P Q
B A C
C
(100–l)
2Ω (l) G
Fig. 3.31 Measuring unknown resistance using meter bridge

4V
∴ At balancing situation of bridge, Example 3.59 The given figure shows the experimental set up
P R of a meter bridge. The null point is found to be 60 cm away
= from the end A with X andY in position as shown. When a
Q S resistance of 15 Ω is connected in series withY, then the
l R null point is found to shift by 10 cm towards the end A of the
⇒ = wire. Find the position of null point, if a resistance of
100 − l S 30 Ω were connected in parallel withY.
100 − l
⇒ S= ×R X Y
l
B
Applications of meter bridge
(i) It is used to measure an unknown resistance by G
R (100 − l )
using, S = A C
l
(ii) To compare the two unknown resistances by using,
R l
=
S 100 − l Sol. In first case,
X 60 X 3
Example 3.58 In the following circuit, a meter bridge is = or = …(i)
shown in its balanced state. The meter bridge wire has a Y 40 Y 2
resistance of 1 Ω-cm. Calculate the value of the unknown In second case,
resistance X and the current drawn from the battery of X 50
negligible internal resistance. = =1 …(ii)
Y + 15 50
6W
Dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
X
G X Y + 15 3
× = ×1
40 cm 60 cm Y X 2
A B 15 3
J or 1+ =
Y 2
or Y = 30 Ω
6V
3 3
X = Y = × 30 = 45 Ω
Sol. In balanced condition, no current flows through the 2 2
galvanometer. When a resistance of 30 Ω is connected in parallel withY ,
Here, P = resistance of wire AJ = 40 Ω then the resistance in the right gap becomes
Q = resistance of wire BJ = 60 Ω 30Y 30 × 30
Y′ = = = 15 Ω
R = X, S = 6 Ω 30 + Y 30 + 30
In the balanced condition, Suppose the null point occurs at l cm from end A.
P R Then,
=
Q S X l
=
40 X 15 100 − l
or =
60 6 45 l
or X =4Ω or =
15 100 − l
Total resistance of wire AB = 100 Ω
or 300 − 3l = l
Total resistance of resistances X and 6 Ω connected in series
or 4l = 300
= 4 + 6 = 10 Ω
or l = 75 cm
This series combination is in parallel with wire AB.
10 × 100 100
∴ Equivalent resistance = =
10 + 100 11
Ω Potentiometer
The potentiometer is an instrument that can be used to
emf of the battery = 6 V
measure the emf or the internal resistance of an unknown
∴ Current drawn from the battery, source. It is a device which does not draw any current
emf 6 through the circuit to measure the potential difference.
I= = = 0.66 A
resistance 100 / 11
Hence, it is equivalent to an ideal voltmeter. It also has a rheostat R h and 1-way key K are connected between the
number of other useful applications. terminals A and B of the potentiometer.
K K
E
– + + – – + +
E
–
A A
Rh Rh
400 400
B B
300 J 300
200 200
100
100
A 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
A 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
+ – 1
Meter rod R E1 Meter rod
G R
+ – 3
+ G − E2 2
Fig. 3.32 Potentiometer Fig. 3.33 Circuit for comparing emf’s of two cells
Principle of potentiometer Now, to compare emfs of two cells having a constant

The potentiometer works on the principle that, when a current passing through the wire between terminals A and
constant amount of current flows through a wire of B, the current is kept constant by using rheostat. If the
uniform cross-section and composition, then the potential plug is put in the gap between terminals 1 and 3 of 2-way
drop across the wire is directly proportional to its length, key, then the emf E 1 of the cell is given by
i.e. E 1 = (xl1 ) I …(i)
V ∝ l ⇒ V = kl …(i) where, x = resistance per unit length of potentiometer wire
where, k is the constant of proportionality. (Q l1 = balancing length)
Also, by Ohm’s law, Now, when the key is put in the gap between terminals 2
and 3 after removing it from the gap between 1 and 3,
l
V = IR = ρ I …(ii) then the emf E 2 is given by
A
E 2 = (xl 2 ) I (Q l 2 = balancing length) …(ii)
ρI
If the current I is constant, then would be constant. From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
A
E 1 l1
So, comparing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we will have =
I E 2 l2
⇒ k =ρ
A (ii) To measure internal resistance of a cell
k is also known as potential gradient, which is the Now, to find the internal resistance r of a cell of emf E, let
potential drop per unit length of the potentiometer wire. E ′ be emf of the battery. A constant current I is maintained
V through the potentiometer wire with the help of rheostat.
i.e. k=
l K1
E′
The SI unit of potential gradient is Vm−1 and CGS unit – + + –
A
is Vcm −1. Rh
400
Applications of potentiometer B
J 300
Some important applications of potentiometer are given
below. 200
(i) To compare the emfs of two cells

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Consider two cells of emfs E 1 and E 2 is to be compared. A
E
The positive terminals of both the cells are connected to G R
terminal A of potentiometer and the negative terminals of
both cells are connected to terminals 1 and 2 of a 2-way S
K2
key, while its common terminal is connected to a jockey J Fig. 3.34 Circuit for determining internal resistance of cell
through a galvanometer G. A battery of emf E, ammeter A,
Now, the plug in key K 2 is kept out and the jockey J is Example 3.62 In a potentiometer arrangement, a cell of emf
moved on the potentiometer wire to balance the emf E of 2.25V gives a balance point at 30.0 cm length of the wire.
the cell, whose internal resistance r is to be determined. If the cell is replaced by another cell and the balance point
shifts to 60.0 cm, then what is the emf of the second cell?
Suppose l1 be the balancing length of the potentiometer
wire between point A and jockey J. If x is resistance per Sol. Given, E1 = 2.25 V, l1 = 30.0 cm,
unit length of wire, then emf of cell is given by l 2 = 60.0 cm and E 2 = ?
E = xl1I …(i) As we know that in case of potentiometer, the potential
gradient remains constant.
Introduce some resistance, says S from the resistance box S
So, E ∝l
and now put in the plug key K 2 . The potential difference E1 l1
V between the two terminals of the cell is given by ∴ =
E2 l2
V = xl 2I …(ii) 2.25 30.0
[Q l 2 = balancing length] ⇒ =
E2 60.0
On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we have
2.25 × 60
E l1 ∴ E2 = = 4.5 V
= 30
V l2
Example 3.63 AB is 1 m long uniform wire of 10 Ω
E  resistance. Other data are as shown in figure. Calculate (i)
The internal resistance of the cell is given by r =  − 1 S
V  potential gradient along AB and (ii) length AO, when
galvanometer shows no deflection.
Now, substituting values of E /V in above equation, we get
l  2V 15W
⇒ r =  1 − 1 S O
 l2  A B
1.2W 1.5V
where, S is the resistance of the resistance box. G
Note 0.3W
(i) The sensitiveness of potentiometer means the smallest potential
difference that can be measured with its help. Sol. (i) Total resistance of the primary circuit
(ii) A potentiometer can also be used to compare unknown resistances
and to calibrate a voltmeter or an ammeter. = 15 + 10 = 25 Ω and emf = 2 V
(iii) A balance point is obtained on the potentiometer wire, if the fall of ∴ Current in the wire AB,
potential along the potentiometer wire due to driving cell is greater 2
than the emf of the cell to be balanced. I= = 0.08 A
25
Potential difference across the wire AB
Example 3.60 A potentiometer wire is 10 m long and has a = Current × Resistance of wire AB
resistance of 18 Ω. It is connected to a battery of emf 5V
= 0.08 × 10 = 0.8 V
and internal resistance 2 Ω. Calculate the potential gradient
along the wire. Potential gradient
Potential difference 0.8
Sol. Given, l = 10 m , R = 18 Ω, E = 5 V and r = 2 Ω = = = 0.008 V cm−1
Length 100
Current through the potentiometer wire,
E 5 5 1 (ii) Resistance of secondary circuit = 1.2 + 0.3 = 1.5 Ω
I= = = = A
R + r 18 + 2 20 4 emf = 1.5 V
IR 1 18 1.5
∴ Potential gradient = = × = 0.45 Vm−1 Current in the secondary circuit = = 1.0 A
l 4 10 1.5
The same current is flowing in 0.3 Ω resistor.
Example 3.61 A cell can be balanced against 110 cm and
100 cm of potentiometer wire respectively, when in open Potential difference between points A and O
circuit and when short circuited through a resistance of = Potential difference across 0.3 Ω resistor in the zero
10 Ω. Find the internal resistance of the cell. deflection condition
Sol. Given, l1 = 110 cm, l 2 = 100 cm, R = 10 Ω and r = ? = Current × Resistance = 1.0 × 0.3 = 0.3 V
l − l  Potential difference
∴ r =  1 2R Length AO =
 l2  Potential gradient
110 − 100 0.3 V

⇒ r= × 10 = 1 Ω = = 37.5 cm
100 0.008 V cm−1
CHECK POINT 3.4

1. In the circuit shown, A and V are ideal ammeter and (a) 3 V (b) 2 V
voltmeter, respectively. Reading of the voltmeter will be (c) 5 V (d) 4 V
7. A galvanometer of 25 Ω and having full scale deflection for
2V
a current of 10 mA is changed into voltmeter of range 100 V
by connecting a resistance R in series with the
A V galvanometer. The resistance R (in ohm) is
(a) 10000 (b) 975
1Ω 1Ω (c) 10025 (d) 9975
8. An ammeter and a voltmeter are joined in series to a cell.
(a) 2 V (b) 1 V (c) 0.5 V (d) zero Their readings are A and V, respectively. If a resistance is
now joined in parallel with the voltmeter, then
2. The net resistance of a voltmeter should be large to ensure
(a) both A and V will decrease
that
(b) both A and V will increase
(a) it does not get overheated (c) A will decrease, V will increase
(b) it does not draw emmissive current (d) A will increase, V will decrease
(c) it can measure large potential difference 9. In the circuit shown in the figure, the voltmeter reading is
(d) it does not appreciably change the potential difference 6V
to be measured
3. Two galvanometers A and B require 3 mA and 6 mA
respectively, to produce the same deflection of 10 divisions.
Then, 60 Ω
V
(a) A is more sensitive than B
(b) B is more sensitive than A
(c) both A and B are equally sensitive 40 Ω
(d) sensitiveness of B is twice that of A
4. An ammeter A, a voltmeter V and (a) 2.4 V (b) 3.4 V
+ V (c) 4.0 V (d) 6.0 V
a resistance R are connected as
shown in the figure. If the 10. To send 10% of the main current through a moving coil
voltmeter reading is 1.6 V and + galvanometer of resistance 99 Ω, the shunt required is
the ammeter reading is 0.4 A, A
(a) 9.9 Ω (b) 10 Ω (c) 11 Ω (d) 9 Ω
then R is R
(a) equal to 4 Ω 11. The potential difference across the 100 Ω resistance in the
(b) greater than 4 Ω circuit is measured by a voltmeter of 900 Ω resistance.
(c) less than 4 Ω
The percentage error made in reading the potential
difference is
(d) between 3 Ω and 4 Ω
900 Ω
5. In the following circuit, the emf of the cell is 2 V and the V
internal resistance is negligible. The resistance of the
voltmeter is 80 Ω. The reading of the voltmeter will be
10 Ω 100 Ω
2V
− +
80 Ω
10
V (a) (b) 0.1 (c) 1.0 (d) 10.0
9
20 Ω 80 Ω 12. A microammeter has a resistance of 100 Ω and a full scale
range of 50 µA. It can be used as a voltmeter or as a higher
range ammeter provided a resistance is added to it. Pick the
(a) 0.80 V (b) 1.60 V (c) 1.33 V (d) 2.00 V
correct range and resistance combinations.
6. What is the reading of voltmeter in the figure? (a) 50 V range with 10 k Ω resistance in series
10 V
(b) 10 V range with 200 k Ω resistance in series
(c) 10 mA range with 1Ω resistance in parallel
(d) None of the above
1000 Ω 13. The percentage error in measuring resistance with a meter
V bridge can be minimised by adjusting the balancing point
close to
500 Ω 500 Ω (a) 20 cm (b) 50 cm (c) 80 cm (d) 100 cm
14. When an additional resistance of 1980 Ω is connected in 17. A potentiometer is used for the comparison of emf of two
series with a voltmeter, then the scale division reads cells E1 and E2. For cell E1 , the deflection point is obtained
100 times larger value. Resistance of the voltmeter is at 20 cm and for E2, the deflection point is obtained at
(a) 10 Ω (b) 20 Ω 30 cm. The ratio of their emfs will be
(c) 30 Ω (d) 40 Ω (a) 2/3 (b) 3/2
15. In the given circuit, it is observed that the current I is (c) 1 (d) 2
independent of the value of the resistance R6. Then, the 18. In a potentiometer experiment, the galvanometer shows no
resistance values must satisfy deflection, when a cell is connected across 60 cm of the
potentiometer wire. If the cell is shunted by a resistance of
R5
6 Ω, the balance is obtained across 50 cm of the wire. The
i
internal resistance of the cell is
R1 R3 (a) 0.5 Ω (b) 0.6 Ω
R6
(c) 1.2 Ω (d) 1.5 Ω
R2 R4 19. A resistance of 4 Ω and a wire of length 5 m and resistance

5Ω are joined in series and connected to a cell of emf 10 V
and internal resistance 1 Ω. A parallel combination of two
(a) R1 R2R3 = R3R4 R5 identical cells is balanced across 3 m of the wire. The emf E
1 1 1 1 of each cell is
(b) + = +
R5 R6 R1 + R2 R3 + R4 4W 10 V
(c) R1 R4 = R2R3
(d) R1 R3 = R2R4 = R5R6 5m 1W
16. AB is a wire of uniform resistance. The galvanometer G 3m

X
shows no current when the length AC = 20 cm and E
CB = 80 cm. The resistance R is equal to
G
R 80 Ω
E
(a) 1.5 V (b) 3.0 V
G (c) 0.67 V (d) 1.33 V
A B 20. Potentiometer wire of length 1 m is connected in series
C
with 490 Ω resistance and 2 V battery. If 0.2 mV/ cm is the
potential gradient, then the resistance of the potentiometer
wire is
(a) 320 Ω (b) 8 Ω (c) 20 Ω (d) 40 Ω
(a) 4.9 Ω (b) 7.9 Ω (c) 5.9 Ω (d) 6.9 Ω
Chapter Exercises
(A) Taking it together
Assorted questions of the chapter for advanced level practice
1 The terminal potential difference of a cell is greater 8 A student has 10 resistors of resistance r each. The
than its emf when it is minimum resistance made by him from given
(a) being discharged resistors is
(b) open circuit r r r
(a) 10r (b) (c) (d)
(c) being charged 10 100 5
(d) being either charged or discharged 9 A wire has resistance 12 Ω. It is bent in the form of
2 For measurement of potential difference, a circle. The effective resistance between the two
potentiometer is preferred in comparison to points on any diameter is equal to
voltmeter because (a) 12 Ω (b) 6 Ω (c) 3 Ω (d) 24 Ω
(a) potentiometer is more sensitive than voltmeter 10 A steady current (i) is flowing through a conductor of
(b) the resistance of potentiometer is less than voltmeter
uniform cross-section. Any segment of the conductor
(c) potentiometer is cheaper than voltmeter
has
(d) potentiometer does not take current from the circuit
(a) zero charge
3 What is immaterial for an electric fuse wire? (b) only positive charge
(a) Its specific resistance (b) Its radius (c) only negative charge
(c) Its length (d) Current flowing through it (d) charge proportional to current i
4 Conductivity increases in the order of 11 There are n cells, each of emf E and internal
(a) Al, Ag, Cu (b) Al, Cu, Ag resistance r, connected in series with an external
(c) Cu, Al, Ag (d) Ag, Cu, Al resistance R. One of the cells is wrongly connected, so
5 By mistake, a voltmeter is connected in series and an that it sends current in the opposite direction. The
ammeter in parallel. When the circuit is switched on current flowing in the circuit is
(a) Only the ammeter will be damaged (n – 1)E (n – 1)E
(a) (b)
(b) Only the voltmeter will be damaged (n + 1) r + 2 nr + R
(c) Both ammeter and voltmeter will be damaged (n – 2)E (n – 2)E
(d) Neither the ammeter nor the voltmeter will be (c) (d)
nr + R (n – 2)r + R
damaged
6 If E is the emf of a cell of internal resistance r and 12 The maximum power dissipated in an external
external resistance R, then potential difference resistance R, when connected to a cell of emf E and
across R is given as internal resistance r, will be
(a) V = E /(R + r ) (b) V = E E2 E2 E2 E2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(c) V = E /(1 + r /R ) (d) V = E /(1 + R /r ) r 2r 3r 4r
7 When n cells are joined in parallel combination as 13 The current-voltage graph for a given metallic wire
shown, the strength of the current i is given by at two different temperatures T1 and T 2 is shown in
the figure. The temperatures T1 and T 2 are related as
E, r
E, r
T1
E, r i T2
R K V
(a) T1 > T2 (b) T1 < T2

nE E E
(a) (b) (c) (d) None of these (c) T1 = T2 (d) T1 > 2T2
R + nr R + (r /n ) r + Rn
14 Which of the following characteristics of electrons 21 A wire of resistance R is divided into 10 equal parts.
determines the current in a conductor? These parts are connected in parallel, the equivalent
[NCERT Exemplar] resistance of such connection will be
(a) Drift velocity only (a) 0.01 R (b) 0.1 R
(b) Thermal velocity only (c) 10 R (d) 100 R
(c) Both drift velocity and thermal velocity
(d) Neither drift nor thermal velocity 22 Three resistors each of 2 Ω are connected together
in a triangular shape. The resistance between any
15 An ammeter and a voltmeter of resistance R are two vertices will be
connected in series to an electric cell of negligible (a) 4/3 Ω (b) 3/4 Ω (c) 3 Ω (d) 6 Ω
internal resistance. Their readings are A and V,
respectively. If another resistance R is connected in 23 The effective resistance between the points A and B
parallel with the voltmeter, then potential across in the figure is
D
(a) Both A and V will increase
(b) Both A and V will decrease 3Ω
3Ω
(c) A will decrease and V will increase
(d) A will increase and V will decrease 6Ω
A C
16 The resistance of a wire is 10 Ω. Its length is
increased by 10% by stretching. The new resistance 3Ω 3Ω
will be
(a) 12 Ω (b) 1.2 Ω (c) 13 Ω (d) 11 Ω B
17 Four resistances are connected in a circuit as shown (a) 5 Ω (b) 2 Ω (c) 3 Ω (d) 4 Ω
in the given figure. The electric current flowing 24 Two resistances are joined in parallel whose
through 4 Ω and 6 Ω resistance is respectively 6
resultant is Ω. One of the resistance wire is broken
4Ω 6Ω 8
and the effective resistance becomes 2 Ω. Then, the
4Ω 6Ω resistance in ohm of the wire that got broken was
(a) 3/5 (b) 2 (c) 6/5 (d) 3
25 A wire of resistance 9 Ω is broken in two parts. The
length ratio being 1 : 2. The two pieces are
20 V connected in parallel. The net resistance will be
(a) 2 A and 4 A (b) 1 A and 2 A (a) 2 Ω (b) 3 Ω (c) 4 Ω (d) 6 Ω
(c) 1 A and 1 A (d) 2 A and 2 A 26 In the network shown, the equivalent resistance
18 Current through the 5 Ω resistor is between A and B is
3Ω
8Ω 4Ω
10 V 5Ω 10 V
A 2Ω 6Ω B
6Ω
(a) 2A (b) 4A
(c) zero (d) 1A 4 3 24 17
(a) Ω (b) Ω (c) Ω (d) Ω
19 A cell which has an emf of 1.5 V is connected in 3 4 17 24
series with an external resistance of 10 Ω. If the 27 To send 10% of main current through a moving coil
potential difference across the cell is 1.25 V, then galvanometer of resistance 99 Ω, shunt required is
the internal resistance of the cell (in Ω) is (a) 9 Ω (b) 11 Ω
(a) 2 (b) 0.25 (c) 1.5 (d) 0.3 (c) 10 Ω (d) 9.9 Ω
20 A piece of wire of resistance 4 Ω is bent through 28 A 1250 W heater operates at 115 V. What is the
180° at its mid-point and the two halves are twisted resistance of the heating coil?
together, then the resistance is (a) 1.6 Ω (b) 13.5 Ω
(a) 8 Ω (b) 1 Ω (c) 2 Ω (d) 5 Ω (c) 1250 Ω (d) 10.6 Ω
29 The resistance of a wire at 20°C is 20 Ω and at 300 cm. On connecting the same potentiometer
500°C is 60 Ω. At which temperature its resistance between A and C , the balancing length is 100 cm.
will be 25 Ω? E
The ratio 1 is
(a) 50°C (b) 60°C (c) 70°C (d) 80°C E2
30 A conducting wire of cross-sectional area 1 cm2 has (a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 3
23 3
3 × 10 charge carriers per metre . If wire carries a (c) 2 : 3 (d) 3 : 2
current 24 mA, then drift velocity of carriers is 36 A voltmeter of resistance 998 Ω is connected across
(a) 5 × 10−2 ms−1 (b) 0.5 ms−1 a cell of emf 2 V and internal resistance 2 Ω. The
(c) 5 × 10−3ms−1 (d) 5 × 10−6ms−1 potential difference across the voltmeter is
31 At room temperature, copper has free electron (a) 1.99 V (b) 3.5 V
28 −3 (c) 5 V (d) 6 V
density of 8.4 × 10 m . The electron's drift
velocity in a copper conductor of cross-sectional area 37 A wire 50 cm long and 1 mm2 in cross-section
of 10 −6 m2 and carrying a current of 5.4 A, will be carries a current of 4 A when connected to a 2 V
−1 −1 battery. The resistivity of the wire is
(a) 4 ms (b) 0.4 ms
(a) 2 × 10−7 Ω-m (b) 5 × 10−7 Ω-m
(c) 4 cms−1 (d) 0.4 mms−1
(c) 4 × 10−6 Ω-m (d) 1 × 10−6 Ω-m
32 A metal rod of length 10 cm and a rectangular
cross-section of 1cm × (1/2) cm is connected to a 38 Three resistances P, Q, R each of 2 Ω and an
battery across opposite faces. The resistance will be unknown resistance S form the four arms of a
[NCERT Exemplar]
Wheatstone’s bridge circuit. When a resistance of
(a) maximum when the battery is connected across
1 cm × (1/2) cm faces 6 Ω is connected in parallel to S, the bridge gets
(b) maximum when the battery is connected across balanced. What is the value of S ?
10 cm × (1) cm faces (a) 2 Ω (b) 3 Ω
(c) maximum when the battery is connected across (c) 6 Ω (d) 1 Ω
10 cm × (1/2) cm faces 39 A 2 V battery, a 990 Ω resistor and a potentiometer
(d) same irrespective of the three faces
of 2 m length, all are connected in series. If the
33 Two cells of emfs approximately 5V and 10 V are to resistance of potentiometer wire is 10 Ω, then the
be accurately compared using a potentiometer of potential gradient of the potentiometer wire is
length 400 cm. [NCERT Exemplar] (a) 0.05 Vm−1 (b) 0.5 Vm−1
(a) The battery that runs the potentiometer should have (c) 0.01 Vm−1 (d) 0.1 Vm−1
voltage of 8V
(b) The battery of potentiometer can have a voltage of 40 The electron with charge q = (1.6 × 10 −19 C) moves in
15 V and R adjusted so that the potential drop across an orbit of radius 5 × 10 −11 m with a speed of
the wire slightly exceeds 10 V
2.2 × 10 6 ms −1, around an atom. The equivalent
(c) The first portion of 50 cm of wire itself should have a
potential drop of 10 V current is
(d) Potentiometer is usually used for comparing resistances (a) 1.12 × 10−6 A (b) 1.12 × 10−3 A
and not voltages (c) 1.12 × 10−9 A (d) 1.12 A
34 The resistivity of a potentiometer wire is 41 A potentiometer having the potential gradient of
40 × 10 −8 Ω-m and its area of cross-section is 2 mV/cm is used to measure the difference of
8 × 10 −6 m2 . If 0.2 A current is flowing through the potential across a resistance of 10 Ω in same circuit.
wire, the potential gradient will be If a length of 50 cm of the potentiometer wire is
required to get the null point, then the current
(a) 10−2 V /m (b) 10−1 V /m
−2
passing through the 10 Ω resistor is (in mA)
(c) 3.2 × 10 V /m (d) 1 V/m (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 5 (d) 10
35 Two cells of emfs E 1 and E 2 (E 1 > E 2 ) are connected 42 The n rows each containing m cells in series are
as shown in figure. joined in parallel. Maximum current is taken from
E1 E2 this combination across an external resistance of
A
B
C 3 Ω. If the total number of cells used are 24 and
internal resistance of each cell is 0.5 Ω, then
When a potentiometer is connected between A and (a) m = 8, n = 3 (b) m = 6, n = 4
B, the balancing length of the potentiometer wire is (c) m = 12, n = 2 (d) m = 2, n = 12
43 A 100 V voltmeter of internal resistance 20 kΩ in 49 Equivalent resistance between the points A and B is
series with a high resistance R is connected to a (in Ω)
110 V line. The voltmeter reads 5 V, the value of R
is 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω
(a) 210 kΩ (b) 315 kΩ (c) 420 kΩ (d) 440 kΩ A B
44 A cell supplies a current i1 through a resistance R 1

and a current i 2 through a resistance R 2 . The 1 5 7 7
(a) (b) (c) (d)
internal resistance of this cell is 5 4 3 2
1 2 – i2R1
iR 50 In the circuit shown here, what is the value of the
(a) R 2 – R1 (b)
i1 – i2 unknown resistance R, so that the total resistance of
i2R 2 – iR
1 1 i + i  the circuit between points P and Q is also equal to
(c) (d)  1 2  R1R 2
i1 – i2  i1 – i2  R?
10 Ω
45 Out of five resistances of R Ω each, 3 are
connected in parallel and are joined to the rest 2 in 3Ω
P Q
series. Find the resultant resistance.
(a) (3 / 7) R Ω (b) (7/3) R Ω
3Ω R
(c) (7/ 8) R Ω (d) (8 / 7) R Ω
46 Two batteries A and B each of emf 2V are connected (a) 3 Ω (b) 39 Ω (c) 69 Ω (d) 10 Ω
in series to an external resistance R = 1 Ω. If the 51 Two wires of same metal have the same length but
internal resistance of battery A is 1.9 Ω and that of their cross-sections are in the ratio 3 : 1. They are
B is 0.9 Ω. What is the potential difference between joined in series. The resistance of the thicker wire is
the terminals of battery A? 10 Ω. The total resistance of the combination will be
A B 40 5
(a) 40 Ω (b) Ω (c) Ω (d) 100 Ω
3 2
52 If power dissipated in the 9 Ω resistor in the circuit
R
shown is 36 W, the potential difference across the
2 Ω resistor is
(a) 2 V (b) 3.8 V (c) zero (d) 4.8 V 9Ω
47 For a cell of emf 2 V, a balance is obtained for
50 cm of the potentiometer wire. If the cell is
shunted by a 2 Ω resistor, the balance is obtained 6Ω
across 40 cm of the wire. Find the internal
resistance of the cell.
(a) 0.25 Ω (b) 0.50 Ω
(c) 0.80 Ω (d) 1.00 Ω
2Ω
48 AB is a potentiometer wire of length 100 cm and its V
resistance is 10 Ω. It is connected in series with a (a) 8 V (b) 10 V (c) 2 V (d) 4 V
resistance R = 40 Ω and a battery of emf 2 V and 53 The reading of the ammeter in the following figure
negligible internal resistance. If a source of unknown will be
emf E is balanced by 40 cm length of the 6Ω
potentiometer wire, the value of E is
R 2V 4Ω 2V A
40 cm C
A B
3Ω
2Ω
E
(a) 0.8 V (b) 1.6 V (a) 0.8 A (b) 0.6 A (c) 0.4 A (d) 0.2 A
(c) 0.08 V (d) 0.16 V
54 A wire of length 100 cm is connected to a cell of 59 Two resistors 400 Ω and 800 Ω are connected in
emf 2 V and negligible internal resistance. The series with a 6 V battery. The potential difference
resistance of the wire is 3 Ω. The additional measured by voltmeter of 10 kΩ across 400 Ω
resistance required to produce a potential drop of resistor is
1 milli volt per cm is (a) 2 V (b) 1.95 V (c) 3.8 V (d) 4 V
(a) 60 Ω (b) 47 Ω
(c) 57 Ω (d) 35 Ω
60 A battery of emf E has an internal resistance r. A
variable resistance R is connected to the terminals of
55 Two uniform wires A and B are of same metal and the battery. A current i is drawn from the battery. V
have equal masses. The radius of wire A is twice is the terminal potential difference. If R alone is
that of wire B. The total resistance of A and B when gradually reduced to zero, which of the following
connected in parallel is best describes i and V ?
(a) 4 Ω when the resistance of wire A is 4.25 Ω (a) i approaches zero,V approaches E
(b) 5 Ω when the resistance of wire A is 4 Ω E
(c) 4 Ω when the resistance of wire B is 4.25 Ω (b) i approaches , V approaches zero
r
(d) 5 Ω when the resistance of wire B is 4 Ω E
(c) i approaches , V approaches E
56 In the given circuit, the resistances are given in r
ohm. The current through the 10 Ω resistance is 3 A (d) i approaches infinity, V approaches E
while that through the resistance X is 1 A. No current 61 Two resistances are connected in two gaps of a
passes through the galvanometer. The values of the meter bridge. The balance point is 20 cm from the
unknown resistances X and Y are respectively zero end. A resistance of 15 Ω is connected in series
(in ohm) with the smaller of the two. The null point shifts to
1A 40 cm. The value of the smaller resistance in ohm is
X 24 84 Y (a) 3 (b) 6
(c) 9 (d) 12
IB = 0
62 A battery of four cells in series, each having an emf
10 30 of 1.4 V and an internal resistance of 2 Ω is to be
3A used to charge a small 2 V accumulator of negligible
(a) 14 and 54 (b) 12 and 6 internal resistance. What is the charging current?
(c) 6 and 12 (d) 6 and 6 (a) 0.1 A (b) 0.2 A (c) 0.3 A (d) 0.45 A
57 The current i drawn from the 5 V source will be 63 The length of a wire of a potentiometer is 100 cm,
10 Ω and the emf of its cell is E volt. It is employed to
measure the emf of a battery whose internal
5Ω 10 Ω 20 Ω resistance is 0.5 Ω. If the balance point is obtained
at l = 30 cm from the positive end, the emf of the
10 Ω battery is
i 30E
(a)
100.5
30E
+ − (b)
100 − 0.5
5V 30(E − 0.5i )
(c) , where i is the current in the potentiometer
(a) 0.33 A (b) 0.5 A 100
(c) 0.67 A (d) 0.17 A wire
58 The current in the given circuit is 30E
(d)
10 W 5V 100
64 When a resistance of 100 Ω is connected in series
with a galvanometer of resistance R, then its range is
V. To double its range, a resistance of 1000 Ω is
connected in series. Find the value of R.
2V 20 W (a) 700 Ω (b) 800 Ω
(c) 900 Ω (d) 100 Ω
(a) 0.3 A (b) 0.4 A (c) 0.1 A (d) 0.2 A
65 Two wires of the same material but of different 73 When a galvanometer is shunted by resistance S,
diameters carry the same current i. If the ratio of then its current capacity increases n times. If the
their diameters is 2 : 1, then the corresponding ratio same galvanometer is shunted by another resistance
of their mean drift velocities will be S′, then its current capacity will increase by n′,
(a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 1 which is given by
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 4 (n + 1)S S (n − 1) + S ′ n+S S (n − 1) − S ′
(a) (b) (c) (d)
66 Two bulbs consume same power when operated at S′ S′ S′ S′
200 V and 300 V, respectively. When these bulbs 74 The tungsten filaments of two electric bulbs are of
are connected in series across a DC source of 500 V, the same length. If one of them gives 25 W power
then and the other 60 W power, then
(a) ratio of potential differences across them is 3/2 (a) Both the filaments are of same thickness
(b) ratio of potential differences across them is 9/4 (b) 25 W bulb has thicker filament
(c) ratio of powers consumed across them is 4/9 (c) 60 W bulb has thicker filament
(d) ratio of powers consumed across them is 2/3 (d) Both the filaments have same cross-sectional area
67 A factory is served by a 220 V supply line. In a 75 Three unequal resistors in parallel are equivalent to
circuit protected by a fuse marked 10 A, the a resistance 1 Ω. If two of them are in the ratio 1 : 2
maximum number of 100 W lamps in parallel that and if no resistance value is fractional, then the
can be turned on, is largest of the three resistances (in ohms) is
(a) 11 (b) 22 (a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 8 (d) 12
(c) 33 (d) 66
76 In the circuit given here, the points A, B and C are at
68 A tap supplies water at 22°C, a man takes 1 L of 70 V, zero, 10 V, respectively. Then,
water per min at 37°C from the geyser. The power
of geyser is B
20 W
(a) 525 W (b) 1050 W (c) 1775 W (d) 2100 W
69 The mean free path of electrons in a metal is A
4 × 10 −8 m. The electric field which can give an 10 W D
30 Ω
average 2 eV energy to an electron in the metal will C
be in unit of Vm−1?
(a) the point D will be at a potential of 60 V
(a) 8 × 107 (b) 5 × 10−11 (c) 8 × 10−11 (d) 5 × 107
(b) the point D will be at a potential of 20 V
70 You are given two resistances R 1 and R 2 . By using (c) currents in the paths AD, DB and DC are in the ratio of
1:2 :3
them singly, in series and in parallel, you can obtain (d) currents in the paths AD, DB and DC are in the ratio of
four resistances of 1.5 Ω, 2 Ω, 6 Ω and 8 Ω. The 3 : 2 :1
values of R 1 and R 2 are
(a) 1 Ω, 7 Ω (b) 1. 5 Ω, 6. 5 Ω 77 The current in the resistance R will be zero if
E1 r1
(c) 3 Ω, 5 Ω (d) 2 Ω, 6 Ω
71 A potentiometer having the potential gradient of
2 mVcm −1 is used to measure the difference of
E2 r2
potential across a resistance of 10 Ω. If a length of
50 cm of the potentiometer wire is required to get R
the null points, then the current passing through E1 E 2
10 Ω resistor is (in mA) r = E 2r2
(a) E11 (b) =
r1 r2
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 5 (d) 10
(c) (E1 + E 2 )r1 = E1r2 (d) (E1 – E 2 )r1 = E 2r1
72 A galvanometer of resistance 50 Ω is connected to a
78 The magnitude and direction of the current in the
battery of 3 V along with a resistance of 2950 Ω in
series. A full scale deflection of 30 divisions is circuit shown will be
1Ω e 2Ω
obtained in the galvanometer. In order to reduce this a b
deflection to 20 divisions, the resistance in series 10 V 4 V
should be
(a) 4450 Ω (b) 5050 Ω 3Ω
d c
(c) 5550 Ω (d) 6050 Ω
7 7 83 In the below circuit, the battery E 1 has an emf of 12 V

(a) A from a to e (b) A from b to e
3 3
and zero internal resistance. While the battery E 2 has
(c) 1A from b to e (d) 1A from a to e
an emf of 2 V.
79 Consider a current carrying wire (current I) in the
500 Ω
shape of a circle. Note that as the currrent progresses G
along the wire, the direction of J (current density)
changes in an exact manner, while the current I E1 XΩ E2
remains unaffected. The agent that is essentially
responsible for [NCERT Exemplar]
(a) source of emf If the galvanometer G reads zero, then the value of
(b) electric field produced by charges accumulated on the the resistance X in ohms is
surface of wire (a) 250 (b) 100
(c) the charges just behind a given segment of wire which (c) 50 (d) 200
push them just the right way by repulsion
(d) the charges ahead 84 The potential drop across the 3 Ω resistor is
80. Two batteries of emf ε 1 and ε 2 (ε 2 >ε 1 ) and internal 3Ω
resistances r1 and r 2 respectively are connected in 4Ω

parallel as shown in figure. [NCERT Exemplar]
6Ω
ε1
r1
A B
3V
ε2 r2
(a) 1 V (b) 1.5 V
(a) The equivalent emf εeq of the two cells is between ε1 (c) 2 V (d) 3 V
and ε 2, i.e. ε1 < εeq < ε 2
85 Equivalent resistance between A and B will be
(b) The equivalent emf εeq is smaller than ε1
(c) The εeq is given by εeq = ε1 + ε 2 always
(d) εeq is independent of internal resistances r1 and r2 3Ω 3Ω
81 A resistance R is to be measured using a meter
bridge, student chooses the standard resistance S to
be 100 Ω. He finds the null point at l1 = 2.9 cm. He
3Ω 3Ω
is told to attempt to improve the accuracy. 3Ω 3Ω
Which of the following is a useful way?
[NCERT Exemplar]
(a) He should measure l1 more accurately A B
(b) He should change S to 1000 Ω and repeat the 3Ω 3Ω
experiment
(a) 2 Ω (b) 18 Ω
(c) He should change S to 3 Ω and repeat the experiment (c) 6 Ω (d) 3.6 Ω
(d) He should given up hope of a more accurate
measurement with a meter bridge 86 In the network of resistors shown in the figure, the
equivalent resistance between A and B is
82 The current drawn from the battery shown in the
figure is
R 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω
A B
V
R
3Ω 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω
R
(a) 54 Ω (b) 18 Ω
V V 2V 3V (c) 36 Ω (d) 9 Ω
(a) (b) (c) (d)
R 2R R 2R
87 In the figure shown, the total resistance between A 92 Each of the resistance in the network shown in the
and B is figure is equal to R. The resistance between the
2Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω terminals A and B is
C
A L
8Ω 8Ω 4Ω
R
R R
B
2Ω D 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω
R A
B
(a) 12 Ω (b) 4 Ω (c) 6 Ω (d) 8 Ω R
K
88 The potential difference in volt
across the resistance R 3 in the (a) R (b) 5R (c) 3R (d) 6R
circuit shown in figure, is 50 V 93 Find the equivalent resistance across AB.
R1
(R 1 = 15 Ω, R 2 = 15 Ω, A
R3
R 3 = 30 Ω, R 4 = 35 Ω)
R2 2Ω 2Ω
(a) 5
(b) 7.5 2Ω
(c) 15 R4
2Ω 2Ω
(d) 12.5
89 In the given circuit, the voltmeter records 5 V. The B
resistance of the voltmeter in Ω is (a) 1 Ω (b) 2 Ω (c) 3 Ω (d) 4 Ω
V 94 The equivalent resistance between P and Q in the
100 Ω 50 Ω
figure is approximately
P
Q
8Ω
10 V
6Ω 8Ω
(a) 200 (b) 100 (c) 10 (d) 50
10 Ω
90 In given figure, the potentiometer wire AB has a
resistance of 5 Ω and length 10 m. The balancing
(a) 6 Ω (b) 5 Ω (c) 7.5 Ω (d) 20 Ω
length AM for the emf of 0.4 V is
R = 45 Ω 95 In the given network of resistances, the effective
resistance between A and B is
5V
M R R
A B R
A R R R B
0.4 V
(a) 0.4 m (b) 4 m (c) 0.8 m (d) 8 m R R
91. In the circuit shown below, the readings of the

ammeter and voltmeter are 5 8
(a) R (b) R (c) 5R (d) 8R
6V1Ω 3 3
96 A source of emf E = 15 V and having negligible
internal resistance is connected to a variable
V
6Ω
A resistance, so that the current in the circuit increases
4Ω with time as i = 1.2 t + 3. Then, the total charge that
will flow in first five second will be
(a) 6 A, 60 V (b) 0.6 A, 6 V (a) 10 C (b) 20 C
(c) 6 A, 6 V (d) (6/11) A, (6/11) V (c) 30 C (d) 40 C
97 The effective resistance between points A and C for 100 An electric immersion heater of 1.08 kW is
the network shown in figure is immersed in water. After the water has reached a
R temperature of 100°C, how much time will be
A B
R
required to produce 100 g of steam?
R (a) 50 s (b) 420 s
R R (c) 105 s (d) 210 s
R O R
101 A moving coil galvanometer is converted into an
ammeter reading upto 0.03 A by connecting a shunt
D C
R of resistance 4r across it and into an ammeter
2 3 1 reading upto 0.06 A when a shunt of resistance r is
(a) R (b) R (c) 2R (d) connected across it. What is the maximum current
3 2 2R
which can be sent through this galvanometer, if no
98 Three resistances 5 Ω, 5 Ω and 6 Ω are connected as shunt is used?
shown in figure. If the point S divides the resistance (a) 0.01 A (b) 0.02 A
6 Ω into two equal halves, the resistance between (c) 0.03 A (d) 0.04 A
points P and S is
102 B1, B 2 and B 3 are the three identical bulbs
connected to a battery of steady emf with key K
closed. What happens to the brightness of the bulbs
5Ω P 5Ω B1 and B 2 when the key is opened?
S
B1
K
Q R B2
6Ω
B3
(a) 11 Ω (b) 8 Ω (c) 6 Ω (d) 4 Ω
99 A potentiometer circuit is set up as shown. The (a) Brightness of the bulb B1 increases and that of B 2
potential gradient across the potentiometer wire, is decreases
k volt/cm and the ammeter, present in the circuit, (b) Brightness of the bulbs B1 and B 2 increases
(c) Brightness of the bulb B1 decreases and B 2 increases
reads 1.0 A when two way key is switched off. The
(d) Brightness of the bulbs B1 and B 2 decreases
balance points, when the key between the terminals
(i) 1 and 2 (ii) 1 and 3, is plugged in, are found to be 103 The scale of a galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω
at lengths l1 cm and l 2 cm, respectively. The contains 25 divisions. It gives a deflection of one
magnitudes of the resistors R and X in ohm, are division on passing a current of 4 × 10 −4 A. The
then, respectively equal to resistance (in ohm) to be added to it, so that it may
become a voltmeter of range 2.5 V is
+ − (a) 150 (b) 170
(c) 110 (d) 220
104 Three electric bulbs of 200 W, 200 W and 400 W
are connected as shown in figure. The resultant
power of the combination is
A B
G 200 W
1
2
3 400 W
R X
− 200 W
A
+
~
(a) k (l 2 − l1) and kl 2 (b) kl1 and k (l 2 − l1) (a) 800 W (b) 400 W
(c) k (l 2 − l1) and kl 2 (d) kl1 and kl 2 (c) 200 W (d) 600 W
105 Two electric bulbs rated 50 W and 100 V are What is the value of current i in circuit?
glowing at full power, when used in parallel with a (a) 15 A (b) 10 A
battery of emf 120 V and internal resistance 10 Ω. (c) 20 A (d) 5 A
The maximum number of bulbs that can be 110 The charge flowing in a conductor varies with time
connected in the circuit when glowing at full as Q = at – bt 2 , then the current
power, is (a) reaches a maximum and then decreases
(a) 6 (b) 4 (c) 2 (d) 8 a
(b) falls to zero after t =
106 The equivalent resistance between points A and B of 2b
an infinite network of resistances, each of 1 Ω, (c) changes at a rate of (– 2b)
connected as shown, is (d) Both (b) and (c)
A 1Ω 1Ω 1Ω 111 In the circuit shown in figure, ammeter and
voltmeter are ideal. If E = 4 V, R = 9 Ω and r = 1 Ω,
then readings of ammeter and voltmeter are
1Ω 1Ω 1Ω
B V
R R
(a) infinite (b) 2 Ω E, r R
1+ 5
(c) Ω (d) zero A
2
107 In the given figure, the current through the 20 V (a) 1 A, 3 V (b) 2 A, 3 V
battery is (c) 3 A, 4 V (d) 4 A, 4 V
112 In the circuit shown, the current in 3 Ω resistance
16 V 16 V 20 V
is
2Ω 3Ω
2Ω 4Ω
10 V 2Ω 3Ω
(a) 11 A (b) 12 A (c) 7 A (d) 14 A
108 The current in resistance R 3 in the given circuit is
1
2V 3V 4V (a) 1 A (b) A
7
5 15
(c) A (d) A
R1 = 2 Ω R2 = 2 Ω R3 = 3 Ω 7 7
113 Under what conditions, current passing through the
resistance R can be increased by short circuiting the
2V 3V 2V battery of emf E 2 ? The internal resistances of the
two batteries are r1 and r 2, respectively.
(a) 1 A (b) 2/3 A (c) 0.25 A (d) 0.50 A
109 In the circuit shown in figure, the resistance R has a E1 E2
value that depends on the current. Specifically R is
20 Ω when i is zero and the amount of increase in
resistance is numerically equal to one-half of the
current.
R
i
(a) E 2r1 > E1(R + r2 )
250 V R (b) E1r2 < E 2 (R + r1)
(c) E 2r2 < E1(R + r2 )
(d) E1r2 > E 2 (R + r1)
114 In the arrangement shown, the magnitude of each (a) 3R (b) 4R

resistance is 1 Ω. The equivalent resistance between O 5R 7R
(c) (d)
and A is given by 2 2
C 119 All resistances shown in circuit are 2 Ω each. The
current in the resistance between D and E is
A B
B D D
O C E
10 V
F H
G
A (a) 5 A (b) 2.5 A (c) 1 A (d) 7.5 A

14 3 2 5 120 A battery of emf 10 V is connected to a group of
(a) Ω (b) Ω (c) Ω (d) Ω
13 4 3 6 resistances as shown in figure. The potential
115 Find the reading of the ideal ammeter connected in the differenceVA − VB between the points A and B is
given circuit. Assume that the cells have negligible 1Ω A 3Ω
3Ω
internal resistance.
3Ω 1Ω
10 V 4V 8V 6 V
B
10 V
10 Ω 8Ω 4Ω 2Ω A
(a) –2 V (b) 2 V
20
(c) 5 V (d) V
11
(a) 0.8 A (b) 0.25 A (c) 1.95 A (d) 1.0 A 121 In the circuit shown, when key K 1 is closed, then
116 A moving coil galvanometer has 150 equal divisions. Its the ammeter reads I 0 whether K 2 is open or
current sensitivity is 10 divisions per milliampere and closed. But when K 1 is open the ammeter reads
voltage sensitivity is 2 divisions per millivolt. In order I 0 /2, when K 2 is closed.
that each division reads 1 V, the resistance (in ohms)
needed to be connected in series with the coil will be K1 K2 100 Ω
3 5
(a) 99995 (b) 9995 (c) 10 (d) 10
117 It takes 16 min to boil some water in an electric kettle. A
R1 R2 = 100 Ω
Due to some defect it becomes necessary to remove
10% turns of heating coil of the kettle. After repairs,
how much time will it take to boil the same mass of
E, r
water?
(a) 17.7 min (b) 14.4 min (c) 20.9 min (d) 13.9 min Assuming that ammeter resistance is much less
than R 2 , the values of r and R 1 in ohms are
118 Equivalent resistance between points A and B is (a) 100, 50 (b) 50, 100
R R
(c) 0, 100 (d) 0, 50
122 In the circuit shown in figure, V must be
R
+
4Ω 20 Ω 100 Ω 25 Ω
R
R R R
V
A B 6Ω
R 4A
–
R
(a) 50 V (b) 80 V
R (c) 100 V (d) 1290 V
123 Current through wire XY of circuit shown is 124 In the circuit shown in figure, the ratio of currents
1Ω X 2Ω i1 /i 2 is
2Ω 4Ω 3Ω
2Ω 8Ω 1Ω
3Ω Y 4Ω
16 V
i2 i1
8Ω 8Ω
50 V
8V
(a) 1 A (b) 4 A
(c) 2 A (d) 3 A (a) 2 (b) 8 (c) 0.5 (d) 4
(B) Medical entrance special format questions

Assertion and reason
Directions (Q. Nos. 1-5) These questions consist of two 5 Assertion Two resistance wires shown in
statements each linked as Assertion and Reason. While answering figure are of same material. They have equal
these questions you are required to choose any one of the following length. More heat is generated in wire A.
four responses. B
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the correct A
i i
explanation of Assertion.
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not correct
explanation of Assertion.
(c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false.
Reason In series H ∝ R and resistance of
(d) If Assertion is false but Reason is true. wire A is more.
1 Assertion If a current flows through a wire of non-uniform
cross-section, potential difference per unit length of wire is
Statement based questions
same throughout the length of wire. 1 For the circuit shown in the figure, which of
the following statement is incorrect?
Reason Current through the wire is same at all
cross-sections. R N
2 Assertion In our houses when we start switching on 0.5 A
different light buttons, main current goes on increasing. R1 20 Ω
10 Ω
Reason Different connections in houses are in parallel.
1A
When we start switching on different light buttons, then
P
net resistance of the circuit decreases. Therefore, main 69 V
current increases.
(a) The current through NP is 0.5 A.
3 Assertion Resistance of an ammeter is less than the (b) The value of R1 = 40 Ω.
resistance of a milliammeter. (c) The value of R = 14 Ω.
Reason Value of shunt required in case of ammeter is (d) The potential difference across R = 49 V.
more than a milliammeter. 2 Two non-ideal batteries are connected in
series. Consider the following statements.
4 Assertion In the circuit shown in figure, battery is ideal.
If a resistance R 0 is connected in parallel with R, then I. The equivalent emf is larger than either of
the two emfs.
power across R will increase.
II. The equivalent internal resistance is smaller
than either of the two internal resistances.
R
(a) Each of I and II is correct
(b) I is correct but II is wrong
E (c) II is correct but I is wrong
Reason Current drawn from the battery will increase. (d) Each of I and II is wrong
3 Consider the following statements regarding the

network shown in the figure. Match the columns
R R 1 In the circuit diagram shown in figure, match the
following two columns when switch S is closed.
A B Choose the correct option from codes given below.
G
R
i1
S
2R 2R A B
i2 R
+ – C r D
E
E
I. The equivalent resistance of the network between Column I Column II
points A and B is independent of value of G.
A. Current (i1) (p) will increase
II. The equivalent resistance of the network between
points A and B is 4 / 3 R. B. Current (i 2 ) (q) will decrease
III. The current through G is zero. C. Potential difference (r) will remain same
Which of the above statement(s) is/are true? across A and B
(a) Only I (b) Only II
D. Potential difference (s) may increase or decrease. It
(c) Both II and III (d) I, II and III across C and D will depend on value of r
4 Two non-ideal unidentical batteries are connected in
parallel with positive terminals. Consider the Codes
A B C D A B C D
following statements.
(a) p q q q (b) q p r r
I. The equivalent emf is smaller than either of the two
(c) p s r q (d) s s r p
emfs.
II. The equivalent internal resistance is smaller than 2 In the circuit diagram shown in figure, potential
either of the two internal resistances. difference across 3 Ω resistance is 20 V. Then,
(a) Both I and II are correct match the following two columns and choose the
(b) I is correct but II is wrong correct option from codes given below.
(c) II is correct but I is wrong 12 Ω 3Ω
(d) Both I and II are wrong
5 IfVA − VB = V0 and the value of each resistance is 8Ω
4Ω 6Ω
R, then
C D
A E F B
Column I Column II
R A. Potential difference across 6 Ω resistance (p) 30 V

I. net resistance between AB is .
2 B. Potential difference across 4 Ω resistance (q) 40 V
3R
II. net resistance between AB is . C. Potential difference across 12 Ω resistance (r) 20 V
5
V0 D. Potential difference across 8 Ω resistance (s) 80 V
III. current through CD is .
R Codes
2V0 A B C D
IV. current through EF is .
3R (a) p r s q
(b) p r r s
Which of the statement(s) is/are correct? (c) r p p s
(a) I and II (b) I and III (c) II and III (d) All of these (d) r q s p
OBJECTIVE Physics Vol. 2
(C) Medical entrances’ gallery

Collection of questions asked in NEET and various medical entrance exams
1 A charged particle having drift velocity of 6 Two solid conductors are made up of same material,
7.5 × 10 −4 ms −1 in an electric field of have same length and same resistance. One of them has
3 × 10 −10 Vm −1, has a mobility (in m 2 V −1s −1) of a circular cross-section of area A1 and the other one
[NEET 2020]
has a square cross-section of area A2 . The ratio
(a) 2.5 × 106 (b) 2.5 × 10−6
A1 / A2 is [NEET 2020]
(c) 2.25 × 10−15 (d) 2.25 × 1015 (a) 1.5 (b) 1 (c) 0.8 (d) 2
2 The color code of a resistance is given below 7 For the circuit given below, the Kirchhoff’s loop rule
for the loop BCDEB is given by the equation
[NEET 2020]
i1 R2 i2
Yellow Violet Brown Gold A B C
The values of resistance and tolerance respectively, R1

are [NEET 2020] E1 E2
(a) 47 kΩ, 10% (b) 4.7 k Ω, 5% i3
(c) 470 Ω, 5% (d) 470 kΩ, 5% F E D
E3
3 A resistance wire connected in the left gap of a
metre bridge balances a 10 Ω resistance in the right (a) − i2R 2 + E 2 − E 3 + i3R1 = 0
gap at a point which divides the bridge wire in the (b) i2R 2 + E 2 − E 3 − i3R1 = 0
ratio 3 : 2. If the length of the resistance wire is (c) i2R 2 + E 2 + E 3 + i3R1 = 0
1.5 m, then the length of 1 Ω of the resistance wire (d) −i2R 2 + E 2 + E 3 + i3R1 = 0
is [NEET 2020] 8 The equivalent resistance between A and B for the
(a) 1.0 × 10−1 m (b) 1.5 × 10−1 m mesh shown in the figure is [NEET 2020]
(c) 1.5 × 10−2 m (d) 1.0 × 10−2 m
4Ω 8Ω
4 Which of the following graph represents the
variation of resistivity (ρ) with temperature (T ) for
copper? [NEET 2020] 6Ω
4Ω 8Ω
ρ ρ
A B
(a) (b)
. Ω
(a) 72 (b) 16 Ω (c) 30 Ω (d) 4.8 Ω
T T 9 Six similar bulbs are connected as shown in the

ρ ρ
figure with a DC source of emf E and zero internal
resistance.
(c) (d) The ratio of power consumption by the bulbs when
(i) all are glowing and (ii) in the situation when two
T T from section A and one from section B are glowing,
will be [NEET 2019]
5 For the circuit shown in the figure, the current I will A B
be [NEET 2020]
2V 1Ω 4V 1Ω
I 4Ω
E
(a) 0.75 A (b) 1 A
(c) 1.5 A (d) 0.5 A (a) 9 : 4 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 9
10 Which of the following acts as a circuit protection 15 A current of 10 A is passing through a metallic wire
device? [NEET 2019] of cross-sectional area 4 × 10 −6 m 2 . If the density of
(a) Inductor (b) Switch (c) Fuse (d) Conduct the aluminium conductor is 2.7 g/cc, considering
11 In the circuits shown below, the readings of aluminium gives 1 electron per atom for conduction,
voltmeters and the ammeters will be [NEET 2019] then find the drift velocity of the electrons if
molecular weight of aluminium is 27 g. [AIIMS 2019]
10 Ω i1 10 Ω i2
(a) 1.6 × 10−4 m/s (b) 3.6 × 10−4 m/s
10 Ω (c) 2.6 × 10−4 m/s (d) 1.5 × 10−4 m/s
V1 V2 A2
A1
16 A circuit contain two resistances R 1and R 2 are in
series. Find the ratio of input voltage to voltage of
10 V 10 V R 2. [JIPMER 2019]
R2 R1 + R 2
(a) (b)
(a)V1 = V2 and i1 > i2 (b)V1 = V2 and i i = i2 R1 + R 2 R2
(c)V2 > V1 and i1 > i2 (d)V2 > V1 and i1 = i2 R + R2 R1
(c) 1 (d)
12 The meter bridge shown in the balance position with R1 R1 + R 2
P l1
= . If we now interchange the positions of 17 In the given circuit, find voltage across 12 Ω
Q l2
resistance. [JIPMER 2019]
galvanometer and cell, will the bridge work? If yes,
8Ω
that will be balanced condition? [NEET (Odisha) 2019]
8Ω 4Ω
P Q 4Ω
12A
G
12Ω
l1 l2
(a) 12 V (b) 36 V (c) 72 V (d) 48 V
P l −l 18 Find the current in the 8Ω resistance in the given
(a) Yes, = 2 1 (b) No, no null point
Q l 2 + l1 circuit. [JIPMER 2019]
P l P l
(c) Yes, = 2 (d) Yes, = 1
Q l1 Q l2
3W 3W
13 The reading of an ideal voltmeter in the circuit 3W 3W
shown is [NEET (Odisha) 2019]
20 Ω 30 Ω
3W
30 Ω 20 Ω 8W
24 V
2V (a) 2 A (b) 3A
(c) 4 A (d) 5 A
(a) 0.6 V (b) 0 V (c) 0.5 V (d) 0.4 V
. × 10 −8 Ω-m and
19 If resistivity of copper is 172
R 1
14 For a wire = and length of wire is l = 5 cm. number of free electrons in copper is
l 2
8.5 × 10 28 / m3 . Find the mobility. [JIPMER 2019]
If potential difference of 1 V is applied across it,
(a) 4. 25 × 10−3m2 / CΩ (b) 6.8 × 10−3m2 / CΩ
then current through wire will be [AIIMS 2019]
(c) 8.5 × 10−3m2 / CΩ (d) 3.4 × 10−3m2 / CΩ
(a) 40 A (b) 4 A (c) 25 A (d) 2.5 A
20 In the given circuit, if power rating of heater is (a) 0.5 A (b) 0.2 A
1000 W at 100 V, find the resistance R in figure so (c) 1 A (d) 2 A
that heater produces power of 62.5 W. [JIPMER 2019] 25 Assertion Terminal voltage of a cell is greater than
Heater emf of cell during charging of the cell. [AIIMS 2018]
10W Reason The emf of a cell is always greater than its
R terminal voltage.
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the
correct explanation of Assertion.
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not
100 V
the correct explanation of Assertion.
(a) 5 Ω (b) 7 Ω (c) 10 Ω (d) 8 Ω (c) Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
21 A carbon resistor of (47 ± 4.7) kΩ is to be marked (d) Assertion is incorrect but Reason is correct.
with rings of different colours for its identification. 26 The effective resistance between P and Q in given
The colour code sequence will be [NEET 2018] figure is [AIIMS 2018]
(a) Yellow - Green - Violet - Gold 6W 8W
(b) Yellow - Violet - Orange - Silver 3W 8W
P Q
(c) Violet - Yellow - Orange - Silver 10W
(d) Green - Orange - Violet - Gold 10W 5W
4W W
20
4W
22 A set of n equal resistors, of value R each , are
connected in series to a battery of emf E and internal 4W
resistance R. The current drawn is I. Now, the n (a) 2Ω (b) 3Ω (c) 5Ω (d) 6Ω
resistors are connected in parallel to the same
battery. Then, the current drawn from battery 27 Assertion Bulb generally get fused when they are
becomes 10I. The value of n is [NEET 2018]
switched ON or OFF.
(a) 20 (b) 11 (c) 10 (d) 9 Reason When we switch ON or OFF a circuit,
current changes in it rapidly. [AIIMS 2018]
23 A battery consists of a variable number n of identical (a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the
cells (having internal resistance r each) which are correct explanation of Assertion.
connected in series. The terminals of the battery are (b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not
short-circuited and the current I is measured. Which the correct explanation of Assertion.
of the graphs shows the correct relationship between (c) Assertion is correct and Reason is incorrect.
I and n ? [NEET 2018] (d) Assertion is incorrect and Reason is correct.
I I 28 A current i is flowing through the wire of diameter
d having drift velocity of electrons v d in it. What
(a) (b) will be new drift velocity when diameter of wire is
made d/4? [JIPMER 2018]
O O n
n vd vd
(a) 4v d (b) (c) 16 v d (d)
I I 4 16
(c) (d) 29 The resistance of a wire is R ohm. If it is melted and
stretched to n times its original length, its new
O
O resistance will be [NEET 2017]
n n
R R
(a) nR (b) (c) n 2R (d)
24 Find current (i ) in circuit shown in figure. [NEET 2018] n n2
B
30 Find the value of R net between A and B. [NEET 2017]
5W 10W 10W 10W 10W
A
A D
10W
40W 40W 20W
10W 20W
i
C B
10W 10W 10W
5V (a) 60 Ω (b) 40 Ω (c) 70 Ω (d) 20 Ω
31 FindVP − VQ in the circuit shown in below figure. (b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not
[NEET 2017] the correct explanation of Assertion.
(c) Assertion is correct Reason is incorrect.
10W
(d) Assertion is incorrect but Reason incorrect.
10W Q
P R 36 You are given resistance wire of length 50 cm and a
18W
battery of negligible resistance. In which of the
8W 25W following cases is largest amount of heat generated?
[JIPMER 2017]
+ –
(a) When the wire is connected to the battery directly.
(b) When the wire is divided into two parts and both the
10 V parts are connected to the battery in parallel.
(c) When the wire is divided into four parts and all the
(a) 6.68 V (b) 8 V (c) 4.65 V (d) 7 V
four parts are connected to the battery in parallel.
32 Find the value of i in shown below figure. [NEET 2017] (d) When only half of the wire is connected to the
battery.
30 Ω
37 The current passing through the ideal ammeter in
i1 the circuit given below is [KCET 2017]
60 Ω 2Ω
i2 4V 2Ω
1Ω
i
2V 2Ω
(a) 0.2A (b) 0.1A (c) 0.3A (d) 0.4A 4Ω

A
33 N lamps each of resistance r are fed by a machine
of resistance R. If light emitted by any lamp is (a)1.25A (b) 1A (c) 0.75A (d) 0.5 A
proportional to the square of the heat produced, 38 A potentiometer wire is 100 cm long and a constant
prove that the most efficient way of arranging them potential difference is maintained across it. Two
is to place them in parallel arcs, each containing n cells are connected in series first to support one
lamps, where n is the integer nearest to [NEET 2017] another and then in opposite direction. The balance
 r 
3/ 2
 NR 
1/ 2 points are obtained at 50 cm and 10 cm from the
(a)   (b)   positive end of the wire in the two cases. The ratio
 NR   r 
of emfs is [NEET 2016]
(c) (NRr )3/ 2 (d) (NRr )1/ 2
(a) 5 : 4 (b) 3 : 4 (c) 3 : 2 (d) 5 : 1
34 Two batteries, one of emf 18V and internal 39 The charge flowing through a resistance R varies
resistance 2Ω and the other of emf 12V and internal
with time t as Q = at − bt 2 , where a and b are
resistance 1Ω are connected as shown in figure. The
voltmeterV will record a reading of [AIIMS 2017] positive constants. The total heat produced in R is
[NEET 2016]
3 3 3
V a R a R a R a 3R
(a) (b) (c) (d)
3b 2b b 6b
2Ω
40 The potential difference (VA −VB ) between the
18V points A and B in the given figure is [NEET 2016]
1Ω
3V
VA 2W + – 1W VB
12V
I=2A B
(a) 14 V (b) 15 V (c) 18 V (d) 30 V (a) –3 V (b) +3 V (c) +6 V (d) +9 V
35 Assertion A potentiometer is preferred over that of 41 A filament bulb (500 W, 100 V) is to be used in a
a voltmeter for measurement of emf of a cell. 230 V main supply. When a resistance R is
Reason Potentiometer does not draw any current connected in series, it works perfectly and the bulb
from the cell. [AIIMS 2017] consumes 500 W. The value of R is [NEET 2016]
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the (a) 230 Ω (b) 46 Ω
correct explanation of Assertion. (c) 26 Ω (d) 13 Ω
42 A potentiometer wire has length 4 m and resistance 48 The range of voltmeter is 10 V and its internal
8 Ω. The resistance that must be connected in series resistance is 50 Ω. To convert it to a voltmeter of
with the wire and an accumulator of emf 2 V, so as range 15 V, how much resistance is to be added?
to get a potential gradient of 1 mV per cm on the (a) Add 25 Ω resistor in parallel [EAMCET 2015]
wire is [CBSE AIPMT 2015] (b) Add 25 Ω resistor in series
(a) 32 Ω (b) 40 Ω (c) 44 Ω (d) 48 Ω (c) Add 125 Ω resistor in parallel
(d) Add 125 Ω resistor in series
43 A, B and C are voltmeters of resistance R, 1.5 R and
3R respectively, as shown in the figure. When some 49 Identify the wrong statement. [Kerala CEE 2015]
potential difference is applied between X andY, then (a) Charge is a vector quantity
the voltmeter readings areVA, VB andVC , (b) Current is a scalar quantity
respectively. Then, [CBSE AIPMT 2015]
(c) Charge can be quantised
(d) Charge is additive in nature
B (e) Charge is conserved
A
X Y 50 When the rate of flow of charge through a metallic
C
conductor of non-uniform cross-section is uniform,
(a) VA = VB = VC (b) VA ≠ VB = VC then the quantity that remains constant along the
(c) VA = VB ≠ VC (d) VA ≠ VB ≠ VC conductor is [Kerala CEE 2015]
44 Across a metallic conductor of non-uniform (a) current density (b) electric field
cross-section, a constant potential difference is (c) electric potential (d) drift velocity
applied. The quantity which remain(s) constant along (e) current
the conductor is [CBSE AIPMT 2015] 51 The resistance of a carbon resistor of colour code
(a) current density (b) current Red-Red-Green-Silver is (in kΩ) [Kerala CEE 2015]
(c) drift velocity (d) electric field (a) 2200 ± 5% (b) 2200 ± 10%
45 Consider the diagram shown below [AIIMS 2015] (c) 220 ± 10% (d) 220 ± 5%
(e) 2200 ± 1%
B
A C
100 Ω 100 Ω 52 The slope of the graph showing the variation of
potential differenceV on X-axis and current on
Y-axis gives conductor [Kerala CEE 2015]
50 V (a) resistance (b) resistivity
A voltmeter of resistance 150 Ω is connected across (c) reciprocal of resistance (d) conductivity
(e) impedance
A and B. The potential drop across B and C measured
by voltmeter is 53 Two wires of equal length and equal diameter and
(a) 29 (b) 27 V (c) 31 V (d) 30 V having resistivities ρ1 and ρ 2 are connected in series.
46 Each resistor shown in the figure has a resistance of The equivalent resistivity of the combination is
[Guj. CET 2015]
10 Ω and the battery has the emf 6 V. What will be ρ + ρ2
the current supplied by the battery? [UK PMT 2015] (a) 1 (b) ρ1 + ρ2
2
ρ1 ρ2
10 Ω 10 Ω (c) (d) ρ1 ρ2
10 Ω ρ1 + ρ2
54 A galvanometer of resistance 50 Ω is connected to a
10 Ω Y 10 Ω
battery of 8 V along with a resistance of 3950 Ω in
series. A full scale deflection of 30 divisions is
6V obtained in the galvanometer . In order to reduce
this deflection to 15 divisions, the resistance in
(a) 0.6 A (b) 1.2 A (c) 1.8 A (d) 0.3 A
series should be … Ω. [Guj. CET 2015]
47 A 1 Ω resistance in series with an ammeter is (a) 1950 (b) 7900
balanced by 75 cm of potentiometer wire. A (c) 2000 (d) 7950
standard cell of emf 1.02 V is balanced by 50 cm. 55 Choose the correct statement. [CG PMT 2015]
The ammeter shows a reading of 1.5 A. Then, the
(a) Kirchhoff’s first law of electricity is based on
error in ammeter reading is [EAMCET 2015]
conservation of charge while the second law is based
(a) 0.03 A (b) 3A (c) 1.3 A (d) 0.3 A on conservation of energy.
(b) Kirchhoff’s first law of electricity is based on 62 Three resistances 2 Ω, 3 Ω and 4 Ω are connected in
conservation of energy while the second law is based
on conservation of charge.
parallel. The ratio of currents passing through them
when a potential difference is applied across its ends
(c) Kirchhoff’s both laws are based on conservation of
charge. will be [KCET 2015]
(d) Kirchhoff’s both laws are based on conservation of (a) 5 : 4 : 3 (b) 6 : 3 : 2
energy. (c) 4 : 3 : 2 (d) 6 : 4 : 3
56 A metal plate weighing 750 g is to be electroplated 63 Four identical cells of emf ε and internal resistance r
with 0.05% of its weight of silver. If a current of are to be connected in series. Suppose, if one of the
0.8 A is used, find the time (approx.) needed for cell is connected wrongly, then the equivalent
depositing the required weight of silver (ECE of emf and effective internal resistance of the
silver is 11.8 × 10 −7 kgC −1 ) combination is [KCET 2015]
[CG PMT 2015]
(a) 2E and 4r (b) 4E and 4r
(a) 5 min 32 s (b) 6 min 37 s (c) 2E and 2r (d) 4E and 2r
(c) 4 min 16 s (d) 6 min 10 s
64 In the circuit shown alongside, the ammeter and the
. Ω and its current
57 A DC ammeter has resistance 01 voltmeter readings are 3A and 6V, respectively.
ranges 0-100 A. If the range is to be extended to Then, the value of the resistance R is [KCET 2015]
0-500, then the following shunt resistance will be
R
required [ CG PMT 2015] A
(a) 0.010 Ω (b) 0.011 Ω
(c) 0.025 Ω (d) 0.25 Ω
58 The current I shown in the circuit is [WB JEE 2015] V
–
2V + (a) < 2 Ω (b) 2 Ω
2Ω
(c) ≥ 2 Ω (d) > 2 Ω
2Ω 2Ω
2V
+
2V + 65 The resistance of a bulb filament is 100 Ω at a
– I –
temperature of 100° C. If its temperature coefficient
(a) 1.33 A (b) zero (c) 2 A (d) 1 A of resistance be 0.005 per ° C, then its resistance will
become 200 Ω at a temperature [KCET 2015]
59 A metal wire of circular cross-section has a (a) 500° C (b) 300° C (c) 200° C (d) 400° C
resistance R 1. The wire is now stretched without
breaking, so that its length is doubled and the 66 A and B are the two points on a uniform ring of
density is assumed to remain the same. If the radius r. The resistance of the ring is R and
resistance of the wire now becomes R 2 , then R 2 : R 1 ∠AOB = θ as shown in the figure. The equivalent
is [WB JEE 2015] resistance between points A and B is [Guj. CET 2015]
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 4 : 1 (d) 1 : 4 A
60 Consider the combination of resistor, B
r θ
r
a b
R R R O
The equivalent resistance between a and b is

[UP CPMT 2015]
R 2R R
(a) (b) (c) (d) 3R R (2π − θ ) Rθ
6 3 3 (a) (b)
4π 2π
61 A potentiometer wire of length 100 cm has a  θ R
(c) R 1 −  (d) (2π − θ )θ
resistance of 10 Ω. It is connected in series with a  2π  4π 2
resistance and a cell of emf 2V having negligible
internal resistance. A source of emf 10 mV is 67 The resistance in the two arms of the meter bridge
balanced against a length of 40 cm of the are 5 Ω and R Ω, respectively. When the resistance
potentiometer wire. The value of external resistance R is shunted with an equal resistance, then the new
is [UP CPMT 2015] balance point is at 1.6 l1. The resistance R is
[CBSE AIPMT 2014]
(a) 760 Ω (b) 640 Ω (c) 790 Ω (d) 840 Ω (a) 10 Ω (b) 15 Ω (c) 20 Ω (d) 25 Ω
67 A potentiometer circuit has been set up for finding the R. By mistake one of the cells is connected in
internal resistance of a given cell. The main battery, reverse. Then, the current in the external circuit is
used across the potentiometer wire, has an emf of [WB JEE 2014]
2E 3E 3E 2E
2.0 V and a negligible internal resistance. The (a) (b) (c) (d)
potentiometer wire itself is 4m long. When the 4r + R 4r + R 3r + R 3r + R
resistance R connected across the given cell, then 75 A circuit consists of three batteries of emf E 1 = 1 V,
has values of E 2 = 2 V and E 3 = 3 V and internal resistance
(i) infinity (ii) 9.5 Ω 1 Ω, 2 Ω and 1 Ω respectively which are connected in
The balancing lengths of the potentiometer wire are parallel as shown in figure. The potential difference
found to be 3 m and 2.85 m, respectively. between points P and Q is [WB JEE 2014]
The value of internal resistance of the cell is E1=1 V
[CBSE AIPMT 2014]
(a) 0.25 Ω (b) 0.95 Ω E2=2 V
(c) 0.5 Ω (d) 0.75 Ω
E3=3 V
69 In an ammeter, 0.2% of main current passes through P Q
the galvanometer. If resistance of galvanometer is G,
then the resistance of ammeter will be (a) 1.0 V (b) 2.0 V
[CBSE AIPMT 2014] (c) 2.2 V (d) 3.0 V
1 499 1 500 76 Two resistors of resistances 2 Ω and 6 Ω are
(a) G (b) G (c) G (d) G
499 500 500 499 connected in parallel. This combination is then
70 A carbon film resistor has colour code green, black, connected to a battery of emf 2 V and internal
violet, gold. The value of the resistor is [KCET 2014] resistance 0.5 Ω. What is the current flowing
(a) 50 MΩ (b) 500 MΩ through the battery? [KCET 2014]
(c) 500 ± 5% MΩ (d) 500 ± 10% MΩ 4
(a) 4 A (b) A
71 A uniform wire of resistance 9 Ω is joined 3
4
end-to-end to form a circle. Then, the resistance of (c) A (d) 1 A
17
the circular wire between any two diametrically
points is [Kerala CEE 2014] 77 The dimensions of mobility of charge carriers are
9 3 [Kerala CEE 2014]
(a) 6 Ω (b) 3 Ω (c) Ω (d) Ω (a) [M − 2T2A] (b) [M −1T2A]
4 2
(e) 1 Ω (c) [M − 2T3A] (d) [M −1T3A]
72 The equivalent resistance of two resistors connected (e) [M −1T3A−1]
in series is 6 Ω and their parallel equivalent 78 The temperature coefficient of resistance of an alloy
4 used for making resistor is
resistance is Ω. What are the values of [Kerala CEE 2014]
3 (a) small and positive (b) small and negative
resistances? [KCET 2014] (c) large and positive (d) large and negative
(a) 4 Ω, 6 Ω (b) 8 Ω, 1 Ω (e) zero
(c) 4 Ω, 2 Ω (d) 6 Ω, 2 Ω 79 A wire of resistance 4 Ω is stretched to twice its
73 Six resistances are connected as shown in figure. If original length. In the process of stretching, its area
total current flowing is 0.5 A, then the potential of cross-section gets halved. Now, the resistance of
differenceVA −VB is [EAMCET 2014] the wire is [EAMCET 2014]
6Ω 6Ω 6Ω (a) 8 Ω (b) 16 Ω (c) 1 Ω (d) 4 Ω
A 6Ω 80 In Wheatstone bridge, three resistors P, Q and R are

B
0.5 A connected in three arms in order and 4th arm of
resistance s, is formed by two resistors s1 and s 2
6Ω 12 Ω connected in parallel. The condition for bridge to be
(a) 8 V (b) 6 V (c) 2 V (d) 4 V P
balanced is,
Q [MHT CET 2014]
74 Four cells, each of emf E and internal resistance r,
are connected in series across an external resistance R (s1 + s2 ) s1s2 R s1s2 (s1 + s2 )
(a) (b) (c) (d)
s1s2 R (s1 + s2 ) (s1 + s2 ) R s1s2
81 An electron in potentiometer experiences a force 89 The internal resistance of a 2.1 V cell which gives a
−19 current of 0.2 A through a resistance of 10 Ω is
2.4 × 10 N. The length of potentiometer wire is
[NEET 2013]
6m. The emf of the battery connected across the
(a) 0.2 Ω (b) 0.5 Ω (c) 0.8 Ω (d) 1.0 Ω
. × 10 −19 C)
wire is (electronic charge = 16
[MHT CET 2014] 90 The resistances of the four arms P, Q, R and S in a
(a) 6 V (b) 9 V Wheatstone’s bridge are 10 Ω, 30 Ω, 30 Ω and
(c) 12 V (d) 15 V 90 Ω, respectively. The emf and internal resistance
82 A galvanometer having internal resistance 10 Ω of the cell are 7V and 5 Ω, respectively. If the
galvanometer resistance is 50 Ω, then the current
requires 0.01 A for a full scale deflection. To
drawn from the cell will be [NEET 2013]
convert this galvanometer to a voltmeter of full scale
(a) 1.0 A (b) 0.2 A (c) 0.1 A (d) 2.0 A
deflection at 120 V, we need to connect a resistance
of [UK PMT 2014] 91 An electron revolves in a circle at the rate of 10 19
(a) 11990 Ω in series (b) 11990 Ω in parallel rounds per second. The equivalent current is
(c) 12010 Ω in series (d) 12010 Ω in parallel . × 10 −19 C )
(e = 16 [J & K CET 2013]
83 In potentiometer experiment, a cell of emf 1.25 V (a) 1.0 A (b) 1.6 A (c) 2.0 A (d) 2.6 A
gives balancing length of 30 cm. If the cell is 92. A silver wire of radius 0.1 cm carries a current of
replaced by another cell, then balancing length is 2A. If the charge density in silver is
found to be 40 cm. What is the emf of second cell? 5.86 × 10 28 m−3 , then the drift velocity is
[KCET 2014]
[J & K CET 2013]
(a) —~ 1.5 V (b) —~ 1.67 V
(c) —~ 1.47 V (d) —~ 137
. V (a) 0.2 × 10−3 ms−1 (b) 0.4 × 10−4 ms−1
84 Potentiometer measures the potential difference (c) 0.68 × 10−4 ms−1 (d) 7 × 10−4 ms−1
more accurately than a voltmeter because 93 A 1 m long wire of diameter 0.31 mm has a resistance
[UK PMT 2014] of 4.2 Ω. If it is replaced by another wire of same
(a) it does not draw current from external circuit material of length 1.5 m and diameter 0.155 mm, then
(b) it draws a heavy current from external circuit the resistance of wire is [J & K CET 2013]
(c) it has a wire of high resistance
(a) 25.2 Ω (b) 0.6 Ω (c) 26.7 Ω (d) 0.8 Ω
(d) it has a wire of low resistance
94 24 cells of emf 1.5 V each having internal resistance
85 In a potentiometer experiment, the balancing with a
of 1 Ω are connected to an external resistance of
cell is at length 240 cm. On shunting the cell with a
1.5 Ω. To get maximum current, [J & K CET 2013]
resistance of 2 Ω, the balancing becomes 120 cm.
(a) all cells are connected in series combination
The internal resistance of the cell is [UK PMT 2014]
(b) all cells are connected in parallel combination
(a) 1 Ω (b) 0.5 Ω (c) 4 cells in each row are connected in series and 6 such
(c) 4 Ω (d) 2 Ω rows are connected in parallel
86 A galvanometer has a coil of resistance 100 Ω and (d) 6 cells in each row are connected in series and 4 such
rows are connected in parallel
gives full scale deflection for 30 mA current. If it is
to work as a voltmeter of 30 V, the resistance 95 The temperature coefficient of the resistance of a
required to be added is [UK PMT 2014] wire is 0.00125 per ° C. At 300 K its resistance is
(a) 500 Ω (b) 900 Ω 1 Ω. The resistance of wire will be 2 Ω at
(c) 1000 Ω (d) 1800 Ω [J&K CET 2013]
(a) 1154 K (b) 1100 K (c) 1400 K (d) 1127 K
87 When 4 A current flows for 2 min in an electroplating
experiment, then m gram of silver is deposited. 96 The emf of a cell E is 15 V as shown in the figure
Then, the amount (in gram) of silver deposited by with an internal resistance of 0.5 Ω. Then, the value
6 A current flowing for 40 s is [NEET 2013]
of the current drawn from the cell is [EAMCET 2013]
2Ω 7Ω
m m
(a) 4m (b) (c) 2m (d)
2 4
15 V
88 A wire of resistance 4 Ω is stretched to twice its 6Ω 1Ω
original length. The resistance of stretched wire 0.5 Ω
would be [NEET 2013]
8Ω 10 Ω
(a) 2 Ω (b) 4 Ω
(c) 8 Ω (d) 16 Ω (a) 3 A (b) 2 A (c) 5 A (d) 1 A
97 Copper and carbon wires are connected in series and 104 The drift speed of electrons in copper wire of
the combined resistor is kept at 0° C. Assuming the diameter d and length l is v. If the potential
combined resistance does not vary with temperature, difference across the wire is doubled, then the new
the ratio of the resistances of carbon and copper drift speed becomes [Kerala CET 2013]
wires at 0° C is (temperature coefficients of (a) v (b) 2v
resistivity of copper and carbon respectively are (c) 3v (d) v/2
4 ×10 −3 /° C and −0.5 × 10 −3 / ° C) [EAMCET 2013]
(e) v/4
(a) 4 (b) 8 (c) 6 (d) 2 105 A potentiometer wire of length 10 m and resistance
98 Three conductors draw currents of 1 A, 2 A snd 3 A
10 Ω per metre is connected in series with a resistance
respectively, when connected in turn across a box and a 2 volt battery. If a potential difference of
battery. If they are connected in series and the 100 mV is balanced across the whole length of
combination is connected across the same battery, potentiometer wire, then the resistance introduced in
then the current drawn will be [Karnataka CET 2013] the resistance box will be [MP PMT (2013)]
2 3 (a) 1900 Ω (b) 900 Ω
(a) A (b) A (c) 190 Ω (d) 90 Ω
7 7
4 5 106 If a wire is stretched to four times its length, then
(c) A (d) A
7 7 the specific resistance of the wire will [MP PMT 2013]
(a) become 4 times (b) become 1/4 times
99 Masses of three wires of copper are in the ratio of
(c) become 16 times (d) remain the same
1 : 3 : 5 and their lengths are in the ratio of 5 : 3 : 1.
The ratio of their electrical resistances is 107 For the circuit shown in figure given below, the
[Karnataka CET 2013] equivalent resistance between points A and B is
(a) 1 : 3 : 5 (b) 5 : 3 : 1 [MP PMT 2013]
(c) 1 : 15 : 125 (d) 125 : 15 : 1 7Ω
D C
100 In the circuit diagram, heat produces in R, 2R and
3Ω Ω
1.5 R are in the ratio of [Karnataka CET 2013] 10 5Ω
I1 R
A B
1.5 R 10 Ω
I I
(a) 10 Ω (b) 5 Ω
10
(c) Ω (d) 2 Ω
I2
2R 3
(a) 4 : 2 : 3 (b) 8 : 4 : 27 108 Two resistors of 6 Ω and 9 Ω are connected in series
(c) 2 : 4 : 3 (d) 27 : 8 : 4 to a 120 V source. The power consumed by 6 Ω
101 Which one of the following electrical meter has the resistor is [MP PMT 2013]
smallest resistance? [Kerala CET 2013] (a) 384 W (b) 616 W
(a) Ammeter (b) Milliammeter (c) 1500 W (d) 1800 W
(c) Galvanometer (d) Voltmeter 109 A current of 2A flows in the arrangement of
(d) Millivoltmeter conductors as shown in below figure. The potential
102 Two wires of the same material having equal area of difference between points A and B (VA −VB ) will be
cross-section have length L and 2L. Their respective [UP CPMT 2013]
resistances are in the ratio [Kerala CET 2013] A
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 1 2Ω 3Ω
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 1 : 3 D C
(e) 4 : 1 2A
103 Two bulbs 60 W and 100 W designed for voltage 3Ω 2Ω
220 V are connected in series across 220 V source. B
The net power dissipated is [Kerala CET 2013]
(a) + 1 V (b) −1 V
(a) 80 W (b) 160 W (c) 37.5 W (d) 60 W
(c) +2 V (d) −2 V
(e) 120 W
110 A cell of emf E and internal resistance r supplies 117 Two cells when connected in series are balanced on
current for the same time t through external 8 m on a potentiometer. If the cells are connected
resistance R 1 and R 2 separately. If the heat with polarities of one of the cells is reversed, then
developed in both the cases is the same, then the they balance on 2 m. The ratio of emfs of two cells
internal resistance r will be [UP CPMT 2013] is [BCECE (Mains) 2012]
(a) r = R1 + R 2 (b) r = R1 × R 2 (a) 3 : 4 (b) 4 : 3
(c) 3 : 5 (d) 5 : 3
R1 + R 2 1 1
(c) r = (d) r = + 118 In the given circuit diagram if each resistance is of
2 R1 R 2
10 Ω, then the current in arm AD will be
111 In the circuit shown, the cells A and B have [BCECE (Mains) 2012]
E
negligible resistances. ForVA = 12 V, R 1 = 500 Ω F i
and R = 100 Ω the galvanometer (G ) shows no
deflection. The value ofVB is [CBSE AIPMT 2012]
B
R1
G C
i
A
VA R VB
D
i 2i
(a) (b)
(a) 4 V (b) 2 V (c) 12 V (d) 6 V 5 5
3i 4i
112 A millivoltmeter of 25 mV range is to be converted (c) (d)
5 5
into an ammeter of 25 A range. The value (in ohm)
of necessary shunt will be [CBSE AIPMT 2012] 119 When current i is flowing through a conductor, the
(a) 0.001 (b) 0.01 (c) 1 (d) 0.05 drift velocity is v. If the value of current through the
conductor and its area of cross-section is doubled,
113 If voltage across a bulb rated 220 V-100 W drops by
then new drift velocity will be [BCECE Mains 2012]
2.5% of its rated value, then the percentage of the
v
rated value by which the power would decrease is (a) 4v (b)
[CBSE AIPMT 2012] 2
(a) 20% (b) 2.5% (c) 5% (d) 10% v
(c) (d) v
4
114 6 Ω and 12 Ω resistors are connected in parallel.
This combination is connected in series with a 10 V 120 A wire having resistance12 Ω is bent in the form of an
battery and 6 Ω resistor. What is the potential equilateral triangle. The effective resistance between
difference between the terminals of the 12 Ω any two corners of the triangle will be
[BCECE Mains 2012]
resistor? [AIIMS 2012]
8
(a) 4 V (b) 16 V (c) 2 (d) 8 V (a) 6 Ω (b) Ω
3
115 Charge passing through a conductor of cross-section (c) 9 Ω (d) 12 Ω
area A = 0.3 m2 is given by q = 3 t 2 + 5 t + 2 in 121 When a current of (2.5 ± 0.5) A flows through a
coulomb, where t is in second. What is the value of wire, it develops a potential difference of (20 ± 1) V,
drift velocity at t = 2 s ? (Given, n = 2 × 10 25 /m3 ) then the resistance of wire is [UP CPMT 2012]
[AIIMS 2012] (a) (8 ± 2) Ω (b) (8 ± 1.6) Ω
(a) 0.77 × 10−5m / s (b) 1.77 × 10−5m / s (c) (8 ± 1.5) Ω (d) (8 ± 3) Ω
(c) 2.08 × 105m / s (d) 0.57 × 105m / s 122 To draw the maximum current from a combination
116 A galvanometer having resistance of 50 Ω requires a of cells, how should the cells be grouped?
[UP CPMT 2012]
current of 100 µA to give full scale deflection. How (a) Parallel
much resistance is required to convert it into an (b) Series
ammeter of range of 10 A? [BCECE (Mains) 2012] (c) Depends upon the relative values of internal and
(a) 5 × 10−3 Ω in series (b) 5 × 10−4 Ω in parallel external resistance
(d) Mixed grouping
(c) 105 Ω in series (d) 105 Ω in parallel
123 The variation betweenV-i has shown by graph for C respectively, then R 1 : R 2 : R 3 will be equal to
heating filament [UP CPMT 2012] [AMU 2012]
A
i i
(a) (b)
r
r
r
V V r
i i r
B C
(.c) (d) r
(a) 6 : 3 : 2 (b) 1 : 2 : 3 (c) 5 : 4 : 3 (d) 4 : 3 : 2
V V 129 The equivalent resistance between A and B of
124 Two bulbs when connected in parallel to a source network shown in figure is [UP CPMT 2012]
take 60 W each. The power consumed, when they R
are connected in series with the same source is R
[UP CPMT 2012]
R R B
(a) 15 W (b) 30 W
A R R
(c) 60 W (d) 120 W
125 A voltmeter of range 2 V and resistance 300 Ω 3R 4R
(a) (b) (c) 6 R (d) 2 R
cannot be converted into ammeter of range 4 3
[Manipal 2012]
(a) 1 A (b) 1 mA 130 Each resistance shown in figure is 2 Ω. The
(c) 100 mA (d) 10 mA equivalent resistance between A and B is [AFMC 2012]
126 In the Wheatstone network given, P = 10 Ω,
Q = 20 Ω, R = 15 Ω, S = 30 Ω, the current passing 2Ω 2Ω
through the battery (of negligible internal resistance)
is [Manipal 2012]
A B
2Ω
P R
2Ω 2Ω
G
(a) 2 Ω (b) 1 Ω (c) 4 Ω (d) 5 Ω
Q S 131 In the circuit shown, the potential difference
between x and y will be [JCECE 2012]
40 Ω x y
+ –
6V
(a) 0.36 A (b) zero
(c) 0.18 A (d) 0.72 A
127 A current of 5 A is passing through a metallic wire
of cross-sectional area 4 × 10 −6 m2 . If the density of 120 V 20 Ω
charge carriers of the wire is 5 × 10 26 m−3 , the drift
velocity of the electrons will be [Manipal 2012]
(a) zero (b) 120 V (c) 60 V (d) 20 V
(a) 1 × 102 ms−1 (b) 1.56 × 10−2 ms−1 132 For the circuit shown in figure, [JCECE 2012]
R
(c) 1.56 × 10−3 ms−1 (d) 1 × 10−2 ms−1
128. Six resistances each of value r = 5 Ω are connected 0.5 A
between points A, B and C as shown in the figure. If 10 Ω 10 Ω 20 Ω
R 1, R 2 and R 3 are the net resistance between A and 25 V
B, between B and C and between A and C
(a) resistance R = 46 Ω (a) −1 V (b) +1 V

(b) current through 20 Ω resistance is 0.1A (c) −2 V (d) + 2 V
(c) potential difference across the middle resistance is 2 V 135 Two batteries of emfs 2 V and 1 V of internal
(d) All of the above are true resistances 1 Ω and 2 Ω respectively are connected in
133 An ammeter connected in the circuit as shown in parallel. The effective emf of the combination is
figure shows a reading of [BHU Screening 2012] [Kerala CEE 2011]
2Ω 3 5 3
(a) V (b) V (c) V (d) 2 V
2 3 5
2Ω 2V (e) 5 V
A 136 Two cells with the same emf E and different internal
2Ω resistances r1 and r 2 are connected in series to an
external resistance R. What is the value of R, if the
potential difference across the first cell is zero?
2Ω
[WB JEE 2011]
1 3 1 (a) rr
12 (b) r1 + r2
(a) A (b) A (c) A (d) 2 A r +r
2 4 8 (c) r1 − r2 (d) 1 2
2
134 If a current of 2 A flows through resistances
connected as shown in figure, the potential 137 In the circuit shown below, the currents i1 and i 2 are
differenceVA − VB is [KCET 2011]
[BHU Screening 2012] i1
B
12 Ω 2Ω
i2 4Ω
2Ω 3Ω
A C
12 V, 1 Ω
3Ω 2Ω
(a) 1.5 A, 0.5 A (b) 0.5 A, 1.5 A
(c) 1 A, 3 A (d) 3 A, 1 A
D
2A 2A
ANSWERS
CHECK POINT 3.1
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a)
CHECK POINT 3.2

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (c) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (a) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (d)
CHECK POINT 3.3

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (c) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (a) 17. (c)
CHECK POINT 3.4

1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (c) 6. (d) 7. (d) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (c)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (b) 20. (a)

1. (c) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (a)
11. (c) 12. (d) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (a) 17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (a) 20. (b)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (c) 25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (b) 28. (d) 29. (d) 30. (c)
31. (d) 32. (a) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (d) 36. (a) 37. (d) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (c) 45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (d) 49. (c) 50. (c)
51. (a) 52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (c) 55. (a) 56. (d) 57. (b) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (d) 64. (c) 65. (d) 66. (c) 67. (b) 68. (b) 69. (d) 70. (d)
71. (d) 72. (a) 73. (b) 74. (c) 75. (b) 76. (d) 77. (b) 78. (d) 79. (b) 80. (a)
81. (c) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (a) 85. (d) 86. (d) 87. (d) 88. (c) 89. (b) 90. (d)
91. (d) 92. (a) 93. (a) 94. (b) 95. (a) 96. (c) 97. (a) 98. (d) 99. (b) 100. (d)
101. (b) 102. (c) 103. (a) 104. (a) 105. (b) 106. (c) 107. (a) 108. (b) 109. (b) 110. (d)
111. (a) 112. (c) 113. (d) 114. (c) 115. (c) 116. (b) 117. (b) 118. (c) 119. (b) 120. (b)
121. (d) 122. (b) 123. (c) 124. (b)

l Assertion and reason
1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (d) 5. (a)
l Statement based questions

1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b)
l Match the columns

1. (a) 2. (c)

1. (a) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (b) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (a) 10. (c)
11. (b) 12. (d) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (b) 17. (d) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (a)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (a) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (a) 28. (c) 29. (c) 30. (b)
31. (c) 32. (b) 33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (c) 37. (d) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (d)
41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (a) 44. (b) 45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (a) 48. (b) 49. (a) 50. (e)
51. (b) 52. (c) 53. (a) 54. (a) 55. (a) 56. (b) 57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (c) 60. (c)
61. (c) 62. (d) 63. (a) 64. (a) 65. (b) 66. (d) 67. (b) 68. (c) 69. (a) 70. (c)
71. (c) 72. (c) 73. (d) 74. (a) 75. (b) 76. (d) 77. (b) 78. (a) 79. (b) 80. (a)
81. (b) 82. (b) 83. (b) 84. (a) 85. (d) 86. (b) 87. (b) 88. (d) 89. (b) 90. (b)
91. (b) 92. (c) 93. (a) 94. (d) 95. (d) 96. (d) 97. (b) 98. (*) 99. (d) 100. (b)
101. (a) 102. (c) 103. (c) 104. (b) 105. (c) 106. (d) 107. (b) 108. (a) 109. (a) 110. (b)
111. (b) 112. (a) 113. (c) 114. (a) 115. (b) 116. (b) 117. (d) 118. (b) 119. (d) 120. (b)
121. (a) 122. (c) 123. (a) 124. (b) 125. (b) 126. (a) 127. (b) 128. (c) 129. (a) 130. (a)
131. (b) 132. (d) 133. (b) 134. (d) 135. (b) 136. (c) 137. (b)
Hints & Explanations
l CHECK POINT 3.1 3 (a) R = ρ
l
dq A
1 (a) Current, I = = 3t 2 + 2t + 5
dt Since, wires are made of same material, so resistivity ρ of all
t=2 wires will be same.
q =∫ (3t 2 + 2t + 5) dt l
t=0
Therefore, R ∝
Charge, q = [t 3 + t 2 + 5t]20 = [8 + 4 + 10] = 22 C A
l
q ne n × 1.6 × 10 −19 ⇒ R∝ 2
2 (a) Current, i =or i = ⇒ 16 × 10 −3 = πr
t t 1 l
R∝
∴ Number of electrons, n = 1017  
d
2
 
ne  2
3 (c) We have, current, i =
t For length = 50 cm and diameter = 0.5 mm
it 0.2 × 30 Resistance will be maximum.
∴ Number of electrons, n = = = 3.75 × 1019
e 1.6 × 10 −19
4 (d) Colour code for carbon resistor,
4 (b) Given, I = 4 − 0.08 t A B C D
dq Brown Red Green Gold
⇒ = 4 − 0.08 t
dt ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
⇒
50
q = ∫ (4 − 0.08t ) dt 1 2 10 5 5%
0 R = AB × C ± D
50
 0.08t 2  = 12 × 10 5 ± 5%
⇒ ne = 4t − = 100
 2  0 5 (c) Given, circuit can be redrawn as follows
100 100
⇒ n= = = 6.25 × 10 20 electrons 5W 5W B 5W
e 1.6 × 10 −19 A C
2/3 V 2/3 V 2/3 V
eEτ
5 (a) Drift velocity, v d = I1 V1 V2 V3
m
I
∴ vd ∝ E I1 2V
6 (b) The order of drift velocity of electrons is A C

−4 −1 −2 −1 5W D 5W 5W
10 ms = 10 cms
7 (a) Drift velocity, I V 2 2
Here, I1 = = = = A
3 2 2Req   15
15
vd =
i
= 2× 
 2
neA 8.5 × 10 28 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 2 × 10 −6
So, potential across each resistance,
= 0.11 × 10 −3 ms −1
2 2
length of the wire 3 V ′ = I1 R = ×5= V
∴Time, t = = = 2.73 × 10 4 s 15 3
vd 0.11 × 10 −3
∴ Potential difference across,
2 2 4
l CHECK POINT 3.2 AB = + = V
V q 3 3 3
1 (b) We have, i = =
R t 6 (b) Potential difference across the circuit
Vt 20 × 2 × 60  R R   6 × 4
∴ Charge, q = = = 240 C = i  1 2  = 1.2 ×   = 2.88 V
R 10  R1 + R2   6 + 4
l m
2 (a) Resistance, R = ρ and resistivity, ρ = 2 So, current through 6 Ω resistance
A ne τ
ml 2.88
∴ R= 2 = = 0.48A
ne τA 6
Alternative solution So, equivalent resistance across battery,

 R2  Req = 8.5 + 2 + 4.5 = 15 Ω
From current division rule, i1 = i  
 R1 + R2  Hence, current from the battery,
15
i1 R1 = 6 W i= = 1A
15
12 (b) As B is connected to the earth, so potential at B isVB = 0.
i i Now, current in the given circuit,
R2 = 4 W V 50
i= = = 2A
i2 Rnet 5 + 7 + 10 + 3
Potential difference between A and B is
 4   4
= 1.2   = 1.2   = 0.48 A VA − VB = 2 × 12
 6 + 4  10 
or VA − 0 = 24
7 (c) Current divides according to resistance, so current in 6 Ω VA = 24 V
0.8
resistance is = 0.4 A 13 (d) We have, V = E − ir
2
= 1.5 − 2 × 0.15
So, total current in circuit is 0.8 + 0.4 = 1.2 A
∴ Potential drop across 4 Ω = 1.2 × 4 = 4.8 V V = 1.20 V
8 (b) Two resistances are short circuited. 14 (d) Potential difference between A and B is given by
E r + E 2 r1
So, only third resistance will be considered and hence, VA − VB = 1 2
r1 + r2
i = V /R = 10 / 3 A
5X + 2 × 10
10 × 15 ∴ 4=
9 (b) Net resistance, Rnet = + 3 + 0.5 = 9.5 Ω X + 10
10 + 15
⇒ X = 20 Ω
V 20
∴ I= = = 2.1A
Rnet 9.5 15 (a) 1Ω E1 E2 2Ω
P i Q
According to current division rule, current through 10 Ω 4V 8V
resistance is
i
 15 
I1 =   × 2.1 = 1.2 A
 10 + 15
9Ω
R 2
10 (d) Resistance, RAB = +R= +2
3 3 E1 = 4 V and E 2 = 8 V
8 2 As, E 2 > E1, so current flows from Q to P.
RAB = =2 Ω
3 3 8−4 1
∴ i= = A
11 (a) The circuit can be reduced as follows 12 3
2Ω
1
∴ Potential difference across PQ = × 9 = 3 V
3
15 V Parallel
16 (d) The potentials of different points are as shown in below
figure
6Ω 18 Ω
0.5 Ω 2V 5Ω 4V
8Ω
Series 8V 4V
6V
0V
2Ω
10 V 9Ω
Current through 5 Ω resistance

15 V
Potential difference
=
4.5 Ω Resistance
8.5 Ω
(4 − 2)
= = 0.4 A
5
l CHECK POINT 3.3 V 2 25 × 25

6 (c) Resistance, R = = = 25 Ω
P 25
1 (c)
3A
15 A V2
7 (a) Resistance, R = or R ∝ V 2
A B P
2
R1 V12 R  220  R
8A ⇒ = ⇒ =  = 4 ⇒ R2 =
R2 V22 R2  110  4
D C V2
i 8 (b) Power, P =
5A R
1
∴ P ∝
Applying Kirchhoff’s first law at junction A, B , C, D R
At A, iAB = 15 + 8 = 23A P1 R2
So, =
At B, iBC = 23 + 3 = 26 A P2 R1
At D, iCD = 8 − 5 = 3A 200 R2
At C, iCD + i = iBC =
100 R1
or 3 + i = 26
R2 = 2R1
∴ i = 23 A
V2
2 (d) 1 A 1.5 Ω VB = 0 2.5 Ω 2V 9 (a) Power, P =
R
A B C D 1
Potential difference between A and B, ∴ P ∝
R
VA − VB = 1 × 1.5 or VA − 0 = 1.5 (QVB = 0, given) 1
∴ VA = 1.5 V Also, resistance of wire ∝
(radius of filament)2
Now, potential difference between B and C,
∴ P ∝ (radius of filament)2
VB − VC = 1 × 2.5 = 2.5 V
So, 100 W bulb has thicker filament.
∴ 0 − VC = 2.5 V
⇒ VC = − 2.5 V V 2t Pt 210 × 5 × 60
10 (d) H = = = = 15000 cal
Hence, potential difference between C and D, R×J J 4.2
VC − VD = − 2 V or − 2.5 − VD = − 2 or VD = − 0.5 V V2 (15)2
11 (b) P = ⇒ 150 =
3 (b) Let at junction C, potential isV. R  2R 
 
 2 + R
20 V 2W C 4W 5V
2+R 2
A i1 i3 i2 B ∴ =
2R 3
2W ∴ Resistance, R = 6 Ω
R V2
12 (b) R′ = and P =
4 R
0V P2
∴ P2 = 4P1 ⇒ =4
P1
VA − VC VB − VC VC − 0
∴ + =
2 4 2 13 (c) R40 > R100 . In series, potential difference distributes in
20 − V 5 − V V − 0 direct ratio of resistance.
+ =
2 4 2 V2
14 (c) When bulbs are in series, P = …(i)
V = 9V 3R
9 When bulbs are connected in parallel,
Current, i3 = i = = 4.5 A
2 V2 3V 2
P′ = = = 3 × 3P [from Eq. (i)]
4 (b) Work done,W = qV = 6 × 10 −6 × 9 = 54 × 10 −6 J (R / 3) R
5 (a) In series, i is same, so H = i 2Rt. Therefore, H ∝ R. = 9P
H1 R 1 15 (b) It is known that in parallel combination,

∴ = = 1
H 2 2R 2 Pconsumed ∝ Brigntness ∝
R
⇒ H1 : H 2 = 1: 2
According to question, PA > PB (given), therefore RB > RA
V2 11 (c) Before connecting the voltmeter, let the potential

16 (a) P = . As, R net will decrease, so P will increase.
R difference across 100 Ω isV1.
17 (c) When each bulb is glowing at full power. 10 Ω 100 Ω
50 1
Current from each bulb, i = = A V1
100 2
n
So, main current, i = A (for parallel circuit)
2
Also, E = V + ir V
n
120 = 100 +   × 10  100  10
 2 ∴ V1 =   ×V = V
 100 + 10  11
n=4
After connecting the voltmeter across 100 Ω,
l CHECK POINT 3.4
900 Ω
1 (d) Ammeter is parallel with voltmeter, therefore its reading
will be zero.
1.6 10 Ω 100 Ω
4 (b) If voltmeter is ideal, then R should be = 4 Ω. If it is
0.4
V2
non-ideal, R should be greater than 4 Ω.
5 (c) Total resistance of given circuit V
80
= + 20 = 40 + 20 = 60 Ω
1+ 1
100 × 900
2 1 Equivalent resistance = = 90 Ω
∴ Main current, i = = A 100 + 900
60 30
Let this time potential difference isV2 .
Now, in parallel, there are two resistances of 80 Ω each  90  9
∴ V2 =  V = V
(one of voltmeter and other 80 Ω resistance). So, current is  90 + 10  10
1
equally distributed in 80 Ω resistance and voltmeter, i.e. A 10 9
60 V− V
of current flows through each. Magnitude of % error = 11 10 × 100 = 1.0
10
∴ Potential difference across 80 Ω resistance or voltmeter V
1 11
reading = × 80 = 1.33 V
60 12 (b) (i) 50 ≠ (50 × 10 −6 ) (100 + 10 4 ). Therefore, (a) is wrong.
6 (d) Equivalent resistance of circuit, (ii) 10 ≈ (50 × 10 −6 ) (100 + 200 × 10 3 ). Therefore, (b) is
1000 2500 correct.
Req = 500 + = Ω
3 3 50 × 10 −6 1
∴Current drawn from the cell, (iii) ≠ . Therefore, (c) is wrong.
10 × 10 −3 − 50 × 10 −6 100
10 3
i= = A
2500 / 3 250 14 (b) (ig RV ) (100 ) = ig (RV + 1980 )
3 1000 ∴ Resistance, RV = 20 Ω
Reading of voltmeter = × = 4V
250 3 R R
15 (c) 3 = 1 (balanced Wheatstone bridge)
7 (d) V = IR R4 R2
100 = (10 × 10 −3 ) (25 + R ) or R1 R4 = R2 R3
∴ Resistance, R = 9975 Ω 16 (c) The galvanometer shows no current, it means this is a
balanced Wheatstone bridge, so
8 (d) When some resistance is connected in parallel with R AC 20
voltmeter the effective resistance get decreased. So, A will = =
increase andV will decrease. 80 BC 80
∴ Resistance, R = 20 Ω
10 (c) We have, igG = (i − ig )S
17 (a) In potentiometer, the ratio of emfs is equal to the ratio of
10 × 99 = (90 )S no deflection lengths.
10 × 99 E1 l1 2
S= = =
90 E 2 l2 3
∴ Shunt, S = 11Ω
(l1 − l2 )  60 − 50  11 (c) Out of n cells, two cells will cancel out each other’s emf.
18 (c) r = ×R =   × 6 = 1.2 Ω
l2  50  So, net emf = (n − 2) E.
19 (b) For potentiometer, emf Total resistance = R + nr
E ∝ l or E = kl (n − 2)E
Current, i =
where, k is a constant. nr + R
V iR E
Also, E = = ×l 12 (d) Current, i =
l L r +R
E′ R E 2R
∴ E = × ×l Power, P = i 2R ⇒ P =
(R1 + R2 + r ) L (r + R )2
10 5 Power will be maximum, when r = R.
∴ E = × × 3 = 3V
5+ 4+1 5 E2
Pmax =
e R 4r
20 (a) Potential gradient, x = ⋅
(R + Rh + r ) L 13 (b) Slope of the V-i curve at any point is equal to reciprocal of
0.2 × 10 −3 2 R resistance at that point.
⇒ = ×
10 −2 (R + 490 + 0 ) 1 From the curve, slope for T1 > slope for T2
⇒ R = 4.9 Ω RT1 < RT 2
⇒ Also at higher temperature resistance will be higher, so
(A) Taking it together T2 > T1
14 (a) The relationship between current and drift speed is given
1 (c) During the charging of battery terminal, potential difference by i = neAv d
is always greater than emf of circuit.
Here, I is the current and v d is the drift velocity.
V = E + ir
So, I ∝vd
2 (d) Potentiometer works on null deflection method. In balance Thus, only drift velocity determines the current in a conductor.
condition, no current flow in secondary circuit.
15 (c) Current in the circuit will increase because another
3 (c) We cannot increase the rating of fuse wire of lower value resistance is connected in parallel to the circuit and hence
just by increasing its length. For it, we shall have to make potential drop across the ammeter will decrease. So, the
fuse wire thick. potential difference over voltmeter will increase because total
4 (b) Specific resistance of silver, copper and aluminium are potential difference over ammeter and voltmeter is equal to
1.6 × 10 −8 Ω - m, 1.7 × 10 −8 Ω - m and 2.7 × 10 −8 Ω - m, emf (constant).
respectively. 16 (a) Resistance of wire, R = ρ L /A
1
Since, conductivity (σ ) = On stretching the wire, the volume of the wire remains same.
resistivity (ρ )
A′ l
⇒ =
Hence, σ Al < σ Cu < σ Ag A l′
Thus, correct sequence is Al, Cu, Ag. So, new resistance, R′ = ρl′ /A′
2 2
5 (a) Voltmeter has high resistance. So, most of the main R′  l′   A  l′ l′  l′   1.1l 
⇒ =    = ⋅ =  =  = 1.21
current will flow through ammeter which is in parallel. So, it R  l   A′  l l  l   l 
will burn out. No damage will occur to voltmeter.
∴ R′ = 1.21R = 1.21 × 10 = 12.1Ω −~ 12 Ω
 E   R  E
6 (c) V = E − ir = E −   r =E   = 17 (d) Circuit can be reduced as follows
R + r  R + r  1 + r /R
2Ω 3Ω
8 (b) The minimum resistance can be achieved when we
5Ω
connect all resistances in parallel.
r
So, equivalent resistance of combination = . ⇒
10
9 (b) When wire is bent in the form of a circle, then between 20 V
two points in any diameter, it is equivalent to two resistances 20 V Step (2)
12 Step (1)
in parallel, Req = = 6Ω
2 So, equivalent resistance of circuit, Req = 5 Ω
20
10 (a) As steady current is flowing through the conductor, hence ∴ Current in the circuit = = 4A
the number of electrons entering from one end and outgoing 5
from the other end of any segment is equal. Hence, charge As in parallel, current is divided according to resistance, so
will be zero. current flowing through each resistance = 2 A.
18 (a) Potential difference = 10 V R1 R2 6

24 (c) Given, = …(i)
R1 + R2 8
10
So, i = = 2A When one resistance say R2 is broken, then
5
E   1.5  R1 = 2 Ω …(ii)
19 (a) Internal resistance, r = R  − 1 = (10)  − 1 = 2 Ω From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
V   1.25 
6
20 (b) For twisted wire, there are two halves each of resistance R2 = Ω
5
2 Ω in parallel.
l
2×2 25 (a) We have, R =ρ
So, Req = = 1Ω A
2+ 2
R ∝l
21 (a) When wire is divided in 10 equal parts, then each part
R1 l1 1
will have a resistance = R / 10 = r . = =
Let equivalent resistance be rR , then R2 l2 2
1 1 1 1 ⇒ R2 = 2R1 …(i)
= + + + ...10 times
rR r r r
1 10 10 100 Q R1 + R2 = 9 …(ii)
∴ = = = From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
rR r (R /10 ) R
R1 + 2R1 = 9
R
∴ rR = = 0.01R ⇒ R1 = 3 Ω
100
∴ R2 = 2R1 = 2 × 3 = 6 Ω
22 (a) Equivalent resistance between B and C. RR 3×6
Net resistance, R net = 1 2 = =2Ω
(2 + 2) × 2 8 4 R1 + R2 3 + 6
RBC = = = Ω
2+ 2+ 2 6 3
26 (a) The simplified circuit is as shown below
A 3Ω
2W 2W
8Ω 4Ω
2W 2W Þ C A B
B
2Ω 6Ω
6Ω
B C 2W 3W 3W
2W
23 (b) Given circuit can be reduced to
16/10 W 24/10 W 4W
6Ω A B ÞA B
6W 6W
1 1 1 1 4+ 3+ 2 9
6Ω ⇒ = + + = =
A C R eq 3 4 6 12 12
3Ω 4
R eq = Ω
3Ω 3
B
27 (b) Let resistance, R = 100 Ω
So, equivalent resistance between points A and B is equal to 10
∴ R′ = 100 + 100 × = 110 Ω
100
3Ω
A C ∴ Required shunt, ∆R = R′ − R = 110 − 99 = 11 Ω
28 (d) Given,V = 115 V
3Ω and P = 1250 W
V2
3Ω We know, R =
B P
(115)2
6×3 So, R= = 10.58 Ω
Req = = 2Ω 1250
6+ 3
Resistance, R = 10.6 Ω
29 (d) Resistance, Rt = R0 (1 + αt ) E2 2
⇒ =
E1 3
20 = R0 (1 + 20 α ) and 60 = R0 (1 + 500 α )
E1 3
From these equations, we can find ⇒ =
E2 2
R0 = 18.33 Ω
α = 4.54 × 10 −3 °C −1 36 (a) From Ohm’s law,
Rt = 25 Ω
2V
Again, Rt = R0 (1 + αt )
25 = 18.33(1 + 4.54 × 10 −3t ) 2Ω
We find, t = 80 ° C
30 (c) The current i crossing area of cross-section A, can be
expressed in terms of drift velocity v d and the moving charges
R = 998 Ω
as
i = nev dA E 2
i= = = 2 × 10 −3A
where, n is number of charge carriers per unit volume and R + r 998 + 2
e the charge on the carrier.
Potential difference across the voltmeter is
i 24 × 10 −3
∴ vd = = V = iR = (2 × 10 −3 ) × 998 = 1.996 V −
~ 1.99 V
neA (3 × 10 )(1.6 × 10 −19 )(10 −4 )
23
V 2
= 5 × 10 −3 ms −1 37 (d) Resistance, R = = = 0.5 Ω
i 4
31 (d) Drift velocity in a copper conductor, ρl ρ × 0.5
i 5.4 Resistance, R = ⇒ 0.5 =
vd = = A 1 × 10 −6
neA 8.4 × 10 28 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 10 −6
Resistivity of wire,
= 0.4 × 10 −3 ms −1 = 0.4 mms −1
0.5 × 10 −6
l ρ= = 1 × 10 −6 Ω -m
32 (a) The resistance of wire is given by, R = ρ 0.5
A
For greater value of R, l must be higher and A should be lower 38 (b) In order to balance the bridge, the effective value of S
and it is possible only when the battery is connected across must be equal to 2 Ω.
S×6
 1 So, 2=
1cm ×   cm (area of cross-section A). S+6
 2
2S + 12 = 6S ⇒ 4S = 12 ⇒ S = 3 Ω
33 (b) In potentiometer experiment, the emf of a cell can be 2
measured, if the potential drop along the potentiometer wire 39 (c) Current in the potentiometer wire = = 2 × 10 −3 A
990 + 10
is more than the emf of the cell to be determined. Here value
of emfs of two cells are given as 5V and 10V, therefore the Potential drop over wire = 2 × 10 −3 × 10 = 2 × 10 −2V (QV = IR )
potential drop along the potentiometer wire must be more
2 × 10 −2  V
than 10 V. Potential gradient = = 0.01 V/m Q k = 
2  l
V iR i ρ L i ρ
34 (a) Potential gradient = = = = −19
L L LA A  v  1.6 × 10 (2.2 × 10 6 )
40 (b) Current, i = qf = q   =
0.2 × 40 × 10 −8  2πr  (2π ) (5 × 10 −11)
= = 10 −2 V/m
8 × 10 −6 = 1.12 × 10 −3A
35 (d) When potentiometer is connected between A and B, then 41 (d) We have, k × l = i × R
it measures only E1 and when connected between A and C,
(2 × 10 −3 ) (50 ) = 10 × i
then it measures E1 − E 2.
E1 l The current passing through the resistor,
∴ = 1 i = 10 × 10 −3 A = 10 mA
E1 − E 2 l2
E1 − E 2 l2 42 (c) Total cells = m × n = 24 ⇒ mn = 24 ...(i)
⇒ =
E1 l1 For maximum current in the circuit,
E 100 mr m
⇒ 1− 2 = R= ⇒ 3 = × (0.5) ⇒ m = 6n ...(ii)
E1 300 n n
E2 1 On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get m = 12 and n = 2
⇒ = 1−
E1 3
VV 5 10 (3 + R )
43 (c) Current, IV = = = 0.25 × 10 −3A 50 (c) Resistance, R = 3 + 10 || (3 + R ) = 3 +
RV 20 × 10 3 13 + R
∴ V = IV (R + r ) Solving this equation, we get
110 = 0.25 × 10 −3 (R + 20 × 10 3 ) R = 69 Ω
R = 420 k Ω l
51 (a) Resistance, R = ρ ⋅
E E A
44 (c) We have, i1 = and i2 = R2 A1 3
r + R1 r + R2 For same material and same length, = =
R1 A2 1
From these two equations,we get
i R − iR ∴ R2 = 3R1
r= 2 2 11 Resistance of thick wire, R1 = 10 Ω (given)
i1 − i2
∴ Resistance of thin wire, R2 = 3 × 10 = 30 Ω
1 1 1 1 3
45 (b) = + + = Total resistance of series combination = 10 + 30 = 40 Ω
RP R R R R
R 52 (b) Electric power, P = i 2R
RP = Ω
3 P
∴ Current, i =
and RS = R + R = 2R Ω R
Rnet = RP + RS For resistance of 9 Ω,
R 7R 36
Rnet = 2R + = Ω i1 = = 4= 2 A
3 3 9
2+ 2 4 i ×R 2× 9
46 (c) i = = A i2 = 1 = = 3A
1 + 1.9 + 0.9 3.8 6 6
i = i1 + i2 = 2 + 3 = 5A
For cell A, E = V + ir
⇒ V2 = iR2 = 5 × 2 = 10 V
4
V = E − ir = 2 − × 1.9 53 (c) The equivalent circuit can be drawn as
3.8
6W
V = 0 (zero)
47 (b) Internal resistance, 2V A
4W
l   50 
r =  1 − 1 R =  − 1 × 2 = 0.50 Ω
 l2   40 
3W
e R
48 (d) E = ⋅ ×l
(R + Rh + r ) L
2W
2 10
= × × 0.4 = 0.16V
(10 + 40 + 0 ) 1 ß
4W 2V A
49 (c)
1Ω 1Ω 1Ω R 1Ω 1Ω 1W
P
A Q S B
ß 2V A
5W
In circuit, resistance between PQ, QR and RS are in parallel.
Now circuit reduces to 2
Current = = 0.4 A
5
1Ω
54 (c) Total potential drop across the given wire
1Ω 1Ω 1Ω = (1 × 10 −3 ) (10 2 ) = 0.1 V
A B Therefore, potential difference across R should be 1.9 V.
1Ω
2V
R
1Ω 1/3 Ω 1Ω
A B
100 cm, 3 W
1 7 1.9 R
∴ RAB = 1+ 1+ = Ω Now, = or R = 57 Ω
3 3 0.1 3
55 (a) We have, rA = 2rB Also since, cells are connected in opposite polarities, the
resultant emf is
∴ AA = 4 AB
l E = E1 − E 2 = 5 V − 2 V = 3 V
or lA = B E 3
4 From Ohm’s law, E = iR ⇒ i = = = 0.1 A
R 30
∴ RB = 16RA
 16 R 59 (b) Here, the resistances of 400 Ω and 10000 Ω are in
Rnet =   RA = B
 17 17 parallel, so their effective resistance RP will be
If Rnet = 4, then RA = 4.25 Ω or RB = 68 Ω. 400 × 10000 5000
RP = = Ω
400 + 10000 13
56 (d) Balanced condition for Wheatstone’s bridge,
R1 R3 Total resistance of the circuit,
=
R2 R4 5000 15400
R= + 800 = Ω
24 + X 10 1 13 13
We have, = = …(i) 6 39
84 + Y 30 3 Current in the circuit, i = = A
3 24 + 84 + X + Y 15400 / 13 7700
and = [QV = IR]
1 10 + 30 Potential difference across voltmeter,
108 + X + Y 39 5000
= …(ii) V = iRP = × = 1.95 V
40 7700 13
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get E E
60 (b) Current, i = . When R decreases to 0, i = and
X =Y = 6 Ω R+r r
V = IR = 0.
57 (b) The given circuit can be redrawn as
P l 20 20 1
10 Ω 20 Ω 61 (c) Initially, = = = =
Q 100 − l 100 − 20 80 4
10 Ω When a resistance of 15 Ω is connected in series with the

smaller of the two, i.e. with P, then
P + 15 40 P 15 2
i 5Ω 10 Ω = ⇒ + =
Q 60 Q Q 3
+ −
1 15 2 15 5
5V + = ⇒ =
4 Q 3 Q 12
It is a balanced Wheatstone bridge and hence, no current
flows in the middle resistor, so equivalent circuit would be as ⇒ Q = 36 Ω
shown in figure. 1
Resistance, P = × 36 = 9 Ω
10 W 20 W 4
62 (d) Effective voltage on charging
= 4 × 1.4 − 2 = 3 .6 V
Total resistance = 8 Ω
5W 10 W ⇒ i = V /R = 3.6 / 8 = 0.45 A
i
63 (d) Since, on balancing no current flows through the battery
so its internal resistance will not affected.
+ -
E
5V Potential gradient =
100
10 Ω and 20 Ω resistances are in series, E 30E
So, balancing emf = × 30 =
∴ R′ = 10 Ω + 20 Ω = 30 Ω 100 100
Similarly, 5 Ω and 10 Ω are in series, R′ ′ = 15 Ω
64 (c) When a resistance of 100 Ω is connected in series, then
15 × 30
Now, R′ and R′ ′ are in parallel, R = = 10 Ω the current flowing will be
15 + 30 V
V 5 i= …(i)
So, i= = = 0.5 A 100 + R
R 10
When a resistance of 1000 Ω is connected in series, the range
58 (c) We know that, when current flow is same then resistors of galvanometer gets doubled.
are connected in series, hence resultant resistance is 2V
Current, i= …(ii)
R′ = R1 + R2 = 10 Ω + 20 Ω = 30 Ω 1100 + R
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 2

∴ R× × 10 −3 = 3000 × 1 × 10 −3
V 2V 3
= ⇒ R = 900 Ω
100 + R 1100 + R 3000 × 3
⇒ R= = 4500 Ω
i i×4 2
65 (d) Drift velocity, v d = =
nAe nπD 2e So, resistance to be added = 4500 − 50 = 4450 Ω
1 G
i.e. vd ∝ 2 73 (b) We have, shunt, S = ...(i)
D (n − 1)
v d1 D22  1 1
2 where, G is resistance of galvanometer.
∴ = =  = G
vd2 D12  2 4 Again, S′ = ...(ii)
(n′ − 1)
2
V S (n′ − 1)
66 (c) Power, P = ∴ =
R S′ (n − 1)
V2
∴ R= or R ∝ V 2 S (n − 1)
P ⇒ = (n′ − 1)
2
S′
R1  200  4
i.e. = = S (n − 1) + S ′
R2  300  9 ⇒ n′ =
S′
When connected in series, then potential drop and power
consumed are in the ratio of their resistances. So, 74 (c) Higher the power, lower is the resistance and lower the
P1 V1 R1 4 resistance, thicker will be the element.
= = = R 1
P2 V2 R2 9 75 (b) Given, 1 =
R2 2
67 (b) Current required by each bulb,
Let, third resistance is R.
P 100
i= = A 1 1 1
V 220 So, + + =1
a 2a R
If n bulbs are joined in parallel, then ni = ifuse 3R
100 ∴ a=
or n× = 10 or n = 22 2 (R − 1)
220
As resistance is not fractional. (given)
68 (b) Rise in temperature = 15°C R
Amount of water = 1L = 1000 cc = 1000 g ∴ =2
R −1
Heat supplied in cal = 1000 × 15 × 1
So, R = 2Ω
= 1000 × 15 × 4.2 (in form of joule)
∴ R1 = a = 3 Ω and R2 = 2a = 6 Ω
1000 × 15 × 4.2
∴Power = = 1050 W or (J/s) 76 (d) Applying Kirchhoff’s law at point D, we get
60
i1 = i2 + i3
69 (d) Average energy = 2 eV
VA − VD VD − 0 VD − VC
⇒ eV0 = 2eV0 = +
10 20 30
⇒ V0 = 2 volt VD VD − 10
or 70 − VD = +
V0 2 2 3
∴Electric field, E = = = 5 × 10 7 V/m
Mean free path 4 × 10 −8 70 − 40
⇒ VD = 40 V ⇒ i1 = = 3A
10
70 (d) By joining 2 Ω and 6 Ω in parallel, we get 1.5 Ω and
40 − 0
joining them in series, we get 8 Ω. i2 = = 2A
20
So, values of R1 and R2 will be 2 Ω and 6 Ω. A
71 (d) 10 × i = 2 × 50 70 V i1
100
i= = 10 mA 10 W
10
72 (a) Initially, R1 = 50 + 2950 = 3000 Ω i3 i2
3 D
30 W 20 W
E = 3V ⇒ I1 = = 1 × 10 −3 A
3000
C B
To reduce deflection to 20, 10 V 0V
2 40 − 10
I2 = × 1 × 10 −3 A and i3 = = 1A
3 30
E1/r1 − E 2 /r2 85 (d) The given circuit can be reduced to

77 (b) Enet =
1/ r1 + 1/r2
3Ω
Current through R will be zero, if Enet = 0
E1 E 2
∴ =
r1 r2 3Ω 3Ω
Net emf 10 − 4
78 (d) i = = = 1A from a to e.
Net resistance 1 + 2 + 3 A B
6Ω
79 (b) Electric field produced by charges accumulated on the
surface of wire, provides force to the electrons to change the So, equivalent resistance between A and B,
direction of current density. RAB = (3 + 3 + 3) || 6 = 9 || 6
80 (a) We know that in the given circuit, 9 × 6 9 × 6 18
= = = Ω
ε r + ε 2r1 9+ 6 15 5
ε eq = 1 2
r1 + r2 ⇒ RAB = 3.6 Ω
Here, ε eq is weighted average of ε1 and ε 2. 86 (d) The network can be redrawn as follows
Naturally, its value will lie between the value of ε1 and ε 2, 6Ω 6Ω 6Ω
A B
i.e. ε eq will be less than ε 2 and more than ε1.
81 (c) We know that percentage of error can be minimised by
adjusting the balance point near the middle of the meter scale,
6Ω 6Ω 6Ω
i.e. around 50 cm. This can be achieved by adjusting the Step (1)
value of S. For balance point to be at 2.9 cm, we have the
equation, 3Ω 3Ω 3Ω
R 2.9
= A
Step (2)
B
S 971 .
2 .9 Now, there are three resistances in series.
⇒ R= × 100 = 3 Ω
971. So, equivalent resistance,
For balance point to be in the middle, the equation becomes Req = 3 + 3 + 3 = 9 Ω
R 1 87 (d) The circuit can be reduced as,
=
S 1
2Ω 2Ω 2Ω
R=S A
Here, R = 3Ω
⇒ S = 3Ω 8Ω 8Ω 4Ω
So, the value of S should be changed from 100 Ω to 3 Ω to
obtain reading in the mean position.
B
2Ω 2Ω 2Ω
82 (b) No current will flow through the grounded wire. Step (1)
V
∴ I= 2Ω 2Ω
2R A
83 (b) We have, IG = 0
∴ VX = E 2 = 2 V 8Ω 8Ω 8Ω
V500 Ω (12 − 2) 500
= = B
VX 2 X 2Ω 2Ω
∴ X = 100 Ω Step (2)
2Ω 2Ω
3×6 A
84 (a) Equivalent resistance of circuit, R = 4 + = 6Ω
3+ 6
3 8Ω 4Ω
and current through battery, i = = 0.5 A
6
Potential difference over 4 Ω = 0.5 × 4 = 2V B
2Ω 2Ω
Potential difference across the resistor of 3 Ω Step (3)
over 6 Ω = 3 − 2 = 1V
2W
A RAB = (R + R ) || (R + R )
= 2R || 2R
8W 8W 2R × 2R
= =R
B 2R + 2R
2W
Step (4) 93 (a) The simple circuit is as shown below,
2W
A A
A
4W
2W
2W 2W 1W A
B
2W 2W
Step (5)
Þ Þ2W 2W
Now, equivalent resistance between A and B is
Req = 2 + 4 + 2 = 8 Ω 1W
2W 2W B
88 (c) Total resistance of the circuit,
(R + R2 ) × R3 (15 + 15) × 30 B
R = R4 + 1 = 35 +
(R1 + R2 ) + R3 (15 + 15) + 30 B
30 × 30 ∴ The equivalent resistance across AB,

= 35 + = 50 Ω
30 + 30 2× 2
Req = = 1Ω
50 2+ 2
Current in circuit, i = = 1A
50
94 (b) The simple circuit is as shown below,
1
Current through R3 , i′ = i2 = A
2 10 Ω 10 Ω
Potential difference across R3,
1
V3 = i′ × R3 = × 30 = 15 V 8Ω
2 8Ω 8Ω 24/7 Ω
Q P Q P
89 (b) Potential difference across 100 Ω resistance is 5V. As 6Ω
voltmeter and 100 Ω resistance are in parallel. It means
equivalent resistance of voltmeter and 100 Ω should be 50 Ω. 10 × (8 + 24 / 7)
R net =
So, resistance of voltmeter must be 100 Ω. 10 + (8 + 24 / 7)
iR = 5.3 Ω −
~ 5Ω
90 (d) Emf of cell, E = xil = ×l
L 95 (a) The given circuit consists of a balanced Wheatstone bridge.
e R
∴ E = × ×l 2R
(R1 + R2 + r ) L
5 5 R 2R A R 2/3R B
0.4 = × ×l ⇒
(5 + 45 + 0 ) 10 A B
∴ l =8m 2R
91 (d) Net resistance of circuit, R = 1 + 6 + 4 = 11Ω
2 5
6 ∴ Rnet = R + R= R
I= A 3 3
11 5 5
96 (c) q = ∫ idt = ∫ (1.2t + 3) dt = 30 C
6 6 0 0
∴ V = × 1= V
11 11 97 (a) As RAB = RAO and RBC = ROC , so points O and B will be at
92 (a) The given circuit forms a balanced Wheatstone bridge same potential and hence, resistance ROB becomes ineffective.
between points A and B. Similarly, as RAO = RAD and ROC = RDC , resistance ROD becomes
L ineffective.
So, excluding RBO and ROD , equivalent resistance Req of the
R R
given network between points A and C will be given by
1 1 1 1
B = + +
i.e. A Req 2R 2R 2R
2
R R ⇒ Req = R
3
K
98 (d) The circuit can be drawn as, If n be the number of bulbs possible, then total resistance of
200
circuit = + 10
n
Maximum current in the circuit = 0.5 × n
5Ω P 5Ω 120
⇒ P So, = 0.5n ⇒ n = 4
S 8Ω 8Ω 200
S + 10
n
106 (c) Let RAB = x. Then,
3Ω 3Ω ⇓
1Ω
A
P 1Ω x
4Ω
S B
x x
RAB = 1 + or x = 1+
Resistance between points P and S = 4 Ω 1+ x 1+ x
99 (b) In the first case, potential difference balances against ∴ x + x 2 = 1+ x + x or x 2 − x − 1 = 0
resistance R ,V1 = k l1 ⇒ R = kl1Ω (Q I = 1A) 1+ 1+ 4 1+ 5
In the second case, potential difference balances against R + X, x= = Ω
2 2
V2 = kl2 ⇒ R + X = kl2
107 (a) Potential difference across 4 Ω resistance = 20 + 16 = 36V
∴Potential difference balance over X = k (l2 − l1) Ω
36
100 (d) Power = 1.08 kW = 1080 W Current through 4 Ω resistance = = 9 A [from top to bottom]
4
P × t = E ⇒ 1080 × t = m × L
20 − 16
1080 × t = 100 × 540 × 4.2 ⇒ t = 210 s Similarly, current through 2 Ω resistance = = 2A
2
ig S
101 (b) For an ammeter, = ⇒ ig G = (i − ig )S Therefore, total current through 20 V battery will be 11 A.
i G+S
108 (b) Current through R1 and R2 comes out to be zero (potential
∴ ig G = (0.03 − ig ) 4r …(i)
difference = 0).
and ig G = (0.06 − ig )r …(ii)
Net emf
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get ∴ Current through R3 =
Total resistance
0.12 − 4ig = 0.06 − ig
(4 + 3 + 2) − (2 + 3 + 2) 2
Maximum current through the galvanometer, ig = 0.02 A = = A
3 3
102 (c) When key K is opened, bulb B3 will not draw any current
 i
from the source. So, that terminal voltage of source increases. 109 (b) According to the question, R =  20 +  Ω
 2
Hence, power consumed by bulb increases. So, light of the 250 250
bulb B2 becomes more. The brightness of bulb B1 decreases. Now, current, i = =
R 20 + (i / 2)
103 (a) Maximum current possible in galvanometer, ⇒ i 2 + 40i − 500 = 0
Imax = 25 × 4 × 10 − 4 A = 10 − 2 A Solving, we get
−2 2.5 i = 10 A
So, 10 =
100 + R
110 (d) According to question,
100 + R = 250 dQ
Q = at − bt 2 ⇒ i= = a − 2bt
Resistance, R = 150 Ω dt
a
104 (a) Let, the bulb 400 W is having resistance value of R. For i = 0 at t =
2b
200 W, necessary value of resistance will be 2R. di
= − 2b
Total value of resistance in the circuit will be R + R = 2R dt
If I is the maximum current in the circuit, then I 2R = 400 W 111 (a) The given three resistors are in parallel,
Power of circuit as a whole = I 2 × 2R = 2 × I 2R = 2 × 400 i/3 R
= 800 W
50 R
105 (b) Maximum current possible in bulb = = 0.5 A
100 i R
V 2 100 × 100 V
Resistance of each bulb = = = 200 Ω
P 50 E
E 4 Current sensitivity
∴ Current, i = = = 1A 116 (b) Voltage sensitivity =
r + R / 3 1+ 3 Resistance of galvanometer G
i
V = R = E − ir = 4 − 11
( ) = 3V Current sensitivity 10
3 G= = = 5Ω
Voltage sensitivity 2
6×2 7
112 (c) Resistance, Rnet = 2 + = Ω 150
6+ 2 2 Full scale deflection current, ig = = 15 mA
2Ω 3Ω 10
i Voltage to be measured,V = 150 × 1= 150 V
V 150
10 V 2Ω 3Ω Hence, R = − G = − 5 = 9995 Ω
ig 15 × 10 −3
V2
117 (b) We have, × 16 = H (Q H = P × t )
10 20 R
∴ i= = A
(7 / 2) 7 V2 V2 V2
×t = H ⇒ × 16 = ×t
According to current division rule, 0.9 R R 0.9R
 2  1 5 ∴Time, t = 16 × 0.9 = 14.4 min
i3 Ω =   i = ⋅i = A
 2 + 6 4 7 118 (c) Topmost and bottommost figures are short-circuited.
E + E2 E1 Simplified circuit is shown below
113 (d) Current, i1 = 1 and i2 =
r1 + r2 + R R + r1 R
Q i2 > i1
E1 E + E2
∴ > 1 or E1 r2 > E 2 (R + r1) R R B ⇒A
R 1/2R R B
R + r1 r1 + r2 + R A
R
114 (c) Both B and D are symmetrically located with respect to
points O. Hence, the figure can be folded as shown in figure. R 5R
Req = R + R + =
C 2 2
119 (b) Due to balanced Wheatstone bridge, resistance between A
1/2Ω and B can be removed.
1Ω A,C,F
2W 2W
1/2 Ω
B, D O
D 2W G
2W 2W
1Ω
1/2Ω
B,E,H
10 V
A
The given circuit forms Wheatstone bridge with DO or BO 2W
ineffective. The current between D and E,
1 1 10 10
∴ RS = 1 + + = 2 Ω IDE = = = 2.5 A
2 2 RDE + RHG 2 + 2
2×1 2
Resistance across AO = = Ω 120 (b) Resistance between upper branch and lower branch in
2+1 3
parallel part is same, so equal amount of current flows
115 (c) By finding potential difference across any resistance, we through them.
can find current through each resistance directly. Let main current is i.
10 V 4V 8V 6 V i/2 1Ω A 3Ω
3Ω
C
3Ω 1Ω
i
10 Ω 8Ω 4Ω 2Ω A i/2 B
10 V
i
0.8 A 0.25 A 0.5 A 3A
V
∴ i=
∴ i = 3 + 0.25 − 0.5 − 0.8 = 1.95 A Req
Equivalent resistance of circuit, Applying KVL in loop (1) and (2), we get
10 8i3 = 16
Req = 3 + 2 = 5 Ω ⇒ i = = 2A
5 ⇒ i3 = 2A …(i)
So, current in each branch = 1A and 4(i1 − i3 ) = 16 − 8 = 8
Now, VC − VA = 1 × 1 = 1V …(i) ⇒ i1 = 2 + i3 = 4 A [using Eq. (i)]
and VC − VB = 1 × 3 = 3 V …(ii) The current in a circuit is distributed depending on the value
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have of resistance as shown below.
VA − VB = 3 − 1 = 2 V 2 W 1A 4 W 2A 2A 3W
121 (d) When K1 is closed, R1 is short-circuited. 1A 4A

2W
E E
When K2 is open, I0 = = ...(i) 8W 1W
r + R2 r + 100 1A
— 1A
— 16 V
2 2
1 E  8W 8W
When K2 is closed, I0 = ...(ii)
2 r + 50 
From these two equations, we get r = 0 8V
I E 1
When K1 is open and K2 is closed, 0 = ...(iii) ∴ i2 = A
2 2(R1 + 50 ) 2
From Eqs. (i) and (iii), we have i1 4
⇒ = =8
R1 = 50 Ω i2 (1/ 2)
122 (b) In the circuit, we can see that 20 Ω, 100 Ω and 25 Ω are
in parallel. (B) Medical entrance special format
Net resistance of circuit = 4 + 6 +
1
= 20 Ω questions
1 1 1
+ +
20 100 25 l Assertion and reason
∴ V = iR = 4 × 20 = 80 V 1 (d) R1 and R2 are resistances per unit length.
123 (c) Let current through XY is i3. Applying Kirchhoff’s law to 1
2
loops (1) and (2),
1W X 2W
i1 (i1 – i3)
1 i3 2
(i2 + i3)
i2 3W Y 4W V1 = iR
1 1
i
and V2 = i2R2
 1
50 V R2 > R1  as R ∝ 
 A
i1 + 0 × i3 − 3i2 = 0
As, i1 = i2
∴ i1 = 3i2 …(i)
Hence, V2 > V1
and − 2(i1 − i3 ) + 4 (i2 + i3 ) = 0
3 (b) The resistance of milliammeter becomes high because of
So, 2i1 − 4i2 = 6i3 …(ii) increased number of turns of coil, so the torque produced in
Also, 50 = i1 + 2 (i1 − i3 ) the coil is not decreased due to low value of current.
∴ 3i1 − 2i3 = 50 …(iii) Milliammeter generally do not have shunt because the main
From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get current is already very low. Even if there is shunt, its value is
kept high so that current diversion through it is least in case
i3 = 2 A of milliammeter.
124 (b) The simplified circuit can be drawn as, 4 (d) In both cases potential difference across R is E.
i3 (i1 – i3)
E2
∴ P =
16 V R
8Ω 2 4Ω i.e., power remains same.
1 i1
In second case, net resistance will decrease. Therefore, main
current will increase.
8V
l 1 In this case, equivalent resistance of the network between

5 (a) R =ρ or R ∝
A A points A and B is independent of the value of G, as no current
Area of cross-section of wire A is less. Hence, its resistance is flows through it.
more. E1 / r1 + E 2 / r2
4 (c) E eq =
Also, H ∝ R, so more heat is generated in wire A. 1/ r1 + 1/ r2
l Statement based questions E1r2 + E 2r1 r + r (E / E ) 
= = E1  2 1 2 1 
1 (a) In parallel circuit, voltage remains same, so r1 + r2  r1 + r2 
VNP = 20 × 1 = 20 V Therefore, E eq can be greater than, less than or equal to E1
20 depending upon the condition whether
∴ INP = = 2A E 2 > E1 , E 2 = E1 or E 2 < E1
10
Current through R, 5 (b) C D
IR = 0.5 + 2 + 1= 3.5 A
VR = 69 − 20 = 49 V A E F B
49 V1 V1 V3 V3 V1 V1 V2 V2 V3 V3 V2 V2
∴ R= = 14 Ω
3.5
Also, VR1 = 20 = 0.5 × R1
⇒ R1 = 40 Ω R/2 C,D R/2
2 (d) When two non-ideal batteries of emfs E1 and E 2 are V1 V3 V3 V2
connected as given below.
A E F B
E1 r1 E2 r2
V1 R V2
R
∴ RAB =
2
V0 V
⇒ ICD = , IEF = 0
R R R
Then, equivalent emf, E = E1 + E 2 l Match the columns
∴Hence, |E | > |E1| and |E | > |E 2|
1 (a) In parallel connections, net resistance will decrease.
Equivalent internal resistance, req = r1 + r2 Therefore, main current i1 will increase.
Again, when two non-ideal batteries of emfs E1 and E 2 are VAB = VCD = E − ir1
connected as given below. VAB
With increase in i1, VAB orVCD will decrease. Further, i2 = .
E1 r
1 E 2 r2 R
VAB is decreasing. Therefore, i2 will also decrease.
2 (c) The simple circuit is shown in below figure
V1 V2 V3
R 8Ω 3Ω 2Ω
Then, equivalent emf, E ′ = E1 − E 2 (Q E1 > E 2)

Hence, |E′ | may be greater than or equal to or less than the
V
individual value of E1 or E 2.
As, 3 Ω and 6 Ω are in parallel connection.
Equivalent internal resistance, r = r1 + r2
Hence, potential difference across 6 Ω is also 20 V.
Hence, each of statement I and II is wrong.
V 20 20 60
(P + Q )(R + S ) And, for 8 Ω, 1 = + = = 10
3 (d) Reff = 8 3 6 6
(P + Q + R + S ) V = 80 V
(R + R )(2R + 2R ) Similarly, for 12 Ω and 4 Ω,
=
(R + R + 2R + 2R ) V1 V2
=
The equivalent resistance of the network between points A 8 3
and B, 80 V2
⇒ =
4 8 3
Reff = R
3 ⇒ V2 = 30 V
6 (b) Given, R1 = R2, l1 = l2

l R l A
1 (a) Given, drift velocity, v d = 7. 5 × 10 −4 m/s Since, resistance, R = ρ ⋅ ⇒ 1 = 1⋅ 2
A R2 l2 A1
Electric field, E = 3 × 10 −10 Vm −1
R1 l1 A2
Mobility, µ = ? ⇒ = ⋅
R1 l1 A1
v d 7. 5 × 10 −4
As, µ= = A2
E 3 × 10 −10 ⇒ 1=
A1
= 2.5 × 10 6 m2V −1s −1 A1
or =1
2 (c) According to the carbon colour code for resistors, A2
Code of yellow = 4
Code of violet = 7 7 (b) Applying KVL rule in loop BCDEB,
Code of brown, i.e. multiplier = 101 R2i2 + E 2 − E 3 − i3 R1 = 0
Code of gold, i.e. tolerance = ± 5% 8 (b) Equivalent resistance between points A and B is
Hence, resistance of resistor = 47 × 101Ω , 5% RAB = [(4 + 8) || 6] + 4 + 8 = [12 || 6] + 12
 12 × 6 
= 470 Ω , 5% =  + 12 = [4] + 12 = 16 Ω
12 + 6 
3 (a) According to the question, the metre bridge is shown
below, 9 (a) Case I When all bulbs are glowing, then the circuit can be
R 10 Ω realised as shown in the figure below.
A B
R R
G
R R
x1 x2
100 cm
R R
x1 3
Given, =
x2 2
At balance condition in metre bridge, E
R x
= 1 ∴The equivalent resistance of this circuit is
10 x 2
Req = RA + RB
x1 3
⇒ R= × 10 = × 10 = 15 Ω As, section A has three parallel resistance, so equivalent
x2 2 resistance,
Now, length of given wire of resistance 15 Ω is 1.5 m. R
RA =
Therefore, length of 1Ω resistance wire is 3
1. 5 1 R
= = = 0.1 or 1 × 10 −1 m Similarly, for section B, equivalent resistance, RB =
15 10 3
4 (b) Resistivity of copper (a metal) as a function of temperature R R 2R
∴ Req = + = … (i)
increases with the increase in temperature as shown below, 3 3 3
ρ Thus, power consumed in this circuit,
V 2 E 2 3E 2
P1 = = = [using Eq. (i)] …(ii)
R Req 2R
Case II When two from section A and one from section B
glow, the circuit can be realised as shown in the figure below.
O T (K)
A B
For copper at 0K, value of resistivity is 1.7 × 10 −8 Ω-m. R
R
Hence, correct option is (b). R
5 (b) Applying KVL in the loop, we get

4I + I ⋅ 1 − 4 + I ⋅ 1 − 2 = 0
⇒ 6I = 6 ⇒ I = 1A
E
∴ Equivalent resistance of section A, 13 (d) The given circuit diagram can be drawn as shown below
R
RA = I1 20 Ω B 30Ω
2 A E
and of section B, V
RB = R 30 Ω 20 Ω
D F
Thus, equivalent resistance of the entire circuit becomes I I2 C
R 3R
Req = RA + RB = + R = … (iii)
2 2
∴Power consumed by this circuit, 2V
2 2 2 The equivalent resistance of circuit is given by
V E 2E
P2 = = = [using Eq. (iii)]… (iv)
R Req 3R 1 1 1
= +
Req RAE RDF
So, ratio of power in two cases is obtained from Eqs. (ii)
P1 3E 2 3R 9 1 1
and (iv), = × = or 9 : 4 = +
P2 2R 2E 2 4 (20 + 30 ) (30 + 20 )
1 1 2
10 (c) Among given devices fuse is used in electric circuit as a = + =
protection device. 50 50 50
It helps in preventing excessive amount of current to flow in ⇒ Req = 25 Ω
the circuit or from short circuiting. V 2
The current in circuit, I = = A
It has low melting point and low resistivity, so when excess R 25
amount of current flows in the circuit, then due to excessive As the resistance of two branches is same, i.e. 50 Ω.
amount of heat, it melts and breaks the circuit. So, the current I1 = I2
11 (b) For an ideal voltmeter, the resistance is infinite and for an ⇒ I = I1 + I2
ideal ammeter, the resistance is zero. 2
10 Ω
⇒ = 2I1
i1 25
1
⇒ I2 = I1 = A
V1
25
A1
∴The voltage across AB,
1
V1 = I1R1 = × 20 V
25
10 V Circuit 1
and voltage across CD,
So, the current in circuit 1 is 1
V2 = I2R2 = × 30 V
10 25
R × i = V or 10 i1 = 10 ⇒ i1 = = 1A
10 ∴Voltmeter reading
∴ V1 = i1 × R = 1 × 10 = 10 V 30 20 10
= V2 − V1 = − = = 0.4 V
Similarly, for circuit 2, the addition of 10 Ω to voltmeter does 25 25 25
not affect the current and hence R 1
10 Ω i2
14 (a) Given, for a wire, =
l 2
10 Ω Length of wire, l = 5 cm = 5 × 10 −2 m
V2 A2 l
∴ R= = 2 .5 × 10 −2 Ω
2
Potential difference,V = 1V or IR = 1
10 V Circuit 2
1 1 100
10 I= = = = 40 A
10 i2 = 10 ⇒ i2 = = 1A R 2 .5 × 10 −2 2 .5
10
15 (c) Given, current, I = 10 A
V2 = i2R = 1 × 10 = 10 V
∴ V1 = V2 and i1 = i2 Area of cross-section, A = 4 × 10 −6 m 2
12 (d) The balance condition still remains the same, if the jockey Density of conductors, ρ = 2 .7 g/cc = 2 .7 × 10 3 kg/m 3
points the same point P given in the initial condition, for
Molecular weight of aluminium, Mw = 27g = 27 × 10 −3 kg
which there is no deflection in the galvanometer or no
current will be drawn from the cell. Thus, the bridge will If n be the total number of electrons in the conductor per unit
work as usual and balance condition is same, P / Q = l1 / l2. volume, then
Total number of electrons So, current in 8 Ω resistor,

n=
Volume of conductor V ( ) V 24 − 0
I= = = 3A
Number of atoms per mole × Number of moles R 8
=
V 19 (a) Given, resistivity of copper, ρ = 1.72 × 10 −8 Ω-m
Avogadro number  M 
= ×  Electrons density, n = 8.5 × 10 28 / m3
V  Mw 
1 1
∴ Mobility (µ ) = =
23 ρ 2 .7 × 10 3 ρ ne 1.72 × 10 −8 × 8.5 × 10 28 × 1.6 × 10 −19
= 6 × 10 × = 6 × 10 23 ×
Mw 27 × 10 −3
~ 4.25 × 10 −3 m 2/C Ω
−
28
∴ n = 6 × 10
20 (a) Power rating of heater, P = 1000 W
We know that, drift velocity,
Voltage rating of heater,V = 100 V
I 10
vd = =
neA 6 × 10 28 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 4 × 10 −6
V″ Heater
= 2 .6 × 10 −4 m/s + – + V′ –
10Ω
16 (b) The situation is shown in the circuit diagram.
R
R1 R2
V1 V2 100 V
∴Resistance of heater,
I Vi V 2 (100 )2
R1 = = = 10 Ω
Vi P 1000
Current flowing through the circuit, I = According to question, power dissipated in heater,
R1 + R2
P′ = 62 . 5 W
Voltage across R2, V2 = IR2
VR V R + R2 ∴Voltage V′
( ) across heater can be calculated as
V2 = i 2 ⇒ i = 1 ( ′ )2
V
R1 + R2 V2 R2 P′ =
R1
17 (d) If R1 be the equivalent resistance of parallel resistors
⇒ ( ′ )2 = P ′ × R1 = 62 . 5 × 10
V
8 Ω, 8 Ω and 4 Ω, then
1 1 1 1 4 ⇒ V′ = 25 V (across heater)
= + + =
R1 8 8 4 8 ∴ Voltage across 10 Ω resistor,
⇒ R1 = 2 Ω V ′′ = 100 − 25 = 75V
∴Total resistance of upper branch, Current in 10 Ω resistor
R2 = R1 + 4 = 2 + 4 = 6 Ω V ′′ 75
= = = 7.5 A
10 10
Now, circuit can be redrawn as
Current in heater resistor
I1 6W
V ′ 25
= = = 2. 5 A
10 10
12A
So, current in R, I = 7.5 − 2.5 = 5A
12 W Now,V = IR
25
I2 ⇒ R =V / I = =5Ω
5
By current division rule, current through 12 Ω resistor, 21 (b) Given, R = (47 ± 4.7) kΩ
12 × 6 1
I2 = = 12 × = 4A = 47 × 10 3 ± 10% Ω
12 + 6 3
∴Voltage across 12 Ω resistor, As per the colour code for carbon resistors, the colour
assigned to numbers, 4-Yellow, 7-Violet, 3-Orange.
V = I2R = 4 × 12 = 48 V
For ±10% accuracy, the colour is silver. Hence, the bands of
18 (b) As the other end of 8 Ω resistor is grounded, which is at colours on carbon resistor are in sequence Yellow, Violet,
zero potential, the potential difference across 8 Ω resistor Orange and Silver.
= 24 − 0 = 24 V
22 (c) When n equal resistors of resistances R are connected in So, circuit becomes as shown below
series, then the current drawn is given as B
E 5W 10 W
I=
nR + r A D
where, nR = equivalent resistance of n resistors in series and 10 W 20 W

r = internal resistance of battery. i
C
Given, r =R
E E 5V
⇒ I= = …(i)
nR + R R (n + 1) Now, in the above circuit, RABD = 5 + 10 = 15 Ω
Similarly, when n equal resistors are connected in parallel, RACD = 10 + 20 = 30 Ω
then the current drawn is given as Resistance RABD and RACD are in parallel, so
E 15 × 30 450
I′ = Rnet = = = 10 Ω
R 30 + 15 45
+R
n E 5
R ∴ i= = = 0.5 A
where, = equivalent resistance of n resistors in parallel. Rnet 10
n
25 (c) During charging, E = V − ir (due to reversed current). In
Given, I′ = 10 I
case of charging, emf of a cell is less than its terminal voltage
E nE
⇒ 10I = = …(ii) while in case of discharging emf is greater than terminal
+ R (n + 1)R
R voltage.
n Therefore, Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect.
Substituting the value of I from Eq. (i) in Eq. (ii), we get
26 (b) Figure is equivalent to the one shown below. It is a
 E  nE Wheatstone’s bridge in which
10   =
 R (n + 1) R (n + 1) C
⇒ n = 10
6W
8W
Q
P
3W
8W
23 (c) If n identical cells are connected in series, then equivalent
emf of the combination, P 10W 10W Q
E eq = nE W
S
4W
20
Equivalent internal resistance, R
req = nr
5W
4W
E eq D
nE
∴ Current, I = = 6×3
req nr P = = 2Ω
6+ 3
E
or I= = constant 8 × 8 64
r Q= = = 4Ω
8 + 8 16
Thus, current (I ) is independent of the number of cells (n )
4 × 4 16
present in the circuit. R= = = 2Ω
4+ 4 8
Therefore, the graph showing the relationship between I and
20 × 5
n would be as shown below and S = = 4Ω
20 + 5
P 2 R
I We find that, = =
Q 4 S
i.e., the bridge is balanced and resistance of arm CD is
ineffective. Effective resistance between P and Q,
(P + Q ) (R + S ) (2 + 4) (2 + 4) 6 × 6
RPQ = = = = 3Ω
O n P +Q +R+S 2+ 4+ 2+ 4 12
24 (a) Given circuit satisfies the Wheatstone bridge condition, so 27 (a) Switching results in high decay/growth rate of current
no current flows in the branch BC and it behaves like an open which results in a high current when bulb is turned ON or
circuit. OFF (due to back emf). So, a bulb is most likely to get fused
when it is just turned ON or OFF.
28 (c) Q Current, I = nAev d 31 (c) In the given circuit, net resistance between P and Q points
1 is RPQ and net resistance between Q and R points is RQR , then
or vd ∝ 10 × 8 80 40
A RPQ = = = Ω
If diameter of wire is d /4, then area will be A / 16, so new 10 + 8 18 9
drift velocity = 16v d . 10 × 18 × 25 4500 225
RQR = = = Ω
10 × 18 + 18 × 25 + 25 × 10 880 44
29 (c) Volume of material remains same in stretching.
As volume remains same, Al11 = A2l2 So, circuit will be
40 225 Ω
Given, l2 = nl1 Ω
9 Q 44
P R
∴ New area, A2 = Al11/l2 = A1/n
Resistance of wire after stretching,
l2 nl  l    l1  
R2 = ρ = ρ 1 = ρ 1  n 2 = n 2R Q R = ρ A  
A2 A1 / n  A1  1 
+ –
10 W C 10 W 10 W G 10 V
30 (b) E
A In the series circuit, voltages will be divide in the ratio of
their resistance.
40 W 40 W 20 W
RPQ VPQ
∴ =
RQR VQR
B F
10 W D 10 W 10 W H
 40 
  V
In the circuit, the branch EGHF have three resistances of 10  9 PQ 1760 VPQ
∴ = or =
Ω, 20 Ω and 10 Ω respectively, which are connected in series  225 VQR 2025 VQR
 
combination.  44 
So, their equivalent resistance is given by 1760 VPQ
⇒ =
R1 = 10 + 20 + 10 = 40 Ω 1760 + 2025 VPQ + VQR
This R1 resistance is in parallel with 40 Ω resistance which is
1760 VPQ
connected in the branch EF. So, their equivalent resistance, ⇒ =
3785 10
40 × 40
R2 = = 20 Ω ⇒ VPQ = 4.65 V
40 + 40
Now, circuit becomes 32 (b) Q 60 Ω and 30 Ω resistors are connected in parallel.
10 W C 10 W E So, their net resistance
A 30 × 60 1800
Rnet = = = 20 Ω
40 W 20 W 30 + 60 90
2 2
∴ i= = = 0.1 A
B F Rnet 20
10 W D 10 W
Now, in the branch CEFD 10 Ω, 20 Ω and 10 Ω resistance 33 (b) As each arc containing n lamps, hence resistance of each
are connected in series combination and their equivalent arc = nr, number of arcs = N /n
resistance is given by Equivalent resistance S is given by
R3 = 10 + 20 + 10 = 40 Ω 1 1 N  1
=Σ =  
This R3 is in parallel with 40 Ω resistance which is in branch S nr n  nr 
40 × 40 n 2r
CD. Their equivalent resistance, R4 = = 20 Ω S=
40 + 40 N
Now, circuit becomes n 2r
10 Ω ∴ Total resistance = R + S = R +
C N
A
If E is the emf of the machine, current entering the arcs is
20 Ω E / (R + S ) and in each arc is nE / (R + S )N .
Hence, current passing through each lamp,
B −1
10 Ω D nE E R nr 
I= = +
2
N (R + n r / N ) N  n N 
The net resistance between A and B,
Rnet = 10 + 20 + 10 = 40 Ω Now, heat produced per second in the lamps is H = NrI 2.
Since, light emitted is proportional to H 2, therefore light Hence, largest amount of heat will be generated in case of
produced is maximum when H 2 and hence H is maximum or four parts connected in parallel.
R nr  37 (d) Here, 2 Ω and 2 Ω are in parallel.
+ is minimum.
 n N 
1/ 2 2
1 1 1
R nr  R 
1/ 2
 nr    Rr 
1/ 2 ∴ = +
Hence, we can write, + =   −    + 2   R 2 2
n N  n  N

N
2×2
⇒ R= = 1Ω
R nr 2+ 2
This is minimum, when − =0
n N Now, resistance 1 Ω, 2 Ω, 4 Ω and 1Ω are in series.
or very small or n is closely equal to (NR /r )1/ 2. ∴ Rnet = 1 + 2 + 4 + 1= 8 Ω
34 (a) It is clear that the two cells oppose each other, hence the V 4
Hence, current, I = = = 0.5 A
effective emf in closed circuit is 18 − 12 = 6V and net R 8
resistance is 1 + 2 = 3 Ω (because in the closed circuit the 38 (c) According to question, emf of the cell is directly
internal resistance of two cells are in series). proportional to the balancing length, i.e., E ∝ l …(i)
The current in circuit will be in direction of arrow shown in Now, in the first case, cells are connected in series to support
figure one another, i.e. net emf = E1 + E 2
effective emf From Eq (i), E1 + E 2 = 50 cm (given) …(ii)
I= = 6/ 3 = 2A
total resistance Again cells are connected in series but in opposite direction,
The potential difference across V will be same as the terminal i.e. net emf = E1 − E 2
voltage of either cell. From Eq. (i), E1 − E 2 = 10 cm (given) …(iii)
From Eqs. (ii) and (iii),
V
E1 + E 2 50
=
I E1 − E 2 10
18V 2Ω
E1 5 + 1 6 3
⇒ = = =
E2 5 − 1 4 2
12V 1Ω
39 (d) Given, charge, Q = at − bt 2
dQ
Q We know that current, I = …(i)
Since, current is drawn from the cell of 18V, hence dt
V1 = E1 − Ir1 = 18 − (2 × 2) So, Eq. (i) can be written as
= 18 − 4 = 14V d
I = (at − bt 2 )
dt
35 (a) When a voltmeter is connected across the two terminals of
a cell, it draws a small current from the cell, so it measures ⇒ I = a − 2bt …(ii)
terminal potential difference between the two terminals of For maximum value of t,
the cell, which is always less than the emf of the cell. On the dQ
=0
other hand, when a potentiometer is used for the dt
measurement of emf of cell, it does not draw any current d
from the cell. Hence, it accurately measures the emf of cell. or (at − bt 2 ) = 0
dt
Thus, a potentiometer is preferred over a voltmeter.
⇒ a − 2bt = 0
36 (c) Let R be the resistance of the wire, then a
∴ t= …(iii)
V 2t 2b
(i) The heat generated is H1 = .
R Q The total heat produced (H ) can be given as
t a / 2b
(ii) Resistance of each part will be R / 2. When they are H = ∫ I 2R dt = ∫ (a − 2bt )2 R dt
connected in parallel, the resistance will be R /4. 0 0
a / 2b
Hence, H 2 = 4V 2t /R. =∫ (a 2 + 4b 2t 2 − 4abt ) Rdt
0
(iii) In case of four wires connected in parallel, the resistance a / 2b
will be R / 8.  t 3 4abt 2 
H = a 2t + 4b 2 − R
8V 2t  3 2  0
∴ H3 =
R Solving above equation, we get
2 2
V t 2V ⋅ t a 3R
(iv) H 4 = = ⇒ H=
R /2 R 6b
2W + – 1W It is clear from Eq. (i), when area increases the current

40 (d) V 2 A VB
A
density decreases so the number of flow of electrons will be
3V same and thus the current will be constant.
Applying KVL, 45 (c) When voltmeter is connected across A and B, the
VA + ΣV = VB + 2 × 2 + 2 × 1 equivalent resistance of the circuit is
VA − VB − 3 = 4 + 2;VA − VB = 9 V 150 Ω
41 (c) If a rated voltage and power are given, then V
V2 A C
Prated = rated 100 Ω B 100 Ω
R
∴ Resistance of bulb, 50 V
100 × 100
Rb = = 20 Ω 150 × 100 15000
500 Req = 100 + = 100 + = 100 + 60 = 160 Ω
100 + 150 250
P
And current in the bulb, i = 50 5
V ∴ Current, i = = A
160 16
500
⇒ i= = 5A Therefore, potential drop across B and C is
100
5 500
Q Resistance R is connected in series, VBC = i RBC = × 100 = = 31.25 V −
~ 31V
16 16
E 230
∴ Current, i = =
R net R + Rb 46 (a) Figure can be redrawn as
230 M
⇒ R + 20 = = 46
5 10 Ω 10 Ω
∴ R = 26 Ω 10 Ω
42 (a) Given, l = 4 m a c
10 Ω b 10 Ω
R = potentiometer wire resistance = 8 Ω
dV
Potential gradient = = 1mVcm −1
dl
6V
So, for 400 cm, ∆V = 400 × 1 × 10 −3 = 0.4 V
Let a resistor RS is connected in series, so as 10 10
As, = (from figure)
V 10 10
∆V = ×R
R + RS So, circuit is said to be Wheatstone bridge in balanced
2 condition and hence current through arm Mb is zero, i.e. no
⇒ 0.4 = ×8 current flows.
8 + RS
Now, the equivalent resistance of the circuit is given by
16
⇒ 8 + RS = = 40 ⇒ RS = 32 Ω 1 1 1 2
0.4 = + = ⇒ Req = 10 Ω
Req 20 20 20
43 (a) The equivalent resistance between Q and S is given by
∴ Current supplied by the battery,
1.5 R V 6
R B i= = = 0.6 A
P Q S R 10
A
C 47 (a) Suppose, actual current through the ammeter is I.
3R Now, we can write
V Ir = kl1 ⇒ I × (1) = k (75) …(i)
where, k is a constant.
Similarly, 1.02 = k (50 ) …(ii)
1 1 1 2+1
= + = ⇒ R′ = R From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
R′ 1.5R 3R 3R
I 75 3
Now, VPQ = VA = IR = =
1.02 50 2
Also, VQS = VB = VC = IR
3
Hence, VA = VB = VC ⇒ I = (1.02) = 3 (0.51) = 1.53 A
2
44 (b) As the cross-sectional area of the conductor is non-uniform,
so current density will be different. Thus, error in ammeter reading is
As, I = JA …(i) ∆I = (1.53 − 1.5) A = 0.03 A
48 (b) The current in case of voltmeter of range 10 V and 55 (a) Kirchhoff’s first law states that, algebraic sum of currents
resistance 50 Ω is meeting at a point in a circuit is zero. It is based on
10 conservation of charge.
I= A …(i)
50 Kirchhoff’s second law states that, the algebraic sum of
Let X be the resistance connected in order to make a potential differences around a closed loop is zero. It is based
voltmeter with range 15 V having current, on the law of conservation of energy.
15 56 (b) Using the formula, m = ZI, where m = mass of silver
I= A …(ii)
X
deposited = 0.05% of 750 g = 0.375 g = 3.75 × 10 −4 kg
Equating Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
15 10 (15) × (50 ) Current passing through it, I = 0.8 A
= = = 75 Ω Z = ECE of silver = 11.8 × 10 −7 kgC −1
X 50 (10 )
Then, R = 75 − 50 = 25 Ω must be connected in series, ∴The time needed for depositing silver is given by
becauseV ∝ R when current is constant. m 3.75 × 10 −4
t= = = 397 s = 6 min 37 s
50 (e) Current remains constant throughout the metallic ZI 11.8 × 10 −7 × 0.8
I 57 (c) The shunt resistance required is given by
conductor. Current density J = is not constant because
A  I   100  100
cross-sectional area is a variable parameter. Drift velocity S =  DC  RDC =   × 0.1 = × 0.1
 I − IDC   500 − 100  400
I 1
vd = is not constant. Since, v d ∝ .
neA A ∴ S = 0.025 Ω
If this value of shunt resistance is connected in parallel with
51 (b) Given,
the DC ammeter, then the range will be extended to 0-500 A.
Colour coding of resistance = Red, Red, Green, Silver
First band value = 2 58 (a) The circuit diagram can be redrawn as the potential
Second band value = 2 between A and B is
Third band value = 10 5 A
D E
Fourth band value = ± 10%
- 2V
Now, R = 22 × 10 5 ± 10% Ω 2Ω 2Ω
+
R = 2200 ± 10% kΩ
I + 2Ω +
52 (c) Slope = 2V 2V
V - −
Q V = IR I
C F
I 1 I′ B I−I′
∴ =
V R
Hence, slope is reciprocal of resistance. For the loop ABCDA, +2 − 2I′ + 2 − 2I = 0
53 (a) The resistance of two wires are 2 = I + I′ …(i)
l l For the loop ABFEA ,
R1 = ρ1 and R2 = ρ 2
A A 2 − 2I + 2 − 2(I − I′ ) = 0
Now, equivalent resistance of series connection of wire 4 − 4I + 2I′ = 0
l l l 2 = 2I − I′ …(ii)
Req = R1 + R2 = ρ1 + ρ 2 = (ρ1 + ρ 2 )
A A A From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
2l 4 = 3I ⇒ I = 4/ 3 = 1.33 A
The equivalent resistance Req can be given by Req = ρ eq
A l l2
2l l 59 (c) As we know that, R1 = ρ =ρ
⇒ ρ eq = (ρ1 + ρ 2 ) a V
A A where, l = length of wire,
ρ + ρ2 a = area of cross-section of the wire
Hence, ρ eq = 1
2 and V = volume of the wire.
54 (a) Total resistance = 50 + 3950 = 4000 Ω As, R1 ∝ l 2
2 2
For this circuit, deflection of resistance R be R1  l1   1
⇒ =  = 
4000 30 4000 R2  l2   2
⇒ = ⇒ R= = 2000 Ω
R 15 2 ⇒ R2 : R1 = 4 : 1
Then, resistance in series should be = 2000 − 50 = 1950 Ω
60 (c) The combination of resistors can be redrawn as 2 = 1 + [0.005 (T2 − 100 )]

a 0.005 (T2 − 100 ) = 1
1
T2 − 100 =
0.005
R R R 1000
⇒ T2 − 100 =
5
T2 − 100 = 200
b ⇒ T2 = 200 + 100 = 300 ° C
Therefore, equivalent resistance is given by 66 (d) Consider the ring as two parts. As two resistances are
1 1 1 1 R joined in parallel between two points A and B, then two
= + + ⇒ Req =
Req R R R 3 resistances would be
R R
61 (c) From the circuit (potentiometer), R1 = ⋅rθ = θ
2πr 2π
R R
i E and R2 = r (2π − θ ) = (2π − θ )
R
2πr 2π
Now, equivalent or effective resistance between A and B,
B R × R2
A C Req = 1
G
R1 + R2
E1 R R  R 2θ (2π − θ ) 
θ× (2π − θ )  
VCB = E (if no current is drawn from the battery) ⇒ Req = 2π 2π = 4π 2 
R  2πR 
 E1  [θ + 2π − θ]
⇒ 2π  2π 
R + R  RCB = E …(i)
 AB 
R 2θ (2π − θ ) 2π Rθ (2π − θ )
Given, E1 = 2 V and RAB = 10 Ω = × =
4π 2 2πR 4π 2
40
∴ RCB = × 10 = 4 Ω and E = 10 × 10 −3 V 67 (b) Case I For balanced point of meter bridge,
100
5 l1
On solving Eq. (i), we get R = 790 Ω = …(i)
R 100 − l1
62 (d) We know that, potential drop across a resistance,
Case II When R is shunted with equal resistance, i.e. R
V = I R ⇒ V = constant
1 1 1
1 = + ⇒ R′ = R /2
i.e. I∝ R′ R R
R
5 1.6 l1
1 1 1 1 1 1 ∴ = …(ii)
I1 : I2 : I3 = : : = : : = 6: 4: 3 R / 2 100 − 1.6 l1
R1 R2 R3 2 3 4
63 (a) Total internal resistance does not change  l1  1.6 l1
∴ R′ = 4r 2  = ⇒ l1 = 25 cm
 100 − l1 100 − 1.6 l1
Net emf, E ′ = E (n − 2m )
5 25
Here, n = total number of cells = 4 From Eq. (i), = ⇒ R = 15 Ω
R 75
m = wrong connection = 1
E ′ = E[4 − 2] , i.e. E ′ = 2E 68 (c) As, r = internal resistance,
 l − l1 rl
64 (a) Given, I = 3 A andV = 6 V and r = R1   ⇒ 1 = l − l1 …(i)
 l1  R1
We know that,V = IR
V 6  l − l2  rl
R= ⇒ R = =2Ω Also, r = R2   ⇒ 2 = l − l2 …(ii)
I 3  l2  R2
If the ammeter and voltmeter have resistance, then R < 2 Ω. Subtracting Eq. (i) from Eq. (ii), we get
65 (b) Given, R1 = 100 Ω l l 
l1 − l2 = r  2 − 1 
R2 = 200 Ω ⇒ T1 = 100 ° C  2
R R1
α = 0.005 per °C At, R1 = ∞, l1 = 3 m and at, R2 = 9.5 Ω, l2 = 2.85 m

We know that, new resistance of the bulb filament,  2.85 
⇒ (3 − 2.85) = r −0
R2 = R1 [1 + α (T2 − T1)]  9.5 
200 = 100 [1 + 0.005 (T2 − 100 )] ⇒ r = 0.5 Ω
2 Now, 6 Ω and 6 Ω are in series.

69 (a) As, current IG = I
1000 So, R′ = 6 + 6 = 12 Ω
Resistance of 1 1 1 1 1 2
∴ = + = + =
galvanometer R′′ R′ 12 12 12 12
I IG
G ⇒ R′′ = 6 Ω
Ir The required resistance of the circuit = 2 + 6 = 8 Ω.
So, the potential difference,
r VA −VB = iR = 0.5 × 8 = 4 V
 G 
Also, Ir =  I 74 (a) Total emf of the cell = 3E − E = 2E
G + r
E E E E
We know that, potential across G and shunt r are same.
∴ VG = Vr ⇒ IG (G ) = Ir r
2IG GI
⇒ = (r ) ⇒ 2(G + r ) = 1000 r
1000 G + r
Total internal resistance = 4r
G
⇒ G + r = 500 r ⇒ + 1 = 500 ∴Total resistance of the circuit = 4r + R
r
So, the current in the external circuit
1
⇒ G /r = 499 ⇒ r = G 2E  V
499 i= Q i = 
4r + R  R
70 (c) Corresponding to the colours of the first and second bands,
i.e. green and black, the figures are 5 and 0. 75 (b) As, resistances 1Ω, 2 Ω and 1Ω are in parallel.
Corresponding to the colour of third band, i.e. violet, the So, the required internal resistance,
multiplier is 10 7. Therefore, the value of the resistance is E1 = 1V
50 × 10 7 Ω. The gold colour of the fourth band indicates the
E2 = 2V
tolerance of ±5%.
So, the value of the resistor is written as E3 = 3V
7 6 P Q
50 × 10 Ω ± 5% = 500 × 10 Ω ± 5% = 500 ± 5% MΩ
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 + 1+ 2 2
R R = + + = + + = ⇒ r= Ω
× r r1 r2 r3 1 2 1 2 5
R 9
71 (c) The required resistance = 2 2 = = Ω
R R 4 4 The potential difference between points P and Q,
+
2 2 E1 E 2 E 3 1 2 3
+ + + +
r r2 r3
72 (c) Let the values of resistances be R1 and R2, respectively. E = 1 =1 2 1
1/r 5/ 2
When R1 and R2 resistances are in series, then
R1 + R2 = 6 (according to question) …(i) 2+ 2+ 6
2 10 / 2 10 2
When R1 and R2 resistances are parallel, then = = = × = 2V
R1 R2 4 5/ 2 5/ 2 5 2
= …(ii)
R1 + R2 3 76 (d) Given, R1 = 2 Ω, R2 = 6 Ω, E = 2 V, r = 0.5 Ω, I = ?
From Eq. (i), we get Q R1, R2 are in parallel combination.
R1 R2 4 1 1 1 1 1 3+ 1 6
= ⇒ R1 R2 = 4 × 2 ⇒ R1 R2 = 8 …(iii) So, = + = + = ⇒ R = = 1.5 Ω
6 3 R R1 R2 2 6 6 4
We know that, Then, the current in the circuit,
2
R1 − R2 = (R1 + R2 ) − 4RR
1 2 = 36 − 4 × 8
E 2 2
I= = = = 1A
⇒ R1 − R2 = 4 r + R 0.5 + 1.5 2.0
⇒ R1 − R2 = 2 …(iv) (as internal resistance, r is in series with other resistance)

drift velocity
From Eqs. (i) and (iv), we get 77 (b) As, mobility =
R1 = 4 Ω , R2 = 2 Ω electric field
vd metre 2 [L]2
73 (d) Given, 6 Ω , 6 Ω and 6 Ω are in parallel. ⇒µ = = =
E volt-second (joule/coulomb) -second
1 1 1 1 3
So, = + + = [L]2 [L2]
R 6 6 6 6 = 2 −2
= 2 −2 −1
= [M−1T 2A]
[kg-metre - second ]-second [ML T A ]
6
∴ R = =2Ω ampere-second
3
l 85 (d) As, kl1 = E − ri = E − r (0 ) = E

79 (b) Resistance of wire, R = ρ
A
⇒ kl1 = E …(i)
Given, R1 = 4 Ω, l1 = l, A1 = A
Potentiometer battery
l2 = 2l, A2 = A/ 2, ρ = constant
R1 l1/A1 l1 × A2
∴ = = l1
R2 l2 /A2 l2 × A1
4 l × A/ 2 4 1
⇒ = ⇒ = ⇒ R2 = 16 Ω
R2 2l × A R2 4 G I =0
r i=0 g
E
80 (a) Balanced condition for Wheatstone bridge,
P R
= …(i)
Q s l2
1 1 1 ss G Ig = 0
where, = + ⇒ s= 12 …(ii)
s s1 s2 s1 + s2
i1 E r
P R (s1 + s2 )
= i1 R
Q s1s2
and kl2 = E − ri1 = Ri1
81 (b) Force experienced by electron, F = qE E RE
⇒ i1 = ⇒ kl2 = …(ii)
where, E = electric field intensity. R+r R+r
∴2.4 × 10 −19 = 1.6 × 10 −19 E On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
⇒ E = 1.5 NC −1 l1 R + r r l 
= = 1 + ⇒ r = R  1 − 1
Moreover, E = potential gradient l2 R R  l2 
dV
E = We know that for internal resistance,
dl
l 
⇒ E × l =V r =  1 − 1
 l2 
⇒ V = 1.5 × 6 = 9 V
V 120 where, l1 = balancing length of potentiometer wire = 240 cm,
82 (b) Resistance, R = − G = − 10 = 12000 − 10 l2 = balancing length after shunting = 120 cm
ig 0.01
and R = shunting resistance = 2 Ω.
R = 11990 Ω Putting all the values, we get
To convert a galvanometer into a voltmeter, high resistance of
value 11990 Ω should be connected in parallel.  240 
Internal resistance, r =  − 1 × 2 = (2 − 1) × 2 = 2 Ω
 120 
83 (b) Given, first balancing length, l1 = 30 cm
86 (b) Let, Rx resistance be connected in series to convert
Second balancing length, galvanometer to voltmeter.
l2 = 40 cm ⇒ E1 = 1.25 V
G
E2 = ? Ig
Rg Rx
So, according to the principle of potentiometer,
V
E1 = Kl1 …(i)
and E 2 = Kl2 …(ii) According to the question, Rg = 100 Ω, Ig = 30 mA
E1 Kl1 1.25 30 (Current corresponding to full scale deflection)
Q = ⇒ = Now, we can write,V = Ig × Rg + IgRx = Ig (Rg + Rx ) …(i)
E 2 Kl2 E2 40
Given, V = 30 V
1.25 × 40
⇒ E2 = From Eq. (i), we get
30
5 30 = (30 × 10 −3) (100 + Rx )
⇒ E 2 = = 1.666 V −
~ 1.67 V
3 30
⇒ = 100 + Rx
84 (a) Potentiometer measures the potential difference more 30 × 10 −3
accurately than a voltmeter because while measuring emf ⇒ 10 3 = 100 + Rx ⇒ Rx = 1000 − 100 = 900 Ω
(electromotive force), it does not draw any current from the
source of known emf. Potentiometer has its own battery 87 (b) By Faraday’s law of electrolysis, m = Zit
which maintains constant potential drop across the Given, m1 = m gram, i1 = 4 A, i2 = 6 A, t1 = 120 s
potentiometer wire. t2 = 40 s, m 2 = ?
m1 it11 m 4 × 120 96 (d) We know that,

Q = ⇒ =
m 2 i2t2 m2 6 × 40 E 15 15
i= = = = 1A
m × 6 × 40 m r + Reff 0.5 + 14.5 15
⇒ m2 = =
4 × 120 2
97 (b) Given, temperature coefficient of carbon,
88 (d) As R ∝ l 2. When wire is stretched, α 1 = 4 × 10 −3/ ° C
∴ R′ = n 2R = 22 × 4 = 4 × 4 = 16 Ω Temperature coefficient of copper,
89 (b) As I =
E
or E = I (R + r ) α 2 = − 0.5 × 10 −3/ ° C
R+r Hence, R1α 1 = − R2 α 2
⇒ . = 0.2 (10 + r )
21 R2 −4 × 10 −3
21
. =
10 + r = × 10 R1 0.5 × 10 −3
2 R2 8
∴ r = 10.5 − 10 = 0.5 Ω ⇒ =
R1 1
90 (b) Effective resistance,
98 (*) Let the three conductors having resistances R1, R2 and R3
40 × 120 4800
Reff = = = 30 Ω respectively, and the current drawn by them are 1A, 2 A and
120 + 40 160
3 A respectively, when connected in turn across a battery.
7 7  E  ∴ V = R1 V = 2R2 andV = 3R3
∴ Current, I = = = 0.2 A Q I = 
(30 + 5) 35  R + r V V
So, R1 = V, R2 = and R3 =
2 3
91 (b) Current, I = qf
When the conductors are connected in series, across the same
Given, q = 1.6 × 10 −19 C and f = 1019 battery, then
∴ I = 1.6 A V = I [R1 + R2 + R3]
I  V V
92 (c) vd = ⇒ V =I V + +
nAe  2 3 
Given, I = 2 A, n = 5.86 × 10 28 m−3  6 + 3 + 2 6
⇒ 1= I or I = A
 6  11
A = πr 2 = π (0.1 × 10 −2 )2, e = 1. 6 × 10 −19 C
∴ Drift velocity, v d = 0.68 × 10 −4 ms −1 l12 l22 l32
99 (d) R ∝ l 2 / m ⇒ R1 : R2 : R3 = : :
m1 m 2 m 3
 l d 2  1.5(0.31)2
93 (a) As, R ∝ l / d 2 ⇒ R2 = R1 2 12  = × 4.2 = 25.2 Ω 25 9 1
 l1 d 2  (0.155)2 = : : = 125 : 15 : 1
1 3 5
94 (d) Suppose, m rows are connected in parallel and each row I × 2R 2I
100 (b) We have, I1 = =
contains n identical cells (each cell having E = 1.5 V and r = 1Ω) 3R 3
For maximum current in the external resistance R, the 2 4I 2
necessary condition ∴ H1 = I1 R = ×R …(i)
9
R=
nr I ×R I
Also, I2 = =
m 3R 3
n ×1 I2
1.5 = ∴ 2
H 2 = I2 (2R ) = × 2R …(ii)
m 9
1.5 m = n …(i) and H 3 = I 2 (1.5 R ) …(iii)
Total cells = 24 = n × m …(ii) From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
On solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 4I 2 I2
H1 : H 2 : H 3 = × R : × 2R : I 2 × 1.5R
m=4 9 9
n=6 4 2
= : : 1.5 = 4 : 2 : 13.5
Therefore, 6 cells in each row are connected in series and 9 9
4 such rows are connected in parallel. = 8 : 4 : 27
95 (d) R1 = R0 (1 + αt ) 101 (a) A milliammeter will have greater resistance than ammeter
because (1) number of turns in the coil in milliammeter is
1 = R0 (1 + 0.00125 × 27) …(i)
increased to compensate low value of current to create large
2 = R0 (1 + 0.00125 × t ) …(ii) deflection. (2) milliammeter does not have usually a shunt in
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get parallel because main current is very small. Ammeter usually
t = 854° C = 1127 K have a shunt in parallel which makes overall resistance low.
102 (c) We know that, the resistance of any wire, On solving, we get
ρL (R1 − R2 )r 2 = (R1 − R2 )RR
R= 1 2
A ⇒ r = R1 R2
In given case, L1 = L , L2 = 2L , ρ and A are constants.
R1 L1 R L R 1 111 (b) Applying Kirchhoff’s law, 500I + 100I = 12
Hence, = ⇒ 1= ⇒ 1=
R2 L2 R2 2L R2 2 12 × 10 −2
So, I= = 2 × 10 −2A
103 (c) Power when connected in series, 6
1 1 1 Hence, VB = 100 (2 × 10 −2 ) = 2 V
= +
P P1 P2 112 (a) The full scale deflection current,
Given, P1 = 60 W and P2 = 100 W 25 mV
ig = ampere
60 × 100 G
Hence, P =
60 + 100 where, G is the resistance of the meter.
6000 The value of shunt required for converting it into ammeter of
⇒ P = ⇒ P = 37.5 W igG
160 range 25 A is S = .
e Eτ e τ V i − ig
104 (b) We know that, drift velocity, v d = =
m m l 25 mV
⇒ S= = 0.001 Ω
Here, vd ∝v 25
Given, condition V1 = V and V2 = 2V V2
vd V 113 (c) Power, P =
Hence, = ⇒ v ′d = 2v d = 2v R
v d′ 2V ∆P 2 × ∆V
For small variation, × 100% = × 100%
105 (c) Using,V = IR P V
= 2 × 2.5 = 5%
100 × 10 −3 = I × 10
Therefore, power would decrease by 5%.
⇒ I = 0.01A
114 (a) 6Ω
E i1
Also, I= 6Ω
R + R′
i2 12 Ω
2
⇒ = 0.01 ⇒ R′ = 190 Ω
10 + R′
106 (d) Specific resistance of a material is the characteristic 10 V
property, it does not depends upon the dimensions of 6 × 12 6 × 12
material, hence it does not depend upon length. Resistance, R = = =4Ω
6 + 12 18
107 (b) 7 Ω and 3 Ω are in series, so total 10 Ω and 10 Ω are in Total resistance, Req = 6 + 4 = 10 Ω
parallel, so total resistance across AC = 5 Ω. Now, 5 Ω and 5 V 10
Ω are in series, so they make 10 Ω. Now, 10 Ω and 10 Ω are Current, i = = = 1A
R 10
in parallel, so R net = 5 Ω.
The current in 12 Ω resistor is
108 (a) Equivalent resistance in series = 6 + 9 = 15 Ω
 R1   6  1
V 120 i2 = i   = 1×   ⇒ i2 = A
Current flow in circuit, i = = = 8A  R1 + R2   6 + 12 3
R 15
The potential difference in 12 Ω resistor,
Voltage in 6 Ω resistor,V = iR = 8 × 6 = 48 V
1
Power consumed by 6 Ω resistor, V = i × 12 = × 12 = 4 V
3
V 2 48 × 48
P = = 115 (b) Given, A = 0.3 m2, n = 2 × 10 25 /m3
R 6
= 8 × 48 = 384 W q = 3t2 + 5t + 2
109 (a) Current through each arm DAC and DBC = 1A i=
dq
= 6 t + 5 = 17 A (at t = 2 s)
VD − VA = 2 and VD − VB = 3 dt
We have current, i = ne Av d
∴ VA − VB = 1V
i 17
110 (b) Heat = i 2Rt Drift velocity, v d = =
ne A 2 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 0.3
25
2 2
 E   E  17
∴   R1 =   R2 [Q t is the same] = = 1.77 × 10 −5 ms −1
 R1 + r   R2 + r  0.96 × 10 −6
116 (b) To convert a galvanometer into an ammeter, a resistance 123 (a) As the current in heating filament increases, it gets more
(shunt) is required to be connected in parallel to the heated. Hence, its temperature increases and resistance also
galvanometer. increases, due to which the current decreases.
Gig 50 × 100 × 10 −6 PP
By using, S = = ≈ 5 × 10 −4 Ω 124 (b) In series, P = 1 2
i − ig (10 − 100 × 10 −6 ) P1 + P2
Given, P1 = P2 = 60
117 (d) By using the relation,
60 × 60
E1 l1 + l2 (8 + 2) 5 where, E ′ + E ′′ = E1 ∴ Power, P = = 30 W
= = =   60 + 60
E 2 l1 − l2 (8 − 2) 3  and E ′− E ′′ = E 2 
2 2 20
125 (b) Ig = A= × 1000 mA = mA
118 (b) The current distribution in the circuit can be shown as 300 300 3
E Ig = 6.67 mA
(i – i1 – i2) As range of ammeter cannot be decreased but can be
F i
increased only, therefore the instrument cannot be converted
B to measure the range 1 mA.
i2 (i1 + i2)
P R
(i – i1)
126 (a) The balanced condition for Wheatstone bridge is = .
i Q S
C
A As is obvious from the given values, no current flows through
galvanometer.
i1 Now, P and R are in series, so
D
Applying Kirchhoff’s law in mesh ABCDA, Resistance, R1 = P + R = 10 + 15 = 25 Ω
− 10 (i − i1) − 10 i2 + 20 i1 = 0 Similarly, Q and S are in series, so
3i1 − i2 = i …(i) Resistance, R2 = Q + S = 20 + 30 = 50 Ω
and in mesh BEFCB, Net resistance of the network, as R1 and R2 are in parallel,
25 × 50 50
−20 (i − i1 − i2 ) + 10 (i1 + i2 ) + 10i2 = 0 Rnet = = Ω
75 3
⇒ 3i1 + 4i2 = 2i …(ii)
V 6×3
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get i= = = 0.36 A
Rnet 50
2i i 2i
i1 = , i2 = ⇒ iAD = i1 = I
5 5 5 127 (b) Drift velocity, v d =
J neA
119 (d) The drift velocity, v d = 5
ne ⇒ vd =
(5 × 10 26 ) × (1.6 × 10 −19 ) × (4 × 10 −6 )
i
(where, J is current density = )
A = 1.56 × 10 −2 ms −1
So, v d ∝ J 128 (c)
A A
i 2i i
∴ J1 = and J2 = = = J1
A 2A A
So, (v d )1 = (v d )2 = v r r r r/3
r r
120 (b) As resistance, R ∝ length Þ
12 r
∴Resistance of each arm = =4Ω
3 B C B C
r/2
So, effective resistance between any two corners, r
4 × 8 32 8 Resistance between points A and B,
Reff = = = Ω
4 + 8 12 3  5 
r × r 
V 20  r r   6  5
121 (a) We have, R = = =8Ω RAB = r ||  +  = = r
 3 2  5  11
I 2.5 r + r 
∆R ∆V ∆I 1 0.50 1  6 
= + = + =
R V I 20 2.5 4 Resistance between points B and C,
R 8 r 4r
∆R = = = 2 Ω ×
4 4 r  r 4
RBC = || r +  = 2 3 = r
⇒ R = (8 ± 2) Ω 2  3 r
+
4r 11
nr 2 3
122 (c) We have R = , so grouping of cells depends upon the Resistance between points C and A,
m
relative values of internal and external resistance.
 r 3r  So, the reading of ammeter,

 × 
r r  3 2 3 V 2 6 3
RCA = ||  + r  = = r i= = = = A
3 2  r
+
3r 11 R 8/ 3 8 4
3 2
134 (d) The resistances of branches ABC and ADC are in parallel.
RAB : RBC : RCA = 5 : 4 : 3
The current entering at node A will equally divided in each
130 (a) Given circuit is a balanced Wheatstone bridge. So, diagonal parallel branch.
resistance of 2 Ω will be ineffective. ∴ VA − VB = IR = 1 × 2 = 2 V
Equivalent resistance of upper arm = 2 + 2 = 4 Ω Point A is at greater potential with respect to point B, so
Equivalent resistance of lower arm = 2 + 2 = 4 Ω VA − VB = + 2 V
4× 4
∴ RAB = = 2Ω 135 (b) Equivalent potential in the given parallel circuit is given as
4+ 4
E1 E 2
+
131 (b) In open circuit, current through the circuit i = 0 r r2 E1r2 + E 2r1
E eq = 1 =
Potential difference between x and y will be 1 1 r1 + r2
+
V = E = 120 V r1 r2
1 1 1 1 Here, E1 = 2 V, E 2 = 1V, r1 = 1 Ω
132 (d) = + +
R′ 10 10 20 and r2 = 2 Ω
R 2 × 2 + 1× 1 4 + 1 5
0.5 A
⇒ E eq = = = V
2+1 3 3
25 V R¢ 136 (c) Here are two batteries with emf E each and the internal
resistances r1 and r2, respectively.
E E
20
⇒ R′ = = 4Ω r1 r2
5
25 I
Now, using Ohm’s law, i =
R + R′ R
25
⇒ 0.5 = Hence, we have I (R + r1 + r2 ) = 2E
R+4
2E
25 Thus, I = … (i)
⇒ R + 4= R + r1 + r2
0.5
⇒ R = 50 − 4 = 46 Ω Now, the potential difference across the first cell would be
0.5 × 5 2 .5 equal toV = E − Ir1. From the question,V = 0, hence
Current through 20 Ω resistor = = = 0.1A 2Er1
20 + 5 25 E = Ir1 = [from Eq. (i)]
R + r1 + r2
Potential difference across middle resistor
= Potential difference across 20 Ω = 20 × 0.1 = 2 V ⇒ R + r1 + r2 = 2r1
Hence, R = r1 − r2
133 (b) The given circuit can be shown as the resistance between
2 137 (b) The net resistance,
A and B = Ω.
3 12 × 4 48
R= + 2= + 2= 5 Ω
Total resistance of the circuit 12 + 4 16
2Ω 2V Electric current,
A E 12
i= = = 2A
2Ω R + r 5+ 1
A B From current division rule,
2Ω  12 
i2 =  × 2
 12 + 4
2Ω 3
= × 2 = 1.5 A
4
2 8
R =2+ = Ω and i1 = 2 − 1.5 = 0.5 A
3 3
CHAPTER
04
Magnetic Effect of
Current and Moving
Charges
In previous unit, we have studied about the electric current, its measurement and
the thermal effects of current. In this unit, we shall study about magnetic effects
of current. Earlier, it was thought that there is no connection between electricity
and magnetism. However in the year 1820, Oersted realised that electricity and
magnetism were related to each other. He showed experimentally that the electric
current through a straight wire causes noticeable deflection of the magnetic
compass needle held near the wire.
Inside
He also found that the iron fillings sprinkled around the wire arrange themselves 1 Magnetic field
in concentric circles with wire as the centre in the plane perpendicular to the Biot-Savart’s law
wire. This shows that the magnetic field is associated with a moving charge or a (Magnetic field due
to a current carrying conductor)
current carrying conductor. The branch of physics which deals with the
Applications of
magnetism due to electric current is called electromagnetism. Biot-Savart’s law
2 Ampere’s circuital law
MAGNETIC FIELD Applications of Ampere’s
circuital law
The space in the surroundings of a magnet, in which magnetic influence of 3 Force on a moving charge in a
moving charges or a current carrying conductor can be experienced is called uniform magnetic field
magnetic field. Magnetic field is a vector quantity and is denoted by B. The SI Motion of a charged particle
unit of magnetic field is weber/m 2 or tesla (T) and its CGS unit is gauss or in combined electric and
maxwell/cm 2 . magnetic fields : Lorentz force
Cyclotron
1 tesla = 10 4 gauss 4 Force on a current carrying
conductor in a magnetic field
Magnetic field due to moving charges Force between two parallel
current carrying conductors
(Oersted’s experiment) Magnetic force between two
Oersted found experimentally that a magnetic field is established around a current moving charges
carrying conductor just as it occurs around a magnet. In this experiment, Oersted Magnetic dipole moment
placed a magnetic compass near a current carrying conductor and observed that The moving coil galvanometer
(MCG)
the compass needle shows deflection. Also, when the current is reversed, the
needle shows deflection in opposite direction.
Magnetic Effect of Current and Moving Charges 271
Key Key Key ● inversely proportional to the square of distance between

Battery (open) (closed) (closed)
+ – + – the element and the point, i.e. dB ∝ 1/r 2 …(iv)
+ –
Conducting Combining all the above four relations, we get

wire
Idl sinθ
A B A B A B dB ∝
N S r2
S N
S N This relation is called Biot-Savart’s law.
Magnetic compass Compass showing Compass showing If conductor is placed in air or vacuum, then magnitude of
with no deflection deflection in deflection in
one direction opposite direction
magnetic field is given by
(a) (b) (c) µ 0 Idl sinθ
Fig. 4.1 Oersted’s experiment |dB | =
4π r 2
Thus, from the above figures, he concluded that a
magnetic field is established around a current carrying µ0
where, is the proportionality constant.
wire due to which such deflections are visible. 4π
Oersted’s experiment shows the connectivity between the µ 0 is called the permeability of free space (or vacuum).
magnetic field and electric current and as electric current
In SI unit, µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 Tm/A or Wb/A-m and its
means moving charges, he also concluded that moving
µ
charges also produce magnetic field in their surroundings. dimensions are [MLT −2A −2 ]. The value of 0 in CGS
4π
Biot-Savart’s law (Magnetic field due system is unity.
to a current carrying conductor) In vector form, Biot-Savart’s law can be written as

Id l × r µ 0 Id l × r
Biot-Savart’s law is an experimental law predicted by Biot dB ∝ = ⋅
and Savart. This law deals with the magnetic field |r |3 4π r3
produced at a point due to a small current element (a part The direction of dB is represented by the right hand screw
of any conductor carrying current). rule or right hand thumb rule.
Consider a wire XY carrying current I. Let dl be the Similarly, magnetic field induction at point P due to
infinitesimal element of the conductor, dB be the magnetic current through entire wire is
field at point P at a distance r from the element.
µ Id l × r
Y B=∫ 0 ⋅
4π r3
θ
I dl µ 0 Id l sin θ
r or B= ∫ 4π ⋅ r2
Current P dB
element I
Biot-Savart’s law in a medium
If the conductor is placed in a medium, then vector form
X of Biot-Savart’s law is given as
Fig. 4.2 A long current carrying conductor
µ Idl × r µ 0 µ r I dl × r
Biot-Savart’s law states that, the magnitude of the dB = =
4π | r |3 4π r3
magnetic field induction dB at the point P due to the
µ
current element is where, µ r = relative permeability = =1
● directly proportional to the current flowing through the
µ0
conductor, i.e. dB ∝ I …(i) (for air or vacuum)
● directly proportional to the length of the element, and µ = absolute permeability of the medium.
i.e. dB ∝ dl …(ii) Biot-Savart’s law in terms of current density J
● directly proportional to the sine of angle between the
µ 0 ( J × r)  I Idl Idl 
length of element and line joining the element to the dB = ⋅ dV Q J = = = 
4π r3  A Adl dV 
point, i.e. dB ∝ sin θ …(iii)
Biot-Savart’s law in terms of charge (q ) and its that the thumb represents the direction of flow of
velocity (v ) current, then the direction of the folding fingers will
A moving charge constitutes current and the magnetic represent the direction of magnetic field.
field associated with the charge is given as
i
µ q (v × r)  q dl  B
dB = 0 ⋅ Q Idl = dl = q = qv 
4π r 3  dt dt 
Special conditions of Biot-Savart’s law

Special conditions of Biot-Savart’s law are given below
B i
(i) The magnetic field due to the current element can
1 Id l × r
also be written as dB = 2
Fig. 4.5 Right hand thumb rule
4πε 0 c r3
1 Note
where, c = = speed of light in vacuum. (i) If magnetic field is directed perpendicular and into the plane of the
µ 0ε 0 paper, it is represented by ⊗ (cross) whereas if magnetic field is
directed perpendicular and out of the plane of the paper, it is
(ii) When θ = 0 ° or 180°, then magnetic field produced represented by u (dot).
due to the current will be zero. (ii) Anti-clockwise
Clockwise
(iii) When θ = 90°, i.e. r is perpendicular to dl, then i i
i i
µ idl
magnetic field will be dB = 0 2 , which is maximum. B
×
B B
×
B
4πr ×
Out In In Out ln Out
Rules to find direction of magnetic field

(i) Right hand palm rule If we spread our right hand Fig. 4.6 Direction of magnetic field
in such a way that thumb is towards the direction of In Magnetic field is away from the observer or perpendicular
current and fingers are towards that point where we inwards.
have to find the direction of magnetic field, then Out Magnetic field is towards the observer or perpendicular
direction of magnetic field will be perpendicular to outwards.
the palm.
i Applications of Biot-Savart’s law
P B Current carrying
conductor Applications of Biot-Savart’s law are given below
Magnetic field surrounding a thin,

Fig. 4.3 Right hand palm rule
straight current carrying conductor
Magnetic field due to a current carrying wire at a point P
(ii) Maxwell’s right handed screw rule If a right which lies at a perpendicular distance d from the wire (as
handed cork screw is rotated such that its tip moves shown in figure) is given as
in the direction of flow of current through the
µ0 i
conductor, then the rotation of the head of the screw B= (sin α + sin β)
gives the direction of magnetic field. 4π d
i A
d a B (×)
P
b
Fig. 4.4 Right handed screw rule i
(iii) Right hand thumb rule If a straight current B

carrying conductor is held in the right hand such Fig. 4.7 A current carrying wire subtend angles α and β at a point P
Note down the following points regarding the above equation Example 4.1 A current of 10 A is flowing east to west in a
(i) For an infinitely long straight wire, α = β = 90 ° long wire kept in the east-west direction. Find magnetic field
in a horizontal plane at a distance of (i) 10 cm north, (ii)
µ i µ i µ i 20 cm south from the wire and in a vertical plane at a
∴ B = 0 (sin 90 ° + sin 90 ° ) = 0 (1 + 1) = 0
4πd 4πd 2π d distance of (iii) 40 cm downwards (iv) 50 cm upwards.
(ii) When wire is semi-infinite (at the foot of long wire), Sol. The magnitude of the magnetic field at a distance r from a
π long wire carrying a current i is given by
α = and β = 0 ° µ i
2 B= 0
µ 0i  π µ 0i 2π r
∴ B=  sin 0° + sin  ⇒ B = µ0
4 πd  2  4 πd where, = 2 × 10 T mA−1.
−7
2π
(iii) For axial position of wire, i.e. when point P lies on (i) The magnetic field in a horizontal plane at a distance of
axial position of current carrying conductor, then 10 cm (= 0.10 m) north from the wire,
magnetic field at P, 10
B=0 [since, θ = 0°] B N = (2 × 10−7 ) = 2 × 10−5 T
0.10
(iv) B ∝ 1/d , i.e. B-d graph for an infinitely long straight The current in the wire is from east to west. So,
wire is a rectangular hyperbola as shown in figure. according to the right hand palm rule, the direction of
B
the field at the point towards north will be downwards
in a vertical plane.
(ii) The magnetic field at a distance of 20 cm (= 0.20 m)
10
south from the wire, B S = (2 × 10−7 ) = 1 × 10−5 T
0.20
d The direction of the field will be upward in the vertical
Fig. 4.8 B-d graph for an infinitely long straight wire plane.
(iii) The magnetic field at a distance of 40 cm (= 0.40 m)
Magnetic field for different configurations
from the wire downwards in the vertical plane,
of the straight conductors 10
Magnitude and direction of magnetic fields associated with BD = (2 × 10−7 ) = 5 × 10−6 T
0.40
different configurations of the straight conductors are given below
The field will be in a horizontal plane pointing south.
(i) (ii)
(iv) The magnetic field at a distance of 50 cm (= 0.50 m)
i
i above the wire in the vertical plane,
10
α α
BU = (2 × 10−7 ) = 4 × 10−6 T
P β 0.50
a a P
The field will be in a horizontal plane pointing north.
µ i
µ 0i B P = 0 [sin α − sinβ ] q
BP = [sin α ] q 4 πa Example 4.2
4 πa
(i) A pair of stationary and infinitely long bent wires are placed
(iii) to ∞ (iv) to ∞
in the XY-plane as shown in figure. The wires carry currents
i i 10 A each. The segments P and Q are parallel to the Y-axis
P
a such as OS = OR = 0.02 m. Find the magnitude and direction
a of the magnetic field at the origin O.
to ∞ P
Y
Starting point i
µ i
BP = 0 q µ i i R
Q
2 πa BP = 0 q X
4 πa O S
P
(v) to ∞ (vi) b
a P (ii) Three long wires carrying currents 10 A, 20 A and 30 A are
i α a O i
placed parallel to each other as shown below. Points P and Q
are in the midway of wires. Find ratio of magnetic fields at
points P and Q.
Starting point 8 µ 0i a2 + b 2
BO = q
µ 0i 4π ab
BP = [sinα + 1] q 30 A 20 A 10 A
4 πa 8 2 µ 0i
When a = b , B O =
4 πa Q P
2d 2d
Sol. (i) Consider the wires as shown below

Q Now, net magnetic field at point P,
3 µ 0i  1 1  µ i d
i BP = B1 + B 2 =  +  = 0 ⋅ , upward
2π  x d − x  2π x (d − x )
1 i R
O S 4 BP is minimum, if x (d − x ) is maximum.
2
x (d − x ) is maximum, if x = d − x
⇒ x = d /2
d d
(the product of two parts is maximum, if parts are equal)
Magnetic field, B1 = B 4 = 0 [Qθ = 0° ]
d
µ 0i As, x = , BP is minimum.
Magnetic field, B 2 = B 3 = u 2
4 πd
2µ 0i
Magnetic field at the centre O, (BP )min = , upward
πd
µ i µ i µ i
BO = B1 + B 2 + B 3 + B 4 = 0 + 0 + 0 = 0 u As, x → 0, B → ∞
4 πd 4 πd 2 πd x → d, B → ∞
µ 10 µ From x = 0 to x = d /2, magnetic field decreases and reaches
= 0 × = 0 × 1000
2π 0.02 4π to minimum value at x = d /2.
= 10−7 × 103 = 10−4 T (downward) (Q µ 0 = 4π × 10−7) From x = d /2 to x = d , magnetic field increases and tends to
infinite at x = d .
(ii) The given figure is shown below
Left of O At x distance from O,
P 1 i i 2
×
O A
30 A 20 A 10 A x d
Q P
Magnetic field at point P due to current carrying wire 1,
d d µ i
B1 = 0 , downward
2d 2d 2 πx
Magnetic field at the point Q, Similarly, magnetic field at point P due to current carrying
µ 30 20 10  µ 0 20 wire 2,
BQ = 0  − − = ⋅ ⊗ µ 0i
2π  d d 3d  2π 3d B2 = , upward
2π(x + d )
Magnetic field at the point P,
µ 30 20 10 µ 0 20 Magnetic field at the point P,
BP = 0  + − = ⋅ ⊗
2π 3d d d  2π d µ 0i  1 1 
BP =  −  , downward
The ratio of magnetic fields at points P and Q, 2π  x x + d 
BP
∴ =3 Example 4.4
BQ
(i) A very long wire carrying a current i is bent at right angles.
Example 4.3 Two long wires carrying same currents in opposite Find magnetic field at a point lying on a perpendicular to the
directions are placed at separation d as shown in figure. Predict wire, drawn through the point of bending, at a distance d from
variation of magnetic field as one moves from one wire to it.
another along X-axis excluding the points O and A. (ii) Three long wires carrying same current are placed as shown in
Y figure. Find magnetic field at point O.
d d
O A × ×
× X
d
d
Sol. The given situation can be shown as
O i P i A
× O
1 2
x d–x
d
Sol. (i) A very long wire is bent at right angles as shown below
Between the wires magnetic field at point P, 2 i
O
µ i Y 1
Due to current carrying wire (1), B1 = 0 , upward
2 πx i
X
µ 0i
Due to current carrying wire (2), B 2 = , upward
2π(d − x )
Magnetic field at point P at height d above point O, Example 4.5 Evaluate magnitude and direction of magnetic
µ i field at point P in the following cases.
Due to wire (1), B1 = 0 , towards +X-axis
4 πd (i)
µ i
Due to wire (2), B 2 = 0 , towards –Y-axis i
4 πd 4a
B1 is perpendicular to B 2. P
P B1 = B
45° 4a
3a
BP
(ii)
B2 = B
Net magnetic field at the point P, 2a P i
2µ 0i µ 0i
BP = 2B = =
4 πd 2 2 πd 2a
(ii) The given figure can be drawn as
P is the centre of square.
i d i d i (iii)
1 × × 3
A 2 B C
d a a
√2d √2d P
°
445
5°
B3
a
B2 i
O
B1 P is the centre of equilateral triangle.
Magnetic field at the point O, (iv)
µ 0i
Due to wire (1), B1 =
2π 2d P
µ i i
Due to wire (2), B 2 = 0
2 πd
a
µ 0i
Due to wire (3), B 3 = P is the centre of regular hexagon.
2π 2d
Sol. (i) The given figure can be drawn as
B3
A
q1 5a
45° 4a i
B¢ B2
90° O
O P
3a
B1
4a
Resultant of B1 and B 3, q2
µ i B
B ′ = 2B1 cos 45° = 0 (Q B1 = B 3) 3a
2 πd
Magnetic field at centre P,
B′ B2
µ 0i
P BP = [cos θ1 + cos θ 2]
B ′ = B2 4π (OP )
∴ Magnetic field at the centre O, µ 0i µ i
= [cos θ + cos θ] = 0 cos θ
BO = B ′ − B 2 = 0 4π (3a ) 6 πa
Use Pythagoras theorem, we find the value Since, current is anti-clockwise, magnetic field at centre
2 2 P will be outside the plane of paper.
PA = (3a ) + (4a )
9µ 0i
BP = u
= 25a 2 = 5a 2 πa
PA 4 (iv)
From the figure, cos θ = =
OA 5
µ i 4 2µ 0i
∴ BP = 0 ⋅ = ⊗ P
6πa 5 15πa
(ii) The given figure can be drawn as a¢
60° 60°
A D
q a/2 i
a
1 P 2a Magnetic field,
a¢
µ i
B1 = 0 (cos 60° + cos 60° )
q 4 πa ′
B C µ 0i µ 0i 1
= ⋅ 2 cos 60° = ⋅2 ×
2a a a 2
4π ⋅ ⋅ tan 60° 4π ⋅ ⋅ 3
Magnetic field at centre P due to one side of square, say 2 2
AB, µ 0i
=
µ i 2 πa 3
B1 = 0 (cos θ + cos θ ) (Qa ′ = a, θ = 45°)
4 πa ′ Magnetic field at P = 6 times the magnetic field due to
one side
µ 0i 1 µ 0i 3µ 0i
B1 = ⋅2⋅ = ∴ BP = 6B1 = ⊗
4 πa 2 2 2 πa πa
So, magnetic field at centre P due to square loop,
Example 4.6 A wire shaped to a regular hexagon of side 2 cm
2µ 0i carries a current of 2 A. Find the magnetic field at the centre
BP = 4B1 =
πa of the hexagon.
Since, current is clockwise, magnetic field at centre P Sol. O
will be inside the plane of paper.
2µ 0i θ θ
BP = ⊗
πa
r
(iii) The given figure can be drawn as i
A C B
a a From geometry of the figure, we have
P
BC
⇒ = tan θ [QBC = 1 cm (given) ]
a¢ OC
30° 30°
1 1
1 i ∴ = tan 30° = ⇒ r = 3 cm
a/2 a/2 r 3
Net magnetic field at O = 6 times the magnetic field due to
From the figure,
a′ a one side
tan 30° = ⇒ a′ = and θ1 = θ 2 = 30° µ i 
a /2 2 3 ∴ B 0 = 6  0 (sin θ + sin θ )
µ i 2 π r 
Magnetic field, B1 = 0 [cos 30° + cos 30° ]
4 πa ′ 6 ( 2 × 10–7 ) ( 2 )  1 1
=  +  [Qθ = 30°]
µ 0i 3 3µ 0i 3 × 10–2  2 2
= ⋅2⋅ =
4π ⋅
a 2 2 πa = 1.38 × 10–4 T
2 3
So, magnetic field at centre P due to triangular loop, Example 4.7 A rectangular polygon of n sides is formed by
9µ 0i bending a wire of total length 2πR which carries a current i.
BP = 3B1 = Find the magnetic field at the centre of the polygon.
2 πa
Sol. One side of the polygon is 2R 0 2i

i1 = ⋅i =
R 0 + 2R 0 3
ab i
i2 = i − i1 =
d 3
i
B
a 1 2
45°
i1
2πR d
a= A 45°
O
C
n i i
i2
arc
Since, angle = 3 4
radius
D
a 2πR /n 2π µ 0i1 µ 0i1
∴ α +β = = = Magnetic field, B1 = (sin 45°+ sin 45° ) =
R R n 4 πd 2 2 πd
2π
⇒ α +β = µ 0 (2i / 3) 2µ 0i
n = = = B 2, ⊗
a 
2π 2 2 π   3 2 πa
⇒ α +α = (Q α = β)  2
n
µ 0i2
⇒ α = π /n Magnetic field, B 3 = (sin 45°+ sin 45° )
4 πd
π
Hence, α = β = µ 0i2 µ 0 (i / 3) µ 0i
n = = = = B 4, u
2 2 πd 2 2 π  a  3 2 πa
d  
Again, = cot α  2
(a /2)
Magnetic field at the centre O,
a   πR   π BO = (B1 + B 2 ) − (B 3 + B 4 )
∴ d =   cot α =   cot  
 2  n  n  4µ 0i 2µ 0i
= −
All sides of the polygon produce the magnetic field at the 3 2 πa 3 2 πa
centre in same direction (here). Hence, net magnetic field, 2 µ 0i
B = (n ) (magnetic field due to one side) = ,⊗
3 πa
µ i 
= n  0 (sin α + sin β )
 4π d  Magnetic field at the centre of a
 µ   in   π  π circular current carrying coil
or B = n 0    tan  2 sin 
 4 π   πR   n  n
Consider a circular current carrying coil of radius a and
2
  π π carrying current i. Magnetic field at the centre O due to
 sin   /  the current element dl is
 µ 0i   n  n 
or B= 
 2R  cos (π / n ) i
dl
Example 4.8 Consider the following figure in which ABCD is r=a
a square of edge a. Resistance of the wire ABC is R 0 and O
that of ADC is 2R 0 . Find magnitude and direction of
a
magnetic field at the centre O of the square.
B
Fig. 4.9 Circular current carrying coil
µ 0 I dl × r
A C
dB = ⋅ 3
i O i 4π r
Here, dl ⊥ r, so θ = 90 °
D µ i dl sin 90 °
Sol. Given, R ABC = R1 = R 0 , R ADC = R 2 = 2R 0 dB = 0
4π a2
Therefore, magnetic field at the centre due to the whole Example 4.9 A current path shaped as shown in figure
µ i µ i produces a magnetic field at P, the centre of the arc. If the
circular loop, B = ∫ dB = 0 2 ∫ dl = 0 2 (2πa ) arc subtends an angle of 30° and the radius of the arc is
4πa 4πa 0.6 m. What is the magnitude of the field at P, if the current
is 3.0 A?
µ 0i
B= i A
2a C
Direction of this field is outward perpendicular to the
plane of the paper. P 30°
µ NI
Note If the loop has N turns, then magnetic field, B = 0 .
2a D
E
Magnetic field due to an arc Sol. Here, point P is along the length of straight wires CA and
Magnetic field due to an arc of a circular current carrying DE, hence
coil at the centre is given by BCA = BDE = 0
i
Magnetic field due to an arc of a circle at the centre,
 θ  µ i µ   i 
B =   0 =  0   θ
 2π  2R  4π   R 
q a π
Here, θ = 30° = rad, i = 3 A and R = 0.6 m
Inwards 6
O  µ   3   π
B =  0    
Fig. 4.10 Magnetic field due to an arc  4π   0.6  6 
 θ  µ i µ i µ   i  10−7 × 3 × π
B =   0 = 0   θ or B =  0    θ =
 2π  2a 4π  a   4π   a  0.6 × 6
Here, θ is to be substituted in radians. = 2.6 × 10−7 T
Example 4.10 Figure shows a current loop having two

Magnetic field for different configurations circular arcs joined by two radial lines. Find the magnetic
of the circular coil field B at the centre O.
Magnitude and direction of magnetic fields associated with different
configurations of the circular coil are given below i
(i) (ii) i
D C
O O
a a A B
a b
i i O
µ 0i µ 0i
BO = q BO = u Sol. Magnetic field at O due to wires CB and AD will be zero.
2a 2a
i
Magnetic field due to arc BA,
(iii) (iv)
 θ   µ i
a
i B1 =    0 
i O  2π   2a 
µ i
BO = 0 q Direction of field B1 is out of the plane of the figure.
4a µ 0i µ i
BO = + 0 q
2 πa 4 a Similarly, magnetic field at O due to arc DC,
 θ   µ i
(v) i (vi) B2 =    0 
a  2π   2b 
O i
i Direction of B 2 is into the plane of the figure.
µ 0i
The resultant field at O,
BO = q µ i θ (b – a )
4a B = B1 – B 2 = 0 , out of the plane of figure.
4π ab
B O = 0 (for any value of θ)
Example 4.11 What is the magnitude and direction of (iii) The given figure can be drawn as
magnetic field at point O in the following cases? 3
(i) i
a 2 O
∞ i i ∞
O a
(ii) 1 i
i ∞ µ i
Magnetic field, B1 = 0 u
4 πa
a
µ i
O 2a Magnetic field, B 2 = 0 u
i
4a
Magnetic field, B 3 = 0
i
∞ Net magnetic field at the centre point O,
µ i µ i µ i 1 
(iii) ∞ BO = B1 + B 2 + B 3 = 0 + 0 + 0 = 0  + 1 u
4πa 4a 4a  π 
i
Example 4.12 Find the magnitude and direction of magnetic
i O field at point O in the following cases.
a (i)
i
∞
Sol. (i) The given figure can be drawn as O

R2
i 2
R1
a
i i i
1
O 3
(ii) i
Since, point O is along the length of straight wires 1 and
3, hence B1 = B 3 = 0. R2
i
Net magnetic field at the centre point O,
µ i
BO = B 2 = 0 ⊗ O R1
4a
(ii) The given figure can be drawn as (iii) i
i 1
R
O i
2
a O 2a
i
i
i
3
Sol. (i) The given figure can be drawn as
Since, point O is the foot of long wires 1 and 3, 2 i
µ i
∴ B1 = B 3 = 0 u
4 πa R2
O
Due to semi-circle (2),
µ i
B2 = 0 u R1
4a
Net magnetic field at the centre point O, 1 i
BO = B1 + B 2 + B 3 Magnetic field at O due to straight wires is zero.
µ i µ i µ i µ i 2  µ i µ i
= 0 + 0 + 0 = 0  + 1 u Now, B1 = 0 u and B 2 = 0 u
4πa 4a 4πa 4a  π  4R1 4R 2
Net magnetic field at the centre point O, Sol. (i) The given figure can be drawn as
µ i1 1 2
BO = B1 + B 2 = 0  +  u
4  R1 R 2 
(ii) The given figure can be drawn as 2π − θ
i 2 O
R2 1 θ/2 θ/2 a
i d
i 1
R1
O θ
From the figure, d = a cos
Magnetic field at O due to straight wires is zero. 2
µ i µ i  θ θ
Now, B1 = 0 ⊗ B1 = 0  sin + sin 
4R1 4 πd  2 2
µ i µ 0i θ µ i θ
and B2 = 0 u = ⋅ 2 sin = 0 tan ⊗
4R 2 θ 2 2 πa 2
4π ⋅ a cos
⇒ B1 > B 2 (Q R1 < R 2) 2
Net magnetic field at the centre O, µ i (2π − θ)
and B2 = 0 ⊗
µ i1 1 2a 2π
BO = B1 − B 2 = 0  −  ⊗ Net magnetic field at the centre O,
4  R1 R 2 
µ i  θ θ
(iii) The given figure can be drawn as BO = B1 + B 2 = 0  tan + π −  ⊗
2 πa  2 2
i
(ii) The given figure can be drawn as
2
2 R
3 i R2
O
θ
O
1 i R1
µ 0i
Magnetic field, B1 = u
4 πR
µ i 3 1
Magnetic field, B 2 = 0 ⋅ u
2R 4 µ 0i (2π − θ )
Magnetic field, B1 = ⋅ u
Magnetic field, B 3 = 0 2R1 2π
Net magnetic field at the centre O, µ i θ
µ 0i  1 3 Magnetic field, B 2 = 0 ⋅ u
BO = B1 + B 2 + B 3 =  +  u 2R 2 2π
4R  π 2
Net magnetic field at the centre O,
Example 4.13 Evaluate the magnitude and direction of µ i µ 0i 
magnetic field at point O in the following cases. BO = B1 + B 2 =  0 (2π − θ ) + θ u
 4πR1 4 πR 2 
(i) i (ii) (iii) The given figure can be drawn as
i R2
i b
O 2 i
θ
q a O
b
R1 90°
i 3
1 i O
a
(iii) b
i 2
b 45°
90°
b
i O
a
O
µ 0i 3 3µ 0i µ 0i  π 
Magnetic field, B1 = ⋅ = u B3 =  u (due to arc of radius R)
2a 4 8a 4 πR  2 
µ i
Magnetic field, B 2 = 0 (cos 90°+ cos 45°) As, the current is anti-clockwise in all three arcs, therefore all
4 πb the fields are perpendicular to plane and outwards.
µ 0i
= u = B3 ⇒ B net = B1 + B 2 + B 3
4 2 πb µ i 1 1 1  9 µ 0i
Net magnetic field at the centre O, ∴ B net = 0  + +  =
R 32 8 8 32R
3µ i µ 0i 
BO = B1 + (B 2 + B 3 ) =  0 + u
 8a 2 2 πb  Example 4.16 In the given figure, resistance of wire ABC is
twice that of wire ADC. Find the magnitude and direction of
Example 4.14 What is the magnetic field at the centre of the
magnetic field at the centre O.
circular loop (as shown in figure), when a single wire is bent B
to form a circular loop and also extends to form straight
section? R
i A C i
O
O
D
R
Sol. Given, R ABC = R1 = 2R 0 , R ADC = R 2 = R 0
B
90° C R0 i 2i
i1 = ⋅ i = ⇒ i2 = i − i1 =
I R 0 + 2R 0 3 3
A i1 B
Sol. From figure, magnetic field due to AB, 2R0

R
µ I  π π µ I  1  i A C
B1 = 0 sin − sin  ⊗ = 0 1 − ⊗
4 πR  2 4 4 πR  2 O i
µ I
Magnetic field due to circular loop, B 2 = 0 u R0
2R i2 D
Magnetic field due to straight wire BC ,
µ 0 i1 1 µ 0i
µ I  π π µ 0I  1  Magnetic field, B 1 = ⋅ = ⊗
B3 = 0 sin 2 + sin 4 u = 4πR 1 + u 2R 2 12R
4 πR    2
µ i 1 µ i
∴ Net magnetic field, B = B 2 + B 3 − B1 Magnetic field, B 2 = 0 2 ⋅ = 0 u
2R 2 6R
µ 0I µ I  1  µ 0I  1  µ 0I  1  Net magnetic field at the centre O,
+ 0 1 +  − 1 −  = 1 + u
2R 4 πR  2  4 π R  2  2R  2π  µ i
BO = B 2 − B1 = 0 u
12R
Example 4.15 Find the magnetic field at the centre O of the
loop shown in the figure. Magnetic field on the axis of a circular
I
current carrying coil
4R
If a coil of radius a is carrying current i, then magnetic
R field on its axis at a distance r from its centre is given by
O
a
i P
2R r B
Sol. Due to straight parts, there is no magnetic field at O. There

are three fields at O due to three arcs.
Fig. 4.11 Magnetic field on the axis of a circular
µ i
As, field due to arc, B = 0 θ current carrying coil
4 πr
µ 0i  π  µ0 Nia 2
B1 =  u (due to arc of radius 4R) B axis =
4π (4R )  2  2 (a + r 2 )3/ 2
2
µ 0i
B2 = (π )u (due to arc of radius 2R) where, N = number of turns in coil.
4π (2R )
(i) At centre, r = 0
µ Ni µ 0 Ni Magnetic field due to a set of two circular
⇒ B centre = 0 . = = Bmax current carrying coils (case of Helmholtz)
2 a 2a
(ii) At far points, Consider the set up of two co-axial coils of same radius
µ  Nia 2  µ Nia 2 1 such that distance between their centres is equal to their
r >> a, B ≈ 0  3  = 0 3
⇒ B∝ 3 radius. This arrangement is called Helmholtz.
2  r  2 r r
(iii) B-r graph shows the variation of magnetic field at R
i
various position on the axis of circular current R R
i
carrying coil. Magnetic field is maximum at the + O +
A¢ A¢¢ A
centre and decreases as we move away from the – O1 – O2
centre on the axis of the loop. O1 O O2 x
B R
m0Ni (a) Magnetic field due to (b) B-x graph of two
2a two co-axial coils co-axial coils
Fig. 4.15
A¢
A Point of inflection
(point of change of
curvature) At axial mid-point O, the magnetic field is given by
8 µ 0 Ni µ Ni
–r a B= = 0.716 0 = 1.432 Bmax
r=0 r=a r R
r = –2 2 5 5R
Fig. 4.12 B-r graph at the axis of coil (ring) µ 0 Ni
where, Bmax =
2R
Direction of magnetic field on the axis of the
circular coil Example 4.17 The magnetic field B due to a current carrying
Direction of magnetic field on the axis of a circular loop can circular loop of radius 12 cm at its centre is 0.5 × 10 −4 T.
be obtained using the right hand thumb rule. This rule Find the magnetic field due to this loop at a point on the
states that, if the fingers of right hand are curled along the axis at a distance of 5.0 cm from the centre.
current, then the stretched thumb will point towards the Sol. Magnetic field at the centre of a circular loop,
direction of magnetic field as shown in figures given below. µ i
B1 = 0
B 2R
i and that at an axial point,
µ 0 iR 2
B2 =
2 (R 2 + x 2 )3/ 2
B2 R3
Thus, = 2
i B1 (R + x 2 )3/ 2
B
Fig. 4.13 Right hand thumb rule  R3 
or B 2 = B1  2 2 3/ 2 
 (R + x ) 
Magnetic field due to circular current
Substituting the given values in above equation, we get
carrying coil apart from axis  (12) 3 
The magnetic field at any point except the axis is B 2 = (0.5 × 10−4 )  3/2 
mathematically difficult to calculate. The magnetic field  (144 + 25) 
lines due to a circular current carrying coil are shown = 3.9 × 10−5 T
below in the figure, which will give some idea of the field.
AMPERE’S CIRCUITAL LAW
It states that, the line integral of magnetic field B around
any closed path (Amperian loop) or circuit is equal to µ 0
times the total current crossing the area bounded by the
closed path, provided that the magnetic field inside the
loop remains constant. Thus,
∫ B ⋅ d l = µ 0 (inet )
Fig. 4.14 Magnetic field lines of a current carrying loop
In the above relation, we will use a sign convention given Magnetic field due to a cylindrical wire
by right hand rule. According to this rule, fingers of the
right hand are curled in the sense that the boundary is (i) Outside the cylinder (r > R) To find magnetic field
traversed in the loop integral ∫ B ⋅ d l, then the direction of outside at point P, we will assume Amperian loops
the thumb gives the sense in which the current I is treated as shown below
Amperian loop
as positive.
P
P
Amperian loop
R r R r
i i
B i1 i2 i3
(a) Solid cylinder (b) Thin hollow cylinder
P
Upward current (+) Downward current (–) R1 r R

R i
Fig. 4.16 Sign convention for the current
In this way, currents i1, i 2 and i 3 shown in the diagram are (c) Thick hollow cylinder
respectively taken as positive and negative.
Fig. 4.17 Applications of Ampere’s circuital law for a point P
∴ inet = i1 + i 2 − i 3 outside the cylinder
⇒ ∫ B ⋅ d l = µ 0 (i1 + i 2 − i 3 ) In all the above cases, magnetic field outside the
wire at P,
Its simplified form is Bl = µ 0 inet .
This simplified equation can be used under the following ∫ B ⋅ d l = B (2πr )
conditions
µ 0i
(i) At every point of the closed path, B || d l. ⇒ B out =
2πr
(ii) Magnetic field has the same magnitude B at all
places on the closed path. µ 0i
In all the above cases, B surface =
(iii) Ampere’s circuital law holds for steady currents 2πR
which do not change with time.
(ii) Inside the hollow cylinder (r < R) Magnetic field
Example 4.18 Write equation for Ampere’s circuital law for
inside the hollow cylinder is zero because no current
the Amperian loop as shown below.
(Traverse in the direction shown by arrow mark put on it.)
is enclosed by Amperian loops as shown below
Amperian loop B≠0
i1 i2 i3 i4
B=0 i B=0
i=0
Amperian loop i≠0
Amperian loop
(a) Thin hollow cylinder (b) Thick hollow cylinder
Sol. If observed from the top, then left side portion of the loop is Fig. 4.18 Magnetic field inside the hollow cylinder
traversed clockwise while the other portion is traversed
anti-clockwise. Therefore, by sign convention (iii) Inside the solid cylinder (r < R) Current i ′ enclosed
i1 → (+ ), i2 → (− )
by Amperian loop is less than the total current (i).
i3 → (+ ) , i4 → (+ ) Amperian
Thus, ∫ B ⋅ d l = µ 0 (i1 + i3 + i4 − i2) R r
r loop
Amperian i
loop P
Applications of Ampere’s P
circuital law Fig. 4.19 Amperian loop inside a solid cylinder
Ampere’s circuital law can be applied to calculate Current density is uniform, i.e. J = J ′
magnetic field associated with symmetric distributed A′ r2 
current carrying configurations which are discussed below ⇒ i′ = i × =i  2
A R 
Hence, at inside point, ∫ B in ⋅ d l = µ 0 i ′ Magnetic field outside the cylindrical conductor does
not depend upon nature (thick/thin or solid/hollow)
µ 0 ir of the conductor as well as its radius of cross-section.
⇒ Bin = ⋅
2π R 2 Magnetic field due to a solenoid
(iv) Inside the thick portion of hollow cylinder Current A cylindrical coil of many wounded turns of insulated
enclosed by the Amperian loop of radius r is wire with diameter of the coil smaller than its length is
A′ (r 2 − R 12 ) called a solenoid.
given by i ′ = i × =i× 2
A (R 2 − R 12 )
P
P R2 r R1 Loop
r i Solenoid i
R1 i
R2
Fig. 4.23 Solenoid and its magnetic field
Fig. 4.20 Amperian loop inside the thick portion of the
hollow cylinder A magnetic field is produced around and within the
solenoid as shown in above figure. The magnetic field
Hence, at point P, ∫ B ⋅ dl = µ 0 i ′ within the tightly wound solenoid (ideal solenoid) is
uniform and parallel to the axis of solenoid.
µ 0 i (r 2 − R 12 ) Outside the ideal solenoid, magnetic field is zero as shown
⇒ Bin = ⋅
2πr (R 22 − R 12 ) in the figure below
B=0
Variation in magnetic field with radius
(i) The variation in magnetic field due to infinite long B
solid cylindrical conductor along its radius is as
shown in figure
B Fig. 4.24 Magnetic field (outside) due to ideal solenoid
B max
(i) Finite length solenoid If N = total number of
turns, l = length of the solenoid and n = number of
µ
r 1
Bµr
turns per unit length = N /l.
B
r<R
O
r=0 r=R r>R r
r α β
Fig. 4.21 B-r graph for solid cylinder
P
Note that inside the wire, B = 0 as r = 0.
Also, the magnetic field is continuous at the surface Fig. 4.25 Magnetic field due to finite length solenoid
of the wire.
(ii) The variation in magnetic field due to infinite long Magnetic field inside the solenoid at point P is given by
hollow cylindrical conductor along its radius is as µ ni
B = 0 [sin α + sin β]
shown in figure 2
B
Bmax
(ii) Infinite length solenoid If the solenoid is of
infinite length and the point is well inside it,
1
B µr
i.e. α = β = (π / 2)
B=0
Then, Bin = µ 0 ni
O
r=0 r=R r>R r
If the solenoid is of infinite length and the point is
near one end, i.e. α = 0 and β = (π /2), then
Fig. 4.22 B-r graph for hollow cylinder
1  1  Example 4.19 A 0.8 m long solenoid has 800 turns and has
B end = (µ 0 ni )  B end = Bin 
2  2  a field density of 2.52 × 10 −3 T at its centre. Find the
current in the solenoid.
(iii) Variation in magnetic field with distance d from its Sol. Number of turns per unit length,
centre N 800
B n= = = 1000 turns/m
l 0.8
B/2 We know that, B = µ 0ni
B 2.52 × 10−3
End of solenoid d End of solenoid ∴ Current in the solenoid, i = = = 2.0 A
µ 0n 4π × 10−7 × 1000
Fig. 4.26 B-d graph for solenoid
Note Example 4.20 A copper wire having a resistance of 0.01 Ω/m

(i) Magnetic field produced by solenoid is directed along its axis. is used to wind a 400 turns solenoid of radius
(ii) Magnetic field inside the solenoid is uniform. 1.0 cm and length 20 cm. Find the emf of a battery which
(iii) Magnetic field outside the volume of the ideal solenoid (tightly when connected across the solenoid would produce a
wound) approaches to zero. magnetic field of 10 −2 T near the centre of the solenoid.
Sol. Length of wire used = 2πr × Number of turns
Magnetic field due to a toroid = (2π × 1.0 × 10−2 × 400) m
A toroid can be considered as a ring shaped closed
Resistance per unit length = 0.01 Ω /m
solenoid. Hence, it is like an endless cylindrical solenoid.
∴ Total resistance of wire,
Winding R = 2π × 1.0 × 10−2 × 400 × 0.01
Core
r P = 8π × 10−2 Ω
r O
Number of turns per unit length,
i 400
n = N /l = = 2000 turns/m
20 × 10−2
Fig. 4.27 Toroid and its magnetic field V
Magnetic field, B = µ 0ni = µ 0n
R
Consider a toroid having n turns per unit length. Magnetic
field at a point P in the figure is given as BR 10−2 × 8π × 10−2
emf of the battery,V = = = 1V
µ 0n 4π × 10−7 × 2000
µ 0Ni N
B= = µ 0 ni where, n =
2 πr 2πr Example 4.21 A coil wrapped around a toroid has inner
Note radius of 20.0 cm and an outer radius of 25.0 cm. If the
(i) Magnetic field outside the volume of toroid is always zero. wire wrapping makes 800 turns and carries a current of
(ii) Magnetic field at the centre of toroid is always zero. 12.0 A. Find the maximum and minimum values of the
magnetic field within the toroid.
Magnetic field due to an infinitely large Sol. Let a and b be the inner and outer radii of the toroid,
current carrying sheet respectively. Then, maximum value of magnetic field,
Consider an infinite sheet of current with linear current µ N 4π × 10−7 × 800 × 12.0
B max = µ 0nI = 0 I =
density J (A/m). Due to symmetry of field line pattern 2 πa 2π × 20.0 × 10−2
above and below the sheet is uniform. = 9.6 × 10−3 T = 9.6 mT
Magnetic field at point P due to infinitely large current Minimum value of magnetic field,
NI
carrying sheet is given as B min = µ 0nI = µ 0
P 2 πb
i 4π × 10−7 × 800 × 12.0
B min =
2π × 25.0 × 10−2
= 7.68 × 10−3 T = 7.68 mT
Example 4.22 A solenoid 50 cm long has 4 layers of

windings of 350 turns each. The radius of the lowest layer is
Fig. 4.28 1.4 cm. If the current carried is 6.0 A, find the magnitude
of magnetic field (i) near the centre of the solenoid on its
µ0 J
B= axis and off its axis, (ii) near its ends on its axis (iii) and
2 outside the solenoid near its centre.
Sol. (i) The magnitude of the magnetic field at (or near) the Now, I = 6.0 A, µ 0 = 4π × 10−7 TmA−1
centre of the solenoid is given by
and n = 2800 turns/m
B = µ 0nI ∴ B = 4π × 10−7 × 2800 × 6 = 21 . × 10−2 T
where, n is the number of turns per unit length. Since, for an infinitely long solenoid, the internal field
This expression for B can also be used, if the solenoid near the centre is uniform over the entire cross-section,
has more than one layer of windings because the radius therefore this value of B is for both on and off its axis.
of wire does not effect this equation. Therefore, (ii) Magnetic field at the ends of the solenoid,
Number of turns per layer × Number of layers
n= µ nI 21 . × 10−2
Length of the solenoid B end = 0 = = 1.05 × 10−2 T
2 2
350 × 4 (iii) The outside field near the centre of a long solenoid is
= = 2800 turns/m
0.5 negligible as compared to the internal field.
CHECK POINT 4.1

1. Which of the following gives the value of magnetic field due 8. In the figure shown, there are two semicircles of radii r1
to a small current element according to Biot-Savart’s law? and r2 in which a current i is flowing. The magnetic
i∆ l sin θ µ 0 i∆ l sin θ induction at the centre O will be
(a) (b)
r2 4π r
µ 0 i∆ l sin θ µ i∆ l sin θ
(c) (d) 0
4π r2 4π r3
r1
2. Magnetic field at a distance r from an infinitely long straight
conductor carrying steady current varies as O
(a)1 / r 2 (b)1 / r r2
(c)1 / r 3 (d)1 / r
3. The strength of the magnetic field at a distance r near a long µ 0i µ 0i
straight current carrying wire is B. The magnetic field at a (a) (r1 + r2) (b) (r1 − r2)
distance r/ 2 will be 4 4
B B µ 0i  r1 + r2  µ 0i  r2 − r1 
(a) (b) (c)  rr  (d)  rr 
2 4 4  12  4  12 
(c) 2B (d) 4B
9. A current of 0.1 A circulates around a coil of 100 turns and
4. The current is flowing in south direction along a power line. having a radius equal to 5 cm. The magnetic field set up at
The direction of magnetic field above the power line the centre of the coil is (µ 0 = 4 π × 10−7 Wb/A-m)
(neglecting earth’s field) is
(a) 5π × 10−5 T (b) 8 π × 10−5 T
(a) south (b) east
(c) north (d) west (c) 4 π × 10−5 T (d) 2π × 10−5 T
5. Two infinitely long, thin, insulated, straight wires lie in the 10. Two concentric coils each of 10 turns are situated in the
XY-plane along the X and Y-axes, respectively. Each wire same plane. Their radii are 2 cm and 4 cm and they carry
carries a current I respectively in the positive x-direction and 0.2 A and 0.3 A currents respectively in opposite directions.
positive y-direction. The magnetic field will be zero at all The magnetic field (in Wb/m2) at the centre is
points on the straight line with equation (a) (35/4) µ 0 (b) (µ 0 / 80) (c) (7/80) µ 0 (d) (25/2) µ 0
(a) y = x (b) y = – x
(c) y = x – 1 (d) y = – x + 1 11. A given length of a wire carries a steady current. It is bent
first to form a circular plane coil of one turn. If a loop of
6. The magnetic field produced at the centre of a current same length is now bent more sharply to give a double
carrying circular coil of radius r is
loop of smaller radius, then the magnetic field at the centre
(a) directly proportional to r (b) inversely proportional to r
(c) directly proportional to r 2 (d) inversely proportional to r 2
caused by the same current is
(a) a quarter of its first value
7. A particle carrying a charge equal to 100 times the charge on (b) unaltered
an electron, is rotating one rotation per second in a circular (c) four times of its first value
path of radius 0.8 m. The value of the magnetic field (d) two times of its first value
produced at the centre will be
(µ 0 = permeability for vacuum) 12. An arc of a circle of radius R subtends an angle π / 2 at the
10−7 centre. It carries a current i. The magnetic field at the
−17
(a) T (b) 10 µ0 T centre will be
µ0 µ 0i µ 0i µ 0i 2µ 0 i
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(c) 10−6µ 0 T (d) 10−7µ 0 T 2R 8R 4R 5R
13. A current i ampere flows in a circular arc of radius R, which (a) 1 (b) 2
subtends an angle 3π / 2 radian at its centre. The magnetic 2
induction B at the centre is 1
(c) (d) 2 2
2 2
17. A circular current carrying coil has a radius R. The distance
i from the centre of the coil on the axis of the coil, where the
R
π/2 magnetic induction is (1/8)th of its value at the centre of
O coil is
(a) 3R (b) R/ 3 (c) (2/ 3)R (d) R/ 2 3
18. Which of the following figures shows the magnetic flux
µ 0i µ 0i density B at a distance r from a long straight rod carrying a
(a) (b) steady current i ?
R 2R
2µ 0 i 3µ 0 i B B
(c) (d)
R 8R
14. A current I flows through a closed loop as shown in figure. (a) (b)
The magnetic field at the centre O is
r r
I
B B
O (c) (d)
R 2θ
r r
µ 0I µ 0I 19. While using Ampere’s law to determine the magnetic field

(a) (π – θ + tan θ) (b) (π – θ + sin θ) inside a straight long solenoid, the loop that is taken is
2πR 2πR
(a) a circular loop, co-axial with the solenoid
µ I
(c) 0 (θ + sin θ) (d) None of these (b) a rectangular loop in a plane is perpendicular to the axis of
2πR the solenoid
15. Magnetic field due to a ring having n turns at a distance x (c) a rectangular loop in a plane containing the axis of the
on its axis is proportional to (if r = radius of ring) solenoid, the loop being totally within the solenoid
r r (d) a rectangular loop in a plane containing the axis of the
(a) (b)
(x 2 + r 2) (x 2 + r 2)3/ 2 solenoid, the loop being partly inside the solenoid and
partly outside it
nr 2 n2r 2
(c) (d) 20. A toroid has a core of inner radius 25 cm and outer radius
(x + r 2)3/ 2
2
(x + r 2)3/ 2
2
26 cm around which 3500 turns of a wire are wound. If the
16. The ratio of the magnetic field at centre of a current current in the wire is 11 A, the magnetic field inside the
carrying coil of the radius a and at a distance a from centre core of the toroid is
of the coil to the axis of coil is (a)1.5 × 10−3 T (b) 3.0 × 10−2 T
(c) 4.5 × 10−2 T (d) 5.0 × 10−2 T
FORCE ON A MOVING CHARGE IN A

UNIFORM MAGNETIC FIELD
If a particle carrying a positive charge q and moving with (c) v = 0, i.e. charged particle is at rest.
velocity v enters in a magnetic field B, then it experiences (d) θ = 0° or 180°, i.e. particle is moving parallel or
a magnetic force Fm which is given by the expression anti-parallel to the direction of magnetic field.
Fm = q (v × B ) (iii) Fm is maximum at θ = 90° and this maximum value
is Bqv.
(i) The magnitude of Fm is
F m = Bqv sin θ Rules to find the direction of
where, θ is the angle between v and B. magnetic force (F m )
(ii) Fm is zero, when From the property of cross product, we can infer that Fm is
(a) B = 0, i.e. no magnetic field is present. perpendicular to both v and B or it is perpendicular to the
(b) q = 0, i.e. particle is neutral.
plane formed by v and B.
The exact direction of Fm can be determined by any of the Given,

q
= 0.2 C /kg
following methods m
(i) Direction of Fm = (sign of q) (direction of v × B ) ...(i) v = (2i$ − 3$j ) ms−1 and B = (5i$ + 2j$ ) T
We can say that, if q is positive in Eq. (i), magnetic Therefore, a = 0.2(2i$ − 3j$ ) × (5i$ + 2j$ )
force is along v × B and if q is negative, magnetic
force is in a opposite direction to v × B. = 0.2 [4k$ + 15k$ ] = 3.8 k$ ms−2
(ii) Fleming’s left hand rule According to this rule, if Example 4.24 When a proton has a velocity
the forefinger, the central finger and the thumb of v = (2i$ + 3$j ) × 10 6 ms −1, it experiences a force
the left hand are stretched in such a way that they F = – (1.28 × 10 –13 k$ ) N. When its velocity is along the
are mutually perpendicular to each other, then the Z-axis, then it experiences a force along the X-axis. What is
central finger gives the direction of velocity of the magnetic field?
positive charge (v ), forefinger gives the direction of Sol. Magnetic force, Fm = q (v × B)
magnetic field (B ) and the thumb will give the
direction of magnetic force (Fm ). For F to be along (−k$ ), magnetic field must be along (−j$ ).
m
Fm (Direction of magnetic force) Now, substituting all the values in above equation, we get
− (1.28 × 10–13 k$ ) = (1.6 × 10 –19 ) [(2i$ + 3$j ) × (–B $j )] × 106
∴ 1.28 = 1.6 × 2 × B
B (Direction of magnetic field) 1.28
or B= = 0.4
3.2
Therefore, the magnetic field, B = −B $j = (− 0.4 $j ) T
v
(Velocity of the charged particle)
Example 4.25 A charged particle is projected in a magnetic
Fig. 4.29 Direction of Fm by Fleming’s left hand rule field
B = (3 $i + 4$j ) × 10 –2 T
(iii) Right hand rule Wrap the fingers of your right
hand around the line perpendicular to the plane of v and the acceleration of the particle is found to be
and B as shown in figure, so that they curl around a = (x$i + 2$j) ms −2 .
with the sense of rotation from v to B through the
smaller angle between them. Your thumb, then points Find the value of x.
in the direction of the force Fm on a positive charge. Sol. As, Fm ⊥ B
Fm
Fm = v × B i.e. the acceleration a ⊥ B ⇒ a ⋅ B = 0
or (x $i + 2$j ) ⋅ (3$i + 4$j ) × 10−2 = 0
Right hand rule
v or (3x + 8) × 10−2 = 0
B 8
∴ Value of x = −
B 3
v Example 4.26 A magnetic field of (4.0 × 10 −3 k$ )T exerts a
force (4.0 i$ + 3.0 j$ ) × 10 −10 N on a particle having a charge
Fig. 4.30 Direction of Fm by right hand rule 10 −9 C and moving in the XY-plane. Find the velocity of the
ds particle.
Note If Fm ⊥ v ⇒ F ⊥ . Therefore, Fm ⊥ ds or the work done by the
dt Sol. Given, B = (4 × 10−3 k$ ) T,
q = 10−9 C
magnetic force in a static magnetic field is zero.
i.e. WFm = 0 and magnetic force, Fm = (4.0 i$ + 3.0 j$ ) × 10−10 N
Example 4.23 A charged particle of specific charge Let velocity of the particle in XY-plane be
(i.e. charge per unit mass) 0.2 C/kg has velocity v = v i$ + v j$
x y
(2i$ − 3j$ ) ms −1 at some instant in a uniform magnetic field Then, from the relation,
(5i$ + 2j$ ) T. Find the acceleration of the particle at this Fm = q (v × B)
instant. (4.0 i$ + 3.0 j$ ) × 10−10 = 10−9 [(v xi$ + v y j$ ) × (4 × 10−3 k$ )]
F q
Sol. The acceleration of the particle, a = = (v × B) = (4v y × 10−12 i$ − 4v x × 10−12 j$ )
m m
Comparing the coefficients of i$ and $j, we have (ii) Find all positions at which a third long parallel wire carrying
−10 −12 a current of magnitude 2.5 A may be placed so that magnetic
4 × 10 = 4v y × 10 field at R is zero.
∴ v y = 102 = 100 ms−1 P Q R
−10 −12 ⊗ ⊗
and 3.0 × 10 = − 4v x × 10 i1 = 2.5 A i2 = i
∴ v x = − 75 ms−1 2m
5m
∴ v = v i$ + v j$
x y
Sol. (i) Magnetic field at R due to wires,
= (− 75i$ + 100$j) m/s µ i i  2.5 i 
B = 0  1 + 2  = 2 × 10−7  + 
Example 4.27 A charged particle carrying charge, q = 1µC 2π  5 2   5 2
moves in uniform magnetic field with velocity, v1 = 10 6 ms −1 = 10−7 (1 + i ), along Y-axis
at an angle 45° with X-axis in the XY-plane and
Q
experiences a force F1 = 5 2 mN along the negative Z-axis. P
Ä Ä
R
v = 4 ´ 105 m/s
When the same particle move with velocity, v 2 = 10 6 ms −1
B
along the Z-axis, then it experiences a force F 2 in
y-direction. Find Angle between v and B is 90°.
(i) the magnitude and direction of the magnetic field. Magnetic force, F m = Bqv
(ii) the magnitude of the force F 2. 3.2 × 10−20 = 10−7 (1 + i )(1.6 × 10−19 )(4 × 105 )
Sol. F 2 is in y-direction when velocity is along Z-axis. 1+ i = 5
Therefore, magnetic field should be along X-axis. So, let ∴ Current, i = 4 A
B = B i$ (ii) Third wire can be placed left of R or right of R at
0
distance d. If it is placed left of R, current in it should be
(i) Given, v1 = v1 cos 45° i$ + v1 sin 45° j$ upward direction or if it is placed right of R, current in
it should be in downward direction.
106 $ 106 $
= i+ j Now, BR = 0
2 2
µ 0 2.5 4 µ 0 2.5
⇒ + =
and F1 = − 5 2 × 10−3 k$ 2π  5 2  2π d
From the equation, F1 = q (v1 × B) ∴ Position, d = 1 m
We have,
106 106   Motion of a charged particle in uniform
(−5 2 × 10−3 ) k$ = (10−6 )  i$ + j$ × (B 0i$ )
 2 2   magnetic field
B As we know that, the magnetic force on a charged particle
= − 0 k$
2 is perpendicular to its velocity. Thus, this force does not
∴
B0
= 5 2 × 10−3
do any work on the particle. Hence, the kinetic energy or
2 the speed of the particle does not change due to the
or B 0 = 10−2 T magnetic force.
Therefore, the magnetic field, Let a charged particle q be thrown in magnetic field B
with a velocity v as shown in the figure. The magnetic
B = (10−2 i$ )T
force acting on the particle is given by F = Bqv sinθ,
(ii) Here, F 2 = B 0qv 2 sin 90° where θ is the angle between the velocity and the
As, the angle between B and v in this case is 90°. magnetic field.
∴ F 2 = (10−2 ) (10− 6 ) (106 ) = 10−2 N v
Example 4.28 Two long parallel wires carrying current

2.5 A and i in the same direction (directed into plane of the
θ
paper) are held at P and Q respectively such that they are q
B
perpendicular to the plane of paper. The points P and Q are
located at distance of 5 m and 2 m respectively from a Fig. 4.31 Charged particle with velocity v at
collinear point R. angle θ with the magnetic field
(i) An electron moving with a velocity of 4 × 105 m/s along Depending on the initial conditions, the charged particle
positive x-direction experiences a force of magnitude can follow different trajectories in a region of uniform
3.2 × 10−20 N at the point R. Find the value of i. magnetic field. Let us take them one-by-one.
Case I When θ is 0° or 180° Bq

∴ ω=
When θ = 0 ° or 180°, the magnetic force Fm = 0. Hence, m
1
path of the charged particle is a straight line (undeviated) (iii) Frequency of rotation, f =
when it enters parallel or anti-parallel to magnetic field as T
Bq
shown below. ⇒ f =
B B 2πm
Note When a charged particle is projected perpendicular to a
q = 0° q = 180° magnetic field, then
or (i) its path is circular in a plane perpendicular to the plane of magnetic
q
–+ v
+– q
field.
v
(ii) the speed and kinetic energy of the particle remain constant.
Fm = 0 (iii) the velocity and momentum of the particle change only in direction.
Fig. 4.32 A charged particle moving parallel or anti-parallel to (iv) the time period of revolution, angular velocity and frequency of
magnetic field revolution are independent of velocity of the particle and radius of
circular path.
Case II When θ is 90° Important points related to motion of a charged
When θ = 90°, the magnetic force, particle in uniform magnetic field
Fm = Bqv sin 90 ° = Bqv The speed of the particle in magnetic field does not
This magnetic force is perpendicular to the velocity at every change but the particle gets deviated. The deviation θ can
instant. Hence, path of the charged particle is a circle. The be found in two ways,
necessary centripetal force is provided by the magnetic
force. q r
× × × v
× × × ×B ×
× × × × × x q
× + × × v× × ×
r
v × F× ×
F + × × ×
× × F × ×
× × × × × q, m + v
× × + v × × × × B
Fig. 4.33 A charged particle is moving in a circular path
× × ×
Hence, if r be the radius of the circle, then x
mv 2 mv Fig. 4.34 Deviation θ of the charged particle in magnetic field
= Bqv ⇒ r =
r Bq (i) After time t,
This expression of r can be written in following different  Bq   Bq 
ways Deviation, θ = ωt =   t Q ω = 
mv p 2Km m  m
r = = =
Bq Bq Bq (ii) In terms of the length of the magnetic field (i.e.
when the particle leaves the magnetic field), the
Here, p = momentum of particle and
x
p2 deviation, θ = sin −1   , if x ≤ r
K = KE of particle = or p = 2Km r 
2m
Also, if the charged particle is accelerated by a potential × × × ×
v
difference ofV volts, it acquires a KE given by
× × × ×
2qVm r
K = qV ⇒ r =
Bq v
× × × ×
(i) Further, time period of the circular path, x>r
 mv  Fig. 4.35 Charged particle having 180° deviation
2π  
2πr  Bq  2πm
T = = ⇒ T = Since, sinθ ≥ 1, this relation can be used only when
v v Bq x ≤ r.
2π Bq For x > r , the deviation will be 180° as shown in
(ii) Angular speed of the particle, ω = =
T m Fig. 4.34.
Example 4.29 What is the smallest value of B that can be set  qBd 
⇒ θ = sin−1 
up at the equator to permit a proton having speed of  mv 
10 7 m s −1 to circulate around the earth? (R = 6.4 × 10 6 m,
m p = 1.67 × 10 –27 kg ) θ mθ m  qBd 
Time interval, t = = = sin−1 
mv ω Bq qB  m 
Sol. From the relation, R =
Bq (ii) Given,V = 104 V, q = 2e = 2 × 1.6 × 10−19 C
⇒ B=
mv d = 0.1 m, B = 0.1T and m α = 6.4 × 10−27 kg
qR
1
Substituting the given values in above equation, we get Kinetic energy, K = m α v 2 = qV = 2eV
2
(1.67 × 10–27 ) (107 )
B= 4eV
(1.6 × 10–19 ) (6.4 × 106 ) ⇒ v=
mα
= 1.6 × 10–8 T m αv m αv
∴ R= =
Example 4.30 A proton and an α-particle, accelerated Bq 2eB
through same potential difference, enter in a region of d d 2eBd
uniform magnetic field with their velocities perpendicular to Now, sin θ = = =
R m α v /B ⋅ 2e m α v
the field. Compare the radii of circular paths followed by
them. 2eBd e
= = ⋅ Bd
Sol. Let mass of proton be m and charge on proton be e. 4eV m αV
mα
Then, mass of α-particle = 4 m and charge on α-particle = 2e mα
When a charge q is accelerated by potential differenceV, it
1.6 × 10−19 1
acquires a kinetic energy, E k = qV = × 0.1 × 0.1 =
6.4 × 10−27 × 104 2
∴ Momentum is given by mv = 2mE k = 2mqV
∴ Change in direction, θ = 30°
mv 2mqV 2mV
Radius, r = = = (iii) Given, m = 10 g = 10 × 10−3 = 10−2 kg
qB qB qB 2
q = 4 µC = 4 × 10−6 C, v = 270 m/s
rp 2mV 2eB 2 1
Thus, = × = Magnetic field, B = 500 µT = 500 × 10−6 = 5 × 10−4 T
rα eB 2 2(4m )V 2
d = 100 m
Example 4.31 (i) A charged particle having mass m and mv 10−2 × 270
charge q is accelerated by a potential difference V, it flies Radius, R = = = 13.5 × 108 m
Bq 5 × 10−4 × 4 × 10−6
through a uniform transverse magnetic field B. The field
occupies a region of space d. Find the time interval for d 100 10−6
sin θ = = 8
=
which it remains inside the magnetic field. R 13.5 × 10 13.5
(ii) An α-particle is accelerated by a potential difference Therefore, θ is very small.
of 104 V. Find the change in its direction of motion if it
d2 (100)2
enters normally in a region of thickness 0.1 m having Now, deflection = =
transverse magnetic induction of 0.1 T. 2R 2 × 13.5 × 108
(Take, m α = 6.4 × 10−27 kg ) = 3.7 × 10−6 m
(iii) A 10 g bullet having a charge of 4 µC is fired at a speed of
Case III When the charged particle is moving at an
270 ms −1 in a horizontal direction. A vertical magnetic field
of 500 µT exists in the space. Find the deflection of the
angle to the field other than 0° , 90° or 180°
bullet due to the magnetic field as it travels through 100 m. In this case, velocity can be resolved in two components,
Make appropriate approximations. one along B and another perpendicular to B. Let the two
components be v || and v ⊥ .
Sol. (i) Kinetic energy of the charged particle,
1 B v sin θ
K = mv 2 = qV v
2 v
2qV
⇒ v= q
m q, m + θ v cos θ
d d Bqd
sin θ = = = Fig. 4.36 Components of velocity of the charged particle
R mv / Bq mv
Then, v || = v cos θ Time taken to complete one revolution,

and v ⊥ = v sin θ 2πr 2 × 314. × 0.012
T = = s
The component perpendicular to field (v ⊥ ) gives a circular v⊥ 2 3 × 105
path and the component parallel to field (v || ) gives a Because of v||, protons will also move in the direction of
straight line path. The resultant path is a helix as shown in magnetic field.
figure. ∴ Pitch of helix, p = v|| × T
y
2 × 105 × 2 × 314
. × 0.012
p B = m = 0.044 m = 4.4 cm
2 3 × 105
r
v sin θ
Example 4.33 A beam of protons with a velocity
6 × 10 5 ms −1 enters a uniform magnetic field of 0.4 T
θ
x
at an angle of 37° to the magnetic field. Find the radius of
v cos θ the helical path taken by proton beam. Also, find the pitch of
helix.
(Use, sin 37° = 3/5, cos 37° = 4/5 and m p ≅ 16. × 10 −27 kg)
Fig. 4.37 Helical path of the charged particle mv ⊥ mv sin θ
Sol. Radius of helical path, r = =
(i) The radius of this helical path, Bq Bq
(1.6 × 10−27 ) (6 × 105 ) (sin 37° )
mv ⊥ mv sin θ =
r = = (0.4) (1.6 × 10−19 )
Bq Bq
= 9 × 10−3m = 0.9 cm
(ii) Time period and frequency do not depend on
2 πm 2π(1.6 × 10−27 )
velocity and so they are given as Time period, T = = −19
= 5π × 10−8 s
Bq (0.4)(1.6 × 10 )
2πm Bq
T = and f = Pitch of helical path,
Bq 2πm
p = v||T = v cos θT = (6 × 105 )(cos 37° )(5π × 10−8 )
(iii) There is one more term associated with a helical
path, that is pitch (p ) of the helical path. Pitch is = 0.024πm
defined as the distance travelled along magnetic field Example 4.34 A particle of specific charge α enters a
in one complete cycle, i.e. uniform magnetic field B = – B 0 k$ with velocity v = v 0 i$ from
2πm the origin. Find the time dependence of velocity and position
p = v ||T = (v cos θ ) of the particle.
Bq
Sol. In such type of problems, first of all see the angle between v
2πmv cos θ and B because it only decides the path of the particle. Here,
∴ p=
Bq the angle is 90°. Therefore, the path is a circle. If it is a
circle, see the plane of the circle (perpendicular to the
Note After every pitch, the particle touches the X-axis (as shown in Fig.
magnetic field).
4.36), i.e. X = np, where n = 0, 1, 2 , … .
Here, the plane is X-Y.
Example 4.32 A beam of protons with a velocity of Then, see the sense of the rotation.
4 × 10 5 ms −1 enters in a region of uniform magnetic field of
y
0.3 T. The velocity makes an angle of 60° with the magnetic C v0
field. Find the radius of the helical path taken by the proton θ r
beam and the pitch of the helix. θ
x P
Sol. Velocity component along the field, v|| = 4 × 105 × cos 60° ⊗ B = –B0^
k
5 −1 Fm y
= 2 × 10 ms
O v0 x
Velocity component perpendicular to the field,
v ⊥ = (4 × 105 ) sin 60° = 2 3 × 105 ms −1 OC = CP = radius of circle
Proton will describe a circle in plane perpendicular to Here, it will be anti-clockwise as shown in figure because at
magnetic field with radius, origin, the magnetic force is along positive y-direction (which
can be seen from Fleming’s left hand rule). Now, the
mv ⊥ (1.67 × 10−27 ) × (2 3 × 105 )
r= = = 1.2 cm deviation and radius of the particle are
qB (1.6 × 10−19 ) × (0.3)
v0  q 2mv 0
θ = ωt = B 0αt and r = Qα =  or length ABC = r (2α ) = .α
B 0α  m Bq
Now, according to the figure, ∴ Time spent by the particle in magnetic field,
velocity of the particle at any time t, ABC 2mα
t ABC = =
v (t ) = v xi$ + v y $j = v 0 cos θ i$ + v 0 sin θ j$ v0 Bq
or v (t ) = v 0 cos (B 0αt ) i$ + v 0 sin (B 0αt ) j$ Alternate method

T α
t ABC =   (2α ) =   ⋅T
Position of particle at time t,  2π   π
r (t ) = x i$ + y $j = r sin θ i$ + (r − r cos θ )j$  α   2πm  2αm
=   =
Substituting the values of r and θ, we get  π   Bq  Bq
v 2mv 0
r (t ) = 0 [sin (B 0αt )i$ + { 1 − cos (B 0αt )}j$] (iii) Distance AC = 2 (AD ) = 2 (r sin α ) = sin α
B 0α Bq
Example 4.35 A charged particle (q, m ) enters a uniform

magnetic field B at angle α as shown in figure with speed v 0 . Motion of a charged particle in
Find
β
× × × × combined electric and magnetic
C
× × × × fields : Lorentz force
× B× × × Consider a point charge q moving with velocity v and is
× × × × located at position vector r at a given time t. If electric
field E and magnetic field B are existing at that point, then
A × × × × B
v0 force on the electric charge q is given by
α
× × × ×
(q, m) F = q [E + v × B] = Felectric + Fmagnetic
(i) the angle β at which it leaves the magnetic field,
(ii) time spent by the particle in magnetic field and
This force was first given by H A Lorentz, hence it is
(iii) the distance AC. called Lorentz force.
Sol. (i) Here, velocity of the particle is in the plane of paper Here, magnetic force, Fm = q (v × B ) = Bqv sin θ and
while the magnetic field is perpendicular to the paper electric force, Fe = qE.
inwards, i.e. angle between v and B is 90°. So, the path is a The direction of magnetic force is same as that of v × B, if
mv 0 charge is positive and opposite to that of v × B, if charge q
circle. The radius of the circle, r =
Bq is negative.
v0 b Case I When v , E and B are all collinear
90° C
In this situation, the magnetic force on it will be
r
zero and only electric force will act. So, acceleration,
a B
F qE
O a D
a= e = .
r
m m
90° A The particle will pass through the field following a
a straight line path (parallel field) with change in its
v0 speed. So, in this situation, speed, velocity,
Now, O is the centre of the circle. momentum and kinetic energy all will change without
In ∆AOC , ∠OCD = ∠OAD change in direction of motion as shown below.
or 90° − β = 90° − α E
∴ β =α v
q
(ii) ∠COD = ∠DOA = α B
(as ∠OCD = ∠OAD = 90° − α) Fig. 4.38 Motion of a charged particle with v || E ||B
∴ ∠AOC = 2α
Case II When v , E and B are mutually perpendicular

In this situation, if E and B are such that
Cyclotron
F = Fe + Fm = 0, i.e. a = (F /m ) = 0. Cyclotron is a device used for accelerating positively
y E
charged particle (like α-particles, deutrons, etc.) with the
help of uniform magnetic field upto energy of the order of
+q v +q
Fe
x
MeV. It consists of two hollow metallic dees D 1 and D 2 .
These are placed in a uniform magnetic field which is
B Fm perpendicular to the plane of dees. An alternating voltage
z
is applied between the dees.
Fig. 4.39 Motion of a charged particle with v ⊥ E ⊥B
As it uses the combination of both the fields (electric and
The particle will pass through the field with same velocity magnetic), which are perpendicular to each other, hence
without any deviation in its path as shown in figure. are called crossed fields. The charged particle to be
In this situation, as Fe = Fm , i.e.qE = qvB accelerated is produced at centre point between the dees.
The particle accelerates along circular path to acquire
v = E /B enough energy to carry out nuclear disintegration, etc.
This principle is used in velocity-selector to get a charged
beam having a specific velocity. N
Deflector
Note If only magnetic field is present, we have to put E = 0 ⇒ Dees
F = q( v × B) . Target
Similarly, if B = 0 ⇒ F = qE
S
Example 4.36 A charge particle having charge 2 C is thrown
with velocity (2i$ + 3j$ ) m/s inside a region having E = 2j$ V/m D1
and magnetic field 5k$ T. Find the initial Lorentz force D2 B
acting on the particle.
Sol. Lorentz force is given by E
F = q (E + v × B) = 2 [2j$ + (2i$ + 3j$ ) × 5k$ ] High frequency S
oscillator
= 2 [2$j + 10 (− $j ) + 15i$]
Fig. 4.40 Path described by a charged particle in a cyclotron
= (30i$ − 16j$ ) N
Cyclotron frequency Time taken by ion to describe a
Example 4.37 A proton beam passes without deviation semicircular path is given by
through a region of space, where there are uniform
transverse mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic πr πm  mv 
t= = Q r = 
fields with E = 220 kV/m and B = 50 mT. Then, the beam v qB  qB 
strikes a grounded target. Find the force imparted by the
beam on the target if the beam current is equal to If T = time period of oscillating electric field, then
i = 0.80 mA .
2πm
Sol. Since, proton is moving in a straight line, hence net force is T = 2t =
zero. qB
∴ qE = Bqv
1 qB
⇒ v=
E ∴ Cyclotron frequency, ν = =
B T 2πm
Also, current associated with the beam, Note Cyclotron is based on the fact that the time period of one
i = ne ⇒ n = i /e revolution is independent of its speed or radius of the orbit.
where, n is number of protons/time. Maximum energy of particle Maximum energy gained
Momentum of a proton = mv  q 2B 2  2
Force, F = nmv by the charged particle, E max =   r0
 2m 
i m E 0.80 × 10−3 × 1.67 × 10−27 × 220 × 103
⇒ F = =
eB 1.6 × 10−19 × 50 × 10−3 where, r 0 is maximum radius of the circular path followed
by positive ion.
= 3.67 × 10−5 N
Limitations of Cyclotron Bq 3.5 × 1.6 × 10−19

Sol. The frequency of the field, f = =
The cyclotron has following limitations . × 1.6 × 10−27
2πm 2 × 314
(i) It is suitable only for accelerating heavy particles = 5.57 × 107 Hz
(like proton, deuteron, α-particle, etc). Electrons
cannot be accelerated by the cyclotron because the Example 4.39 Magnetic field applied on a cyclotron is
mass of the electron is very small and a small 0.7 T and radius of its dees is 1.8 m. What will be energy
increase in energy of the electron makes the electron (in MeV) of the emergent protons?
to move with a very high speed. As a result of it, the Sol. Energy of the emergent protons,
electrons go quickly out of step with oscillating q 2B 2r02 (1.6 × 10−19 )2 × (0.7)2 × (1.8)2
electric field. E= = J
2m 2 × 1.67 × 10−27
(ii) When a positive ion is accelerated by the cyclotron, (1.6 × 10−19 )2 × (0.7)2 × (1.8)2
then it moves with greater speed. = MeV
2 × 1.67 × 10−27 × 1.6 × 10−13
As the speed of ion becomes comparable with that of
speed of light, the mass of the ion increases = 76.05 MeV
according to the relation, Example 4.40 Deuterons in a cyclotron describe a circle of
m0 radius 32 cm just before emerging from the dees of the
m= cyclotron. The frequency of the applied alternating voltage is
(1 − v 2 /c 2 ) 10 MHz. Find
where, m 0 = rest mass of the ion, (i) the magnetic flux density ( i.e. the magnetic field ).
m = mass of the ion while moving with velocity v (ii) the energy and speed of the deuterons upon emergence.
Sol. (i) Frequency of the applied emf = Cyclotron frequency
and c = velocity of light.
Bq
Now, the time taken by the ion to describe or f=
2π m
semi-circular path,
2πmf
πm π m0 ∴ B=
t= = ⋅ q
qB qB (1 − v 2 /c 2 )
(2) (3.14) (2 × 1.67 × 10−27 ) (10 × 106 )
=
It shows that as v increases, t increases. Hence, the 1.6 × 10−19
positive ion will take longer time to describe = 1.31 T
semi-circular path than the time for half-cycle of (ii) The speed of deuterons on the emergence from the
oscillating electric field. BqR
cyclotron, v = = 2π f R
As a result of it, the ion will not arrive in the gap m
between the two dees exactly at the instant when = (2) (3.14) (10 × 106 ) (32 × 10−2 )
the polarity of the two dees is reversed and hence, it = 2.01 × 107 ms−1
will not be accelerated further. Therefore, the ion 1
cannot move with a speed beyond a certain limit in a ∴ Energy of deuterons = mv 2
2
cyclotron. 1
= × (2 × 1.67 × 10–27 ) (2.01 × 107 )2 J
Example 4.38 The magnetic field applied on a cyclotron is 2
3.5 T. What will be the frequency of electric field that must 6.75 × 10−13
be applied between the dees in order to accelerate protons? = MeV = 4.22 MeV
1.6 × 10−13
CHECK POINT 4.2

1. A strong magnetic field is applied on a stationary electron, 9. A proton and an electron both moving with the same
then the electron velocity v enter into a region of magnetic field directed
(a) moves in the direction of the field perpendicular to the velocity of the particles. They will now
(b) moves in an opposite direction of the field move in circular orbits such that
(c) remains stationary (a) their time periods will be same
(d) starts spinning (b) the time period for proton will be higher
2. A particle of mass m and charge Q moving with a velocity v (c) the time period for electron will be higher
(d) their orbital radii will be same
enters a region of uniform magnetic field of induction B.
Then, its path in the region is 10. If a charged particle is describing a circle of radius r in a
(a) always circular magnetic field with a time period T. Then,
(b) circular, if v × B = 0 (a) T 2 ∝ r 3 (b) T 2 ∝ r
(c) circular, if v ⋅ B = 0 (c) T ∝ r 2 (d) T ∝ r 0
11. A particle is projected in a plane perpendicular to a uniform
3. An electron is moving in a circular path of radius r with magnetic field. The area bounded by the path described by
speed v in a transverse magnetic field B. The value of e / m the particle is proportional to
for it will be (a) the velocity (b) the momentum
v B (c) the kinetic energy (d) None of these
(a) (b)
Br rv
vr 12. If electron velocity is (2$i + 3$j) and it is subjected to a
(c) Bvr (d) $ then
B magnetic field 4 k,
4. An electron and a proton with equal momentum enter (a) speed of electron will change
perpendicularly into a uniform magnetic field, then (b) path of electron will change
(a) the path of proton shall be more curved than that (c) Both (a) and (b)
of electron (d) None of the above
(b) the path of proton shall be less curved than that of electron
(c) Both are equally curved 13. A beam of protons with a velocity of 4 × 10 5 ms –1 enters a
(d) path of both will be straight line uniform magnetic field of 0.3 T at an angle of 60° to the
magnetic field. The radius of helical path taken by proton
5. A charged particle travels along a straight line with a speed beam is
v in a region, where both electric field E and magnetic field (a) 0.036 m (b) 0.012 m
B are present. It follows that (c) 0.024 m (d) 0.048 m
(a) |E | = |B |and the two fields are perpendicular
14. A proton and a deuteron, both having the same kinetic
(b) |E | = v |B|and the two fields are perpendicular energy, enter perpendicularly into a uniform magnetic field
(c) | B | = v | E |and the two fields are parallel B. For motion of proton and deuteron in circular path of
(d) | B | = v | E |and the two fields are perpendicular radius Rp and Rd , respectively. The correct relation is
6. A proton, a deuteron and an α-particle having the same (a) Rd = 2Rp (b) Rd = Rp / 2
kinetic energy, are moving in circular trajectories in a (c) Rd = Rp (d) Rd = 2Rp
uniform magnetic field. If rp , rd and rα denote the radii of
the trajectories of these particles respectively, then 15. Two ions having masses in the ratio 1 : 1 and charges in the
(a) rα = rp < rd (b) rα > rd > rp ratio 1 : 2 are projected perpendicular to the field of a
(c) rα = rd > rp (d) rp = rd = rα cyclotron with speeds in the ratio 2 : 3. The ratio of the radii
of circular paths along which the two particles move is
7. When a charged particle enters a uniform magnetic field, (a) 4 : 3 (b) 2 : 3
then its kinetic energy (c) 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
(a) remains constant (b) increases
16. Which of the particle will have minimum frequency of
(c) decreases (d) becomes zero
revolution when projected in a cyclotron with the same
8. A proton of energy 8 eV is moving in a circular path in velocity perpendicular to a magnetic field?
uniform magnetic field. The energy of an α-particle moving (a) Li + (b) Electron
in the same magnetic field and along the same path will be (c) Proton (d) He+
(a) 4 eV (b) 2 eV (c) 8 eV (d) 6 eV
FORCE ON A CURRENT CARRYING

CONDUCTOR IN A MAGNETIC FIELD
When a current carrying conductor is placed in a magnetic Fm (Direction of force
Thumb on conductor)
field, then it experiences a force in a direction
perpendicular to both the direction of magnetic field and (Direction of
that of length of the conductor. B magnetic field)
Forefinger
F i
i or l
(Direction of current)
B Central finger
Fig. 4.42 Fleming’s left hand rule
Right hand palm rule

i
Stretch the fingers and thumb of right hand at right angles
Fig. 4.41 Current carrying conductor in a uniform magnetic field to each other (as shown below). Now, if the fingers point
in the direction of magnetic field B and thumb in the
The magnetic force, F = ilB sin θ direction of current i, then normal to the palm will point
In vector form, F = i (l × B ) ...(i) in the direction of force.
Current
where, B = intensity of magnetic field,
i = current in the conductor,
l = length of the conductor
Magnetic
and θ = angle between the length of conductor and field
direction of magnetic field.
Cases Force
I. When θ = 90 ° or sin θ = 1, then F = ilB × 1 = ilB Fig. 4.43 Right hand palm rule for force on a
(maximum). current carrying conductor
Therefore, force will be maximum when the current
carrying conductor is perpendicular to magnetic field. Magnetic force on an arbitrarily shaped wire
II. When θ = 0° or sin θ = 0, then F = ilB × 0 = 0. For the magnetic force on an arbitrarily shaped wire
Thus, the force will be zero when the current segment, let us consider the magnetic force exerted on a
carrying conductor is parallel to the magnetic field. small segment of vector length d l.
B
D
Direction of force on a current carrying
C i
conductor in a magnetic field dl
The direction of this force can be found out either by

Fleming’s left hand rule or by right hand palm rule as A
discussed below
Fig. 4.44 Arbitary shaped wire in a uniform magnetic field
d Fm = i (d l × B ) …(ii)
Fleming’s left hand rule
To calculate the total force Fm acting on the wire shown in
The direction of Fm or F can be given by Fleming’s left figure, we will integrate Eq. (ii) over the length of the
hand rule. According to this rule, if the forefinger, the wire.
central finger and the thumb of the left hand are stretched
Fm = i  ∫ d l  × B
D
in such a way that they are mutually perpendicular to ∴ …(iii)
A
each other, then the central finger gives the direction of
current (or l), forefinger gives the direction of magnetic D
But the quantity ∫ d l represents the vector sum of all
field B and the thumb will give the direction of magnetic A
force Fm . length elements from A to D. From the polygon law of
vector addition, the sum is equal to the vector l directed Example 4.42 A square of side 2.0 m is placed in a uniform
from A to D. Thus, Fm = i (l × B ) magnetic field of 2.0 T in a direction perpendicular to the
plane of the square inwards. Equal current, i = 3.0 A is
or we can write, FACD = FAD = i (AD × B ) in uniform flowing in the directions shown in figure.
magnetic field.
Here, AD = effective length of the wire (L eff ). Find the magnitude of magnetic force on the loop.
× × × B ×
Magnetic force on a closed current carrying loop C D
When a closed current carrying loop is placed in uniform × × × ×
magnetic field, then the magnetic force on it is always
× × × ×
zero. As the vector sum of dl is always zero, i.e. ∫ dl = 0.
A E
× × × ×
∴ F = i ∫ dl × B = 0
Sol. Force on wire ACD = Force on AD = Force on AED
Magnetic force on different All these forces are acting along EC.
configurations of the curve ∴ Net force on the loop = 3 (FAD )
Now, consider magnetic forces on current carrying or F net = 3(i ) (AD ) (B ) = (3) (3.0) (2 2 ) (2.0) N = 36 2 N
conductors of different configurations as shown below.
Example 4.43 A straight wire of length 30 cm and mass
Here, magnetic force only depends upon effective length 60 mg lies in a direction 30° east of north. The earth’s
of the wires. magnetic field at this site is horizontal and has a magnitude
× B × × B × × F × × of 0.8 G. What current must be passed through the wire, so
that it may float in air? (Take, g = 10 ms −2 )
F i
× × × × × × × Sol. As shown in figure, if a current i is passed through the wire
i
from end P towards Q, it will experience a force Bi L sin θ
L O a vertically up and hence will float, if
× × × × × × ×
B
× × × × × × × F 30°
i
F = Bi L F = i(2a)B
P Q
(a) Straight wire (b) Semicircular wire mg
B × × × F × × ×
Bil sin θ = mg
mg 60 × 10−6 × 10
× × i × × × × ⇒ i= = = 50 A
Bl sin θ 0.8 × 10−4 × 30 × 10−2 × 1/2
L
× × × × × × Example 4.44 A straight wire of mass 200 g and length
F = Bi L 1.5 m carries a current of 2 A. It is suspended in mid air by
(c) Sinusoidal wire a uniform horizontal magnetic field B. What is the
Fig. 4.45 magnitude of the magnetic field?
l
Example 4.41 A wire of length a carries a current i along the
Y-axis. A magnetic field exists which is given by mg
B
B = B 0 (3 i$ + 2j$ + k)
$ T
Calculate magnetic force in vector form and its magnitude. Sol. Applying Fleming’s left hand rule, we find that upward
Sol. Length of the wire, l = a$j force F of magnitude IlB acts. For mid air suspension, this
Magnetic force on the wire, must be balanced by the force due to gravity.
mg
F = i (l × B) = i [a $j × B 0 (3i$ + 2$j + k$ )] ∴ mg = IlB ⇒ B =
Il
= ia B [− 3k$ + 0 + i] $
0 Given, m = 200 g = 0.2 kg, g = 9.8 ms−2, I = 2A, l = 1.5 m
= B 0ia (i$ − 3k$ ) Substituting these values in above equation, we get
∴ | F | = F = B 0ia (1) + (− 3) 2 2 0.2 × 9.8
B= = 0.65 T
2 × 1.5
= 10B 0ia
Example 4.45 In the figure shown, a semicircular wire loop Example 4.47 A wire PQ of mass 10 g is at rest on two parallel
is placed in a uniform magnetic field, B =1.0 T . The plane of metal rails. The separation between the rails is 4.9 cm . A
the loop is perpendicular to the magnetic field. Current magnetic field of 0.80 T is applied perpendicular to the
i = 2A flows in the loop in the directions shown. Find the plane of the rails, directed downwards. The resistance of the
magnitude of the magnetic force in both the cases (i) and (ii). circuit is slowly decreased. When the resistance decreases
The radius of the loop is 1.0 m. below to 20 Ω, the wire PQ begins to slide on the rails.
× × i = 2 A× × × i=2A× × Calculate the coefficient of friction between the wire and the
B rails.
× × × × × × × P
1m 1m
×
×
×
×
×
× × × × × × ×
6V
×
×
×
×
×
× × × × × × × 4.9 cm
(i) (ii)
×
×
×
×
×
Sol. Refer Fig. (i) It forms a closed loop and the current
×
×
×
×
×
completes the loop. Therefore, net force on the loop in Q
uniform field should be zero.
Refer Fig. (ii) In this case, although it forms a closed loop but Sol. Wire PQ begins to slide when magnetic force is just equal to
current does not complete the loop. Hence, net force is not zero. the force of friction, i.e. µmg = ilB sin θ = ilB (Q θ = 90° )
V 6
× ×
C
× × B Here, i= = = 0.3 A
R 20
× × × × ilB (0.3) (4.9 × 10–2 ) (0.8)
∴ µ= = = 0.12
× × × × mg (10 × 10–3 ) (9.8)
A D
Example 4.48 The magnetic field existing in a region is given
× × × ×
x x2  $
by, B = B 0  + 2  k. A square loop of edge L carrying a
FACD = FAD L L 
∴ Floop = FACD + FAD = 2FAD current i is placed with its edges parallel to the X and Y-axes.
∴ |Floop | = 2 |FAD | = 2ilB sin θ (Q l = 2r = 2.0 m) Find the net magnetic force experienced by the loop.
= (2) (2) (2) (1) sin 90° = 8 N Sol. Consider the situation shown below
Y
Example 4.46 A wire carrying a current i is kept in the B
 2π 
XY-plane along the curve y = (2 cm ) A sin  x . B C
λ 
A magnetic field B exists in the z-direction. Find the L
magnitude of the magnetic force on the portion of the wire
between x = 0 and x = λ /2.
D
A X
Sol. Consider the sinusoidal shaped wire as shown below L
B
For wire AB, x = 0, B = 0 ⇒ F AB = 0
 L L2 
i For wire CD, x = L, B = B 0  + 2  k$ = 2B 0k$
L L 
A X ⇒ FCD = 2B 0i L , towards right

l/2 Force on BC is equal and opposite to force on DA.
∴ (F net )loop = FCD = 2B 0i L, towards right
l
Example 4.49 A conducting rod of
B
Effective length of the wire for x = λ /2 is
length l and mass m is moving down a
smooth inclined plane of inclination θ
λ
Leff = with constant velocity v. A current i is
2 flowing in the conductor in a direction v θ
∴ Magnetic force on the wire, perpendicular to paper inwards. A
λ iB λ vertically upwards magnetic field B l
F = i (Leff ) B = i   B = , upward exists in space. Then, find magnitude
 2 2
of magnetic field B.
Sol. Consider the forces acting on the rod as given below Example 4.50 Currents of 10 A and 2 A are passed through
B
two parallel wires A and B respectively in opposite
q
directions. If the wire A is infinitely long and length of the
cos wire B is 2m, then find the force acting on the conductor B
N Fm
which is situated at 10 cm distance from A.
q
Fm (magnetic Sol. Force on a conductor of length l carrying current I 2 and
force)
q placed at a distance r parallel to another infinitely long
q
conductor carrying current I1,
q
in µ 2I I
F = 0 ⋅ 12l
sq
mg sin q …(i)
m s
mg co 4π r
F
(component of mg)
mg
Hence, from figure, i i

F m cos θ = mg sin θ …(i) F F
Also, F m = Bil …(ii) ×
b
mg
B= tan θ
il X Y
Here, I1 = 10 A, I 2 = 2 A, l = 2 m, r = 10 cm = 0.1 m
Force between two parallel Substituting all these values in Eq. (i), we get
current carrying conductors F = 10−7 ×
2 × 10 × 2 × 2
= 8 × 10−5 N
Consider two long wires 1 and 2 kept parallel to each 0.1
other at a distance r and carrying currents i1 and i 2 Example 4.51 A and B are two infinitely long straight
respectively in the same direction. parallel conductors. C is another straight conductor of length
1 2 1m kept parallel to A and B as shown in the figure. Then,
find the magnitude and direction of the force experienced
by C.
A C B
i1 i2
F dl
2A 3A 4A
r
Fig. 4.46 Two long parallel wires carrying currents in 5 cm 8 cm
the same direction
Sol. The force between the conductors is attractive, because the
Magnetic field on wire 2 due to current in wire 1, currents in them are in the same direction.
µ 0 i1 Mutual force between conductors A and C ,
B= ⋅ (in ⊗ direction)
2π r µ II l
F1 = 0 1 2
Magnetic force on a small element dl of wire 2 due to this 2π r
magnetic field, µ 2 × 3 ×1
= 0 = 2.40 × 10−5N (towards A)
dF = i 2 (d l × B ) 2π 0.05
Mutual force between conductors B and C ,
Magnitude of this force,
µ 4 × 3 ×1
 µ i 1 µ i i F2 = 0 × = 3 × 10−5 N (towards B)
dF = i2 [(dl ) (B ) sin 90° ] = i2 (dl )  0  = 0 ⋅ 1 2 ⋅ dl 2π 0.08
 2π r  2π r
Hence, the resultant force experienced by C ,
Direction of this force is along d l × B or towards the wire 1. FC = F 2 − F1 = (3 − 2.4) × 10−5 N
The force per unit length of wire 2 due to wire 1, = 0.6 × 10−5 N (towards B)
dF µ 0 i1i2
= Example 4.52 A long horizontal wire P carries a current of
dl 2π r 50 A. It is rigidly fixed. Another fine wire Q is placed
The same force acts on wire 1 due to wire 2. The wires directly above and parallel to P. The weight of wire Q is
0.075 Nm −1 and carries a current of 25 A. Find the
attract each other if currents in the wires are flowing in perpendicular distance of wire Q from P so that wire Q
the same direction and they repel each other if the remains suspended due to the magnetic repulsion. Also,
currents are flowing in opposite directions. indicate the direction of current in Q with respect to P.
Sol. The force per unit length between two parallel current (ii) When switch S is closed, current i flows in wire PQ.
carrying wires separated by a distance d is given by Magnetic force on PQ, F m = Bil , downward
dF µ 0 2i1i2 T′ T′
=
dL 4π d
F 60° 60°
i2
Q mg
Bil
Mg
d 2T ′ sin 60° = mg + Bil
P
mg + Bil 100 × 10−3 × 10 + 0.5 × 2 × 0.2
∴ T′ = =
i1 3 3
1 + 0.2 1.2
This force is repulsive if the current in the wires is in = = N
opposite direction (otherwise attractive). 3 3
So, in order that wire Q may remain suspended, the force F
on it must be repulsive and equal to its weight, i.e. the Magnetic force between two
current in the two wires must be in opposite directions and
this force is given by moving charges
⇒ F = Mg Consider two charges q 1 and q 2 moving with velocities v 1
F Mg and v 2 respectively and at any instant, let the distance
i.e. = between them be r.
L L
v1 v2
µ 0 2i1i2 Mg  dF µ 0 2i1 i2 
⇒ = Q dL = 4π d  Fe Fe Fe Fm Fm Fe
4π d L   q1 q2
q1 q2
2 × 50 × 25 1 r
⇒ d = 10−7 × = × 10−2m
0.075 3 Fig. 4.47 Two moving charges
 Mg  A magnetic force Fm will appear between them alongwith
Q = 0.075 Nm−1
 L  the electric force.
Example 4.53 The figure shows a rod PQ of length 20cm and µ qq vv
Magnetic force between them, Fm = 0 1 2 2 1 2 …(i)
mass 100g suspended through a fixed point O by two threads 4π r
each of lengths 20 cm. A magnetic field of strength 0.5T exists
1 q 1q 2
in the vicinity of the wire PQ as shown in figure. The wire Electric force between them, Fe = …(ii)
connecting PQ with the battery are lose and exert no force on 4πε 0 r 2
PQ. (i) Find the tension in the threads when the switch S is From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have
open. (ii) A current of 2A is established when the switch S is 2
closed. Find the tension in the threads now. (Take, g = 10 ms −2) Fm  v   1
=  Q µ 0 ε 0 = 2 
O Fe c  c 
P Q (for charges moving with same velocity.)
Example 4.54 Two electrons move parallel to each other with
an equal velocity v = 200 × 10 3 m /s. Calculate the ratio of
S magnetic and electrical forces of the electrons.
v v
Sol. (i) When switch S is open,
e Fm e Fe
T T r
Sol. Electrical force between electrons,
60° 60° 1 e ⋅e
Fe = ⋅ (repulsive)
mg 4 πε 0 r 2
2T sin 60° = mg Magnetic force between electrons,
mg 100 × 10−3 × 10 1 µ e ⋅e ⋅v ⋅v
∴ T = = = N Fm = 0 ⋅ (attractive)
4π r2
3 3 3
Fm v2  1  Q M = iA = 2 × (l × b )
∴ = µ 0 ε 0v 2 = 2 Qc = 
Fe c  µ 0 ε0  = 2 × (0.1) (0.1) = 0.02 A-m 2
2 M net = ( 2 ) (0.02) = 0.028 A-m 2
 200 × 103  −7
=  = 4.4 × 10
 3 × 108  Example 4.57 In the Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, the
electron circulates around the nucleus in a path of radius
. × 10 −11 m at a frequency of 6.8 × 1015 Hz.
51
Magnetic dipole moment (i) What value of magnetic field is set-up at the centre of the orbit ?
Magnetic dipole moment associated with a current (ii) What is the equivalent magnetic moment ?
carrying loop is given as M = Ni A ⇒ | M | = NiA
Sol. (i) An electron moving around the nucleus is equivalent to
where, N = number of turns in the loop, a current, i=qf
i = current in the loop µ i µ qf
Magnetic field at the centre, B = 0 = 0
and A = area of cross-section of the loop. 2R 2R
It is a vector quantity directed along area vector A of the loop Substituting the given values in above equation, we get
with anti-clockwise sense as positive. Its SI unit is A-m 2 . ( 4π × 10−7 ) (1.6 × 10−19 ) ( 6.8 × 1015 )
B= = 13.4 T
Example 4.55 Find the magnetic moment of a thin round 2 × 5.1 × 10−11
loop with current if the radius of the loop is equal to (ii) The current carrying circular loop is equivalent to a
R = 100 mm and the magnetic induction at its centre is equal magnetic dipole, with magnetic moment,
to B = 8.0µT. M = NiA = Nq f πR 2
Sol. Magnetic field at centre O, Substituting all the values in above equation, we get
µ i 2RB M = (1) (1.6 × 10−19 ) (6.8 × 1015 ) (3.14) (5.1 × 10–11)2
B = 0 ⇒ i=
2R µ0 = 8.9 × 10−24 A-m2
i
Example 4.58 A square loop OABCO of side l carries a
current i. It is placed as shown in figure. Find the magnetic
O moment of the loop.
R z
A
B
Magnetic moment of loop, i
2RB
M = iA = i ⋅ πR 2 = πR 2 O
y
µ0 60°
C
2BR 3 2 × 8 × 10−6 × (0.1)3 x
= =
µ 0 /π 4 × 10−7 Sol. Magnetic moment of the loop, M = i (BC × CO )
= 4 × 10−2 Am−2 Here, BC = − l k$
Example 4.56 Find the magnitude of magnetic moment of the CO = − l cos 60° i$ − l sin 60° $j
current carrying loop ABCDEFA. Each side of the loop is l $ 3l $
10 cm long and current in the loop is i = 2.0 A. =− i− j
2 2
C
i   l 3l $ 
∴ M = i (− l k$ ) ×  − $i − j 
B
D
  2 2  
il 2 $
E or M= ( j − 3 $i )
A 2
F Torque on current carrying loop in a

Sol. By assuming two equal and opposite currents in BE, two magnetic field
current carrying loops ABEFA and BCDEB are formed. Their
magnetic moments are equal in magnitude but perpendicular When a current carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field,
to each other. Hence, the coil experiences a torque.
M net = M 2 + M 2 = 2M
Consider a rectangular current carrying coil PQRS having
N turns and area A. When this coil is placed in a uniform
field B in such a way that the normal ($n) to the coil makes Example 4.60 A uniform magnetic field of 3000 G is
an angle θ with the direction of B. The coil experiences a established along the positive z-direction. A rectangular loop
torque which is given by of sides 10 cm and 5 cm carries a current of 12 A. What is
the torque on the loop in the different cases shown in figure.
τ = NBiA sin θ What is the force in each case? Which case corresponds to
In vector form, τ = M × B stable equilibrium?
z z
z
Special cases
(i) τ is zero when θ = 0°, i.e. the plane of the coil is
perpendicular to the field. B I B B
I y I y
(ii) τ is maximum when θ = 90 °, i.e. the plane of the y
coil is parallel to the field, τ max = NBiA
(i) (ii) (iii)
x
x x
B
P Q z z
r
θ
B B
n y y
R I I
S
Fig. 4.48 Current carrying loop at an angle θ with magnetic field (iv) (v)
x x
Note Sol. Here, B = uniform magnetic field = 3000 G along Z-axis

(i) Expression of torque is applicable for all shapes.
= 3000 × 10−4 T = 0.3 T
(ii) Axis of rotation is parallel to τ, for loops rotating freely in magnetic
field. ∴ Area of rectangular loop,
A = l × b = 10 × 5 = 50 cm 2
Example 4.59 A circular loop of radius R = 20 cm is placed = 50 × 10−4 m 2
in a uniform magnetic field B = 2T in XY-plane as shown
Torque on the loop, τ = IAB sin θ
in figure. The loop carries a current i = 1.0 A in the direction
where, θ is the angle between the normal to the plane of the
shown in figure. Find the magnitude of torque acting on the loop and the direction of magnetic field.
loop.
(i) Here, θ = 90°
y ∴ τ = 12 × 50 × 10−4 × 0.3 × sin 90°
i B = 1.8 × 10−2 N-m
and acts along negative y-direction.
45° x (ii) Here, θ = 90°
∴ τ = 12 × 50 × 10−4 × 0.3 × sin 90°
= 1.8 × 10−2 N-m
and acts along y -direction.
Sol. Here, M = NiA = NiπR 2 = (1) (1.0) (π ) (0.2)2 = 0.04π A-m2
(iii) Here, θ = 90°
B = 2T and θ = angle between M and B = 90° ∴ τ = 12 × 50 × 10−4 × 0.3 × sin 90°
∴ Magnitude of torque, | τ| = (0.04π ) (2) sin 90° = 0.25 N-m = 1.8 × 10−2 N-m
Note Here, the angle 45° is given just to confuse the students. M is and acts along negative x-direction.
along negative z-direction (perpendicular to paper inwards) (iv) Here, θ = 0°
while B is in XY-plane. So, the angle between M and B is 90° not ∴ τ = BIA sin 0° = 0
45°. So, far as only magnitude of τ is concerned, there is no
(v) Here, θ = 180°
use of giving 45°. But when the direction of torque is desired,
then this angle is used. Because in that case, you will write,
∴ τ=0
B = 2 cos 45° $i + 2 sin 45° j$ = 2 ( i$ + j$) T
Net force on a planar loop in a uniform magnetic field is
always zero, so force is zero in each case.
and M = – ( 0.04 π) k$ A - m 2 Case (iv) corresponds to stable equilibrium as M is
∴ τ = M × B = ( 0.04 2 π) ( − j$ + i$) = 0.18 ( i$ − j$) N-m aligned with B.
Voltage sensitivity is the deflection per unit voltage.

The moving coil galvanometer (MCG) It is given by
It is a device which is based on the principle that when a
current carrying coil is placed in a uniform magnetic field, α  NAB  I
Vs = =  
then it experiences a torque. V  k V
The MCG consists of a multi-turn coil free to rotate about NAB I NAB
⇒ Vs = × = (QV = IR)
a vertical axis, in a uniform radial magnetic field. There is k IR kR
a cylindrical soft iron core to increase the sensitivity of the Current sensitivity
MCG. Voltage sensitivity =
R
Torsion head Its SI unit is rad/V or div/V.
Phosphor Example 4.61 The coil of a moving coil galvanometer has an
bronze strip
effective area of 5 × 10 −2 m 2 . It is suspended in a magnetic
Concave mirror
field of 2 × 10 −2 Wb m −2 . If the torsional constant of the
Coil suspension fibre is 4 × 10 −9 Nm deg −1, then find its current
Soft iron core
(in deg µA −1) sensitivity.
A D Sol. Here, N = 1, A = 5 × 10−2m2,
T2 T1 B = 2 × 10−2Wb m−2, k = 4 × 10−9 Nm deg −1
N S Hair spring
NBA 1 × 2 × 10−2 × 5 × 10−2
Levelling Current sensitivity = =
B C
screw k 4 × 10−9
= 0.25 × 106 deg A−1
Fig. 4.49 Moving coil galvanometer = 0 .25 deg µ A−1
Example 4.62 A moving coil galvanometer has 100 turns and
The plane of the coil always remains parallel to the direction each turn has an area of 2 cm 2 . The magnetic field
of magnetic field, therefore θ = 90 °. The deflecting torque produced by the magnet is 0.01 T. The deflection in the
has maximum value, galvanometer coil is 0.05 rad when a current of 10 mA is
passed through it. Find the torsional constant of the spiral
τ = NIAB …(i)
spring.
where, the symbols have their usual meaning. Since, the
k
magnetic field is radial by design, we have taken sinθ ≈ 1 Sol. Current, i = θ
in the above expression for the torque. NAB
NABi
As the coil deflects, a restoring torque is set-up in the ⇒ k=
θ
suspension fibre. If α is the angle of twist, the restoring
torque, 100 × 2 × 10−4 × 0.01 × 10 × 10−3
or k=
τ rest = k α …(ii) 0.05
where, k is the torsional constant of the fibre. When the ∴ k = 4.0 × 10 Nm rad −1
−5
coil is in equilibrium,
Example 4.63 A current of 0.5 A is passed through the coil
NBIA = k α of a galvanometer having 500 turns and each turn has an
⇒ I = Gα ⇒ α ∝ I average area of 3 × 10 −4 m 2 . If a torque of 1.5 N-m is
k required for this coil carrying same current to set it parallel
where, G = is the galvanometer constant. to a magnetic field, then calculate the strength of the
NBA
magnetic field.
This linear relationship between I and α makes the moving Sol. The magnetic moment of current loop,
coil galvanometer useful for current measurement and
M = NiA = 500 × 0.5 × 3 × 10−4 = 0.075 A-m2
detection.
Also, τ = M × B ⇒ | τ| = MB sin θ
Current sensitivity is the deflection per unit current
where, θ = angle between B and A.
flowing through it. It is given by
Here, θ = 90°
α  NAB  ∴ τ = MB sin 90°
Is = =  
I  k  τ 1.5
⇒ B= = = 20 T
Its SI unit is rad/A or div/A. M 0.075
CHECK POINT 4.3

1. A conducting loop carrying a current I is placed in a 6. The force per unit length between two long parallel wires A
uniform magnetic field pointing into the plane of the paper and B carrying current is 0.004 Nm −1 . The conductors are
as shown. The loop will have a tendency to 0.01 m apart. If the current in conductor A is twice that of
B Y conductor B, then the current in the conductor B would be
× (a) 5 A (b) 50 A
(c) 10 A (d) 100 A
I X 7. Current i is carried in a wire of length L. If the wire is
turned into a circular coil, the maximum magnitude of
torque in a given magnetic field B will be
L2B2 L2B L2iB L2B
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(a) contract 2 2 4π 4π
(b) expand
8. A circular coil of 20 turns and radius 10 cm is placed in
(c) move towards +ve X-axis uniform magnetic field of 0.10 T normal to the plane of the
(d) move towards –ve X-axis coil. If the current in coil is 5 A, then the torque acting on
2. Two parallel wires carrying currents in the same direction the coil will be
attract each other because of (a) 31.4 Nm (b) 3.14 Nm
(a) potential difference between them (c) 0.314 Nm (d) zero
(b) mutual inductance between them 9. The pole pieces of the magnet used in a pivoted coil
(c) electric force between them galvanometer are
(d) magnetic force between them (a) plane surfaces of a bar magnet
(b) plane surfaces of a horse-shoe magnet
3. Two parallel conductor A and B of equal length carry
(c) cylindrical surfaces of a bar magnet
currents I and 10I, respectively, in the same direction, then
(d) cylindrical surfaces of a horse-shoe magnet.
(a) A and B will repel each other with same force
(b) A and B will attract each other with same force 10. In a moving coil galvanometer, the deflection of the coil θ is
(c) A will attract B but B will repel A related to the electrical current i by the relation
(a) i ∝ tanθ (b) i ∝ θ
(d) A and B will attract each other with different forces
(c) i ∝ θ2 (d) i ∝ θ
4. Two thin long parallel wires, separated by a distance d carry
a current i ampere in the same direction. They will 11. In order to increase the sensitivity of a moving coil
galvanometer one should decrease
(a) attract each other with a force of µ 0 i / 2πd 2
(a) the strength of its magnet
(b) repel each other with a force of µ 0 i 2 / 2πd 2 (b) the torsional constant of its suspension
(c) attract each other with a force of µ 0 i 2 / 2πd (c) the number of turns in its coil
(d) repel each other with a force of µ 0 i / 2πd (d) the area of its coil
5. Two long conductors, separated by a distance d carry 12. Two galvanometers A and B require current of 3 mA and
currents I1 and I 2 in the same direction. They exert a force 5 mA respectively, to produce the same deflection of I 0
F on each other. Now the current in one of them is division. Then,
increased to two times and its direction is reversed. The (a) A is more sensitive than B
distance is also increased to 3d. The new value of the force (b) B is more sensitive than A
between them is (c) A and B are equally sensitive
F F 2F −2F
(a) − (b) (c) (d) (d) sensitiveness of B is 5/3 times of that of A
3 3 3 3
Chapter Exercises
B B
1 Biot-Savart’s law indicates that the moving electrons
(velocity, v) produce a magnetic field B such that
[NCERT Exemplar] (a) (b)
(a) B is perpendicular to v
(b) B is parallel to v
r r
(c) it obeys inverse cube law
(d) it is along the line joining the electron and point of B B
observation
2 In a cyclotron, a charged particle [NCERT Exemplar] (c) (d)
(a) undergoes acceleration all the time
(b) speeds up between the dees because of the magnetic field
r r
(c) speeds up in a dee
(d) slows down within a dee and speeds up between dees 8 The magnetic field at the centre of a circular coil of
3 A proton is moving along the negative direction of
radius r carrying current I is B1. The field at the
X-axis in a magnetic field directed along the positive centre of another coil of radius 2r carrying same
direction of Y-axis. The proton will be deflected current I is B 2 . The ratio B1 /B 2 is
(a) 1/2 (b) 1
along the negative direction of
(c) 2 (d) 4
(a) X-axis (b) Y-axis
(c) Z-axis (d) None of these 9 Three long straight wires A, B and C are carrying
4 In a co-axial, straight cable, the central conductor
currents as shown in figure. Then, the resultant
and the outer conductor carry equal currents in force on B is directed
A B C
opposite directions. The magnetic field is zero
(a) outside the cable
(b) inside the inner conductor 1A 2A 3A
(c) inside the outer conductor
(d) in between the two conductors d d
5 A current carrying circular loop of radius R is placed (a) towards A (b) towards C
in the XY-plane with centre at the origin. Half of (c) perpendicular to the plane of paper and outward
the loop with x > 0 is now bent, so that it now lies (d) perpendicular to the plane of paper and inward
in the YZ-plane. Then, [NCERT Exemplar] 10 A wire of length 2 m carrying a current of 1 A is
(a) the magnitude of magnetic moment now diminishes bend to form a circle. The magnetic moment of the
(b) the magnetic moment does not change coil is (in A- m2 )
(c) the magnitude of B at (0,0, z ), z > R increases
(a) 2π (b) π /2 (c) π /4 (d) 1/π
(d) the magnitude of B at (0,0, z ), z >> R is unchanged
11 In hydrogen atom, an electron is revolving in the
6 The maximum energy of a deuteron coming out of a orbit of radius 0.53 Å with 6.6 × 10 15 rot/s. Magnetic
cyclotron is 20 MeV. The maximum energy of
field produced at the centre of the orbit is
proton that can be obtained from this accelerator is
(a) 0.125 Wb/m 2 (b) 1.25 Wb/m 2
(a) 10 MeV (b) 20 MeV
(c) 30 MeV (d) 40 MeV (c) 12.5 Wb/m 2 (d) 125 Wb/m 2
7 A long thin hollow metallic cylinder of radius R has 12 A circular flexible loop of wire of radius r carrying a
a current i ampere. The magnetic induction B away current I is placed in a uniform magnetic field B
from the axis at a distance r from the axis varies as perpendicular to the plane of the circle, so that wire
shown in
comes under tension. If B is doubled, then tension in the axis of the circular wire passes through its centre
the loop at speed v. The magnetic force acting on the particle
(a) remains unchanged (b) is doubled when it passes through the centre has a magnitude
(c) is halved (d) becomes 4 times µ 0i µ 0i µ 0i
(a) qv (b) qv (c) qv (d) zero
13. A current carrying conductor of length l is bent into 2a 2 πa a
two loops one by one. First loop has one turn of wire 19 A particle of mass m and charge q moves with a
and the second loop has two turns of wire. constant velocity v along the positive x-direction. It
Compare the magnetic fields at the centre of the loops. enters a region containing a uniform magnetic field
(a) B ′ = 4B (b) 4B ′ = B (c) 2B ′ = B (d) B ′ = 2B B directed along the negative z-direction, extending
14 Two charged particles traverse identical helical paths from x = a to x = b . The minimum value of v
in a completely opposite sense in a uniform magnetic required, so that the particle can just enter the
field B = B 0 k$ . Then, region x > b is
[NCERT Exemplar]
(a) qbB/m (b) q (b − a ) B /m
(a) they have equal z-components of moment (c) qaB /m (d) q (b + a ) B /2m
(b) they must have equal charges
(c) they necessarily represent a particle, anti-particle pair 20. A proton of mass 1.67 × 10 −27 kg and charge
(d) the charge to mass ratio satisfy 1.6 × 10 −19 C is projected in XY-plane with a speed
 e  +  e  = 0 of 2 × 10 6 m/s at an angle of 60° to the X-axis. If a
 m 1  m 2
uniform magnetic field of 0.14 T is applied along the
15 When a certain length of wire is turned into one Y-axis, then the path of the proton is
circular loop, then the magnetic field produced at the (a) a circle of radius 0.2 m and time period π × 10−7 s
centre of coil due to some current flowing, is B1. If (b) a circle of radius 0.1 m and time period 2π × 10−7 s
the same wire is turned into three loops to make a
(c) a helix of radius 0.07 m and time period 0.5 × 10−6 s
circular coil, then the magnetic induction at the
centre of this coil for the same current will be (d) a helix of radius 0.14 m and time period1.0 × 10−7 s
(a) B1 (b) 9B1 (c) 3B1 (d) 27 B1 21 An equilateral triangle of side length l is formed
16 A long solenoid carrying a current I is placed with from a piece of wire of uniform resistance. The
its axis vertical as shown in the figure. A particle of current I is fed as shown in the figure. Then, the
mass m and charge q is released from the top of the magnitude of the magnetic field at its centre O is
solenoid. Its acceleration is (g being acceleration due b
to gravity)
m, q
a c
I
I
(a) greater than g (b) less than g 3 µ 0I 3 3 µ 0I µ 0I
(a) (b) (c) (d) zero
(c) equal to g (d) None of these 2 πl 2 πl 2 πl
17 A proton moves at a speed v = 2 × 10 6 m/ s in a 22 An infinitely long conductor is bent into a circle as
region of constant magnetic field of magnitude shown in figure. It carries a current I ampere and
B = 0.05 T. The direction of the proton when it the radius of loop is R metre. The magnetic
enters this field is θ = 30 ° to the field. When you induction at the centre of loop is
look along the direction of the magnetic field, then
the path is a circle, projected on a plane perpendicular R
to the magnetic field. How far will the proton move
along the direction of B when two projected circles
I
have been completed?
(a) 4.35 m (b) 0.209 m (c) 2.82 m (d) 2.41 m µ 02I µ 02I
(a) (π + 1) (b) (π − 1)
18 An electric current i enters and leaves a uniform 4 πR 4 πR
circular wire of radius a through diametrically µ I
(c) 0 (π + 1) (d) zero
opposite points. A charged particle q moving along 8 πR
23. Two identical coils carrying equal currents have a 29 A, B and C are parallel conductors of equal length
common centre and their planes are at right angles carrying currents I, I and 2I, respectively. Distance
to each other. Find the ratio of the magnitudes of the between A and B is x. Distance between B and C is
resultant magnetic field at the centre and the field also x. F1 is the force exerted by B on A and F2 is the
due to one coil alone. force exerted by C on A. Choose the correct answer.
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 :1 A B C
24 An electron moves in a circular orbit with a uniform I I 2I
speed v. It produces a magnetic field B at the centre
of the circle. The radius of the circle is proportional
x x
to
B v v B
(a) (b) (c) (d)
v B B v (a) F1 = 2F 2 (b) F 2 = 2F1
25 Two wires of same length are shaped into a square (c) F1 = F 2 (d) F1 = − F 2
and a circle. If they carry same current, then ratio of 30 Three long, straight and parallel wires carrying
the magnetic moment is currents are arranged as shown in figure. The force
(a) 2 : π (b) π : 2 (c) π : 4 (d) 4 : π experienced by 10 cm length of wire Q is
26 Two long thin wires ABC and DEF are arranged as
shown in the figure. The magnitude of the magnetic R Q P
field at O is
F 2 cm 10 cm
r 20 A 10 A 30 A
I I
(a) 1.4 × 10−4 N towards the right
B O
A D
E
I (b) 1.4 × 10−4 N towards the left
(c) 2.6 × 10−4 N towards the right
r
(d) 2.6 × 10−4 N towards the left
C
µ I µ 0I µ 0I 31 A current of 10 A is flowing in a wire of length
(a) 0 (b) (c) (d) zero 1.5 m. A force of 15 N acts on it when it is placed in
4 πr 2 πr 2 2 πr
a uniform magnetic field of 2 T. The angle between
27 A circular conductor of uniform resistance per unit the magnetic field and the direction of the current is
length, is connected to a battery of 4 V. The total (a) 30° (b) 45°
resistance of the conductor is 4 Ω. The net magnetic (c) 60° (d) 90°
field at the centre of the conductor is 32 An ionised gas contains both positive and negative
ions initially at rest. If it is subjected simultaneously
to an electric field along the +x-direction and a
4V magnetic field along the +z-direction, then
(a) positive ions deflect towards + y-direction and negative
ions − y-direction
(b) all ions deflect towards + y-direction
µ0 8µ 0
(a) (b) (c) 2 µ 0 (d) zero (c) all ions deflect towards − y-direction
2 3 (d) positive ions deflect towards − y-direction and negative
28 Figure shows, three long straight wires parallel and ions towards + y-direction
equally spaced with identical currents as shown 33 A charged particle P leaves the origin with speed
below. Then, the force acting on each wire Fa, Fb v = v 0 , at some inclination with the X-axis. There is a
and Fc due to the other are related as uniform magnetic field B along the X-axis. P strikes a
a b c fixed target T on the X-axis for a minimum value of
B = B 0 . P will also strike T, if
(a) F a > F b > F c (b) F b > F c > F a (a) B = 2B 0, v = 2v 0 (b) B = 2B 0, v = v 0
(c) F c > F a > F b (d) F b > F a > F c (c) Both are correct (d) Both are wrong
34 The rectangular coil of area A is in a field B. Find (a) 0.32 N-m tending to rotate the side AD out of the page
the torque about the Z-axis when the coil lies in the (b) 0.32 N-m tending to rotate the side AD into the page
position shown and carries a current I. (c) 0.0032 N-m tending to rotate the side AD out of the page
Z
(d) 0.0032 N-m tending to rotate the side AD into the page
39 A circular loop which is in the form of a major arc of
a circle is kept in the horizontal plane and a constant
I magnetic field B is applied in the vertical direction
A
such that the magnetic lines of forces go into the
B
plane. If R is the radius of circle and it carries a
Y current I in the clockwise direction, then the force
X on the loop will be
(a) IAB in negative Z-axis (b) IAB in positive Z-axis × × × × × × × ×
(c) 2IAB in positive Z-axis (d) 2IAB in negative Z-axis
× × × × × × ×
35 In hydrogen atom, the electron is making × ×
× × × × × × ×
6.6 × 10 15 rev/s around the nucleus in an orbit of × ×
× × × × ×
radius 0.528 Å. The magnetic moment (A-m2 ) × α
× × × × × ×
will be
B
(a) 1 × 10−15 (b) 1 × 10−10 (c) 1 × 10−23 (d) 1 × 10−27
A
(a) BIR tan α (b) 2 BIR cos (α /2)
36 Two infinitely long conductors carrying equal (c) 2 BIR sin (α /2) (d) None of these
currents are shaped as shown in figure. All the short
40. Two protons are projected simultaneously from a
sections are of equal lengths. The point P is located fixed point with the same velocity v into a region,
symmetrically with respect to the two conductors. where there exists a uniform magnetic field. The
The magnetic field at P due to any one conductor is magnetic field strength is B and it is perpendicular to
B. The total field at P is the initial direction of v. One proton starts at time
πm
t = 0 and another proton at t = . The separation
2qB
πm
i between them at time t = (where, m and q are
i
qB
P
the mass and charge of proton), will be
approximately
mv 2 mv mv mv
(a) 2 (b) (c) (d)
qB qB qB 2qB
(a) zero (b) B (c) 2B (d) 2B
41 A disc of radius R rotates with constant angular
37 A particle of mass m and having a positive charge q
velocity ω about its own axis. Surface charge density
is projected from origin with speed v 0 along the
of this disc varies as σ = αr 2 , where r is the distance
positive X-axis in a magnetic field B = − B 0 k$ , where
from the centre of disc. Determine the magnetic
B 0 is a positive constant. If the particle passes
field intensity at the centre of disc.
through (0, y, 0 ), then y is equal to
2mv 0 2mv 0 µ 0αωR 3 µ αωR 3 µ 0αωR 3
(a) − (b)
mv 0 mv
(c) − 0 (d) (a) µ 0αωR 3 (b) (c) 0 (d)
qB 0 qB qB qB 0 6 8 3
42 A rigid circular loop of radius r and mass m lies in
38 A 100 turns coil shown in figure carries a current of
the XY-plane on a flat table and has a current i
2 A in a magnetic field B = 0. 2 Wb/m2 . The torque flowing in it. At this particular place, the earth’s
acting on the coil is magnetic field is B = B x $i + B z k$ . The value of i, so
A B
that the loop starts tilting is
mg mg
(a) (b)
10 cm
N S πr B x2 + B z2 πrB x
mg mg
(c) (d)
D
8 cm
C πrB z πr B xB z
43 Two circular coils 1 and 2 are made from the same 48 A charge q is moving with a velocity v 1 = $i m/s at a
wire but the radius of the 1st coil is twice that of the point in a magnetic field and experiences a force
2nd coil. What is the ratio of potential difference F = q[−$j + k$ ] N. If the charge is moving with a
applied across them, so that the magnetic field at
their centres is the same? velocity v 2 = $j m/s at the same point, then it
(a) 3 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 6 : 1 (d) 2 : 1 experiences a force F = q ( $i − k$ ) N. The magnetic
2
44 A charged particle with specific charge (charge per induction B at that point is
q (a) (i$ + $j + k$ ) Wb / m2 (b) (i$ − $j + k$ ) Wb / m2
unit mass = = S) moves undeflected through a
m (c) (− i$ + $j − k$ ) Wb / m2 (d) (i$ + $j − k$ ) Wb /m2
region of space containing mutually perpendicular
uniform electric and magnetic fields E and B. When 49 A square frame of side 1 m carries a current I,
the E field is switched off, then the particle will produces a magnetic field B at its centre. The same
move in a circular path of radius current is passed through a circular coil having the
E ES ES E same perimeter as the square. The magnetic field at
(a) (b) (c) (d) the centre of the circular coil is B′. The ratio B /B ′ is
BS B B2 B 2S
8 8 2 16 16
45 A large metal sheet carries an electric current along (a) 2
(b) 2
(c) 2
(d)
π π π 2π 2
its surface. Current per unit length is λ.
50 The magnetic field existing in a region is given by
B = B 0 1 +  k
x $
Magnetic field induction near the metal sheet is  l 
λµ 0 λµ 0 µ0 A square loop of edge l and carrying current I is
(a) λµ 0 (b) (c) (d)
2 2π 2πλ placed with its edges parallel to the X and Y-axes.
46 A current i = 2A is flowing in a wire frame as shown The magnitude of the net magnetic force
experienced by the loop is
in figure. The frame is a combination of two
(a) 2B 0Il (b) zero
equilateral triangles ACD and CDE of side 1 m. It is (c) B 0Il (d) 4B 0Il
placed in uniform magnetic field B = 4 T acting
perpendicular to the plane of frame. The magnitude of 51 Two straight infinitely long current carrying wires
magnetic force acting on the frame is are kept along Z-axis at the coordinates (0, a, 0 ) and
A (0, − a, 0 ) respectively, as shown in the figure. The
× × × × × × current in each of the wire is equal and along
× × × × × × negative Z-axis (into the plane of the paper).
× ×C D× × Y
× × × × × ×
× × × × × × a
X
E
(a) 24 N (b) zero (c) 16 N (d) 8 N a
47 A conducting stick of length 2L and mass m is

Z
moving down a smooth inclined plane of inclination
60° with constant speed 5m/s. A current 2A is The variation of magnetic field on the X-axis will be
flowing in the conductor perpendicular to the paper approximately
inwards. A vertically upward magnetic field B exists B B
in space there. The magnitude of magnetic field B is
B
P (a) (b)
X X
B B
v
60°
Q (c) (d) X
X
mg mg 3 mg 3mg
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4L L 4L 2L
52 A wire is bent in the form of a regular polygon of n The circuit has total resistance R. When the
sides, is inscribed in a circle of radius a. If i ampere magnetic field perpendicular to the plane of paper is
is the current flowing in the wire, then the switched on, then springs are observed to extend
magnetic field at the centre of the circle is further by the same distance. The magnetic field
strength is
2mgR mgR mgR mgR
(a) (b) (c) (d)
a LE LE 2LE E
/n
θ=π 56 A particle of specific charge q /m = π C/kg is
O θ = π/n
projected from the origin towards positive X-axis
with a velocity of 10 m/s in a uniform magnetic field
B = − 2k$ T. The velocity v of the particle after time
1
t = s will be
µ 0i π µ 0ni π 6
(a) tan (b) tan
2 πa n 2 πa n (a) (5i$ + 5 3 j$ ) m/s (b) 10$j m/s
2 ni π ni π
(c) µ 0 tan (d) µ 0 tan (c) (5 3 i$ + 5j$ ) m/s (d) −10$j m/s
π a n 2a n
57 A charged particle enters into a uniform magnetic
53. A wire PQRS carrying a current I runs along three
edges of a cube of side l as shown in figure. There field with velocity v 0 perpendicular to it, the length
exists a uniform magnetic field of magnitude B along of magnetic field is x = ( 3 /2) R, where R is the
one of the sides of the cube. The magnitude of the radius of the circular path of the particle in the field.
force acting on the wire is The magnitude of change in velocity of the particle
S when it comes out of the field is
R v0 3v 0
(a) 2v 0 (b) (c) (d) v 0
2 2
58 A proton moving with a constant velocity passes
Q through a region of space without any change in its
P
I velocity. If E and B represent the electric and
(a) zero (b) 3 IB (c) 2IlB (d) 2IlB magnetic fields respectively, then this region of
space may not have
54 The magnetic field at the centre of square of side a is (a) E = 0, B = 0 (b) E = 0, B ≠ 0
I (c) E ≠ 0, B = 0 (d) E ≠ 0, B ≠ 0
R
R = stands for resistance 59 Figure here shows three cases, in all cases the
R 2R
of wire circular path has radius r and straight ones are
infinitely long. For same current, the magnetic field
I
at the centre P in cases (1), (2) and (3) have the ratio
2R
2 µ0 2 µ 0I 2 µ 0I
(a) (b) (c) (d) zero P
πa 3 πa 3 a P
55 A straight rod of mass m and length L is suspended

from the identical springs as shown in figure. The P
(1) (2) (3)
spring is stretched a distance x 0 due to the weight of
the wire.  π   π   3π 1
(a) −  :   :  − 
 2   2   4 2
 π  π   3π 1
(b)  − + 1 :  + 1 :  + 
 2  2   4 2
π π π
(c) − : :3
2 2 4
L  π   π 1   3π 1
(d)  − − 1 :  −  :  + 
 2   2 4  4 2
60 A non-planar loop of conducting wire carrying a 62 A particle of charge −q and mass m enters a uniform
current I is placed as shown in the figure. Each of magnetic field B (perpendicular to paper inwards) at
the straight sections of the loop is of length 2a. The P with a speed v 0 at an angle α and leaves the field
magnetic field due to this loop at the point P (a, 0, a) at Q with speed v at angle β as shown in the figure.
is in the direction Then,
× × × ×
Z
Y × × v0 B
α
× × × ×
× v P × ×
i X × β × ×
× × × ×
2a Q
× × × ×
1 1
(a) (− $j + k$ ) (b) (− $j + k$ + i$ ) (a) α ≠ β
2 3
(b) v ≠ v 0
1 $ $ $ 1 $ $
(c) (i + j + k ) (d) (i + k ) mv 0 sin α
3 2 (c) PQ =
Bq
61 A rectangular loop consists of N closed wrapped 2m (π − α )
turns and has dimensions a × b . The loop is hinged (d) particle remains in the field for time t =
Bq
along the Y-axis. What is the magnitude of the
torque exerted on the loop by a uniform magnetic 63 A square coil of edge L having n turns carries a
field B = B 0 directed along the X-axis when current current i. It is kept on a smooth horizontal plate. A
i = i 0 in the direction shown. The torque acting on uniform magnetic field B exists in a direction parallel
the loop is to an edge. The total mass of the coil is M. What
Y should be the minimum value of B for which the coil
i = i0 will start tipping over?
A B Mg Mg Mg 2Mg
(a) (b) (c) (d)
niL 2niL 4niL niL
a
64 A long straight wire along the Z-axis carries a
37° X current I in the negative z-direction. The magnetic
O field vector B at a point having coordinates (x, y ) in
b C
the z = 0 plane is
Z
µ 0I ( y $i − x $j) µ 0I (x i$ + y $j)
4Ni0abB 0 $j 4Ni0abB 0i$ (a) 2 2
(b)
(a) − (b) 2 π (x + y ) 2 π (x 2 + y 2 )
5 5
µ 0I (x $j − y i$ ) µ 0I (x $i − y $j)
4Ni0abB 0 J $ −2Ni0abB 0$j (c) (d)
(c) − j (d) 2 π (x 2 + y 2 ) 2 π (x 2 + y 2 )
3 5

Assertion and reason 1 Assertion Two infinitely long wires A and B carry unequal
currents both in inward direction.
Directions (Q. Nos. 1-6) These questions consist of
two statements each linked as Assertion and A B
Reason. While answering these questions you are Then, there is only one point (excluding the points at
required to choose any one of the following four infinity), where net magnetic field is zero.
responses.
Reason That point lies between points A and B.
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and
Reason is the correct explanation of Assertion. 2 Assertion When a charged particle moves perpendicular to
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but a uniform magnetic field, then its momentum remains
Reason is not the correct explanation of constant.
Assertion. Reason Magnetic force acts perpendicular to the velocity of
the particle.
(d) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
3 Assertion An α-particle and a deuteron having (a) H+ ions will be deflected most
same kinetic energy enter in a uniform magnetic (b) O2+ ions will be deflected least
field perpendicular to the field. Then, radius of (c) He+ and O2+ ions will suffer same deflection
circular path of α-particle will be more. (d) All ions will suffer the same deflection
q q 3 The coil of a moving coil galvanometer has an
Reason ratio of an α-particle is equal to the
m m effective area of 4 × 10 −2 m 2 . It is suspended in a
ratio of a deuteron. magnetic field of 5 × 10 −2 Wbm −2 . If deflection in
4 Assertion In a uniform magnetic field B = B 0 k $ , if the galvanometer coil is 0.2 rad when a current of
velocity of a charged particle is v $i at t = 0, then it 5 mA is passed through it, then which of the
0
following statement(s) is/are correct?
can have the velocity v 0 $j at some other instant.
(a) Torsional constant is 5 × 10−6 N-m rad −1.
Reason In uniform magnetic field, acceleration of a (b) Current sensitivity is 40 rad A −1.
charged particle is always zero. (c) Torsional constant is 3 × 10−3 N-m rad −1.
5 Assertion If velocity of charged particle in a (d) Current sensitivity is 40 deg A −1.
uniform magnetic field at some instant is (a1$i − a 2 $j ) 4 Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
and at some other instant is (b $i + b $j ), then1 2 I. A flexible wire loop of irregular shape carrying
current when placed in a uniform external magnetic
a12 + a 22 = b12 + b22
field acquires a circular shape.
Reason Magnetic force cannot change velocity of a II. For a given perimeter circular shape is having the
charged particle. greatest area.
6 Assertion Upper wire shown in figure is fixed. At a (a) Only I (b) Only II
certain distance x, lower wire can remain in (c) Both I and II (d) None of these
equilibrium. 5 Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
i2 I. A positive charged particle is rotating in a circle.
x Then, magnetic field (B) at centre of circle and
magnetic moment (M) produced by motion of
i1
charged particle are parallel to each other.
Reason The above equilibrium of lower wire is
stable equilibrium.
Statement based questions II. M and B are always parallel to each other.
1 An electron is projected with uniform velocity along (a) Only I (b) Only II
the axis of a current carrying long solenoid. Which (c) Both I and II (d) None of these
of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
[NCERT Exemplar]
Match the columns
(a) The electron will be accelerated along the axis.
(b) The electron path will be circular about the axis. 1 Four particles; α-particle, deuteron, electron and a
(c) The electron will experience a force at 45° to the axis Cl− ion enter in a transverse magnetic field
and hence execute a helical path. perpendicular to it with same kinetic energy. Their
(d) The electron will continue to move with uniform paths are as shown in figure. Now, match the
velocity along the axis of the solenoid. Column I with Column II and mark the correct
2 H+ , He + and O 2+ ions having same kinetic energy option from the codes given below.
pass through a region of space filled with uniform
magnetic field B directed perpendicular to the
velocity of ions. The masses of the ions 3
2
H+ , He + and O 2+ are respectively, in the ratio
1 4
1 : 4 : 16. Which of the following statement(s) is/are
correct?
Column I Column II Codes

(A) Deuteron (p) Path-1 A B C D
(a) p q p q
(B) α-particle (q) Path-2
(b) p r s q
(C) Electron (r) Path-3
(c) s r s q
−
(D) Cl (s) Path-4 (d) p r s s
Codes 3 A square current carrying loop abcd is placed near
A B C D A B C D an infinitely long another current carrying wire ef.
(a) p q r s (b) q p s r Now, match the Column I with Column II and mark
(c) s r p q (d) q s p r the correct option from the codes given below.
2 A charged particle is rotating in uniform circular f
motion in a uniform magnetic field. Let r = radius of b c
circle, v = speed of particle, K = kinetic energy,
a = magnitude of acceleration, p = magnitude of
q
linear momentum, = α = specific charge and
m a d
ω = angular speed. Then, match the Column I with e
Column II and mark the correct option from the Column I Column II
codes given below.
(A) Net force on bc and da (p) zero
Column I Column II (B) Net force on ab and cd (q) non-zero
(A) If v is doubled (p) r will become two times (C) Net force on complete loop abcd (r) rightwards
(D) Net force on ab (s) leftwards
(B) If B is doubled (q) ω will become two times
A B C D A B C D
(C) If p is doubled (r) a will become two times
(a) p,s r,q p s (b) q,r q,r r s
(D) If α is doubled (s) None (c) p q q,s q,s (d) r r p q

Collection of questions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams
1 A long solenoid of 50 cm length having 100 turns 3 Two toroids 1 and 2 have total number of turns 200
carries a current of 2.5 A. The magnetic field at the and 100 respectively with average radii 40 cm and
centre of solenoid is [NEET 2020] 20 cm, respectively. If they carry same current i, the
(Take, µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 T m A −1) ratio of the magnetic fields along the two loops is
[NEET (Odisha) 2019]
. × 10−4 T
(a) 314 (b) 6.28 × 10−5 T (a) 1 : 1 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 2
−5 −4
. × 10
(c) 314 T (d) 6.28 × 10 T 4 A straight conductor carrying current i splits into two
2 A cylindrical conductor of radius R is carrying a parts as shown in the figure. The radius of the
constant current. The plot of the magnitude of the circular loop is R. The total magnetic field at the
magnetic field B with the distance d from the centre centre P of the loop is [NEET (Odisha) 2019]
of the conductor is correctly represented by the
i1
figure [NEET 2019] R
B B
i P
90º
(a) (b)
i2
R d i
R d
B B (a) zero
(b) 3 µ 0i / 32 R, outward
(c) (d) (c) 3 µ 0i /32R, inward
µ i
(d) 0 , inward
R d R d 2R
5 Ionised hydrogen atoms and α-particles with same 10 If two protons are moving with speed
momenta enters perpendicular to a constant magnetic v = 4.5 × 10 5 ms −1 parallel to each other, then find
field B. The ratio of their radii of their paths r H : r α the value of ratio of electrostatic and magnetic force
will be [NEET 2019] between them. [AIIMS 2019]
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 2 : 1
(a) 4.4 × 105 (b) 2.2 × 105 (c) 3.3 × 105 . × 105
(d) 11
6 Assertion A charged particle is released from rest
in magnetic field, then it will move in a circular 11 A metallic rod of mass per unit length
path. [NEET 2019] 0.5 kg m−1 is lying horizontally on a smooth inclined
Reason Work done by magnetic field is non-zero. plane which makes an angle of 30° with the
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the horizontal. The rod is not allowed to slide down by
correct explanation of Assertion. flowing a current through it, when a magnetic field
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct, but Reason is of induction 0.25 T is acting on it in the vertical
not the correct explanation of Assertion. direction. The current flowing in the rod to keep it
(c) Assertion is correct, but Reason is incorrect. stationary is [NEET 2018]
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect. (a) 14.76 A (b) 5.98 A (c) 7.14 A (d) 11.32 A
7 Two circular loops having same radius (R = 10 cm) 12 A long straight wire carrying current I is bent at its
7 mid-point to form an angle of 45°. Induction of
and same current A are placed along same axis as
2 magnetic field (in tesla) at point P, distant R from
shown in the figure. If distance between their point of bending, is equal to [AIIMS 2018]
centres is 10 cm, find the value of net magnetic P 45°
I
R
field at point P. [AIIMS 2019]
10 cm ( 2 − 1) µ 0I ( 2 + 1) µ 0I
(a) (b)
4 πR 4 πR
10 cm
P ( 2 − 1) µ 0I ( 2 + 1) µ 0I
(c) (d)
4 2 πR 4 2 πR
13 An element dl = dx $i (where dx = 1cm) is placed at
5 cm
the origin and carries a large current i = 10 A. What
50 µ 0 28 µ 0 is the magnetic field on theY-axis at a distance of
(a) T (b) T
5 5 0.5 m? [AIIMS 2018]
5 6 µ0 5 6µ0
(c) T (d) T (a) 2 × 10−8 kT
$ (b) 4 × 10−8 kT
$
5 3
(c) − 2 × 10−8 kT
$ (d) − 4 × 10−8 kT
$
8 A proton is projected with velocity v = 2$i in a region
14 The magnetic moment of an electron orbiting in a
where magnetic field, B = ($i + 3 $j + 4k
$ ) µT and electric
circular orbit of radius r with a speed v is equal to
field, E = 10 $i µ Vm −1. Then, find out the net (a) evr/ 2 (b) evr [JIPMER 2018]
acceleration of proton. [AIIMS 2019] (c) er/2v (d) None of these
(a) 1400 ms −2 (b) 700 ms −2 15 A current carrying loop is placed in a uniform
(c) 1000 ms −2 (d) 800 ms −2 magnetic field. The torque acting on it does not
9 Assertion Electron moving perpendicular to B will depend upon [JIPMER 2018]
perform circular motion. (a) shape of loop (b) area of loop
(c) value of current (d) magnetic field
Reason Force by magnetic field is perpendicular to
velocity. [AIIMS 2019] 16 A long wire having a semicircular loop of radius r
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the carries a current i as shown in figure. The magnetic
correct explanation of Assertion. induction at the centre O due to entire wire is
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not [JIPMER 2017]
c
the correct explanation of Assertion. i
(c) Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect. i r
a d i e
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect. b
o
l l
µ 0i µ 0i 2 22 A wire carrying current I has the shape as shown in

(a) (b)
4r 4r adjoining figure. Linear parts of the wire are very
µ 0i long and parallel to X-axis while semicircular portion
(c) (d) None of these
4r 2 of radius R is lying in YZ-plane. Magnetic field at
17 In the given figure, what is the magnetic field point O is [CBSE AIPMT 2015]
induction at point O ? [JIPMER 2017] Z
E I
R Y
r O O
I
I
µ 0I µ 0I µ 0I
(a) (b) + X
4 πr 4r 2 πr µ I µ0 I $
µ I µ I µ 0I µ 0I (a) B = 0 (π i$ + 2k$ ) (b) B = − (π i − 2k$ )
(c) 0 + 0 (d) − 4π R 4π R
4r 4 πr 4r 4 πr µ I µ I
(c) B = − 0 (π i$ + 2k$ ) (d) B = 0 (π i$ − 2k$ )
18 A long wire carrying a steady current is bent into a 4π R 4π R
circular loop of one turn. The magnetic field at the 23 An electron moving in a circular orbit of radius r
centre of the loop is B. It is then bent into a circular makes n rotations per second. The magnetic field
coil of n turns. The magnetic field at the centre of produced at the centre has magnitude
this coil of n turns will be [NEET 2016] [CBSE AIPMT 2015]
(a) nB (b) n 2B (c) 2nB (d) 2n 2B
19 An electron is moving in a circular path under the r
influence of a transverse magnetic field of ×
B
3.57 × 10 −2 T. If the value of e/m is 1.76 ×10 11 C/kg, e
the frequency of revolution of the electron is
[NEET 2016] I
(a) 1 GHz (b) 100 MHz µ ne
(a) 0 (b) zero
(c) 62.8 MHz (d) 6.28 MHz 2 πr
20 A square loop ABCD carrying a current i is placed µ 0n 2e µ 0ne
(c) (d)
near and coplanar with a long straight conductor XY r 2r
carrying a current I, the net force on the loop will be 24 Consider the circular loop having current i and with
[NEET 2016] central point O. The magnetic field at the central
B C
Y
point O is [AIIMS 2015]
I
I i L
O 2R
R
II
X A D I
L/2 L i
µ 0Ii 2µ 0IiL 2 µ0 i 5 µ0 i
(a) (b) (a) acting downward (b) acting downward
2π 3π 3πR 12 R
µ 0IiL 2µ 0Ii 6 µ0 i 3 µ0 i
(c) (d) (c) acting downward (d) acting upward
2π 3π 11 R 7R
21 A long straight wire of radius a carries a steady 25 A proton is projected with a speed of 3 × 10 6 m/s
current I. The current is uniformly distributed over horizontally from east to west. An uniform magnetic
its cross-section. The ratio of the magnetic fields B
field of strength 2 × 10 −3 T exists in the vertically
a
and B′ at radial distances and 2 a respectively, upward direction. What would be the acceleration of
2
proton? [UK PMT 2015]
from the axis of the wire is [NEET 2016]
1 1 (a) 11.6 × 1011 m / s2 (b) 17.4 × 1011 m / s
(a) (b) 1 (c) 4 (d) (c) 5.8 × 1011 m / s2 (d) 2.9 × 1011 m / s2
2 4
26 The magnetic field at the centre of a circular coil 3 cm, respectively. The ratio of mass of A to that of
carrying current I ampere is B. If the coil is bent into B is [Manipal 2015]
smaller circular coil of n turns, then its magnetic (a) 1/3 (b) 1/2 (c) 4/9 (d) 9/5
field at the centre is B ′. The ratio between B ′ and B 32 A proton beam enters a magnetic field of10 −4 Wb/m 2
is [Kerala CEE 2015] normally. If the specific charge of the proton is
(a) 1 : 1 (b) n :1 10 11 C/kg and its velocity is 10 9 m/s, then the radius
(c) n 2 : 1 (d) 2n : 1 of the circle described will be [KCET 2015]
(e) (n + 1) : 1 (a) 100 m (b) 0.1 m (c) 1 m (d) 10 m
27 Equal currents are passing through two very long 33 A cyclotron is used to accelerate [KCET 2015]
and straight parallel wires in the same direction. (a) Only negatively charged particles
They will [Guj. CET 2015] (b) neutron
(a) attract each other (c) Both positively and negatively charged particles
(b) repel each other (d) Only positively charged particles
(c) lean towards each other
34 Two parallel beams of positron moving in the same
(d) Neither attract nor repel each other
direction will [Manipal 2015]
28 The variation of magnetic field B due to circular coil (a) not interact with each other
as the distance X varies is shown in the graph. (b) repel each other
Which of the following is false? [CG PMT 2015] (c) attract each other
(d) be deflected normal to the plane containing two beams
35 Two concentric coils each of radius equal to 2π cm
A′ A are placed at right angles to each other. If 3A and
4A are the currents flowing through the two coils,
respectively. The magnetic induction (in Wb/m 2 ) at
the centre of the coils will be [KCET 2015]
X= 0 (a) 5 × 10−5 (b) 12 × 10−5 (c) 7 × 10−5 (d) 10−5
(a) Points A and A′ are known as points of zero curvature 36 Two identical long conducting wires AOB and COD
(b) B varies linearly with X at points A and A′ are placed at right angle to each other with one
dB above other such that O is the common point for the
(c) = 0 at points A and A′
dt two. The wires carry I 1 and I 2 currents, respectively.
d 2B Point P is lying at distance d from O along a
(d) 2 = 0 at points A and A′ direction perpendicular to the plane containing the
dt
wires. The magnetic field at the point P will be
29 Two particles A and B having equal charges, after [CBSE AIPMT 2014]
being accelerated through the same potential µ  I1  µ
(a) 0   (b) 0 (I1 + I 2 )
difference enter into a region of uniform magnetic 2 πd  I2  2 πd
field and the particles describe circular paths of radii µ µ
(c) 0 (I12 − I 22 ) (d) 0 (I12 + I 22 )1/ 2
R 1 and R 2 , respectively. The ratio of the masses of A 2 πd 2 πd
and B is [WB JEE 2015]
37 A solenoid has length 0.4 cm, radius 1 cm and
(a) R1 /R 2 (b) R1 /R 2 400 turns of wire. If a current of 5 A is passed
(c) (R1 /R 2 )2 (d) (R 2 /R1)2 through this solenoid, then what is the magnetic
field inside the solenoid? [KCET 2014]
30 There is a ring of radius r having linear charge
density λ and rotating with a uniform angular (a) 6.28 × 10−4 T (b) 6.28 × 10−1T
velocity ω. The magnetic field produced by this ring (c) 6.28 × 10−7 T (d) 6.28 × 10−6 T
at its own centre would be [UP CPMT 2015]
38 A toroid having 200 turns carries a current of 1A.
λ ω2 µ 0 λ2 ω µ λω µ 0λ The average radius of the toroid is 10 cm. The
(a) (b) (c) 0 (d)
2 − µ0 2 2 2 ω2 magnetic field at any point in the open space inside
31 Two particles A and B having equal charges + 6 C
the toroid is [Kerala CEE 2014]
(a) 4 × 10−3 T (b) zero
after being accelerated through the same potential −3
difference, enter in a region of uniform magnetic (b) 0.5 × 10 T (d) 3 × 10−3 T
−3
field and describe circular paths of radii 2 cm and (e) 2 × 10 T
39 The magnetic field due to a current carrying circular 47 An electron in a circular orbit of radius 0.05 nm
loop of radius 3 cm at a point on the axis at a performs 10 16 rev/s. The magnetic moment due to
distance of 4 cm from the centre is 54 µT. What will this rotation of electron is (in A-m 2 ) [WB JEE 2014]
be its value at the centre of the loop? [UK PMT 2014] (a) 2.16 × 10−23 (b) 3 .21 × 10−22
(a) 200 µT (b) 250 µT (c) 125 µT (d) 75 µT −24
(c) 3 .21 × 10 (d) 1 .26 × 10−23
40 A proton of mass m and charge q is moving in a
48 A circular coil of radius 10 cm and 100 turns carries
plane with kinetic energy E. If there exists a
uniform magnetic field B perpendicular to the plane a current 1 A. What is the magnetic moment of the
motion, the proton will move in a circular path of coil? [KCET 2014]
radius [WB JEE 2014] (a) 3.142 × 104 A-m2 (b) 104 A-m 2
2Em 2Em Em 2Eq (c) 3.142 A-m2 (d) 3 A-m2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
qB qB 2qB qB 49 Two thin long conductors separated by a distance d
41 If the velocity of charged particle has both carry currents I 1 and I 2 in the same direction. They
perpendicular and parallel components while moving exert a force F on each other. Now, the current in
through a magnetic field, then what is the path one of them is increased to two times and its
followed by a charged particle? [KCET 2014] direction is reversed. The distance is also increased
(a) Circular (b) Elliptical (c) Linear (d) Helical to 3d. The new value of force between them is
[UK PMT 2014]
42 A particle with charge q is moving along a circle of F 2F F
(a) −2F (b) (c) − (d) −
radius R with uniform speed v. The associated 3 3 3
magnetic moment µ is given by [EAMCET 2014] 50 A charged particle experiences magnetic force in the
1 1 1 1 presence of magnetic field. Which of the following
(a) v 2R (b) qvR (c) qvR (d) q 2vR
2 4 2 2 statement is correct? [KCET 2014]
43 A charged particle of mass m and charge q moves (a) The particle is moving and magnetic field is
along a circular path of radius r that is perpendicular perpendicular to the velocity
to a magnetic field B. The time taken by the particle (b) The particle is moving and magnetic field is parallel to
to complete one revolution is [UK PMT 2014]
the velocity
(c) The particle is stationary and magnetic field is
2µmq 2πq 2B perpendicular to the velocity
(a) (b)
B m (d) The particle is stationary and magnetic field is parallel
2πqB 2πm to the velocity
(c) (d)
m qB 51 The ratio of magnetic dipole moment of an electron
44 Magnetic induction produced at the centre of a of charge e and mass m in Bohr’s orbit in hydrogen
circular loop carrying current is B. The magnetic atom to its angular momentum is [MHT CET 2014]
moment of the loop of radius R is e m 2m e
(a) (b) (c) (d)
(where, µ 0 = permeability of free space) m e e 2m
[MHT CET 2014]
52 A wire of length L metre carrying a current I ampere
BR 2 2πBR 3 BR 2 2πBR 2 is bent in the form of a circle. The magnitude of the
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2πµ 0 µ0 2πµ 0 µ0 magnetic moment is [EAMCET 2014]
45 In cyclotron, for a given magnet, radius of the L2I 2 LI L2I LI
(a) (b) (c) (d)
semicircle traced by positive ion is directly 4π 4π 4π 4π
proportional to (where, v = velocity of positive ion) 53 A long conducting wire carrying a current I is bent
[MHT CET 2014]
at 120° (see figure). The magnetic field B at a point P
(a) v −2 (b) v −1 on the right bisector of bending angle at a distance d
(c) v (d) v 2 from the bend is (µ 0 is the permeability of free
46 When a magnetic field is applied on a stationary space) [MP PMT 2014]
electron, then it [Kerala CEE 2014] P
(a) remains stationary
(b) spins about its own axis I d
(c) moves in the direction of the field
120°
(d) moves perpendicular to the direction of the field
(e) moves opposite to the direction of the field I
2µ 0I µ 0I 61 In the diagram, I 1, I 2 are the strength of the currents

(a) (b)
2 πd 2 πd
in the loop and straight conductors respectively,
µ 0I 3µ 0I
(c) (d) OA = AB = R . The net magnetic field at the centre O
3 πd 2 πd
is zero, then the ratio of the currents in the loop and
54 When a proton is released from rest in a room, it the straight conductor is [KCET 2013]
starts with an initial acceleration a 0 towards west.
When it is projected towards north with a speed v 0,
it moves with an initial acceleration 3a 0 towards
O
west. The electric and magnetic fields in the room I1
are [NEET 2013]
ma 0 2ma 0 ma 0 2ma 0
(a) west, up (b) west, down R
e ev 0 e ev 0
A
ma 0 3ma 0 ma 0 3ma 0 R
(c) east, up (d) east, down
e ev 0 e ev 0 B
I2
55 A current loop in a magnetic field [NEET 2013]
1 1
(a) experiences a torque whether the field is uniform or (a) π (b) 2π (c) (d)
non-uniform in all orientations π 2π
(b) can be in equilibrium in one orientation 62 Two straight wires each 10 cm long are parallel to
(c) can be equilibrium in two orientations, both the one another and separated by 2 cm. When the
equilibrium states are unstable current flowing in them is 30 A and 40 A
(d) can be in equilibrium in two orientations, one stable
respectively, then the force experienced by either of
while the other is unstable
the wires is [J & K CET 2013]
56 A proton and helium nucleus are shot into a
(a) 1.2 × 10−3 N (b) 12 × 10−3 N
magnetic field at right angles to the field with same
kinetic energy. Then, the ratio of their radii is (c) 11.2 × 10−3 N (d) 10.2 × 10−3 N
63 A charged particle with a velocity 2 × 10 3 ms −1
[KCET 2013]
(a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
passes undeflected through electric field and
57 Two charged particles have charges and masses in magnetic fields in mutually perpendicular directions.
the ratio 2 : 3 and 1 : 4, respectively. If they enter a The magnetic field is 15 T. The magnitude of
uniform magnetic field and move with the same electric field will be [Karnataka CET 2013]
velocity, then the ratio of their respective time (a) 1.5 × 103 NC−1 (b) 2 × 103 NC−1
periods of revolution is [Kerala CEE 2013] −1
3
(c) 3 × 10 NC (d) 1.33 × 103 NC−1
(a) 3 : 8 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 3 : 5 (d) 1 : 6
(e) 2 : 5 64 Two similar coils of radius R are lying concentrically
58 A current of 2 A is made to flow through a coil with their planes at right angles to each other. The
which has only one turn. The magnetic field current flowing in them are I and 2I, respectively.
The resultant magnetic field induction at the centre
produced at the centre is 4π × 10 −6 Wb/m2 . The will be [CBSE PMT 2012]
radius of the coil is [MP PMT 2013]
5µ 0I 3µ 0I
(a) 0.0001m (b) 0.01m (c) 0.1m (d) 0.001 m (a) (b)
2R 2R
59 A long straight wire is carrying a current of 12 A. µ I µ 0I
(c) 0 (d)
The magnetic field at a distance of 8 cm is 2R R
(µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 N A 2 ) [J & K CET 2013]
65 The adjacent figure shows the cross-section of a long
(a) 2 × 10−4 Wb/m 2 (b) 3 × 10−5 Wb /m2 rod with its length perpendicular to the plane of the
(c) 4 × 10−4 Wb /m2 (d) 4 × 10−5 Wb /m2 paper. It carries constant current flowing along its
60 The magnetic field at a point on the axis of a long length. B1, B 2, B 3 and B 4 respectively, represent the
solenoid having 5 turns per cm length when a current magnetic fields due to the current in the rod at
of 0.8 A flows through it is [J & K CET 2013] points 1, 2, 3 and 4 lying at different separations
(a) 5.024 × 10−4 Wb /m2 (b) 6.024 × 10−4 Wb /m2
from the centre O, as shown in the figure. Which of
the following shall hold true? [AMU 2012]
(c) 7.024 × 10−4 Wb /m2 (d) 8.024 × 10−4 Wb /m2
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 5 : 3
(c) 7 : 11 (d) 11 : 7
72 When an electron beam passes through an electric
O 1 2 3 4 field, they gain kinetic energy. If the same electron
beam passes through a magnetic field, then their
[BHU 2012]
(a) energy and momentum both ramain unchanged
(a) B1 > B 2 ≠ 0 (b) B 2 > B 3 ≠ 0 (b) potential energy increases
(c) B1 = B 2 = B 3 ≠ 0 (d) B 3 > B 4 ≠ 0 (c) momentum increases
(d) kinetic energy increases
66 A wire of one metre length carries a constant
current. The wire is bent to form a circular loop. 73 If a steel wire of length l and magnetic moment M is
The magnetic field at the centre of this loop is B. bent into a semicircular arc, the new magnetic
moment is [JCECE 2012]
The same is now bent to form a circular loop of M
smaller radius having four turns. The magnetic field (a) M × l (b)
l
at the centre of this new loop will be [BHU 2012] 2M
(c) (d) M
(a)
B
(b) 4B (c)
B
(d) 16B π
2 4 74 A proton travelling at 23° w.r.t. the direction of a
67 A proton is moving in a uniform magnetic field B in magnetic field of strength 2.6 mT experiences a
a circular path of radius a in a direction magnetic force of 6.5 × 10 −17 N. What is the speed
perpendicular to Z-axis along which field B exists. of the proton? [DUMET 2011]
Calculate the angular momentum, if the radius is a (a) 2 × 105 ms−1 (b) 4 × 105 ms−1
and charge on proton is e. [Manipal 2012]
Be (c) 6 × 105 ms−1 (d) 6 × 10−5 ms−1
2 2
(a) (b) eB a (c) a eB (d) aeB
a2 75 What uniform magnetic field applied
perpendicular to a beam of electrons moving at
68 The magnetic field in a certain region of space is
1.3 × 10 6 ms −1, is required to make the electrons
given by B = 8.35 × 10 −2 $i T. A proton is shot into travel in a circular arc of radius 0.35 m?
the field with velocity v = (2 × 10 5 $i + 4 × 10 5 $j ) m/s. [DUMET 2011]
(a) 2.1 × 10−5 G (b) 6 × 10−5 T
The proton follows a helical path in the field. The
distance moved by proton in the x-direction during (c) 2.1 × 10−5 T (d) 6 × 10−5 G
the period of one revolution in the YZ-plane will be 76 Two very long straight parallel wires carry currents i
(Take, mass of proton = 1.67 × 10 −27 kg) [AMU 2012] and 2i in opposite directions. The distance between
(a) 0.053 m (b) 0.136 m (c) 0.157 m (d) 0.236 m the wires is r. At a certain instant of time, a point
69 A planar coil having 12 turns carries 15 A current. charge q is at a point equidistant from the two wires
The coil is oriented with respect to the uniform in the plane of the wires. Its instantaneous velocity v
magnetic field B = 0.2$i T such that its directed area is perpendicular to this plane. The magnitude of the
is A = 0.04$i m2 . The potential energy of the coil in force due to the magnetic field acting on the charge
the given orientation is [AMU 2012]
at this instant is [KCET 2011]
3 µ 0 iqv µ 0 iqv µ 0 iqv
(a) 0 (b) + 0.72 J (c) +1.44 J (d) −1.44 J (a) zero (b) (c) (d)
2π r π r 2π r
70 A current i ampere flows along the inner conductor 77 The torque required to hold a small circular coil of
of a co-axial cable and returns along the outer 10 turns, area 1 mm2 and carrying a current of
conductor of the cable, then the magnetic induction (21 / 44) A in the middle of a long solenoid of
at any point outside the conductor at a distance 10 3 turns / m carrying a current of 2.5 A with its
r metre from the axis is [JCECE 2012] axis perpendicular to the axis of the solenoid is
µ 0 2i µ 0 2 πi [KCET 2011]
(a) ∞ (b) zero (c) (d) Solenoid
4π r 4π r
Coil
71 Two parallel long wires carry currents i1 and i 2 with B
i1 > i 2 . When the currents are in the same direction, Axis
then the magnetic field midway between the wires
is 10 µT. When the direction of i 2 is reversed, then (a) 1.5 × 10−6 N-m (b) 1.5 × 10−8 N-m
it becomes 40 µT. Then, ratio of i1 /i 2 is [JCECE 2012] (c) 1.5 × 10+6 N-m (d) 1.5 × 10+8 N-m
ANSWERS
CHECK POINT 4.1
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (c) 4. (d) 5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (b) 8. (c) 9. (c) 10. (d)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (c) 16. (d) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (d) 20. (b)
CHECK POINT 4.2

1. (c) 2. (c) 3. (a) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (b) 10. (d)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (a)
CHECK POINT 4.3

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (d) 9. (d) 10. (b)
11. (b) 12. (a)

1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (a) 5. (a) 6. (d) 7. (a) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (d)
11. (c) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (d) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (d) 24. (c) 25. (c) 26. (b) 27. (d) 28. (b) 29. (c) 30. (c)
31. (a) 32. (d) 33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (c) 36. (a) 37. (d) 38. (a) 39. (c) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (b) 44. (d) 45. (b) 46. (a) 47. (c) 48. (a) 49. (b) 50. (c)
51. (d) 52. (b) 53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (b) 56. (a) 57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (a) 60. (d)
61. (a) 62. (d) 63. (b) 64. (a)

1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (c) 6. (c)
1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a)
l Match the columns

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c)

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (d) 6. (d) 7. (c) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (a) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (a) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (a) 20. (d)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (d) 24. (b) 25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (b) 29. (b) 30. (c)
31. (c) 32. (a) 33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (d) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (d) 42. (c) 43. (d) 44. (b) 45. (c) 46. (a) 47. (d) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (a)
51. (d) 52. (c) 53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (a) 57. (a) 58. (c) 59. (b) 60. (a)
61. (d) 62. (a) 63. (c) 64. (a) 65. (d) 66. (d) 67. (c) 68. (c) 69. (d) 70. (b)
71. (b) 72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (b) 75. (c) 76. (a) 77. (b)
l CHECK POINT 4.1 10 (d) The given situation is shown below
3 (c) Magnetic field at a distance r near a long straight current 4 cm 0.3 A
carrying wire is given by A
µ 2i 1 0.2 A
B= 0⋅ ⇒ B∝ B
4π r r O 2 cm
B1 r2 B r /2
∴ = or =
B2 r1 B2 r
⇒ B2 = 2B
At centre O, magnetic field due to inner circular coil,
4 (d) Using Fleming’s right-hand rule, the direction of magnetic µ Ni µ 10 × (0.2)
field is towards west. B1 = 0 1 = 0 = 50 µ 0 u
N W 2r1 2 × (2 × 10 −2 )
Similarly, at centre O, magnetic field due to outer circular coil,
W E µ Ni µ 10 × (0.3) 75µ 0
B2 = 0 2 = 0 = ⊗
S 2r2 2(4 × 10 −2 ) 2
75µ 0
5 (a) According to right hand screw rule, Net magnetic field, BO = B1 − B2 = 50µ 0 −
2
Along the line x = y , magnetic field due to two wires will be 100µ 0 − 75µ 0 25
equal and opposite. = = µ 0 Wb/m2 u
2 2
i
x=y µ Ni N
11 (c) The magnetic field, B = 0 or B ∝
2R R
B2 N 2 R1 2N1 R1
= × = × = 4 ⇒ B2 = 4B1 = 4B
i B1 N1 R2 N1 R1/ 2
B′ = 4B
6 (b) Magnetic field at the centre of a current carrying circular 12 (b) Magnetic field at the centre of arc,
coil of N turns is given by µ θi µ 0 π i µ 0i
µ Ni 1 B= 0 = × × =
B = 0 ⇒B ∝ 4π r 4π 2 R 8R
2r r
13 (d) Magnetic field induction at centre O is given by
q 100 × e
7 (b) Current produced in wire, i = =
t 1
∴ i = 100 e
p/2
Magnetic field at the centre of circular path,
i O
µ 2πi µ 0 2π × 100 e µ 0 × 200e 3p
= 0 ⋅ = ⋅ = 2
4π r 4π r 4r
µ 0 × 200 × 1.6 × 10 −19
= = 10 −17µ 0 T 3
R
4 × 0.8 B= ( Magnetic field due to whole circle )
4
8 (c) The direction of magnetic field produced due to both 3  µ 0i  3µ 0i
=   =
semicircular parts will be perpendicular to the paper and 4  2R  8R
inwards.
14 (a) The magnetic field at the centre O, I
Magnetic induction at the centre O,
BO = B1 + B2
µ 0i µ 0i µ 0i  r1 + r2 
B = B1 + B2 = + =   µ I  2π − 2θ  µ 0I O
4 r1 4 r2 4  r1r2  = 0 + [sin θ + sin θ]
2R  2π  4πr R
q q
r
9 (c) Magnetic field at the centre of circular coil of N turns is µ I π − θ µ 0I
= 0 + (2 sin θ ) 2
given by 2R  π  4π (R cos θ )
µ Ni 4π × 10 −7 × 100 × 0.1 µ 0I
B= 0 = = 4π × 10 −5 T = [π − θ + tan θ]
2r 2 × 5 × 10 −2 2πR
15 (c) Magnetic field due to a ring having n turns at a distance x l CHECK POINT 4.2
on its axis is given by
1 (c) For stationary electron, v = 0
µ nir 2
B= 0⋅ 2 ∴ F = Bqv sin θ = Bq × 0 × sin θ = 0, hence
2 (x + r 2 )3/ 2
on a static charge, there is no effect of magnetic field, so
nr 2 electron remains stationary.
∴ B∝
(x 2 + r 2 )3/ 2
2 (c) Path is circular when v ⊥ B or v ⋅ B = 0.
16 (d) Magnetic field at the centre of a current carrying coil mv
having current I and radius a is given as 3 (a) Radius of circular path, r =
qB
µ I
B1 = 0 …(i) mv
2a For electron, r =
eB
Magnetic field on the axis of circular current carrying coil of
e v
radius ‘a’ and current I at a distance x from centre is given as ∴ =
m Br
µ 0Ia 2
B2 =
2 (x 2 + a 2 )3/ 2 4 (c) Radius of circular path of charged particle,
mv p
Here, x =a r= =
qB qB
µ 0Ia 2
∴ B2 = Since, electron and proton both have same momentum,
2 (a 2 + a 2 )3/ 2
therefore, the circular path of both will have the same radius.
µ 0Ia 2
= 5 (b) As, Fe = Fm , qE = q (v × B )
25/ 2 ⋅ a 3
µ I ∴ E = v × B ⇒ | E| = v | B|
= 5/ 20 …(ii) Therefore, the two fields (E and B) are perpendicular.
2 ⋅a
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get 2Km m
6 (a) Radius, r = or r ∝
B1 µ 0I / 2a 25/ 2 Bq q
∴ = 5/ 2
=
B2 µ 0I / 2 a 2  m  m  m 4 1 2
3/ 2 1/ 2   :  :  = : : = 1: 1: 2
=2 = 2⋅ 2 =2 2  q α  q p  q d 2 1 1
17 (a) According to the question, Hence, rα = rp < rd .
µ 0IR 2 1 µ I 7 (a) Work done by magnetic force is zero, hence according to
=  0
2(x + R 2 )3/ 2 8  2R 
2
work-energy theorem,
R2 1 Change in kinetic energy = Work done
∴ = =0
(x + R 2 )3/ 2 8R
2
So, kinetic energy remains constant.
or (x 2 + R 2 )3/ 2 = 8R 3 8 (a) Radius of circular path of proton,
or x 2 + R 2 = 4R 2 2Km q2
r= or K ∝ (for same radius)
∴ x = 3R Bq m
1  q′   m   1
18 (d) Inside the rod, B ∝ r and outside it, B ∝ . ⇒ Kα = K     = 8(2)  = 4 eV
r 
 q  m′   4
Thus, graph (d) is correct option.
9 (b) When charged particle moving in circular path enters into
20 (b) Mean radius of toroid, a region of magnetic field, then time period of charged
25 + 26 particle is given by
r= = 25.5 cm = 0.255 m
2 2 πm
T=
Total number of turns, N = 3500 qB
Current, I = 11A ∴ T ∝m (q and B are same)
N 3500 Q mp > me
Number of turns per unit length, n = =
2πr 2π × 0.255 ∴ Time period of proton > Time period of electron.
Magnetic field inside the core of the toroid, 10 (d) Time period of charged particle,
3500 2πm
B = µ 0nI = 4π × 10 −7 × × 11 T=
2π × 0.255 Bq
Hence, T is independent of r.
= 3.0 × 10 −2 T
2 Km 2 (d) The parallel wires carrying currents in the same direction

11 (c) Radius of particle, r =
Bq attract each other because magnetic forces on the two wires
2πKm act towards each other.
∴Area bounded by the path, A = πr 2 = or A ∝ K
B 2q 2 3 (b) Two parallel conductor A and B of equal length carry
currents I and 10 I, respectively in the same direction, then A
12 (b) Velocity is in XY-plane and magnetic field along Z-axis. and B attract each other with same force.
Therefore, path of the electron in magnetic field will be a
4 (c) Force per unit length,
circle. Magnetic force cannot change the speed of a particle
F µ 0 2 ii12
but direction of its motion continuously changes. Hence, path = ⋅
of electron will change. l 4π d
13 (b) Radius of helical path taken by proton beam, F µ 0 2i 2
= ⋅ (Qi = i1 = i2 )
l 4π d
Mv sin 60 ° ( 1.67 × 10 –27 ) × ( 4 × 10 5 ) sin 60 °
r= = F µ 0 i2
Bq 0.3 × 1. 6 × 10 –19 = ⋅ (attractive)
l 2π d
= 0.012 m
I1I2
14 (a) For charged particle on circular path, 5 (d) Force between two conductors, F ∝
d
mv 2 When I1 is changed to 2 I1 and d is changed to 3d.
= qvB
r (2 I1) (I2 ) 2
∴ F′ ∝ ∝ F
mv 2mE 3d 3
∴ r= =
qB qB As, direction of current is reversed, so F ′ = − 2F / 3.
2m p E F µ ii
6 (c) Force per unit length, = 0 A B
For proton, Rp = …(i) l 2π r
qB
Given, iA = 2iB
2 md E
For deuteron, Rd = …(ii) 2 × 10 –7 2
qB ∴ (0.004) = (2iB )
0.01
Dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i), we get ∴ iB = 10 A
Rd md 7 (c) Torque, τmax = NiAB = 1 × i × πr 2 × B
= = 2 [Qm d = 2m p ]
Rp mp
 L
Q 2πr = L ⇒ r = 
∴ Rd = 2Rp  2π 
2
mv L L2iB
15 (a) Radius of the circular path, r = ∴ τmax = πi   B =
qB  2π  4π
r1 m 1v1 q 2 1 × 2 2 4 8 (d) Torque acting on the coil is given by
⇒ = × = × =
r2 m 2v 2 q1 1 × 3 1 3 τ = NiBA sin θ
Bq As, magnetic field is normal to the plane of coil.
16 (a) Frequency of revolution, f =
2πm So, θ = 0°
i.e. f ∝
q ∴ τ=0
m
9 (d) The pole pieces of the magnet used in a pivoted coil
1 galvanometer are cylindrical surfaces of a horse-shoe magnet.
As q is same for all given particles, f ∝. Mass of Li+ is
m
10 (b) The electrical current in moving coil galvanometer
maximum, therefore its frequency will be minimum.
kθ
i=
l CHECK POINT 4.3 NAB
y ⇒ i ∝θ
1 (b) Applying Fleming’s left-hand rule,
if magnetic field is perpendicular to F F
11 (b) We have sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer
paper inwards and current in the loop NAB
is clockwise, the magnetic force F on S=
k
each element of loop is radially
outwards and loop has a tendency to where, k is the torsional constant of its suspension.
expand outwards. In order to increase the sensitivity of a moving coil
F F galvanometer, one should decrease the torsional constant of
Also, when a current carrying loop is
placed in uniform magnetic field, then its suspension.
net force on it is zero and loop cannot have translation motion.
θ 10 (d) Given, 2πR = 2.0 m

12 (a) Sensitivity, S =
i 1.0
SA iB S 5 ∴ R= m
= ⇒ A = ⇒ SA > SB π
SB iA SB 3 Magnetic moment, M = iA = (i ) (πR 2 )
2
 1.0  1
= (1) (π )   = A- m2
(A) Taking it together  π π
11 (c) Magnetic field produced at the centre of the orbit,
1 (a) In Biot-Savart’s law, magnetic field B||i d l × r and idl due
µ 2πi
to flow of electron is in opposite direction of v, so by B= 0
4π r
direction of cross product of two vectors, B ⊥ v
q
2 (a) The charged particle undergoes acceleration as Now, i = = qf
t
(i) speeds up between the dees because of the oscillating µ 2π (q f )
electric field and ∴ B= 0
4π r
(ii) speed remain the same inside the dees because of the
4π × 10 −7 × 2 × 314
. × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 6.6 × 1015
magnetic field but direction changes continuously. =
4π × 0.53 × 10 −10
3 (c) Q Force, Fm = q (v × B )
= 12.5 Wb m−2
Q A proton is moving along the negative direction of X-axis
in a magnetic field directed along the positive direction of 12 (b) Force or tension in the loop, F = Bil
Y-axis. Therefore, according to Fleming’s left hand rule, force
on proton in magnetic field, will act along negative direction ⇒ F ∝B
of Z-axis. If B is doubled, then tension in the loop is double.
So, the proton will be deflected along the negative direction 13 (a) In Ist case
of Z-axis l = 2πr1 … (i)
5 (a) The direction of magnetic moment of circular loop of µ i
At centre, B= 0
radius R is placed in the XY -plane is along z-direction and its 2r1
magnitude is given by M = I (πR 2 ). When half of the loop with In IInd case
x > 0 is bent, such that it now lies in the YZ-plane, the l = 2 × πr2 …(ii)
magnitudes of magnetic moment of each semi-circular loop of From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
radius R lie in the XY-plane and the YZ-plane having
2 × 2πr2 = 2πr1 ⇒ r2 = r1/ 2
magnitude M′ = I (πR 2 ) /4 each and the direction of magnetic
2 × µ 0i
moments are along z-direction and x-direction, respectively. ∴ B′ = (Q there are 2 turns)
2r2
Their resultant, Mnet = M′ 2 + M′ 2 = 2 M′ = 2 I (πR 2 ) / 4 B′ 2r1
⇒ = = 4 ⇒ B′ = 4B
So, Mnet < M or M diminishes. B r2
6 (d) As, maximum energy of particle in cyclotron, 14 (d) For a given pitch (x ) corresponding to charge particle, we
q 2πv cos θ
2 2
qB 2 q 2  B 22  have = = constant
Emax = r0 ⇒ Emax ∝ Q 2 r0 = constant m Bx
2m m  
Since, charged particles traverse identical helical paths in a
Here, q d = q p , m d = 2m p and Emax(deuteron) = 20 MeV completely opposite sense in a uniform magnetic field B, so
LHS of above equation for two particles should be same and
qp  m  of opposite sign. Therefore,
(E p )max = (E d )max    d  = 20 × 2 = 40 MeV
 q d   mp  e e
  +  =0
m1 m 2
7 (a) For hollow metallic cylinder, magnetic field inside is zero
while outside it the magnetic field is inversely proportional to 15 (b) When wire is turned into n circular loops, then magnetic
distance from centre of cylinder. field produced is B′ = n 2B = (3)2B1 = 9 B1.
So, variation is correctly shown by graph (a).
16 (c) As magnetic field and velocity of charge is in same
µ I µ I
8 (c) We have, B1 = 0 , B2 = 0 direction, so magnetic force on it is zero. Hence, it falls with
2r 4r acceleration equal to g.
B1
∴ =2  2πm 
B2 17 (a) Distance = 2 (pitch) = 2   v cos θ
 Bq 
9 (a) Magnetic force on wire B from both the wires is
4 × π × 1.6 × 10 –27 × 2 × 10 6 × cos 30 °
towards A. = = 4.35 m
0.05 × 1.6 × 10 –19
18 (d) Velocity vector is parallel to magnetic field vector. µev

⇒ R2 =
∴ θ = 0° 2πB
Hence, force, F = Bqv sin 0 = 0 2 v
⇒ R ∝
mv B
19 (b) We have, (b − a ) = r = v
Bq ⇒ R∝
(b − a ) Bq B
∴ vmin =
m 25 (c) Let the length of each wire be L.
20 (c) Radius of circular path, For square, length of each side = L/4
2
mv cos 60 °  L L2
r= Area of square =   =
Bq  4 16
( 1.67 × 10 –27 ) ( 2 × 10 6 ) cos 60 ° For circle, L = 2 πr ⇒ r =
L
= = 0.07 m
0.14 × 1.6 × 10 –19 2π
2
2πm (2π ) ( 1.67 × 10 –27 ) L L2
and T= = = 0.5 × 10 –6 s Area of circle = πr 2 = π   =
Bq 0.14 × 1.6 × 10 –19  2π  4π
As, magnetic moment, M = iA
21 (d) Distribution of current will be as shown below.
⇒ M ∝A
b
Msquare Asquare L2/16 π
∴ = = =
I C A I Mcircle Acircle L2/4π 4
3 3
O 26 (b) At O, due to wire AB and DE, magnetic field will be zero.
The combined effect of BC and DF is equivalent to that of an
a c
B infinitely long wire, i.e. both fields are in same direction.
I 2I I 2µ 0I µ 0I
3 ⇒ BO = =
4πr 2πr
Net magnitude of magnetic field at the centre O is given by
27 (d) The given figure is as shown
Bnet = Bab + Bbc − Bac
I2
µ I / 3 µ 0 I / 3 µ 0 2I / 3
= 0⋅ + ⋅ − ⋅
2π CO 2π AO 2π BO I 270°
µ I / 3 µ 0 I / 3 µ 0 2I / 3
= 0⋅ + ⋅ − ⋅ 4V 90°
2π r 2π r 2π r
I1
[Q AO = BO = CO = r ]
=0
22 (a) B = (due to circular wire) + (due to straight wire) R1 1
= [Q Resistance, R ∝ l]
µ I µ I µ I  1 2µ I R2 3
= 0 + 0 = 0 1 +  = 0 (1 + π )
2R 2π R 2R  π  4Rπ I1 R2
⇒ = =3 [QV = 4V]
23 (d) The magnitude of the resultant magentic field at the I2 R1
common centre of coil is given as Bnet = 2B µ 0I1 90 ° µ I 270
∴ B1 = × ⊗ and B2 = 0 2 × .
B Bnet = √2 B 2r 360 2r 360
B1 I1 90 1
∴ = × = 3× =1
B2 I2 270 3
or B1 ⊗ = B2 u
B
∴Net magnetic field at centre of conductor is zero.
The ratio of the magnitude of the resultant magnetic field at
the common centre and the magnetic field due to one coil µ 0I 2l µ I 2l µ I 2l
28 (b) Fa = Fab − Fac = − 0 = 0
alone at common centre. 2πd 2π (2d ) 4πd
Bnet 2B 2 d d
⇒ = =
Bat centre B 1 a b c
 v 
(µ 0 ) (e )   µ I 2l µ I 2l µ I 2l
µ 0i µ 0 (ef )  2πR  Fb = Fba + Fbc = 0 + 0 = 0
24 (c) Magnetic field, B = = =
2R 2R R 2πd 2πd πd
µ 0I 2l µ I 2l 3µ I 2l 36 (a) All magnetic fields are cancelling each other.

Fc = Fca + Fcb = + 0 = 0
2π (2d ) 2πd 4πd mv
37 (d) Here, diameter of circular path, y = 2r = 2 0
On comparing values as Fa , Fb and Fc , we get qB0
Fb > Fc > Fa 38 (a) Torque acting on the coil, τ = NiBA
2
µ I2 × l µ 2I × l = 100 × 2 × 0.2 × (0.08 × 0.1) = 0.32N-m
29 (c) F1 = 0 , towards A and F2 = 0 , towards A
4π x 4π 2x According to Fleming’s left hand rule, force on side AD is in
∴ F1 = F2 upward direction out of the page and force on side BC is in
downward direction into the page.
30 (c) Force on wire Q due to wire R, Q
Hence, this torque rotates the side AD out of the page.
−7
4π × 10 2 × 20 × 10
FR = × × 0.1 FR 39 (c) From the figure,
4π 0.02
FP
= 20 × 10 −5 N (towards right)
Force on wire Q due to wire P, O
4π × 10 −7 2 × 30 × 10 α α R
FP = × × 0.1 2 2
4π 0.1
A B
= 6 × 10 −5 N (towards right)
α
Net force on Q, AB = 2R sin
2
F = FR + FP = 20 × 10 −5 + 6 × 10 −5 = 26 × 10 −5 N α α

∴ Force = IB  2R sin  = 2BIR sin
= 2.6 × 10 −4 N (towards right)  2 2
31 (a) Force on the wire, F = ilB sin θ πm T
40 (b) Given, time, t = = of proton
F 15 1 Bq 2
sin θ = = = ⇒ θ = 30 °
ilB 10 × 1.5 × 2 2 P2
∴ The angle between the magnetic field and direction of the d r

current, θ = 30 °.
P1
32 (d) If charge q is positive, then due to electric field their
velocity will be towards positive X-axis.
Now, Fm = q (v × B )
where, v → towards $i 2mv
Sepearation, d = 2r =
and B → towards k$ Bq
∴ Fm → towards − $j (i.e. − y-direction)
41 (b) As, dA = (2πr ) dr
Similarly, we can see with − q charge.
∴ dq = σ ⋅ dA = (2παr 3 ) ⋅ dr
33 (c) For minimum value of B, it is colliding after one pitch. It ω
will collide the target again, if pitch is halved or remains = (αωr 3 ) dr
Current, i = (dq ) f = (dq )
same. 2π
 2πm  v µ i αµ 0ωr 2dr
p = (v cos θ )   or p ∝ Now, dB = 0 =
 Bq  B 2r 2
1 R µ αωR 3
For p / p 0 = 1and , both options (a) and (b) are correct. ∴ B = ∫ dB = 0
2 0 6
34 (b) τ = M × B = IAB 42 (b) As, (mg ) (r ) = MBx = i (πr 2 ) Bx
Magnetic moment is in positive x-direction and the magnetic mg
∴ Current, i =
field in positive y-direction. So, the torque (IAB) must be in πrBx
positive z-direction.
43 (b) At, the centre of coil 1,
35 (c) We know that, current, i = qf µ 2πi1
B1 = 0 × ...(i)
= 1.6 × 10 −19 × 6.6 × 1015 = 10.5 × 10 −4 A 4π r1
. × (0.528)2 × 10 −20 m2
∴ Area, A = πR 2 = 314 At the centre of coil-2,
µ 2πi2
∴ Magnetic moment, M = iA B2 = 0 × ...(ii)
4π r2
= 10.5 × 10 −4 × 314
. × ( 0.528)2 × 10 −20
But B1 = B2
~ 10 × 10 −24 units = 1× 10 −23 units
−
µ 0 2πi1 µ 0 2πi2 i1 i2 49 (b) According to question, l = 2πR ⇒ R =

l
∴ = or =
4π r1 4π r2 r1 r2 2π
As, r1 = 2r2
i1 i
∴ = 2 or i1 = 2i2 45°
O
2r2 r2 45°
Now, ratio of potential differences,
V2 i2 × R2 i × R2 1
= = 2 = a/2 a/2
V1 i1 × R1 2i2 × 2R2 4
l
[Q Resistance, R ∝ r (radius)] and l = 4a ⇒ a =
4
V1 4
⇒ = µ 0i µ 0i µ πi
V2 1 B′ = = = 0
2R 2 ⋅ l l
E 2π
44 (d) Velocity, v = and radius of path,
B µ i 
E /B B=4 0⋅ (sin 45° + sin 45° )
r=
mv
=
v
=
E
= 2  4π a / 2 
Bq B ⋅ q /m B ⋅ S B S
2 2 µ 0i 8 2 µ 0i  l
= = Qa =
45 (b) Applying Ampere’s circuital law in the closed loop as πa πl  4 
shown in figure,
B 8 2
∴ = 2
B′ π
50 (c) Here, Fbc + Fda = 0
2Bl = µ 0 (λ ⋅ l ) Y
µ λ
∴ Magnetic field induction, B = 0 b c
2
46 (a) We have, FCAD = FCD = FCED
∴ Net force on frame = 3 FCD a d
X
= 3 (Bil ) = 3 × 4 × 2 × 1= 24 N
 x
Force, Fab = IlB0 1 +  = IB0l + IB0 x (towards right)
47 (c) According to the question,  l
mg sin θ = IlB cos θ  x + l
Force, Fcd = IlB0 1 + = 2IB0l + IB0 x (towards left)
B  l 
q q ∴ Fnet = Fcd − Fab = IB0l (towards left)
s in Fm = IlB
mg 51 (d) At centre, B = 0.
mg
q As, x → a, B → 0 between centre and x = a, there will be a
maximum value.
mg Along X-axis for x > 0, Bnet is downwards.
∴ Magnitude of magnetic field, B = tan θ
Il Along X-axis for x < 0, Bnet is upwards.
mg tan 60 ° 3mg π
= = 52 (b) Radius, r = a cos
2 × (2L ) 4L n
O
48 (a) Let the magnetic field,
B = B1$i + B2$j + B3k$ a
π/n r
Applying Fm = q (v × B ) two times, we have
q [− $j + k$ ] = q [($i) × (B1$i + B2$j + B3k$ )] = q [B2k$ − B3$j]
∴ Magnetic field,
On comparing two sides, we get
B2 = 1and B3 = 1 µ i  π π 
B =n  0 ⋅  sin + sin  
 4π a cos π /n  n n 
Further, q [$i − k$ ] = q [($j ) × (B1$i + B2$j + B3k$ )]
= q [−B k$ + B $i] µ 0ni  π
1 3 = tan  
2πa n
Again comparing, we get
B1 = 1 and B3 = 1 53 (c) The magnitude of the force acting on the wire,
∴ B = ($i + $j + k$ ) Wb / m2 Fnet = F 2 + F 2 = 2 F = 2 IlB
54 (b) Magnetic field at O, θ

| ∆v | = 2v 0 sin
2
I = 2v 0 sin 30 ° = v 0
a/2 58 (c) As proton is moving with constant velocity, so acceleration
is zero.
2I/3 45° a
45° When E ≠ 0, B = 0, then proton will move with a
a/2 45° 45° acceleration. Hence, this region of space for the motion proton
a/2
in given condition does not satisity.
I I/3 So, E = 0 and B = 0
When E = 0 and B ≠ 0 but proton is moving in parallel to the
 µ 0 2I / 3 µ I / 3 direction of magnetic field, then there will be no net force
(sin 45° + sin 45° ) − 0 ⋅
B = 2  4π a / 2 4π a / 2  acting on proton.
 
 (sin 45° + sin 45° )  When, E ≠ 0 and B ≠ 0 but electric force and magnetic force
cancel each other, then also velocity will remain unchanged.
2 µ 0I
= 59 (a) For first figure,
3πa
µ0 i
E  Magnetic field at P due to straight part (a), Ba = ⋅
55 (b) As, kx 0 = mg = ILB =   ⋅ LB 4π r
 R
mgR a
∴ The magnetic field, B =
EL
r
56 (a) Motion of charged particle in magnetic field (B = − 2k$ T) is b P
shown below r
Y
c
µ0 πi
Magnetic field at P due to circular part (b), Bb =
4π r
µ0 i
30° Magnetic field at P due to straight part (c), Bc =
P 4π r
X
O So, net magnetic field at the centre of first figure,
µ πi
2πm 2π 2π B1 = Bb + Bc − Ba = 0 .…(i)
Time period, T = = = = 1s 4π r
Bq B⋅
q 2⋅ π
For second figure, magnetic field at P due to two straight and
m
one circular part,
1 T
Since, the particle will be at point P after time, t = s= s µ πi
6 6 B2 = 0 …(ii)
4π r
2π
Hence, if it is deviated by angle θ, then θ = = 60 °. For third figure, magnetic field at P due to straight part (a),
6
1 Ba = 0
Therefore, velocity of the particle after t = s, is given by
6 ( b)
v = 10 (cos 60 ° $i + sin 60 ° $j )
 $i $j 3  r P
= 10  +  (a)
2 2  p/2
r
= (5$i + 5 3 $j ) m/ s
( c)
 x  3
57 (d) Deviation, θ = sin−1   = sin−1   = 60 ° Magnetic field at P due to circular part (b),
 R  2
µ (2π − π /2)i µ 0 3π
vf = v 0 Bb = 0 = ⋅ ⋅i
4π r 4π 2r
µ i
Magnetic field at C due to straight part (c), Bc = 0
4π r
60° So, net magnetic field at centre of third figure,

v f = v0
µ i 3π 
B3 = 0 ⋅  − 1 …(iii)
Velocity of the particle when it comes out of the field, 4π r  2 
From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get Here, α = β and v = v 0

3π  v0
B1 : B2 : B3 = π : π :  − 1
 2  a
P
π π  3π 1
=− : : − 
2 2  4 2 a
v
60 (d) We can consider the non-planar loop as made by two loops q
ABCDA and AQRBA as shown in figure. Q
C Z
Y
P (a, 0, a) θ 2(π − α ) 2m (π − α )
^ ∴ t= = =
D B k ω (Bq / m ) Bq
R ^j
B
63 (b) i
A B
A X Y
Q ^
i
Magnetic field due to loop ABCDA will be along X-axis and X

due to loop AQRBA along Z-axis. Magnitude of magnetic field
due to both loops will be equal. D C
B2
Deflecting torque due to current,
B= B12 + B22
τ1 = (niA)B sin 90 ° = niL2B
Restoring torque,
L
τ 2 = force × perpendicular distance = Mg ×
B1 2
⇒ τ1 ≥ τ 2
Therefore, direction of resultant magnetic field at P will be
2 L Mg
1 $ $ niL B ≥ Mg ⇒B ≥
along ( i + k). 2 2niL
2
Mg
61 (a) Area vector, A = CO × OA ∴ Bmin =
2niL
= (−b cos 37° $i − b sin 37° k) $ × (a$j ) Note M is along + Z-axis and B is along + X-axis. The magnetic
ab $ $ moment vector M tries to align along B through smaller angle to
=− [4( i × j ) + 3( k$ × $j )]
5 have minimum potential energy, so coil rotates clockwise about
line BC.
 4 3
Q cos 37° = and sin 37° =
 5 5  64 (a) In the z = 0 plane, the situation is as follows
ab $ Y
=− [4k − 3$i]
5 P (x, y)
B sin θ
ab $ θ
= [3 i − 4k$ ]
5 r
B cos θ B
Magnetic moment, M = Ni0A y
Ni0ab $ θ
= (3 i − 4k$ ) O
x
X
5
B = B0 $i Here, P (x, y ) is the point and r = x 2 + y 2
Ni0ab $ Magnetic field at P is perpendicular to OP, as it is shown in
∴Torque, τ = M× B = (3 i − 4k$ ) × B0 $i
5 figure.
Ni0abB0 $ $ So, B = B sin θ $i − B cos θ $j
= [3( i × i) − 4(k$ × $i)]
5 µ0 I
4Ni0abB0 $ Here, B=
=− j 2π r
5 y x
2mv 0 sin θ = , cos θ =
62 (d) From the question, PQ = 2r sin α = sin α r r
Bq
µ 0I  y $ x $ µ 0 I ( y $i − x $j )
Q θ = (2π − 2α ) ∴ B=  i − j =
2 πr  r r  2 π (x 2 + y 2 )
K
(B) Medical entrance special format We have, i = θ
NAB
question ⇒ K=
NABi 1× 4 × 10 −2 × 5 × 10 −2 × 5 × 10 −3
=
l Assertion and reason θ 0.2
−5 −1
= 5 × 10 N-m rad
1 (b) To the right of B, both fields are downwards and to the left of
A, both fields are upwards. At mid-point between wiresA and B, Current sensitivity,
magnetic field due to current carrying wire A is equal and NBA 1× 5 × 10 −2 × 4 × 10 −2
opposite to the magnetic field due to current carrying wire B. Is = =
K 5 × 10 −5
Hence, they cancel to each other.
= 40 rad A −1
2 (d) Velocity will change but speed will remain constant. Hence,
momentum will change. 4 (b) It may or may not take a circular shape depending upon
2Km m the direction of B.
3 (d) As, r = or r ∝
Bq q 5 (a) If a positive charged particle is rotating in a circle in
clockwise direction, then equivalent current is also clockwise.
 m 4  m 2
  = = 1 and   = = 2 Therefore, B at centre and M produced by motion of charged
 q α 2  q d 1 particle, both are inwards. Hence, they are parallel. But at
some other point they may not be parallel.
∴ rd > rα
q 2 1 q 1
Further,   = = and   =
m α 4 2 m d 2
l Match the columns
2Km m
q q 1 (b) As, r = ⇒r ∝
∴   =  Bq q
m α m d
⇒ rd > rα (towards left) and re < rCl− (towards right)
4 (c) Acceleration of charged particle in uniform field is non-zero Hence, A → q; B → p; C → s; D → r.
but speed remains constant. In given condition, particle will rotate
mv p 2Km Bq
in a circular path in xy-plane. Therefore, if velocity isv 0 $i at some 2 (a) As, r = = = ⇒ ω=
Bq Bq Bq m
instant, then it can have the value v $j at other instant also.
0
Hence, A → p; B → q; C → p; D → q.
5 (c) Magnetic force can change the velocity but not the speed.
Speeds at two instants must be same. 3 (c) Magnetic field over the loop from the straight wire is
perpendicular to paper inwards.
6 (c) Magnetic force of attraction on lower wire is upwards Force, F = i (d l × B )
while its weight is downwards. At a certain distance x, these
two forces are equal. If the lower wire is displaced upwards Hence, A → p; B → q; C → q,s; D → q,s.
from this position, then magnetic force will increase but
weight will remain same. Therefore, net force is upwards or (C) Medical entrances’ gallery
equilibrium is unstable.
1 (d) Given, l = 50 cm = 0.5 m, N = 100 turns
l Statement based questions and I = 2.5A
1 (d) The magnetic force on an electron, projected with ∴Magnetic field at the centre of solenoid,
uniform velocity along the axis of a long current carrying N 100
B = µ 0nI = µ 0   ⋅ I = 4π × 10 −7 × × 2.5
solenoid, F = evB sin180 ° = 0 or F = evB sin 0 ° = 0 as l 0.5
magnetic field and velocity are parallel. So, the electron will
continue to move with uniform velocity along the axis of the = 6.28 × 10 −4 T
solenoid. 2 (b) The cylinder can be considered to be made from concentric
2 mk circles of radius R.
2 (c) Radius, r = R
qB
m
∴ r∝
q d
1 4 16
∴ rH + : rHe + : rO 2 + = : : = 1: 2 : 2
1 1 2
3 (b) Here, N = 1, A = 4 × 10 −2 m 2
(i) The magnetic field at a point outside cylinder, i.e. d > R .
B = 5 × 10 −2 Wb/m 2
From Ampere’s circuital law, ∫ B ⋅ dl = µ 0I
i = 5 × 10 −3A, θ = 0.2 rad, K = ?, Is = ?
⇒ B ∫ dl = µ 0I
µ 0I 1 Then, the magnetic field due to larger arc AB,

B (2πd ) = µ 0I ⇒ B = ⇒B ∝
2πd d µ i 270
B1 = 0 1 × …(i)
where, µ 0 = permeability of free space. 2R 2π
(ii) The magnetic field at surface, i.e. d = R , which acts in inward direction as per right hand thumb rule.
µ 0I And magnetic field due to smaller arc AB,
B=
2πR µ i 90
B2 = 0 2 × …(ii)
(iii) The current for a point inside the cylinder is given by 2R 2π
I′ = current per unit cross-sectional area of cylinder × which acts in outward direction.
cross-section of loop The resultant magnetic field, BR = B1 + B2
Id 2 µ i × 270 µ 0i2 × 90
=
I
πd 2 = = − 01 + …(iii)
2 4πR 4πR
πR R2
[from Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
∴ Magnetic field at a point inside cylinder,
which acts in inward direction as B1 > B2.
µ 0I ′ µ 0Id 2 µ I Two arcs can also be seen as the two resistances in parallel
B= = = 0 d ⇒B ∝d
2πd 2πR 2d 2πR 2 combination.
So, the variation of magnetic field can be plotted as So, the potential across them will be same, i.e.
B V1 = V2
1 1 = i2R2
iR …(iv)
where, R1 and R2 = resistance of respective segments.
B ∝d
B∝ 1 The wire is uniform,
d
R1 L1 R × 270
∴ = = [Q length of arc = radius × angle]
R2 L2 R × 90
O d=R d R1 R 1
⇒ = 3⇒ 2 = …(v)
µ NI R2 R1 3
3 (a) The magnetic field within the turns of toroid, B = 0
2πr From Eq. (iv), we get
where, N = number of turns, i1 R2 1
⇒ = = or 3 i1 = i2 …(vi)
I = current in loops i2 R1 3
and r = radius of each turn. From Eqs. (iii) and (v), we get
Given, N1 = 200, N 2 = 100 , r1 = 40 cm, r2 = 20 cm and current µ µ
I is same, i.e. I1 = I2 = I, then BR = 0 (−270i1 + 90i2 ) = 0 [−270i1 + 90 (3i1)]
4πR 4πR
B1 µ 0N1I 2πr2 µ
= × = 0 (−270i1 + 270i1) = 0
B2 2πr1 µ 0N 2I 4πR
Substituting the given values in the above equation, we get
5 (d) The centripetal force required for circular motion is
B1  N1   r2  provided by magnetic force.
=   
B2  N 2   r1  mv p2
⇒ = Bqv p
 200   20  1 r
=   = 2× =1 mv p
 100   40  2 ⇒ r= … (i)
qB
∴ B1 : B2 = 1: 1
where, v p = perpendicular velocity of particle and q = charge
4 (a) The magnetic field at the centre of an arc subtended at an on particle.
angle θ is given by
As, momentum, p = mv p
µ i θ
B= 0 × p
2R 2π ∴ r= [from Eq. (i)]
qB
i1 According to the question, moment a of both particles
270° are same.
R
P 1
i A 90°
⇒ r∝
q
R
i2 For ionised hydrogen atom, q H = e
B and for α-particle, q α = 2 e
i rH q α 2e 2
⇒ = = = or 2 : 1
rα q H e 1
6 (d) When a charged particle of charge (q ) is released from rest particle moves in uniform circular motion. Therefore, electron
(u = 0 ) in the uniform magnetic field (B ), then magnetic force moving perpendicular to magnetic field (B) will perform
on the charged particle, F = Bqu sinθ = 0 because u = 0. circular motion.
Therefore, the charge particle will not move in circular path. Hence, both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is
In the magnetic field, force on charged particle always acts in the correct explanation of Assertion.
perpendicular direction to the direction of velocity of charged 10 (a) Given, speed of proton, v = 4.5 × 10 5 ms −1
particle, therefore, work done by magnetic field on charge
particle is zero. Hence, both Assertion and Reason are Electrostatic force between two protons,
incorrect. e2
Fe = k 2 …(i)
r
7 (c) Given, radius of identical circular loops,
Magnetic field produced due to moving proton of speed v,
R = 10 cm = 10 −1 m
µ ev
7 B= 0⋅ 2 …(ii)
Current, I = A 4π r
2
∴Magnetic force on the proton,
Distance from both circular loops at point P,
µ ev
x1 = x 2 = x = 5 cm = 5 × 10 −2 m Fm = B ev = 0 ⋅ 2 ⋅ ev [From Eq. (ii)]
4π r
From figure, according to Maxwell’s right hand thumb rule, it µ 0 e 2v 2
is clear that magnetic field will be in same direction by both Fm = ⋅ …(iii)
the coils, 4π r 2
µ 0IR 2 µ 0 IR 2 From Eqs. (i) and (iii), we get
i.e. B = B1 + B2 = 2 2 3/ 2
+ ke 2
2 (R + x ) 2 (R 2 + x 2 )3/ 2
Fe r2 k ⋅ 4π
µ0 I R2 µ 0 × 7/ 2 × (10 −1)2 = =
= = Fm µ 0 e 2v 2 v 2 ⋅ µ 0
(R 2 + x 2 )3/ 2 [(0.1)2 + (0.05 )2]3/ 2 ⋅
4π r 2
56
= µ 0T Fe 9 × 10 9 × 4 × 314
.
5 = = 4.4 × 10 5
Fm (4.5 × 10 ) × 4π × 10 −7
5 2
8 (a) Given, velocity of proton, v = 2$i

11 (d) As, the system is in equilibrium,
Magnetic field, B = (i$ + 3$j + 4k$ ) µT ∴ ΣFx = 0
Electric field, E = 10 $iµ Vm −1 According to the question,
Applied Lorentz force on the proton, q
s
B co
F = qE + q (v × B) = q[E + (v × B)] F
= 1.6 × 10 −19 [10 × 10 −6 $i + 2i$ × ($i + 3$j + 4k$ ) × 10 −6 ]
q
= 1.6 × 10 −19 × 10 −6 [10 $i + 6k$ − 8$j] F
−25
F = 1.6 × 10 [10 $i − 8$j + 6k$ ] N
q mg
∴ Acceleration of proton, sin q
g
m
F
a= (Q m p = 1.6 × 10 −27 kg) mg sin θ = F cos θ …(i)
mp
where, F is the magnitude of force experienced by the rod
1.6 × 10 −25[10 $i − 8$j + 6k$ ] when placed in a magnetic field and current I is flowing
= through it.
1.6 × 10 −27
But the force experienced by the given rod in a uniform
a = 100 [10 i$ − 8$j + 6k$ ] magnetic field,
∴ a = |a| = 100 10 2 + 82 + 62 F = ILB
∴ Eq. (i) becomes
. = 1414 ms −2 −
= 100 × 1414 ~ 1400 ms −2
mg sin θ = ILB cos θ
9 (a) When an electron enters into a uniform magnetic field in a mg sin θ mg
direction perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field, ⇒ I= = tan θ
LB cos θ LB
then a magnetic force acts on the electron in perpendicular
direction of both direction of magnetic field and direction of  m  g tan θ
I=  …(ii)
velocity of electron and direction of force can be determined L B
by Fleming’s left hand rule. m
Here, = 0.5 kg m−1,
We know that, when direction of force on a particle is in L
perpendicular direction to the direction of velocity, then
g = 9.8 ms −2, θ = 30 °,
B = 0.25 T 15 (a) The torque acting on a current carrying loop is given by

Substituting the given values in Eq. (ii), we get τ = MB cos θ
0.5 × 9.8 0.5 × 9.8 1 = NiAB cos θ [Q M = NiA]
I= tan 30 ° = × = 11.32 A
0.25 0.25 3 where, N = number of turns,
µ I i = current of loop,
12 (a) Q B (at P) = 0 (cos θ1 − cos θ 2 ) A = area of loop
4πd
θ2 and B = magnetic field.
I
I I 45° Thus, torque does not depend on shape of loop.
d P 135° 16 (a) According to Biot-Savart’s law, the magnetic induction at a
θ1
point to a current carrying element iδl is given
by
P µ iδl sin θ
B= 0⋅
4π r2
In given case, d = R sin 45° = R / 2
Directed normal to plane containing δl and r, θ being angle
θ1 = 135°, θ 2 = 180 ° between δl and r.
µ 0I
∴ B (at P) = [cos 135° − cos 180 ° ] Field due to semicircular arc
4π (R / 2 ) Now, angle between a current element δl of semicircular arc
µ 0I  −1  and the radius vector of the element to point c is π / 2.
= 2 − (−1)
4πR  2  Therefore, the magnitude of magnetic induction B at O due to
this element,
µ 0I  2 − 1
= 2  µ iδl sin π / 2 µ 0iδl
4πR  2  δB = 0 ⋅ =
4π r2 4πr 2
µ 0I Hence, magnetic induction due to whole semicircular loop is
⇒ B (at P ) = ( 2 − 1) T
4πR µ iδl
B = Σδ B = Σ 0 ⋅ 2
13 (b) Here, dl = dx = 1cm = 10 −2 m, 4π r
i = 10 A, r = 0.5 m µ0 i µ i µ i
= Σδ l = 0 2 ( π r ) = 0
µ i (dl × r ) 4π r 2 4πr 4r
∴ dB = 0 ⋅
4π r3 The magnetic field due to ab and de is zero, because θ = 0 ° or
µ idl 180°, so net magnetic field is
= 0 ⋅ 2 ($i × $j ) µ i
4π r B= 0
µ 0 idl $ 4r
= ⋅ k
4π r 2 17 (c) Magnetic field due to straight wire above O is zero,
−7 −2
10 × 10 × 10 i.e. B1 = 0 (since, θ = 0 °)
= k$ = 4 × 10 −8 kT
$
(0.5)2 The magnetic field due to semicircular part,
1 µ I µ I
14 (a) Magnetic moment, B2 = × 0 = 0
2 2r 4r
M = NiA
The magnetic field due to lower straight portion,
where, N = number of turns in the current loop
µ I µ I
and i = current. B3 = 0 (sin 0 °+ sin 90 ° ) = 0 (upward)
Since, the orbiting electron behaves as a current loop of 4πr 4πr
current i, we can write Net magnetic field,
e e ev µ 0I µ 0I
i= = = B = B1 + B2 + B3 = 0 + +
T 2πr /v 2πr 4r 4πr
µ 0I µ 0I
= + (upwards)
4r 4πr
v 18 (b) Magnetic field at the centre of the circular
µ i
loop of one turn, B = 0
2R R
i
Now, the wire is bent into n circular coils.
2
where, A = area of the loop = πr Thus, new radius can be determined as
 ev  2 evr n × 2πr = 2πR
⇒ M = (1)   (π r ) =
 2πr  2
R 21 (b) Consider two Amperian loops of

⇒ r=
n a
radius and 2a as shown in the figure.
∴Magnetic field at the centre of these loops, 2 a/2
µ i µ i  µ i Applying Ampere’s circuital law for
B′ = n 0 = n 0 = n 2  0  = n 2B these loops, we get
2r  R  2R 
2  2a
n ∫ B d L = µ 0Ienclosed
19 (a) The radius of a charged particle of mass m in a magnetic For the smaller loop,
field B is given by 2
a I  a 1 µ I
⇒ B × 2π = µ0 × × π   = µ 0I × = 0
r=
mv
…(i) 2 πa 2  2 4 4
qB µ 0I a
⇒B= at distance from the axis of the wire.
where, q = charge on the particle. 4πa 2
and v = speed of the particle Similarly, for bigger Amperian loop,
∴ The time taken to complete the circle, B′ × 2π (2a ) = µ 0I
2πr T m (total current enclosed by Amperian loop is I)
T= ⇒ = [from Eq. (i)]
v 2π qB µ 0I
⇒ B′ = at distance 2a from the axis of the wire.
2π qB 4πa
∴ ω= = B µ 0I 4πa
T m So, ratio of = × =1
e B′ 4πa µ 0I
Q q = e and = 1.76 × 1011 C/kg
m 22 (c) The magnetic fields in the different regions are given by
B = 3.57 × 10 −2T Z
eB
∴ ω=
m
Now, frequency of revolution, I
2
ω 1 e 1
f = = B= × 1.76 × 1011 × 3.57 × 10 −2 R
O
Y
2π 2π m 2π 1I I
= 1.0 × 10 9 Hz = 1GHz 3
20 (d) The given figure is shown below

B C X
Y
µ0 I $ µ I
B1 = × (−k), B3 = 0 (−k$ )
I i L 4π R 4πR
µ I
and B2 = 0 (− $i)
X A D 4R
L/2 L Net magnetic field at the centre O,
From this figure, it can be seen that the direction of currents µ I µ I µ I
B = B1 + B2 + B3 = 0 (−2k$ ) + 0 (− $i) = − 0 (2k$ + π$i)
in the long straight conductor XY and arm AB of a square loop 4πR 4R 4πR
ABCD are in the same direction. So, there exists a force of q
attraction between the two which will be experienced by BA, 23 (d) Current, I =
t
µ IiL So, for an electron revolving in a circular orbit of radius r,
FBA = 0
 L
2π  
 2
r
In the case of XY and arm CD, the direction of currents are in
X
the opposite direction. So, there exists a force of repulsion B
which will be experienced by CD. i.e. e
µ 0IiL
FCD = I
 3L 
2π  
 2 q = e and t = T
Therefore, net force on the loop ABCD, e e ωe 2πne
⇒ I= = = = = ne
µ IiL  1 1  T 2π /ω 2π 2π
Floop = FBA − FCD = 0 −
2π  (L / 2) (3L / 2)  The magnetic field produced at the centre,
2µ 0iI µ I µ ne
Floop = B= 0 = 0
3π 2R 2r
24 (b) The angle subtended by circular part of the conductor is From Eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
3π / 2 or 270°. µ λω
B= 0
Net magnetic field at point O, Bnet = B1 + B2 2
where, B1 = magnetic field due to arc II and B2 = magnetic 2mqV 2mV r1 m1 m1 r12
field due to arc I. 31 (c) Since, r = = ⇒ = ⇒ =
qB qB 2 r2 m2 m 2 r22
µ0 i π µ i π 5µ 0 i
Bnet = × + 0 ×3 = (downward) m1 (2)2 4
4π × 3R 2 4π R 2 12 R Hence, = =
m 2 (3)2 9
25 (c) Given, speed of proton, v = 3 × 10 6 m/s
32 (a) Given, B = 10 −4 Wb / m2,
Magnetic field, B = 2 × 10 −3 T
q
Now, force (magnetic) on proton, = 1011C/kg and v = 10 9 m/ s
m
F = qvB sin θ
Radius of the circle described,
= 1.6 × 10 −19 × 3 × 10 6 × 2 × 10 −3 × sin 90 °
mv v
r= ⇒ r=
= 3.2 × 3 × 10 −16 = 9.6 × 10 −16 N qB q
 B
∴ Acceleration of proton, m
F 9.6 × 10 −16 N 9.6 10 9
a= = = × 1011 m / s 2 r= ⇒ r = 100 m
m 1.67 × 10 −27kg 1.67 (1011) (10 −4 )
= 5.74 × 1011 m/s 2 ≈ 5.8 × 1011 m/s 2 33 (d) As, electrons cannot be accelerated in a cyclotron. A large
increase in their energy increases their velocity to a very
26 (c) Magnetic field at the centre of circular coil, large extent. This throws the electrons out of step with the
µ I oscillating field while neutron, being electrically neutral,
B= 0 …(i)
2r cannot be accelerated in a cyclotron.
Now magnetic field at the centre of smaller circular coil, So, cyclotron is used to accelerate only positively charged
µ ni µ i particles.
B′ = 0 ⇒ B′ = n 2 0
2r /n 2r 34 (c) Two parallel beams of positron moving in the same
From Eq. (i), we get direction set up two parallel currents flowing in the same
direction. Hence, they attract each other.
B′ n 2
B′ = n 2B ⇒ = 35 (a) Given, I1 = 3 A, I2 = 4 A, R = 2π cm = 2π × 10 −2 m
B 1
27 (a) Two infinitely long and straight parallel wires carrying µ 0I
Magnetic field at the centre of a coil, B =
equal currents in same direction will attract each other. 2R
µ 0I1 µ 0 3 µ0 3
28 (b) Points A and A′ are the inflection points, where the sign of Now, B1 = = × = ×
curvature changes. 2R 2 2π × 10 −2 4π 10 −2
At these points (i.e. A and A′), field is constant, so 3
= 10 −7 × = 3 × 10 −5 T
dB d 2B 10 −2
as well as 2 are zero.
dt dt µ I µ 4 µ 4
Similarly, B2 = 0 2 = 0 × = 0 ×
29 (b) Let the masses of two particles are m1 and m 2. 2R 2 2π × 10 −2 4π 10 −2
As the charges are of the same magnitude and being accelerated 4
through same potential, so these charges enter into the magnetic = 10 −7 × = 4 × 10 −5 T
10 2
field with the same speeds (letv). Now, radii of the circular paths
followed by two changes is given by Now, net magnetic field at centre of the coils, B = B12 + B22
mv mv
R1 = 1 and R2 = 2 ⇒ 1 = 1
R m ⇒ B = (3 × 10 −5 )2 + (4 × 10 −5 )2
qB qB R2 m 2
⇒ B = 10 −10 (9 + 16)
30 (c) The magnetic field produced by the ring at its centre,
µ I ⇒ B = 5 × 10 −5 T = 5 × 10 −5 Wb/m 2
B= 0 …(i)
2r 36 (d) The point P is lying at a distance d along the Z-axis.
where, I = current through the ring A
B1
Q Qω P
= = Q / (2π /ω ) = …(ii) I1
T 2π 90°
O
Here, Q = total change on the ring C
I2
D
and T = time period of the ring.
Q B2
According to the question, λ = ⇒ Q = λ × 2πr …(iii) B
2πr
µ 0 I1 µ I Now, centripetal force,

| B1| = and | B 2| = 0 2
2π d 2π d mv 2
F = …(ii)
Bnet = B12 + B22 r
µ0 1 2 From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
Bnet = (I1 + I22 )1/ 2
2π d mv 2 mv
qvB = ⇒r=
r qB
37 (b) The magnetic field inside the solenoid is given by
B = µ 0nI 2E
m 
where, n = number of turns per unit length m 1 2E 
∴ r= Q E = mv 2, v = 
and I = current in coil qB  2 m
N 400 2Em
Now, n= = = 10 5 ⇒ r=
L 0.4 × 10 −2 qB
and µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 T-m/A 41 (d) Let the velocityv of the particle entering the field B, instead
∴ . × 10 5 × 5 × 10 −7
B = 4 × 314 of being perpendicular to B makes an angle with it.
= 62800 × 10 −5 = 6.28 × 10 −1 T
38 (b) Magnetic field B at any point in the open space inside the
toroid is zero because the amperian loop encloses net current
equal to zero. B
39 (b) The magnetic field at axis of current carrying loop is Then, v may be resolved into two components: v|| = v cos θ
given by parallel to B and v ⊥ = v sin θ perpendicular to B. The
µ 0ir 2 component v|| gives a linear path and the component v ⊥ gives a
B= …(i) circular path to the particle. The resultant of these two is a
2(r + d 2 )3/ 2
2
helical path whose axis is parallel to the magnetic field.
dB
i r
42 (c) The number of revolutions per second by the charge q is
i θ given as
d
O dB cos θ v
O
q
where, i = current in loop, r = radius of loop R
d = distance on axis
and B = magnetic field of current carrying loop.
1 v
Let B1 be the magnetic field at centre (d = 0). N= =
T 2πR
µ 0ir 2 µ ir 2 µ i
Now, B1 = 2 2 3/ 2
= 03 = 0 …(ii) Current through circular path, i = q (1/T ) = vq / 2πR
2(r + 0 ) 2r 2r
vq 1
On dividing Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get Magnetic moment, µ = iA = (πR 2 ) ⇒ µ = vqR
2πR 2
B µ 0ir 2 × 2r
= 43 (d) Consider a charged particle of mass m and charge q moving
B1 2 (r 2 + d 2 )3/ 2 × µ 0i
along a circular path in anti-clockwise direction as shown in
B r3 33 figure.
⇒ = 2 2 3/ 2
= 2 v
B1 (r + d ) (3 + 42 )3/ 2
B 27 54µT 27
⇒ = 3/ 2
⇒ = 3 (m, q)
B1 (25) B1 5 r
× B
54 × 125
B1 =
27
The magnetic field B is assumed to be into plane of paper and
⇒ B1 = 250 µT
of constant magnitude.
40 (b) Given, kinetic energy = E Clearly, centripetal force required for the circular motion of
Mass = m the charge will be provided by magnetic Lorentz force q (v × B ).
Magnetic field = B mv 2
Hence, = qvB sin 90 °
and charge = q r
Magnetic force, F = qvB sin θ mv 2
If θ = 90°, then F = qvB …(i) ⇒ = qvB
r
⇒ Speed, v =
qBr  µ0 
B1 = I1
m  2πd 
mv The field is perpendicularly inward.
⇒ r= …(i)
qB Now, force on the second wire due to first wire,
Let T be the time period of the periodic motion, i.e. time F21 = I2 (l × B1) (towards left)
taken to complete one revolution. F21 = I2lB1 sin 90 °
2π 2π 2πr 2π  mv  F21 = I2lB1
⇒ T= = = =   [from Eq. (i)]
ω v /r v v  qB  where, l is the length of the wire and d is separation between
the two wires.
2πm
=  µ I  µ II l
qB F21 = I2l  0 1  = 0 1 2
 2πd  2πd
44 (b) Magnetic moment, According to question, | F21| = F
M = Current × Area of enclosed by loop µ II l
⇒ F = 0 12
=I ×A …(i) 2πd
Magnetic induction at the centre of circular loop, Now, consider the situation, when the current in first wire is
µ I 2BR doubled and reversed, we can write
B= 0 ⇒ I= …(ii)
2R µ0
Here, A = πR 2 …(iii)
Substituting Eqs. (ii) and (iii) in Eq. (i), we get 2I1 I2
2BR 2πBR 3 3d
M= × πR 2 =
µ0 µ0
µ 0 (2I1)(I2 )l
45 (c) In cyclotron, force on charge = centripetal force F′ =
2πd × 3
mv 2 mv
∴ qvB = ⇒r = ⇒r ∝v Here, force on second wire will be towards right.
r Bq
 µ 0 (2I1)(I2 )l 
46 (a) When a magnetic field is applied on a stationary electron, F ′  2πd × 3 
So, = 
then it remains stationary. F  µ 0I1I2l 
Because, F = q (v × B )  2πd 
If v =0 ⇒F =0 F ′  2I1I2  2
= =
47 (d) Given, r = 0.05 nm = 0.05 × 10 −9 m, (Q 1 nm = 10 −9 m) F  3I1I2  3
n = 1016 rev/s, e = 1.6 × 10 −19 C 2F
⇒ F′ = −
Magnetic moment, M = Ai 3
M = πr 2 × ne (Q A = π r 2 ) Here, negative sign is due to opposite directions of F ′ and F.
= 3.14 × (0.05 × 10 −9 )2 × 1016 × 1.6 × 10 −19 50 (a) From Fleming’s left-hand rule, when a particle is in motion
and magnetic field is perpendicular to the velocity.
or = 1.26 × 10 −23 A-m 2 z
48 (c) Given, radius of coil, r = 10 cm = 10 × 10 −2 m F
Number of turns, N = 100 turns, current in coil, i = 1A y
Magnetic moment, M = ? B
P
Now, M = NiA, where A = πr 2 +q 90°
v
M = Niπr 2 = 100 × 1 × 3142
. × (10 × 10 −2 )2
= 100 × 1 × 3142
. × 100 × 10 −4 = 3142
. A-m 2 x
49 (c) The given situation is shown in the figure. 51 (d) Angular momentum, L = mvr …(i)
The orbital motion of electron is equivalent to a current.
∴ I = e (1/ T )
I1 I2 2πr
Period of revolution of electron, T =
d v
 1  ev
Since, given wires are very large, hence magnetic field due to ∴ I =e   =
current in the first wire,  2πr / v  2πr
Area of electron orbit, A = πr 2 m

∴ r∝
Magnetic dipole moment of the atom, q
ev evr
M = IA = × πr 2 = mP
2πr 2 rP qP mP q
Using Eq. (i), we have So, = = × He
rHe m He m He q P
 e 
M =  L q He
 2m 
m 2q 1
⇒
M
=
e = ⋅ =
L 2m 4m q 1
2πm
52 (c) Circumference of circle = Length of wire 57 (a) Time period, T =
Bq
∴ 2πR = L
L m
⇒ R=  ⇒ T=
 2π  q
T1 m1 q 2 1 3 3
πL2 L2 or = × = × = or 3 : 8
Area, A = πR 2 = = T2 m 2 q1 4 2 8
4π 2 4π
µ 0 Ni
IL2 58 (c) The magnetic field at centre of a coil, B =
Magnetic moment, M = IA = 2R
4π
Given, i = 2 A, N = 1
53 (d) The given figure can be drawn as follows. µ Ni
So, R= 0
2B
4π × 10 −7 × 1 × 2
R=
90° P 2 × 4π × 10 −6
90° 1
⇒ R= = 0.1 m
30° d√3 10
2 µ I
60° 59 (b) Magnetic field, B = 0
60° 2πr
Given, µ = 4π × 10 −7 N/A 2, r = 8 cm = 8 × 10 −2 m, I = 12 A
The magnetic field at point P,
4π × 10 −7 12
µ I  B= ×
Bnet = 2 0 (sin θ1 + sin θ 2 ) 2π 8 × 10 −2
 4πr 
⇒ B = 3 × 10 −5 Wb/m 2
 
µ 0 I  60 (a) Given, µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 N/A2, n = 5 00 turns /m, I = 0.8 A
=2 × × (sin 90 ° + sin 30 ° )
 4π d 3  We know that, B = µ 0nI
 2  B = 5.024 × 10 −4 Wb/m 2
µ 2I  1  61 (d) Given that, the net magnetic field at the centre O is zero.
=2 0 × × 1 +  
 4π d 3  2  Therefore, magnetic field at O due to circular coil and straight
conductor must be equal and opposite in direction.
µ 2I 3 3µ 0I
=2 0 × × = µ 0I1 µ 0I2 I 1
 4π d 3 2  2πd ∴ = ⇒ 1=
2R 2π( 2R ) I2 2π
55 (d) If the direction of dipole moment of the loop is parallel to
the direction of magnetic field, then loop is in stable 62 (a) Force between wire is
equilibrium and if the direction of dipole moment of the loop µ II
F = 0 12 l
is anti-parallel to the direction of magnetic field, then it is in 2π r
unstable equilibrium. 2 × 10 −7 × 30 × 40 × (0.1)
= = 1.2 × 10 −3 N
56 (a) The radius of the circular path of a charged particle in 0.02
magnetic field,
63 (c) The charged particle goes undeflected through both the
mv 2mE fields, therefore force experience by charged particle due
r= =
qB qB magnetic field must be equal to the force experienced by the
charge particle due to electric field, i.e. Fm = Fe
Here, kinetic energy for proton and helium is same and both
are moving in the same magnetic field. or evB sinθ = eE
Given,v = 2 × 10 3 ms −1 69 (d) Given, n = 12 turns, I = 15 A, B = 0.2 $i,

B = 1.5 T and θ = 90 ° A = − 0.04 $i m2
Hence, E = vB sin θ = 2 × 10 3 × 1.5 × sin 90 ° ∴ Potential energy, U = nIAB
3 = 12 × 15 × (−0.04) × 0.2 = − 1.44 J
= 3 × 10 V/m or N/C
70 (b) The described condition can be shown as
64 (a) The magnetic field (B ) at the centre of circular current
carrying coil of radius R and current i
µ I
I, B = 0
2R i
Similarly, if current = 2I, then

r
µ 2I
Magnetic field = 0 = 2 B P
2R
The magnetic field at P due to inner and outer conductors are
So, resultant magnetic field
equal and opposite. Hence, the net magnetic field at P will be
= B 2 + (2 B ) 2 zero.
= 5B 2 = 5 B 71 (b) When the currents in the wires are in same direction.

Magnetic field at mid-point O due to I and II wires are
µ0 I 5 respectively
=
2R µ 2i µ 2i
B I = 0 1 ⊗ and B II = 0 . 2 8
4π x 4π x
65 (d) The given figure is shown below
i1 i2
O
0 1 2 3 4
x x
I II
So, the net magnetic field at O,
Magnetic field outside the long rod, µ 2
Bnet = 0 ⋅ (i1 − i2 )
µ i 4π x
B= 0 [for rod 3 and rod 4, r3 < r4 ]
2πr µ 2
⇒ 10 × 10 −6 = 0 ⋅ (i1 − i2 ) …(i)
∴ B3 > B4 ≠ 0 4π x
66 (d) The magnetic field at the centre of new loop When the direction of i2 is reversed,
B′ = n 2B µ 2i
BI = 0 ⋅ 1 ⊗
where, n is the number of turns in the loop. 4π x
µ 2i
∴ B′ = (4)2B or B′ = 16B and B II = 0 . 2 ⊗
4π x
67 (c) Under uniform magnetic field, force evB acts on proton and
mv 2 i2
provides the necessary centripetal force . i1
a O
2
mv aeB
∴ = evB ⇒v =
a m x x
Now, angular momentum,
L = r × p = a × aeB = a 2eB
I II
68 (c) Given, B = 8.35 × 10 −2 $iT, v = (2 × 10 5 $i + 4 × 10 5 $j ) m/s So, net magnetic field at O,
m µ 2
The distance covered by proton, d = T (v ) = 2π (v ) Bnet = 0 ⋅ (i1 + i2 )
qB 4π x
1.67 × 10 −27 µ 2
= 2 × 314
. × ⇒ 40 × 10 −6 = 0 ⋅ (i1 + i2 ) …(ii)
1.6 × 10 −19 × 8.35 × 10 −2 $i 4π x
On dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i), we get
× (2 × 10 5 $i + 4 × 10 5 $j)
i1 + i2 4 i 5
⇒ d = 0.157 m = ⇒ 1=
i1 − i2 1 i2 3
73 (c) When wire is bent in the form of semicircular arc, then mv

75 (c) Radius, r =
l = πr qB
mv 9.1 × 10 −31 × 1.3 × 10 6
l or B= =
qr 1.6 × 10 −19 × 0.35
r = 2.1× 10 −5 T
76 (a) The magnetic field induction at P due to currents through
r r both the wires,
O
2i
∴The radius of semicircular arc, r = l/π P
Distance between two end points of semicircular wire
2l
= 2r = i
π
∴ Magnetic moment of semicircular wire r/2 r/2
2l 2 µ 2i µ 2(2i ) µ 0 12i
= m × 2r = m × = ml B= 0 + 0 = ⋅
π π 4π r / 2 4π r / 2 4π r
But ml is the magnetic moment of straight wire, i.e. ml = M
It is acting perpendicular to plane of wire inwards. Now, B and
2 v are acting in the same direction, i.e. θ = 0 °.
∴ New magnetic moment = M
π ∴Force on charged particle is F = qvB sinθ = qvB × 0 = 0.
74 (b) Given, θ = 23°,B = 2.6 mT = 2.6 × 10 −3 T 77 (b) We have, M = NIA, B = µ 0nI
and F = 6.5 × 10 −17N Torque, τ = MB
We know that , F = qvB sinθ Here, τ = (n11
I A)(µ 0 n 2 I2 )
6.5 × 10 −17 = 1.6 × 10 −19 × v × 2.6 × 10 −3 × sin 23°  21   22 
= 10 × × 10 −6   4 × × 10 −7 × 10 3 × 2.5
6.5 × 10 −17  44   7 
v= = 4 × 10 5 ms −1
2.6 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 −19 × 0.39
−3
= 1.5 × 10 −8 N-m
CHAPTER
05
Magnetism and
Matter
A Greek philosopher, Thales of Miletus had observed in 600 BC that a naturally
occuring ore of iron attracted small pieces of iron towards it. This ore was found
in the district of Magnesia in Asia Minor in Greece. Hence, the ore was named
magnetite. Later, William Gilbert first suggested that earth behaves as a huge
magnet which causes the alignment of compass needles, then oersted discovered
that moving charges are the sources of magnetic field. So, the science of
magnetism was known long before the 19th century.
The phenomenon of attraction of small bits of iron, steel, cobalt, nickel, etc.,
towards the ore was called magnetism. Matters (i.e. solids, liquids or gases) show
magnetism and hence they are classified into different categories according to
their magnetic properties. In this chapter, we shall learn about magnetism and
magnetisation of matter followed by knowledge of magnets magnetics dipole and Inside
their magnetic fields. We will also discuss about the earth’s magnetism.
1 Magnet
Magnetic field lines
MAGNET Magnetic dipole
Coulomb’s law for magnetism
A magnet is a material or object that exhibits a strong magnetic field and has a Magnetic field strength at a
property to attract some specific materials like iron towards it. The magnetic field point due to magnetic dipole
is invisible but is responsible for properties of a magnet. or bar magnet
Current carrying loop as a
Magnets are of two types magnetic dipole
(i) Natural magnets (ii) Artificial magnets Bar magnet in a uniform
magnetic field
Natural magnets are generally irregular in shape and weaker in strength. On the
2 Earth’s magnetism
other hand, artificial magnets may have desired shape and strength. A bar magnet, a
Elements of earth’s magnetism
horse shoe magnet, compass needle, etc., all are examples of artificial magnet. Neutral points
Vibration magnetometer
Bar magnet 3 Magnetic induction and
A bar magnet consists of two equal and non-separable magnetic poles. One pole is magnetic materials
designated as north pole (N) and the other as south pole (S). These poles are Classification of substances on
separated at a small distance but they are not exactly at the ends. The distance the basis of magnetic behaviour
between two poles of a bar magnet is known as magnetic length of a magnet. It’s Curie’s law
direction is from S-pole of the magnet to N-pole and is represented by 2l. This Atomic model of magnetism
Hysteresis
length is sometimes also known as effective length (Le ) of the magnet and is less
than its geometric length (L g ).
Magnetism and Matter 343
 5 (ii) At any point, tangent to the magnetic field line

For a bar magnet, Le =   L g represents the direction of net magnetic field (B ) at
 6
that point.
N S (iii) Larger the number of field lines crossing per unit
Le area, stronger is the magnitude of the magnetic
Lg field B.
Fig. 5.1 Bar magnet (iv) Magnetic field lines do not intersect each other, for
if they did, the direction of the magnetic field would
General properties of magnet not be unique at the point of intersection.
Few properties of magnet are discussed below (v) The direction of field lines is from N to S, if they are
outside the magnet and from S to N, if they are
Directional property inside the magnet.
When a magnet is suspended freely, then it points in the (vi) Fig. 5.5 (a) shows the uniform magnetic field lines and
earth’s N-S direction (in magnetic meridian). Fig. 5.5 (b) shows non-uniform magnetic field lines.
Uniform magnetic field

N S
(a)
Fig. 5.2 Freely suspended bar magnet Non-uniform
magnetic field
Monopole non-existence (b)
If a magnet is broken into number of pieces, then each Fig. 5.5
piece behaves as an individual magnet rather than isolated
poles. This means that monopoles do not exist. (vii) Magnetic field lines come out and go into a magnetic
material at any angle.
N S
Different patterns of magnetic field lines
N S N S N S
Few patterns of magnetic field lines around a magnet or a
Fig. 5.3 If a bar magnet is broken, each piece pair of magnets are shown below
behaves as a small magnet
Attractive/Repulsive properties N S
(a) N S (b)
Like magnetic poles repel each other and unlike magnetic
poles attract each other. N S
N S S N Magnetic field lines Magnetic field lines

Repulsion due to a bar magnet due to a horse shoe magnet
(form closed loops) (form closed loops)
N S N S
Attraction
+
Fig. 5.4 Like poles repel and unlike poles attract
N S N N
(c) (d)
Note Repulsion is a sure test of magnetism.
Magnetic field lines Magnetic field lines

between two unlike poles
Magnetic field lines
between two like poles
The magnetic field lines of a magnetic field are the imaginary (contract longitudinally) (repel each other laterally)
lines which continuously represent the direction of that Fig. 5.6 Different patterns of magnetic field lines
magnetic field.
Properties of magnetic field lines Magnetic dipole

(i) The magnetic field lines of a magnet form closed A magnetic dipole is an arrangement which consists of two
continuous loops. This property is unlike electric magnetic poles of equal and opposite strengths separated at
field lines, which begin from a positive charge and a small distance. A bar magnet, a compass needle, etc., are
terminate at the negative charge or escape to the examples of magnetic dipoles.
infinity.
Pole strength It is the product of the strength of either of the pole

strength and the magnetic length of the magnet. It is
Like electric charge, we have equivalent analogous in represented by M. It is a vector quantity.
magnetism which is known as pole strength. Thus, pole
strength can be defined as the strength of a magnetic –m M +m
pole to attract magnetic materials towards itself. It is a
scalar quantity and its SI unit is ampere-metre (A-m). The S N
2l
strength of N-pole and S-pole of a magnet is Fig. 5.7 Bar magnet
conventionally represented by + m and − m, respectively.
It depends on the nature of material and area of The direction of magnetic dipole moment is same as that
cross-section of the magnet. of 2l. Therefore, M = m(2l )
Strength of N-pole and S-pole of a magnet is always equal Its SI unit is ampere-metre 2 (A-m 2 ).
and opposite (+m and −m).
Magnetic dipole moment

Pole strength and magnetic dipole moment in special cases
Special cases Figure Effect on pole Formula for new
strength magnetic dipole moment
If bar magnet is cut into two S –m +m N Remains unchanged 2l M
M′ = m ⋅ =
equal pieces such that the 2l 2 2
length of each piece becomes (becomes half)
–m + m –m +m
half
l l
+m N
If bar magnet is cut into two −m Pole strength of each M ′ =   (2l ) =
S m M
equal pieces such that the −m/2 + m/2 piece becomes half  2 2
width of each piece (becomes half)
− m/2 + m/2
becomes half
2l
If a bar magnet is bent in the Remains unchanged M ′ = m (2r )[Q 2l = πr ]

M ′ = m × 2  =
form of semi-circle 2l 2M
–m +m
 π π
S N S –m +m N  becomes 2 times
2l 2r  
 π 
When two identical bar N Remains unchanged

+m M = M12 + M22 = 2M
magnets are joined
perpendicular to each other –m +m
S N
–m S
When two bar magnets are N (+ m) Remains unchanged Resultant magnetic moment,
inclined at an angle θ M ′ = M12 + M22 + 2MM
1 2 cosθ
M2
M
Angle made by resultant
(– m) magnetic moment (M′ ) with M1
S
θ is given by
φ
M2 sinθ
tan φ =
S N M1 + M2 cosθ
M1
(– m) (+ m)
Example 5.1 Consider a short magnetic dipole of magnetic Example 5.4 Two magnetic poles, one of which is four times
length 10 cm. Find its geometric length. stronger than the other, exert a force of 10 gf on each other
6 when placed at a distance of 20 cm. Find the strength of each
Sol. Geometric length of a magnet is times its magnetic length. pole.
5
6 Sol. Let the pole strength of the two dipoles be m and 4 m.
∴ Geometric length = × 10 = 12 cm
5 Here, F = 10gf = 10 × 10−3 kg-f = 10 × 10−3 × 9.8N
Example 5.2 A thin bar magnet of length 2L is bent at the and r = 20 cm = 0.2 m
mid-point, so that the angle between them is 60°. Find the µ 0 m1m 2
new length of the magnet. Using Coulomb’s law of magnetism, F = ⋅
4π r 2
Sol. On bending the magnet, the length of B 10−7 × m × 4m
the magnet, Substituting the values, 10 × 10−3 × 9.8 =
(0.2)2
 θ  θ °
L cos q/2
60
AC = AO + OC = L sin   + L sin   10 × 9.8 × (0. 2)2 × 104
 2  2 L L
or m2 = = 9800
4
1
= 2L sin 30° = 2L × =L A C or m1 = m = 98.9 A-m
2 L sin q/2 O L sin q/2
and m 2 = 4m = 4 × 98.9 = 396 A-m
Example 5.3 The length of a magnetised steel wire is l and
its magnetic moment is M. It is bent into the shape of L with Example 5.5 Two similar magnetic poles, having pole
two sides equal. What will be the new magnetic moment? strengths in the ratio 1 : 3 are placed 1 m apart. Find the
Sol. If m is strength of each pole, then magnetic moment, M = m × l point where a unit pole experiences no net force due to these
two poles.
When the wire is bent into L shape,
Sol. Let the pole strengths of the two magnetic poles be m and
effective distance between the poles
l/√2 3m. Suppose the required point is located at distance x from
2 2 l/2 the first pole. Then at this point,
l l l
=   +  = x 1–x
 2  2 2 m 1m 3m
l/2
∴ New magnetic moment,
Force on unit pole due to first pole
l M
M′ = m × = (m will remain unchanged) = Force on unit pole due to second pole
2 2 µ 0 m × 1 µ 0 3m × 1
or ⋅ = ⋅
4π x 2 4π (1 − x )2
Coulomb’s law for magnetism or 3x 2 = (1 − x )2 or 3x = 1 − x
This law states that the force of attraction or repulsion
1
between two magnetic poles is directly proportional to the or x= = 0.366 m
product of their pole strength (m ) and inversely 1+ 3
proportional to the square of the distance between them.
m1 m2 Magnetic field strength at a
r
Fig. 5.8 Two magnetic poles separated by a distance r
point due to magnetic dipole
or bar magnet
Let pole strength of either pole be m, then magnetic force The strength of a magnetic field at any point is defined as
between these two isolated poles kept at separation r will be the force experienced by a hypothetical unit strength
m1 × m 2 µ 0 m1 × m 2 north pole placed at that point.
F ∝ ⇒ F = F
r2 4π r2 i.e. B = , where m is the pole strength of hypothetical
µ0 m
where, = 10 −7 N/A 2 north pole. Magnetic field strength is a vector quantity.
4π
The direction of magnetic field B is the direction along
Important points about the Coulomb’s law for magnetism which hypothetical north pole would tend to move, if free
are as follows to do so. We have used the word hypothetical north pole
(i) Force will be attractive, if one pole is north and in the above discussion because an isolated magnetic pole
other pole is south, i.e. opposite poles. does not exist.
(ii) Force will be repulsive, if both poles are of same Let us now calculate the magnetic field strength at
type (i.e. north-north or south-south). different points of magnetic dipole (or bar magnet).
1. When point lies on axial line of Magnetic field strength at P due to N-pole of magnet,
µ m µ m
a bar magnet B1 = 0 = 0 2 , from N- pole to point P
4π (NP ) 2 4π (r + l 2 )
Let 2l be the magnetic length of a bar magnet with its
centre at O. The magnetic dipole moment of the magnet is Magnetic field strength at P due to S-pole of magnet,
M, where M = m × 2l. The distance of the observation µ m µ m
point P on the axial line from the centre of the magnet be B2 = 0 = 0 2 , from point P to S-pole
4π (SP ) 2 4π (r + l 2 )
OP = r .
r+l As, B1 = B 2 in magnitude, their vertical components
–m O +m
Ba B1 sin θ along OP produced and B 2 sinθ along PO will
B2 P B1 cancel out. However, horizontal components along PX will
S 2l N add. Therefore, magnetic field strength at P due to the bar
r-l
r magnet,
Fig. 5.9 Magnetic field of bar magnet on axial line B e = B 1 cos θ + B 2 cos θ = 2 B 2 cos θ, along PX
If m is the strength of each pole, then magnetic field µ m × 2l µ M
∴ B e = 0 2 2 3/ 2 ⇒ B e = 0 2
strength at P due to N-pole of magnet is given by 4π (r + l ) 4π (r + l 2 ) 3/ 2
µ m µ m
B1 = 0 × = 0 , along OP If the magnet is short, l 2 << r 2 , such that l 2 is neglected.
4π (NP ) 2 4π (r − l ) 2
µ0 M µ0 M
Magnetic field strength at P due to S-pole of magnet, ∴ Be = ⇒ Be = …(ii)
4π (r ) 3/ 2
2 4π r 3
µ m µ m
B2 = 0 × = 0 , along PO The direction of B e is along PX, a line parallel to line
4π (SP ) 2 4π (r + l ) 2
joining N-pole to S-pole.
∴ Magnetic field strength at P due to the bar magnet, On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
µ 2Mr Ba
B a = B1 − B 2 = 0 = 2 ⇒ B a = 2Be
4π (r − l 2 ) 2
2
Be
(Here – ve sign due to opposite direction) Hence, magnitude of magnetic field due to a short bar
2 2
When the magnet is short, l << r , such that l is neglected, 2 magnet at any point on the axial line of magnet is twice
the magnetic field at a point at the same distance on the
then,
equatorial line of the magnet.
µ 2Mr µ 2M
Ba = 0 ⇒ Ba = 0 3 …(i)
4π r 4 4π r 3. When point makes angle θ with
The direction of B a is along OP. axis of a bar magnet
At an angle θ with the axis of magnet, the magnetic field
2. When point lies on equatorial line at point P at a distance r from centre of magnet is
B
of a bar magnet B2 α
B1
In figure given below, the point P is shown on equatorial P

line of the same bar magnet, where OP = r .
B1 r
B1 sin θ
B1 cos θ θ
X P
θ S θ M
B2 cos θ N
O
B2 B2 sin θ Fig. 5.11
r
µ0 M
B= ⋅ 1 + 3 cos 2 θ
m θ θ m 4π r 3
S O N
2l
1
Fig. 5.10 Magnetic field of bar magnet on equatorial line and tan α = tan θ
2
For axial position of point P, θ = 0 ° and for equatorial Example 5.8 Calculate the magnetic induction at a point 1 Å
position, θ = 90 °. away from a proton, measured along its axis of spin. The
magnetic moment of the proton is 1.4 × 10 −26 A-m 2 .
Note The magnetic potential due to a magnetic diople at distance r,
µ 0 M cosθ Sol. On the axis of a magnetic dipole, magnetic induction is
V = ⋅
4π r2 given by
µ 2M
Now, (i) on the axis of magnet, θ = 0°, B= 0⋅ 3
µ M 4π r
∴ V = 0 2
4π r Substituting the values, we get
(ii) On the neutral axis, θ = 90°, (10−7 ) ( 2) (1.4 × 10−26 )
B= = 2.8 × 10−3 T = 2.8 mT
∴ V =0 (10−10 )3
Example 5.6 Find the magnetic field due to a dipole of Example 5.9 A short bar magnet has a magnetic moment of
magnetic moment 3 Am 2 at a point 5 m away from it in the 0.48 JT −1. Give the direction and magnitude of the magnetic
direction making angle of 45° with the dipole axis. field produced by the magnet at a distance of 10 cm from
the centre of magnet on (i) the axial and (ii) the equatorial
Sol. The condition given in the figure can be drawn as
lines (normal bisector) of the magnet.
B B1 Sol. (i) When the point lies on the axial line, then let B1 be the
B2 a
P
magnetic field at P.
r = 10 cm = 0.1 m
µ 2M 2 × 0.48
B1 = 0 ⋅ 3 = 10−7 ×
5m
∴
4π r (0 .1)3
S 45°
N
M = 3Am2 = 0.96 × 10−4 T from S-pole to N-pole
O (ii) Let B 2 be the magnetic field at point P on the equatorial
line.
So, the magnetic field at point P,
µ M 0.48
µ M ∴ B 2 = 0 ⋅ 3 = 10−7 ×
B = 0 3 1 + 3 cos2 θ 4π r . )3
(01
4π r
Here, M = 3 A-m 2, r = 5 m, θ = 45° = 0.48 × 10−4 T = 0.48 G along from N-pole to S-pole.
3 Magnetic field due to a hypothetical
∴ B = 10−7 × 3 1 + 3 cos2 (45° )
(5)
3 monopole
= 10−7 × × 1 + 1.5 At any point, magnetic field due to hypothetical monopole is
125
3 given by
= 10−7 × × 1.58 F
125 B= m
= 3.79 × 10−9 T m0
So, at a point P situated at distance r from a monopole,
Example 5.7 A bar magnet of length 0.1 m has pole strength
of 50 A-m. Calculate the magnetic field at a distance of magnetic field is given by
N-pole
0.2 m from its centre on P
B
(i) its axial line (ii) and its equatorial line. r
m
Sol. Here, m = 50 A- m, r = 0.2 m, 2l = 0.1 m or l = 0.05 m Fig. 5.12 Magnetic field due to a monopole (N-pole)
∴ Magnetic dipole moment,
µ0 m
M = m (2l ) = 50 × 0.1 = 5 A- m 2 B= ×
4π r 2
µ 0 2Mr 10−7 × 2 × 5 × 0.2
(i) B axial = = Important points about magnetic field due to monopole
4π (r 2 − l 2 )2 (0.22 − 0.052 )2
(i) It is away from pole, if it is N-pole as shown in
= 1.42 × 10−4 T Fig. 5.12.
µ M 10−7 × 5 (ii) It is towards pole, if it is S-pole, as shown in Fig. 5.13.
(ii) B equi = 0 2 =
4π (r + l )
2 3/ 2
(0.22 + 0.052 )3/2 S-pole
= 5.71 × 10−5 T P
r
Formula with (r 2 − l 2 ) and (r 2 + l 2 ) are used because –m B
here r >> l does not apply. Fig. 5.13 Magnetic field due to S-pole
Example 5.10 A current of 6A is flowing through a 20 turns

Current carrying loop as a circular coil of radius 5 cm. The coil lies in the XY-plane.
magnetic dipole What is the magnitude and direction of the magnetic dipole
moment associated with it?
Consider a planar loop of wire carrying current as shown in
Sol. Magnetic dipole moment is given by
Fig. 5.14. Looking from the upper face, current is
M = NIA
anti-clockwise. Therefore, it has a north polarity  
. Here, N = 20, I = 6A and r = 5 cm = 0.05 cm
 
Looking from the lower face of the loop, current is 22
∴ M = (20) × (6) × × (0.05)2
7
clockwise   , therefore it has a south polarity. Thus, the
  = 0.94 A-m 2
current carrying loop behaves as a system of two equal and The direction of magnetic dipole moment is perpendicular to
opposite magnetic poles and can be considered as a the plane of the coil. Hence, it is along Z-axis.
magnetic dipole.
Magnetic dipole moment of a revolving
N
electron in an atom
The circular motion of an electron around the positively
charged nucleus of an atom can be treated as a current
S loop producing a magnetic field. Hence, it behaves like a
Fig. 5.14 Current loop with north and south polarity magnetic dipole.
The (negatively charged) electron is revolving
Magnetic dipole moment of current anti-clockwise and so the current is clockwise. Hence,
carrying loop according to the right-hand rule, the dipole moment M is
The magnetic dipole moment of the current carrying loop perpendicular to the plane of the current loop and is
(M ) is directly proportional to directed downwards.
n L
M v
r –e
M
Fig. 5.15 Magnetic dipole moment of current loop Fig. 5.16 Orbital magnetic moment of a revolving electron
(i) strength of current (I ) through the loop and Let me be the mass and − e is the charge of an electron
(ii) area (A) enclosed by the loop. revolving with speed v in a circular orbit of radius r.
i.e. M ∝ I and M ∝ A The magnitude of the magnetic dipole moment M
∴ M = kIA … (i) associated with the revolving electron,
where, k is proportionality constant. ev evr  e ev 
M = IA = × πr 2 = Q I = =  … (i)
If we define unit magnetic dipole moment as that of a small 2πr 2  T 2πr 
single turn loop of unit area carrying unit current, then from The magnitude of the orbital angular momentum L of
Eq. (i), we get electron,
1 = k × 1 × 1 or k = 1
L = me vr … (ii)
∴ From Eq. (i), M = IA
On dividing Eq. (i) by Eq. (ii), we get
For N turns, M = NIA M e
= … (iii)
In vector form, M = NIA$n L 2me
where, n$ is unit vector perpendicular to the plane of the loop. Thus, the ratio of the magnitude of the magnetic dipole
Here, the factor NI is called ampere turns of current moment to the magnitude of the angular momentum of the
loop. So, magnetic dipole moment of current loop revolving electron is a constant. This ratio is called the
= ampere turns × loop area gyromagnetic ratio. Its value for an electron is 8.8 ×10 10
Note Direction of magnetic moment is given by right hand rule. C/kg.
The vector form of Eq. (iii) can be written as The magnetic dipole moment of a circular ring,
M = IA (where, A is area of the ring)
 e  or M = Iπ r 2 …(ii)
M=−  L
 2me  On putting the value of r from Eq. (i) in Eq. (ii), we get
2
L
Here, − ve sign means that M is directed opposite to L . M = Iπ  
 2π 
Now, according to Bohr’s quantisation principle, the
angular momentum of a revolving electron assumes L2
⇒ M = Iπ ×
discrete values only. That means, it is an integral multiple 4π 2
h 2
IL
of , where h is a fundamental constant of quantum ⇒ M= A-m 2
2π 4π
mechanics named after Max Planck, known as Planck’s
Example 5.12 The electron in hydrogen atom moves with a
constant having value 6.626 × 10 −34 J-s. Therefore, speed of 2.2 × 10 6 m /s in an orbit of radius 5.3 × 10 −11 cm.
angular momentum can be written as Find the magnetic moment of the orbiting electron.
nh v
L = me vr = …(iv) Sol. Frequency of revolution, f =
2π 2πr
where, n is an integer of values n > 0 and is also known as The moving charge is equivalent to a current loop, given by
principal quantum number. ev
I = f × e or I =
Now, from Eqs. (iii) and (iv), we get 2πr
M e If A be the area of the orbit, then the magnetic moment of the
= orbiting electron,
nh /2π 2me  ev  2 evr
M = IA =   (πr ) =
neh  2 πr  2
⇒ M= …(v)
4πme Putting the values, we get
When n = 1, M = µ (the elementary magnetic dipole (1.6 × 10−19 )(2.2 × 106 )(5.3 × 10−11 × 10−2 )
M=
moment), thus 2
∴ µ=
eh
…(vi) = 9.3 × 10−26A-m 2
4πme
The elementary magnetic moment of a revolving electron
Bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid
is also known as Bohr magneton (µ ). The magnetic field lines for a bar magnet and a current
carrying solenoid resemble very closely. Therefore, a bar
Now, substituting e = 1.6 × 10 −19 C , h = 6.626 × 10 −34 J-s, magnet can be thought as a large number of circulating
. and me = 91
π = 314 . × 10 −31 kg in Eq. (vi), we get currents in analogy with a solenoid. The expression for the
magnetic field due to a solenoid,
1.6 × 10 −19 × 6.626 × 10 −34
µ= −31
A-m2 µ 2m
4 × 3.14 × 9.1 × 10 B= 0 3
4π r
= 9.27 × 10 −24 A-m2
where, r is the distance between the centre of solenoid to
∴ 1 Bohr magneton = 9.27 × 10 −24 A-m 2 the required point.
This expression is same as the expression for magnetic
Example 5.11 A current I flows in a conducting wire of
length L. If we bent it in a circular form, then calculate its field of a bar magnet at its axial point. Thus, a bar magnet
magnetic dipole moment. and a solenoid produce similar magnetic fields.
Sol. Let a wire of length L is bent in a circular form of radius r, Therefore magnetic field lines associated with a solenoid
L are also similar to a bar magnet as shown in the figure.
then 2 πr = L ⇒ r = …(i)
2π
S N
r L I II
Fig. 5.17 Magnetic field lines due to a solenoid carrying current
I
Example 5.13 A closely wound solenoid of 800 turns and In vector form, we can rewrite this equation as τ = M × B
area of cross-section 2.5 × 10 4 m 2 carries a current of 3.0 A.
Explain the sense in which the solenoid acts like a bar The direction of τ is perpendicular to the plane containing
magnet. What is its associated magnetic moment? M and B and is given by right handed screw rule.
Sol. It is given that, number of turns, N = 800 Work done or potential energy of a magnetic dipole
and area of cross-section, A = 2.5 × 104 m2 (bar magnet) in a magnetic field
Now, magnetic moment of the solenoid, The torque acting on the dipole tends to align it in the
−4 direction of the field. Work has to be done in rotating the
M = NIA = 800 × 3.0 × 2.5 × 10
= 0.60 JT−1 dipole against the action of the magnetic torque. This work
done is stored in the form of potential energy of the dipole.
which acts along the axis of the solenoid in the direction
related to the sense of flow of current according to right Now, a small amount of work done in rotating the dipole
handed screw rule. through a small angle dθ is given by
dW = τ dθ = MB sin θ ⋅ dθ [from Eq. (ii)]
Bar magnet in a uniform Total work done in rotating the dipole from θ = θ0 to
θ = θ can be obtained by integrating the above
magnetic field expression.
When a bar magnet is placed in a uniform magnetic field,
∴ The potential energy of the dipole is given by
torque acts on it. Also, magnetic potential energy is
associated with the magnet due to its orientation, which is U = W = − MB (cos θ − cos θ0 )
discussed in following sections. Let us assume that, θ 0 = 90 °
Torque on bar magnet in a uniform magnetic field So, U = W = −MB (cos θ − cos 90 ° )
Let us consider a bar magnet of length 2l placed in a Therefore, U = − MB cos θ
uniform magnetic field B. Let the magnetic axis of the bar In vector notation, we may rewrite this equation as
magnet makes angle θ with the field B, as shown in the
U = −M⋅B
figure.
Special cases
N mB (i) When dipole is perpendicular to magnetic field its
2l
θ
potential energy is zero, i.e. when θ = 90 °
B
N S ⇒ U = − MB cos θ = − MB cos 90 ° = 0
S θ (ii) When the magnetic dipole is aligned along the
mB A
magnetic field, then it is in stable equilibrium having
Fig. 5.18 Torque on a bar magnet minimum potential energy, i.e. when θ = 0 °
Then, force on N-pole = mB, along B ⇒ U = − MB cosθ = − MB cos 0 ° = − MB
Force on S-pole = mB, opposite to B (iii) When θ = 180 °
where, m = strength of each pole U = − MB cosθ
and B = strength of magnetic field. = − MB cos180 ° = MB
These forces being equal and opposite form a couple, which In this condition, potential energy is maximum.
tends to rotate the magnet clockwise, so as to align it Example 5.14 A magnet of magnetic moment 50iA $ -m 2 is
along B. So, the moment of couple or torque is given by placed along the X-axis in a magnet field B = (0.5i$ + 3j$ )T.
τ = Force × Perpendicular distance Find the torque acting on the magnet.
⇒ τ = mB × NA …(i) Sol. Q Torque, τ = M × B
NA NA where, M is magnetic moment and B is magnetic field.
In ∆NAS, sinθ = =
NS 2l Given, M = 50i$A-m2, B = 0.5i$ + 3$j T
∴ NA = 2l sinθ ∴ τ = 50i$ × (0.5i$ + 3j$ )
Eq. (i) becomes, τ = mB × 2l sin θ τ = 150(i$ × $j)
Also, M = m × 2l Using i$ × j$ = k$ , we have
⇒ τ = MB sin θ …(ii) τ = 150 k$ N-m
Example 5.15 A bar magnet when placed at an angle of 30° Thus potential energy in this case is given by,
to the direction of magnetic field of 5 × 10 −2 T, experiences U = − m ⋅ B = −mB cos180°
a moment of couple 2.5 × 10 −6 N-m. If the length of the = −0.32 × 015
. × (−1) = +0.048 J
magnet is 5 cm, then what will be its pole strength? Example 5.19 Consider the situation shown in the diagram,
Sol. Here, θ = 30° , B = 5 × 10−2 T, where a small magnetised needle A is placed at a centre
τ = 2.5 × 10−6 N-m, and 2l = 5cm = 0.05 m
marked as O. The direction of its magnetic moment is
indicated by arrow. The other arrows show different positions
∴ Torque τ = MB sin θ = m (2l )B sin θ (and orientations of the magnetic moment) of another identical
τ 2.5 × 10−6 magnetised needle X.
⇒ m= =
B (2l ) sin θ 5 × 10−2 (0.05) sin 30° (i) In which configuration, the system is not in equilibrium?
∴ m = 2 × 10−3 A-m (ii) In which configuration is the system in (a) stable and
(b) unstable equilibrium?
Example 5.16 The work done in turning a magnet of (iii) Which configuration corresponds to the lowest potential
magnetic moment M by an angle 90° from the meridian is n energy among all the configurations shown?
times the corresponding work done to turn it through an X4
angle of 60°. What is the value of n?
Sol. Here, W1 = MB (cos 0° − cos 90° ) = MB (1 − 0) = MB → →
X5 X1 O A X2 X3
 1 MB
Similarly, W2 = MB (cos 0° − cos 60° ) = MB 1 −  =
 2 2
∴ W1 = 2W2 ⇒ n = 2 X6
Example 5.17 A bar magnet of magnetic moment 2.0 A-m 2 Sol. Potential energy arises due to the position of dipole X in
is free to rotate about a vertical axis through its centre. The magnetic field of A.
magnet is released from rest from the east-west position. Magnetic field due to A,
Find the kinetic energy of the magnet as it takes the µ 2M
north-south position. The horizontal component of the earth’s On end position, BA = 0 ⋅ 3 , along M
4π r
magnetic field is B = 25 µT . Earth’s magnetic field is from
µ M
south to north. On broadside position, BP′ = 0 ⋅ 3 , opposite to M
4π r
Sol. Gain in kinetic energy = Loss in potential energy
The PE, U = − M ⋅ B = −MB cos θ
Thus, KE = U i − U f
For stable equilibrium, U is minimum, i.e. θ = 0°
As, U = − MB cos θ
For unstable equilibrium, U is maximum, i.e. θ = 180°
π
Initially, θi = (for east-west direction) (i) In X1 and X 2, system is not in equilibrium.
2
(ii) (a) In X 5 and X 6, the system is in stable equilibrium and (b)
and finally, θ f = 0° (for north-south direction)
in X 4 and X 3, the system is in unstable equilibrium.
 π
∴ KE = −MB cos   − (−MB cos 0° ) = − 0 + MB = MB (iii) X 6 corresponds to lowest PE,
 2
U = −MB cos θ
Substituting the values, we have µ 0 2M µ 0 ⋅ 2M 2
−6
KE = (2.0) (25 × 10 ) J = 50 µJ = −M ⋅ cos 0 ° = − = U min
4π r 3 4 πr 3
Example 5.18 A short bar magnet of magnetic moment
m = 032. JT −1 is placed in a uniform magnetic field 0.15T. Oscillations of a freely suspended
If the bar magnet is free to rotate in the plane of the field, magnet
which orientation would correspond to its (i) stable and
(ii) unstable equilibrium? What is the potential energy of the When a small bar magnet of magnetic moment M is placed
magnet in each case? in a uniform magnetic field B such as, it is free to vibrate
Sol. (i) When m is parallel to B, then the magnet is in stable in a horizontal plane of magnetic field B about a vertical
equilibrium, i.e. θ = 0° axis passing through its centre of mass, then this bar
∴ PE in this case is given by magnet will oscillates. The restoring torque in this case
will be
U = − m ⋅ B = −mB cos θ
τ = − MBθ (Q For small oscillation, sin θ − ~ θ)
= −0.32 × 0.15 × 1 = − 0.048 J
(ii) When m is anti-parallel to B, then the magnet will be in The deflecting torque on the magnet,
unstable equilibrium, i.e. θ = 180° d 2θ
τ=Iα=I
dt 2
where, I is the moment of inertia of the magnet about the The table given below gives a comparison between an
d 2θ electric dipole and a magnetic dipole
axis of rotation and 2 is the angular acceleration. Physical quantity to
dt be compared
Electric dipole Magnetic dipole
In equilibrium, deflecting torque = restoring torque
Dipole moment p = q (2l ) M = m (2l )
d 2θ −MBθ MB
or 2
= = − ω 2θ, where ω = Direction of dipole From negative charge From south pole to
dt I I moment to the positive charge north pole
d 2θ
i.e. angular acceleration 2 ∝ angular displacement θ Net force in uniform field 0 0
dt Net torque in uniform field τ = p× E τ = M×B
So, the oscillations of a freely suspended magnet in a
Field at far away point 1 2p µ 0 2M
uniform magnetic field are simple harmonic. The period of ⋅ (along p) ⋅ (along M)
on the axis 4 πε0 r 3 4π r3
vibration is given by
Field at far away point 1 p µ0 M
⋅ ⋅
2π I on perpendicular 4 πε0 r 3 4π r3
T = = 2π bisector
ω MB (opposite to p) (opposite to M)
Magnetic field B can be calculated from above equation Potential energy Uθ = −p ⋅ E Uθ = − M ⋅ B

= −pE cosθ = −MB cosθ
and is given as
Work done in rotating Wθ1 − θ 2 = Wθ1 − θ 2 =
4π 2I
B= the dipole pE (cosθ1 − cosθ2 ) MB (cosθ1 − cosθ2 )
MT 2
Note In the table, θ is the angle between field (E or B) and dipole moment
Example 5.20 A magnetic needle is free to oscillate in a ( p or M).
uniform magnetic field as shown in figure. The magnetic
moment of magnetic needle is 7.2 Am 2 and moment of
inertia I = 6.5 × 10 −6 kg-m 2 . The number of oscillations
Magnetism and Gauss’s law
performed in 5 s is 10. Calculate the magnitude of magnetic The Gauss’s law of magnetism states that, ‘‘the surface
field. integral of a magnetic field over a closed surface is zero,
N i.e. the net magnetic flux through any closed surface is
always zero’’.
θ
∫ B⋅d S = 0
S
Consequences of Gauss’s law
Number of revolutions 5 (i) Consider a Gaussian surface (any closed surface)
Sol. Here, T = = = 0.5 s
Time taken 10 enclosing one of the poles (say south) of the magnet is
M = 7.2 Am2 and I = 6.5 × 10−6 kg-m 2 shown in figure. Here, the number of field lines
entering the Gaussian surface is same as the number of
I I
As, T = 2π or T 2 = 4π 2 lines leaving it. i.e. Net magnetic flux for the whole
MB MB Gaussian surface is zero.
The magnitude of the magnetic field,
4π 2I 4 × (3.14)2 × 6.5 × 10−6
B= 2
= = 1.42 × 10−4 T N
MT 7.2 × (0.5)2
Comparison between an electric S

Gaussian
dipole and a magnetic dipole: surface
Fig. 5.19 Magnetic field lines are continuous curves
The electrostatic analogue
The behaviour of a magnetic dipole (may be a bar magnet (ii) The Gauss’s theorem in magnetism implies that
also) is similar to the behaviour of an electric dipole. The isolated magnetic poles do not exist.
only difference is that the electric dipole moment p is (iii) In case of open surface, ∫ B ⋅ dS = φ B
S
replaced by magnetic dipole moment M and the constant
µ (magnetic flux associated with the surface)
1
is replaced by 0 . (iv) The magnetic poles always exist as unlike pairs of
4πε 0 4π equal strengths.
CHECK POINT 5.1

1. Magnetic length is 8. The intensity of magnetic field due to an isolated pole of
(a) less than geometric length strength m at a point distant r from it will be proportional
(b) equal to geometric length to
(c) greater than geometric length m r2 m
(a) (b) mr 2 (c) (d)
(d) None of the above r2 m r
2. Magnetic lines of force due to a bar magnet do not intersect 9. A particle of charge q and mass m moves in a circular orbit
because of radius r with angular speed ω. The ratio of the magnitude
(a) a point always has a single net magnetic field of its magnetic moment to that of its angular momentum is
(b) the lines have similar charges and so repel each other q qωr 2 qω qωr 2
(a) − (b) (c) (d)
(c) the lines always diverge from a single point 2m 2 2mr 2 2m
10. A bar magnet of magnetic moment M, is placed in a
3. The unit of pole strength is magnetic field of induction B. The torque exerted on it is
(a) A-m (b) Am −1 (c) Am −2 (d) A-m 2 (a) M × B (b) − B ⋅ M
(c) M ⋅ B (d) M + B
4. A bar magnet of magnetic moment M1 is axially cut into
two equal parts. If these two pieces are arranged 11. The couple acting on a magnet of length 10 cm and pole
perpendicular to each other, the resultant magnetic strength 15 A-m, kept in a field of B = 2 × 10−5 T , at an angle
moment is M2. Then, the value of M1 / M2 is of 30° is
(a)
1
(b) 1 (c)
1
(d) 2 (a) 1.5 × 10−5 N - m (b) 1.5 × 10−3 N - m
2 2 2 (c) 1.5 × 10−2 N - m (d) 1.5 × 10−6 N - m
5. At a point on the right bisector of a magnetic dipole, the
12. A bar magnet is held at right angle to a uniform magnetic
magnetic
2 field. The couple acting on the magnet is to be halved by
(a) potential varies as1 / r rotating it from this position. The angle of rotation is
(b) potential is zero at all points on the right bisector (a) 60° (b) 45° (c) 30° (d) 75°
(c) field varies as r 2
(d) field is perpendicular to the axis of dipole
13. If a bar magnet of magnetic moment M is freely suspended
in a uniform magnetic field of strength B, then the work
6. The ratio of the magnetic fields due to small bar magnet in done in rotating the magnet through an angle θ is
end on position to broadside on position is (at equal (a) MB(1 − sin θ) (b) MB sin θ
distance from the magnet) (c) MB cos θ (d) MB(1 − cos θ)
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 (c) 1 (d) 2
14. The effect due to uniform magnetic field on a freely
7. Two solenoids acting as short bar magnets P and Q are suspended magnetic needle is
arranged such that their centres are on the X-axis and are
(a) Both torque and net force are present
separated by a large distance. The magnetic axes of P and Q (b) torque is present but no net force
are along X and Y-axes, respectively. At a point R, mid-way (c) Both torque and net force are absent
between their centres, if B is the magnitude of induction (d) net force is present but not torque
due to Q, then the magnitude of total induction at R due to
the both magnets is 15. The net magnetic flux through any closed surface kept in a
5 magnetic field is
(a) 3B (b) 5B (c) B (d) B µ0 4µ 0
2 (a) zero (b) (c) 4 πµ 0 (d)
4π π
EARTH’S MAGNETISM
Our earth behaves as a huge powerful magnet. The value earth. The axis of earth’s magnet makes an angle of 11.5°
of magnetic field on the surface of earth is a few tenths of with the earth’s rotational axis. The magnetic lines of force
a gauss (1 G = 10 −4 T) and its strength varies from place to around the earth are shown in figure.
place on the earth’s surface. Some definitions related to earth’s magnetism are
The earth’s magnetic south pole is located near the (i) Geographic axis The straight line passing through
geographic north pole and the earth’s magnetic north pole the geographical north and south poles of the earth
is located near the geographic south pole. is called its geographic axis. It is the axis of rotation
In fact, the configuration of the earth’s magnetic field is of the earth.
very much similar to the one that would be achieved by (ii) Magnetic axis The straight line passing through the
burying a gigantic bar magnet deep in the interior of the magnetic north and south poles of the earth is called
the magnetic axis.
(iii) Magnetic equator It is the greatest circle on the magnetic field of earth is vertical, i.e. angle of dip is 90°, the
earth perpendicular to the magnetic axis. freely suspended magnetic needle is vertical there. At
(iv) Magnetic meridian The vertical plane in the magnetic equator, field is horizontal or angle of dip is 0°.
direction of B is called magnetic meridian.
(iii) Horizontal and vertical components of earth’s
(v) Geographic meridian The vertical plane passing
magnetic field
through the line joining the geographical north and
south poles is called the geographic meridian. Let Be be the net magnetic field at some point and H & V
be the horizontal and vertical components of Be . Let θ is
Axis of rotation
of the earth (Geographic axis) the angle of dip at the same place, then we can see that
Geographical H = B e cos θ …(i)
Magnetic
north pole
south pole and V = Be sin θ …(ii)
°
11.5
Geographical
Magnetic
S north L
equator
N Magnetic P α O
north H θ
Magnetic Geographical
north pole Geographical south pole meridian S
Fig. 5.20 Magnetic field of the earth Magnetic N

meridian
Note Earth’s magnetic field varies irregularly from place-to-place and M V
at a place it varies with time also.
Be
Q R
Elements of earth’s magnetism Fig. 5.22 Elements of earth’s magnetic field
The earth’s magnetic field at a place can be completely
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
described by three parameters which are called elements
of earth’s magnetic field. These three elements are Be = H 2 + V 2
(i) Magnetic declination or Angle of declination (α ) Further, dividing Eq. (ii) by Eq. (i), we get
At any place, the acute angle between the magnetic V 
meridian and the geographical meridian is called angle of θ = tan −1  
H
declination α. The value of α is small in India. It is
0°41′ E for Delhi and 0°58′W for Mumbai. This means By knowing H and θ at some place, we can find Be and V
that at this place compass needle tells true north very at that place.
accurately. Note
(i) At magnetic equator, H = Be cos0° = Be and at poles, H =
True north Becos90° = 0. Similarly, at magnetic equator, V = Be sin 0° = 0
and at poles, V = Be sin90° = Be.
Angle of declination (ii) tanθ = 2 tan φ, where φ is magnetic lattitude of place.
α
(iii) Magnetic maps show variation of magnetic elements from
N place-to-place. Some important lines drawn on magnetic maps are
(a) Isoclinic lines These are the lines joining points of equal dip or
inclination. A line joining places of zero dip is called aclinic line
or magnetic equator.
Fig. 5.21 Determining angle of declination (b) Isogonic lines These are the lines joining places of equal
declination. The line joining places of zero declination is called
(ii) Magnetic inclination or Angle of dip (θ) agonic line.
The angle of dip (θ ) at a place is the angle between the (c) Isodynamic lines These are the lines joining places having the
same value of horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field.
direction of earth’s magnetic field (B ) and horizontal line in (iv) In a vertical plane making an angle α to the magnetic meridian
the magnetic meridian. At earth’s magnetic poles, the H ′ = H cosα , V ′ = V
So, angle of dip in vertical plane making an angle α with magnetic Example 5.24 At a certain location in Africa, a compass
tanθ points 12° west of the geographic north. The north tip of the
meridian, tanθ′ =
cosα magnetic needle of a dip circle placed in the plane of magnetic
H′ meridian points 60° above the horizontal. The horizontal
a component of the earth’s field is measured to be 0.16 G.
q
H
Specify the direction and magnitude of the earth’s field at the
location.
V Sol. Using the relation, H = B e cos θ, we get the magnitude of B
B
H 0.16 0.16
given by B e = = = = 0.16 × 2 = 0.32 G
cos θ cos 60°  1
 
 2
−4
or B = 0.32 × 10 T [Q1 G = 10−4 T]
Example 5.21 A compass needle of magnetic moment Direction of B The earth’s field lies in a vertical plane 12°
60 A-m 2 is pointing geographical north at a certain place. west of geographic meridian at an angle of 60° above the
It experiences a torque of 1.2 × 10 −3 N-m. The horizontal horizontal line.
component of earth’s magnetic field at that place is
Example 5.25 A magnetic needle suspended in a vertical
40 µWb /m 2 . What is the angle of declination at that place?
plane at 30° from the magnetic meridian makes an angle of
Sol. A compass needle in stable equilibrium position points 45° with the horizontal. Find the true angle of dip.
towards magnetic north, i.e. along the horizontal component H
Sol. In a vertical plane at 30° from the magnetic meridian, the
of earth’s magnetic field. When it is turned through the angle
horizontal component,
of declination α, so as to point geographical north, then it H O
experiences a torque of magnitude MH sin α. 30°
∴ MH sin α = 1.2 × 10−3 N-m (given) Magnetic
meridian H¢
2
Here, M = 60 A-m ,
H = 40 × 10−6 Wb /m2
1.2 × 10−3
∴ sin α = = 0.5 V
60 × 40 × 10−6
∴ α = 30°
H ′ = H cos 30°
Example 5.22 In the magnetic meridian of a certain place,
the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is 0.26 G While vertical component is still V, therefore apparent dip
and the dip angle is 60°. Find V V
will be given by tan θ′ = =
(i) vertical component of earth’s magnetic field H ′ H cos 30°
(ii) and the net magnetic field at this place. V
But = tan θ ′
Sol. Given, H = 0.26 G and θ = 60° H
tan θ
V ∴ tan θ ′ = (where, θ = true angle of dip)
(i) As, tanθ = cos 30°
H ∴ θ = tan−1 [tan θ ′ cos 30° ]
∴ V = H tanθ = (0.26) tan 60 ° = 0.45 G  3
= tan−1 [(tan 45° ) (cos 30° )] = tan−11 ×  ≈ 41°
(ii) As, H = B e cos θ  2 
H 0.26
∴ Be = = = 0.52 G Example 5.26 A ship is to reach a place 10° south of west.
cos θ cos 60 °
In which direction should it be steered, if the declination at
Example 5.23 The horizontal and vertical components of the place is 18° west of north?
earth’s field at a place are 0.22 G and 0.38 G, respectively. Sol. As the ship has to reach a place 10° south of west, i.e.
Calculate the angle of dip and resultant intensity of earth’s
along OP, so it should be steered west of magnetic north at
field.
angle of 90° − 18° + 10° = 82°.
Sol. Here, H = 0 .22 G andV = 0.38G
V 0.38 MN GN
Now, tan θ = = = 1.7272 ME
H 0.22 18°
10°
∴ Angle of dip, θ = 59° 56′ GW GE
P O
Resultant magnetic field of the earth,
MW
B = H 2 + V 2 = 0.222 + 0.382 = 0.439 G
GS MS
Example 5.27 A dip circle shows an apparent dip of 45° at Example 5.29 The earth’s magnetic field at geomagnetic
a place where the true dip is 30°. If the dip circle is rotated poles has a magnitude 8 × 10 −5 T. Find the magnitude and
through 90°, what apparent dip will it show? the direction of the field at a point on the earth’s surface
Sol. Let θ1 and θ 2 are the angles of dip in two arbitary planes where the radius makes an angle of 120° with the axis of
the earth’s assumed magnetic dipole. What is the inclination
which are perpendicular to each other. (dip) at this point?
Here, θ1 = 45° and θ = 30°
Sol. North
As, cot2 θ = cot2 θ1 + cot2 θ 2 P BP
where, θ is true dip. S
R α Vertical
∴ cot2 30° = cot2 45° + cot2 θ 2
θ=120°
cot2 θ 2 = 3 − 1 = 2 ⇒ cotθ 2 = 1.414 R
N
∴ θ 2 = 35.2°
South
Example 5.28 A short magnet (M = 4 × 10 −2 A-m 2 ) lying in
a horizontal plane with its north-pole points 37° east of north. The geomagnetic poles are in end-on-position.
Find the net horizontal field at a point 0.1m away from the The magnetic field at geomagnetic poles,
magnet (Here, B h = 11µ T) (sin 37° = 3/5, cos 37° = 4/5).
µ 2M
Sol. B1 B ′ = 0 ⋅ 3 = 8 × 10−5 T (given)
B2 4π R
P 1
Bh M cos θ The magnetic field at point P,
r θ N N µ M
O 2
BP = 0 3 (1 + 3 cos2 θ )1/ 2
4 πR
M sin θ
B′
S S = (1 + 3 cos2 θ )1/ 2
2
8 × 10−5
Magnetic field due to magnet at P, = [1 + 3 cos2 120° ]1/ 2
2
µ 2M cos θ 1
B1 = 0 ⋅
4π r3 −5 
3 2
= 4 × 10 1 + 
4  4
10−7 × 2 × 4 × 10−2 ×
= 5 = 6.4 × 10−6 T 1 1
Hence, tan α = tan θ = tan120°
(0.1)3 2 2
3 1 3
10−7 × 4 × 10−2 × = × (− 3 ) = −
µ 0 M sin θ 5 = 2.4 × 10−6 T
B2 = ⋅ = 2 2
4π r3 (0.1)3
 3 
Since, B1 and B h are in same direction, α = tan−1 − 
 2 
∴ B ′ = B1 + B h = 6.4 × 10−6 + 11 × 10−6
Dip φ is an angle made by the earth’s magnetic field with the
= 17.4 × 10−6 T horizontal plane,
B′  3
Bp φ = α − 90° = tan−1 −  − 90°
 2 
β Neutral points
B2 P When we trace magnetic lines of force around a magnet
using a compass needle, we obtain the resultant of the
∴ BP = B ′ 2 +B 22 = (17.4)2 + (2.4)2 × 10−6 magnetic field of magnet and that of the earth. In the plot
= 308.52 × 10−6 T of the resultant magnetic field, we come across points at
which field (B ) due to the magnet becomes equal and
= 17.5 × 10−6 T opposite to the horizontal component (H ) of the earth’s
B 2 2.4 × 10−6 field, i.e. B = H. Therefore, the net magnetic field at these
and tan β = = = 014
. points will be zero.
B ′ 17.5 × 10−6
So, the points where net magnetic field due to the magnet Sol. Here, 2l = 30 cm or l = 15 cm = 015
. m,
and due to the earth’s horizontal component is zero are r = 30 cm = 0.30 m and H = 0.34 G = 0.34 × 10−4 T
called neutral points.
When magnet is placed with its north pole pointing south,
A small compass needle placed at a neutral point shall then neutral point is obtained on its axial line.
experience no force/torque. Therefore, it can set itself in any µ0 2Mr
direction, which may be different from usual N -S direction. ∴ B axial = H or × 2 =H
4π (r − l 2 )2
(i) When a magnet is placed with its north pole towards 4π H (r 2 − l 2 )2
geographic south, then neutral points lie on axial or M= ×
µ0 2r
line of the magnet.
1 0.34 × 10−4 × (0.302 − 015
. 2 )2
At each neutral point, = −7
×
10 2 × 0.30
µ 2Mr −4
0.34 × 10 × (0.0675)2
B1 = 0 2 =H = = 2.582 A-m 2
4π (r − l 2 ) 2 10−7 × 2 × 0.30
µ 0 2M M 2.582
For a short magnet (l << r ), H = The pole strength of the magnet, m = = = 8.607 A-m
4π r 3 2l 0.30
Example 5.31 A short bar magnet is placed with its north
X pole pointing north. The neutral point is 10 cm away from
N
the centre of the magnet. If H = 0.4 G, calculate the
S
E
magnetic moment of the magnet.
N W
Sol. When north pole of the magnet points towards magnetic
X′ S north, null point is obtained on perpendicular bisector of the
magnet. Simultaneously, magnetic field due to the bar magnet
should be equal to the horizontal component of earth’s
Fig. 5.23 Neutral points on axial line magnetic field H.
µ M Hr 3
Thus, H = 0 ⋅ 3 or M =
(ii) When a magnet is placed with its north pole towards 4π r ( µ 0 /4π )
geographic north, neutral points lie on equatorial Substituting the values, we get
line of the magnet. (0.4 × 10−4 ) (10 × 10−2 )3
µ M M= = 0.4 A-m2
At each neutral point, B 2 = 0 2 =H 10−7
4π (r + l 2 ) 3/ 2
Tangent galvanometer
µ M
For a short magnet (l << r ), H = 0 3 It is a device used to measure very small current. It is a
4π r moving magnet type galvanometer and works on the
principle of tangent law.
N
Tangent law
N
It states that, if a magnet is placed in two magnetic fields
W E
X S X′ right angle to each other, then it will be acted upon by two
couples tending to rotate it in opposite directions.
S
B2
mB2
N mB1
Fig. 5.24 Neutral points on equatorial line 2l
θ
Note When the magnet is held vertically on the board, there will be
only one neutral point on a horizontal board. In the other B1
orientations, there will be two neutral points.
Example 5.30 A bar magnet 30 cm long is placed in the mB1 O

S
magnetic meridian with its north pole pointing south. The
neutral point is observed at a distance of 30 cm from its one mB2
end. Calculate the pole strength of the magnet. (Given,
Fig. 5.25 Tangent law
horizontal component of earth’s field = 034
. G)
The magnet will be deflected through an angle θ, such that The needle will stay in equilibrium when its length is
the two couples balance each other and the tangent of the parallel to B.
angle of deflection gives the ratio of the two fields as The deflection of the needle from its original position θ is
B1 given by
tan θ = µ NI 2rH
B2 H tan θ = B c = 0 ⇒I = tan θ = k tan θ …(i)
2r µ 0N
where, θ is angle between magnet and magnetic field B 2 .
In case of tangent galvanometer, a magnetic compass needle 2rH
where, k = is constant for a given galvanometer at
is placed horizontally at the centre of a vertically fixed µ 0N
current- carrying coil whose plane is in the magnetic given place and is called reduction factor of galvanometer.
meridian.
Sensitivity
Sensitivity is the measure of change in the deflection
Bc
produced by a unit current.
P A C dθ 1 1
It is given by = =
S
θ
dI k sec 2 θ  I2 
H k 1 + 2 
 k 
[using Eq. (i) and sec 2 θ = 1 + tan 2 θ]
T1
B For good sensitivity, the change in deflection should be
T2
large for a given fractional change of current.
Note The tangent galvanometer is most sensitive when deflection is
around 45°.
Fig. 5.26 Tangent galvanometer Example 5.32 In a tangent galvanometer, when a current of
10 mA is passed, the deflection is 31°. By what percentage,
As shown in figure, pointer P is rigidly attached to the current has to be increased, so as to produce a deflection
of 42°?
compass needle and perpendicular to it. The compass
needle together with pointer can rotate freely about the Sol. Here, I1 = 10 mA, θ1 = 31°, I 2 = ?, θ 2 = 42°
vertical axis. I 2 tan θ 2
As, =
When no current flows through the coil, its plane is I1 tan θ1
parallel to compass needle and coincides with magnetic tan θ 2 tan 42° 10 × 0.9
meridian. When current passes through the coil, it ∴ I 2 = I1 = 10 × = = 15 mA
tan θ1 tan 31° 0.6
produces magnetic field at the centre which deflects the Percentage increase in current,
compass needle and pointer deflects through the same angle.
(I 2 − I1) (15 − 10)
The magnetic field produced at centre due to a coil, × 100 = × 100 = 50%
I1 10
µ 0 NI
Bc = Example 5.33 The coil of a tangent galvanometer of radius
2r 12 cm is having 200 turns. If the horizontal component of
earth’s magnetic field is 25 µT, find the current which gives
where, N is number of turns in the coil, r is radius of coil a deflection of 60°.
and I is current in the coil.
Sol. Given, r = radius of coil = 12 cm = 0.12 m,
Field B c is perpendicular to the plane of coil, i.e.
perpendicular to magnetic meridian N = number of turns of coil = 200,
or perpendicular to the horizontal component of earth’s H = 25 µT = 25 × 10−6 T and φ = 60°
magnetic field. As we know, I = k tan θ
The resultant horizontal magnetic field, 2rH
where, k=
µ 0N
B = B c2 + H 2
2rH 2 × 0.12 × 25 × 10−6 × tan 60°
B ∴ I= tan θ =
⇒ tan θ = c (tangent law of perpendicular field) µ 0N 4π × 10−7 × 200
H = 0.042 A
Sum position This method can be used when magnets

Vibration magnetometer are placed with their poles in same direction.
It is an instrument which is used to find magnetic moment S N M1
of bar magnet and to compare magnetic fields of two S N M2
magnets. This device works on the principle that
Fig. 5.28
whenever a freely suspended magnet in a uniform
magnetic field is disturbed from its equilibrium position, it Net magnetic moment, M s = M1 + M 2
starts vibrating about the mean position. Net moment of inertia, I s = I1 + I 2
Time period of oscillation of this pair in earth’s
Torsion head
magnetic field H,
Screw
Is I1 + I 2
Glass tube T s = 2π = 2π …(i)
Ms H (M1 + M 2 )H
S1 S2 1 (M1 + M 2 )H
Stirrup ∴ Frequency, ν s =
2π Is
S N
Plane Difference position This method can be used when
mirror magnets are placed with their poles in opposite
Magnetic direction.
meridian
M2 N S
Fig. 5.27 Vibration magnetometer
S N M1
Fig. 5.29
Time period of oscillation of experimental bar magnet (with
magnetic moment M) in earth’s magnetic field (H ) is given by Net magnetic moment, M d = M1 − M 2
I Net moment of inertia, I d = I1 + I 2
the formula, T = 2π , where I = moment of inertia of
MH Id I1 + I 2
and T d = 2π = 2π …(ii)
short bar magnet. M dH (M1 − M 2 )H
(i) Comparison of horizontal components of earth’s
magnetic field at two places 1 (M1 − M 2 )H
∴ Frequency, ν d =
2π (I1 + I 2 )
I
T = 2π , since I and M of the magnet are constants. So, from Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
MH
1 T2 Ts (M1 − M 2 ) M T 2 + T d2
So, T2 ∝
H
⇒ 1 = 22 = ⇒ 1 = s2
H H 2 T1 Td (M1 + M 2 ) M 2 T d − T s2
(ii) Determination of magnetic moment of a magnet (ii) Comparison of two magnetic fields Suppose we
wish to compare the magnetic fields B1 and B 2 at
The experimental (given) magnet is put into vibration some point P due to two magnets. For this, vibration
magnetometer and its time period T is determined. magnetometer is so placed that the centre of its
I 4π 2 I magnet lies on P.
Now, T = 2π ⇒ M=
MH H ⋅T 2 Now one of the given magnets is placed at some
known distance from P in the magnetic meridian,
(iii) Comparison of magnetic moment of two magnets
such that point P lies on its axial line and its north
of same size and mass
pole points north. In this position, the fields B1 at P
I produced by the magnet will be in the direction of H.
As, T = 2π , here I and H are constants.
MH Hence, the magnet suspended in the magnetometer
1 M1 T 22 will vibrate in the resultant magnetic field (H + B 1 ).
So, M∝ ⇒ = Its period of vibration is noted, say it is T1, then
T2 M 2 T12
I
T1 = 2π .
(iv) Comparison of magnetic moments of magnets of M (H + B 1 )
different sizes
Now the first magnet is replaced by the second
Following methods are used for the respective
magnet and the second magnet is placed in the same
positions of magnets
position and again the time period is noted.
If the field produced at P due to this magnet be B 2 and I′

∴ T ′ = 2π
I MH
the new time period beT 2 , thenT 2 = 2π .
M (H + B 2 ) T′ I′ l2 + h2 52 + (0.5)2
⇒ = = 2 =
T I l + b2 52 + 32
Finally, the time period of the magnetometer under
T′
the influence of the earth’s magnetic field alone is ⇒ = 0.86
T
I
determined. Let it be T, then T = 2π . ∴ T ′ = T × 0.86 = 5 × 0.86 = 4.30 s
MH
Example 5.36 A magnetic needle performs 20 oscillations
Solving above three equations for T , T1 and T 2 , we per minute in a horizontal plane. If the angle of dip be 30°,
can show that then how many oscillations per minute will this needle
B1 (T 2 − T12 ) T 22 perform in vertical north-south plane and in vertical
= east-west plane?
B2 (T 2 − T 22 ) T12
Sol. In horizontal plane, the magnetic needle oscillates earth’s
Example 5.34 The time period of vibration of two magnets horizontal component H.
in sum position (magnets placed with similar poles on one I
∴ T = 2π
side one above the other) is 3 s. When polarity of weaker MH
magnet is reversed the combination makes 12 oscillations per In the vertical north-south plane (magnetic meridian), the
minute. What is the ratio of magnetic moments of two needle oscillates in the total earth’s magnetic field B e and in
magnets?
vertical east-west plane (plane perpendicular to the magnetic
1 60s meridian) it oscillates only in earth’s vertical component V. If
Sol. Here, T1 = 3s and T2 = min = = 5s
12 12 its time period be T1 and T2, then
As, we know that I
M1 T22 + T12 T1 = 2π
= MB e
M 2 T22 − T12
I
M1 52 + 32 34 17 and T2 = 2 π
⇒ = = = MV
M 2 52 − 32 16 8 From above equations, we can find,
T12 H n2 B
Example 5.35 A bar magnet of length 5 cm, width 3 cm
2
= or 12 = e
and height 2 cm takes 5 s to complete an oscillation in T Be n H
vibration magnetometer placed in a horizontal magnetic field n 22 V
of 20 µT. The mass of this bar magnet is 250 g. (i) Find the Similarly, =
n2 H
magnetic moment of the magnet. (ii) If the magnet is put in
Be 2
the magnetometer with its 0.5 cm edge horizontal, what Further, = sec θ = sec 30° =
would be the new time period? H 3
Sol. (i) Moment of inertia of magnet is given by V 1
and = tan θ = tan 30° =
m (l 2 + b 2 ) H 3
I=
12  
B  2 
∴ n 12 = (n )2  e  = (20)2  
where m = mass of magnet. H   3
250 (52 + 32 ) × 10 −4 × 10 −3 or n 1 = 21.5 oscillations/min
∴ I=
12 V   1 
= 7.08 × 10 −5 kg-m 2 and n 22 = (n )2   = (20)2  
H   3
I ∴ n 2 = 15.2 oscillations/min
Also, T = 2π
MH
4π 2I Example 5.37 A magnet performs 15 oscillations per minute
⇒ M= in a horizontal plane, where angle of dip is 60° and earth’s
HT 2 total field is 0.5 G. At another place, where total field is
On putting values, we get 0.6 G, the magnet performs 20 oscillations per minute. What
4 × (3.14)2 × (7.08 × 10 −5 ) is the angle of dip at this place?
M= = 5.58 Am 2
20 × 10 −6 × 5 × 5 Sol. As, H = B cos θ
(ii) New moment of inertia is given by
where, H = horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field,
m (l 2 + h 2 )
I′ = 0 B = total earth’s magnetic field
12
and θ = angle of dip Sol. When magnet is divided into two equal parts, the magnetic
Then, H1 = B1 cos θ1 and H 2 = B 2 cos θ 2 dipole moment,
l M
I T M ′ = pole strength × = [pole strength remain same]
Further, T1 = 2π = 2π 2 2
MH1 MB1 cos θ1
m
Also, the mass of magnet becomes half, i.e. m ′ = .
I I 2
and T2 = 2 π = 2π
MH 2 MB 2 cos θ 2 ml 2
Moment of inertia of magnet, I = .
T12 B 2 cos θ 2 12
Q = 2
T22 B1 cos θ1 1 m   l  ml 2
New moment of inertia, I ′ =    =
B1 T12 12  2   2 12 × 8
∴ cos θ 2 = × cos θ1 I
B 2 T22 ⇒ I′ =
2 8
B1  ν 2 
= ×   cos θ1  I 
B 2  ν1  Now, T = 2π  
 MB 
2
 0.5  20
=    cos 60° = 0.74  I′   I/8 
 0.6  15  and T ′ = 2π   = 2π  
M′ B   MB / 2
∴ θ 2 = cos−1 (0.74) = 42.2°
T T′ 1
T′ = ⇒ =
Example 5.38 A small bar magnet having a magnetic 2 T 2
moment of 9 × 10 −9 A -m 2 is suspended at its centre of
gravity by a light torsionless string at a distance of 10 −2 m Example 5.40 The time period of the magnet in an
vertically above a long, straight horizontal wire carrying a oscillation magnetometer in the earth’s magnetic field is 2 s.
A short bar magnet is placed to the north of the
current of 1.0 A from east to west. Find the frequency of
magnetometer, at a separation 10 cm from the oscillating
oscillation of the magnet about its equilibrium position. The magnet, with its north pole pointing towards north. The time
moment of inertia of the magnet is 6 × 10 −9 kg -m 2 . period becomes half. Calculate the magnetic moment of this
(Take, H = 3 × 10 −5 T ) short magnet.
Sol. The magnetic moment of the bar magnet, (Take, B h = 12µT )
M = 9 × 10 −9 A-m2 N
Short
The magnitude of the magnetic field at the location of the magnet
magnet due to current carrying wire is, S
10 cm
µ i (2 × 10−7 ) (1.0)
B= 0 =
2π r 10−2
= 2 × 10−5 Wb /m2 (S to N)
The earth’s horizontal magnetic field, I
Sol. Time period, T = 2π
−5 MB
H = 3 × 10 T
1 1
= 3 × 10 −5
Wb /m2 ⇒ T ∝ ⇒B ∝
B T2
−5 2
∴ B + H = 5 × 10 Wb / m Let M is magnetic moment and B ′ is the magnetic field due to
The frequency of oscillation will be short magnet, along south to north.
1 M (B + H ) Given, T1 = 2 s, B h = 12 µT
ν= [here, I = moment of inertia]
2π I T2 = 1 s, B h = B + B ′ = 12 + B ′
(B + B ′ ) T12
1 (9 × 10−9 ) × (5 × 10−5 ) = 2
= [S to N ] B T2
2π 6 × 10−9
2
= 1.38 × 10−3 Hz 12 + B ′  2
=  =4
12  1
Example 5.39 A thin rectangular magnet suspended freely ⇒ B ′ = 36 µT
has a period of oscillation equal to T. Now, it is broken into
µ 2M 2M
two equal halves (each having half of the original length) B ′ = 0 3 ⇒ 36 × 10−6 = 10−7 ×
and one piece is made to oscillate freely in the same field. If 4π r (0.10)3
its period of oscillation is T ′, then find the ratio T ′/T . M = 0.18 A-m2
CHECK POINT 5.2

1. The earth’s magnetic field is 9. The dip at a place is δ. For measuring it, the axis of the dip
(a) 10−4 T (b) 10−5 T needle is perpendicular to the magnetic meridian. If the
(c) 10−6 T (d) None of these axis of the dip needle makes an angle θ with the magnetic
meridian, then the apparent dip will be given by
2. Magnetic meridian is a (a) tan δ cos ecθ (b) tan δ sinθ
(a) point (b) horizontal plane (c) tan δ cosθ (d) tan δ secθ
(c) vertical plane (d) line along N-S
10. At a neutral point
3. The angle between the magnetic meridian and geographical (a) field of magnet is zero
meridian is called
(b) field of earth is zero
(a) angle of dip (b) angle of declination
(c) field of magnet is perpendicular to field to earth
(c) magnetic moment (d) power of magnetic field
4. Angle of dip at the equator is
11. Tangent galvanometer measures
(a) 0° (b) 30°
(c) 60° (d) 90° (a) capacitance (b) current
(c) resistance (d) potential difference
5. Earth’s magnetic field always has a horizontal component
except at 12. Two tangent galvanometers A and B are identical except in
(a) magnetic equator (b) magnetic pole their number of turns. They are connected in series. On
passing a current through them, deflections of 60° and 30°
(c) geographical north pole (d) everywhere
are produced. The ratio of the number of turns in A and B is
1
6. If H = V , then find angle of dip. (where, symbols have (a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
3 (c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
their usual meanings) 13. Vibration magnetometer is used for comparing
(a) 60° (b) 30° (c) 45° (d) 90° (a) magnetic fields (b) earth’s field
7. Let V and H be the vertical and horizontal components of (c) magnetic moments (d) All of these
earth’s magnetic field at any point on earth. Near the north 14. The time period of a freely suspended bar magnet in a field
pole is 2 s. It is cut into two equal parts along its axis, then the
(a) V >> H (b) V << H time period is
(c) V = H (d) V = H = 0 (a) 4 s (b) 0.5 s
8. If a magnet is suspended at angle 30° to the magnetic (c) 2 s (d) 0.25 s
meridian, then the dip needle makes angle of 45° with the 15. A bar magnet suspended freely in a uniform magnetic field
horizontal. The real dip is is vibrating with a time period of 3 s. If the field strength is
(a) tan−1 ( 3 / 2) (b) tan−1 ( 3) increased to 4 times of the earlier field strength, then the
 3  2 time period (in second) will be
(c) tan−1   (d) tan−1  
 2  3 (a) 12 (b) 6 (c) 1.5 (d) 0.75
MAGNETIC INDUCTION
AND MAGNETIC MATERIALS
Several experiments have been done which showed that Some important terms used in magnetism
magnetic lines get modified due to the presence of Magnetic materials have different properties, so some
certain materials in the magnetic field. Few substances important terms which are used to define them, are given
such as O 2 , air, platinum, aluminium, etc. show a very below
small increase in the magnetic flux passing through
them, when placed in a magnetic field. Such substances (i) Magnetic induction (B)
are called paramagnetic substances. The number of magnetic lines of force inside a magnetic
Few other substances such as H2, H2 O, Cu, Zn, Sb, Bi, substance crossing per unit area normal to their direction is called
etc., show a very small decrease in magnetic flux and are the magnetic induction or magnetic flux density inside the
said to be diamagnetic substances. There are other substance. It is denoted by B.
substances like Fe, Co, etc., through which the magnetic The SI unit of B is tesla (T) or weber/metre 2 (Wb/m2 ). The CGS
flux increases to a larger value and are known as unit is gauss (G).
ferromagnetic substances. 1 Wb/m2 = 1 T = 10 4 G
(v) Relative magnetic permeability ( µ r )

It is the ratio of the magnetic permeability µ of the
S N substance to the permeability of free space.
µ
Thus, µr =
µ0
Fig. 5.30 Magnetic field lines of a magnetic material µ r is a pure ratio, hence dimensionless. For vacuum, its
value is 1.
(ii) Intensity of magnetisation (I) µ r can also be defined as the ratio of the magnetic field B
It is defined as the magnetic moment per unit volume of in the substance, when placed in magnetic field B 0 . Thus,
the magnetised substance. This basically represents the B
extent to which the substance is magnetised. µr =
B0
M
Thus, I= For paramagnetic substance, µ r > 1.
V For diamagnetic substance, µ r < 1
The SI unit of I is ampere/metre (A/m). Its dimensional and for ferromagnetic substance, µ r > > 1.
formula is [M0 L−1T 0 A].
(vi) Magnetic susceptibility (χ m )
Note For bar magnet, I = m / A.
It is the property of the substance which shows how easily
(iii) Magnetic intensity or Magnetic a substance can be magnetised when kept in a magnetising
field strength (H ) field. It can also be defined as the ratio of intensity of
The capability of the magnetising field to magnetise the magnetisation (I ) in a substance to the magnetic intensity
I
substance is expressed by means of a vector H, called the (H ) applied to the substance, i.e. χ m = .
magnetic intensity of the field. It is defined through the H
vector relation, It is a scalar quantity with no units and dimensions.
B For paramagnetic substance, χ is small and positive.
H= −I For diamagnetic substance, χ is small and negative.
µ0
The SI unit of H is same as that of I, i.e. ampere/metre (vii) Relation between µ r and χ m
(A/m). The CGS unit is oersted. We have, B = µ 0 (I + H )
I  B
Note or B = µ 0 H  + 1 or B = B 0 (χ m + 1) ⇒ = χm +1
(i) In vacuum, I = 0∴H =
B
.
H  B0
µ0
B µ
(ii) The magnetic field intensity of solenoid is H = nI. It is independent But = = µ r = relative permeability
of the material of the core of a solenoid. B0 µ 0
(iii) When magnetic material is kept inside the solenoid, then
B = B0 + BM
∴ µ r = χ m +1
where, B 0 = magnetic field due to magnetising field Example 5.41 The magnetic moment of a magnet
and B m = magnetic field due to magnetisation of the material. (15 cm × 2 cm × 1 cm ) is 1.2 A-m 2 . Calculate its intensity of
magnetisation.
(iv) Magnetic permeability (µ)
Sol. Given, magnetic moment, M = 1.2 A-m2
It is defined as the ratio of the magnetic induction B inside
the magnetised substance to the magnetic intensity H of Volume, V = (15 × 2 × 1) × 10−6m3 = 30 × 10−6 m3
the magnetising field. ∴ Intensity of magnetisation,
B M 1.2
i.e. µ= I= = = 4 × 104Am−1
H V 30 × 10−6
It is basically a measure of conduction of magnetic lines of Example 5.42 Relative permeability of iron is 5500, what
force through a substance. The SI unit of magnetic will be its magnetic susceptibility?
permeability is weber/ampere-metre (Wb/A-m) or tesla Sol. As, we know that, µ r = 1 + χ m ⇒ 5500 = 1 + χ m
metre-ampere −1 (TmA −1).
⇒ χ m = 5500 − 1 = 5499
Example 5.43 The magnetising field of 20 CGS units The direction will be from S to N-pole.
produces a flux of 2400 CGS units in a bar of iron of µ0 m
cross-section 0.2 cm 2 . Calculate the (i) permeability and
(ii) At centre, H N = 4π l =
2 m
(ii) susceptibility of the bar. , along N-pole
µ0 4 πl 2
20 × 10 3
Sol. Given, H = 20 oersted = A/m –m +m
4π S N
−8
φ = 2400 Maxwell = 2400 × 10 Wb
2l
and A = 0.2 cm 2 = 0.2 × 10−4 m 2 m
HS = , along S-pole
φ 2400 × 10−8 4 πl 2
∴ Magnetic field, B = = = 1.20 Wb /m2 2
A 0.2 × 10− 4 H = HN + HS =
m
=
(i) The permeability of the bar material, 2 πl 2 2π(2 × 10−2 )2
B 1.20 1
µ= = = 7.54 × 10−4 H/m = × 104 A/m, along S-pole
H (20 / 4π ) × 103 4π
(iii) Magnetic field at the centre of magnet, B = µ 0 (H + I)
(ii) The magnetic susceptibility and permeability of a
 1 
material are related with each other as, = 4π × 10−7 − × 104 + 2 × 104
µ 7.54 × 10−4  4π 
µ = µ 0 (1 + χ m ) or χ m = −1= − 1 = 599
µ0 4π × 10−7 = −10−3 + 8π × 10−3 = (8π − 1) × 10−3
= 2.4 × 10−2 T, along N-pole
Example 5.44 A solenoid having 2000 turns/m has a core of
a material with relative permeability 220. The area of core
is 4 cm 2 and carries a current of 5A. Calculate (i) magnetic Classification of substances on
intensity, (ii) magnetic field (iii) and magnetisation of the
core. Also, calculate the pole strength developed. the basis of magnetic behaviour
Sol. Given, n = 2000 turns/m, i = 5A, All substances (whether solid, liquid or gases) may be classified
µ r = 220, A = 4 cm 2 = 4 × 10−4 m into three categories in terms of their magnetic behaviour
(i) paramagnetic, (ii) diamagnetic and (iii) ferromagnetic. In the
(i) Magnetic intensity, H = ni = 2000 × 5 = 10000 A/m
following section we will discuss them in details
(ii) Magnetic field, B = µH = µ 0µ r H
= 4π × 10 −7 × 220 × 10000 = 88π × 10 −2 T 1. Diamagnetic substances
(iii) As we know, B = µ 0 (H + I ) Diamagnetic substances are those which are repelled by a
88π × 10 −2 = 4π × 10 −7 (10000 + I ) magnetic field. Examples of such substances are bismuth,
⇒ 2.20 × 10 6 = 10 4 + I antimony, gold, quartz, water, alcohol, etc.
∴ I = (2.20 × 10 6 − 10 4 ) = 2.19 × 10 6 A/m They have the following properties
Pole strength, m = IA = (2.19 × 10 6 )(4 × 10 −4 ) = 876 A-m (i) These substances when placed in a magnetic field,
acquire feeble magnetisation in a direction opposite
Example 5.45 The space within a current carrying solenoid to that of the applied field. Thus, the magnetic lines
is filled with magnesium having magnetic susceptibility, of induction inside the substance is smaller than that
χ Mg = 1.2 × 10 −5 . What will be the percentage increase in outside to it.
magnetic field? B0
Sol. Magnetic field without magnesium, B 0 = µ 0H
With magnesium, B = µH = µ 0 (1 + χ )H Diamagnetic
substance
B 
∴ % increase =  − 1 × 100 = χ Mg × 100 B < B0
B0 
= 1.2 × 10−5 × 100 = 1.2 × 10−3
Fig. 5.31 Magnetic field inside a diamagnetic substance
Example 5.46 Consider a bar magnet having pole strength
2 A-m, magnetic length 4 cm and area of cross-section 1 cm 2 . (ii) In a non-uniform magnetic
Find field, these substances move Pushed
(i) the magnetisation I, (ii) the magnetic intensity H from stronger to weaker parts up
(iii) and the magnetic field at the centre of magnet. of the external magnetic field. N S
Sol. Given, m = 2 A-m, 2l = 4 cm As, they acquire magnetisation
⇒ l = 2 × 10−2 m, A = 1 cm 2 = 1 × 10−4 m in opposite direction, hence Fig. 5.32 Diamagnetic
substance in external
M m ⋅ 2l m 2 these are weakly repelled by field
(i) Magnetisation, I = = = = = 2 × 104A/m the magnetic field.
V A ⋅ 2l A 1 × 10−4
(iii) If a diamagnetic liquid is filled in a narrow U-tube

and one limb is placed in between the pole of an Pulled
electromagnet, then the level of liquid depresses in
when the field is switched ON. N S
(iv) The relative permeability µ r is slightly less than 1, Fig. 5.36 Paramagnetic substance in external field
i.e. µ r < 1.
Thus, they move from weaker to stronger parts of the
(v) The susceptibility χ m of such substances is always
field.
small and negative. It is constant and does not vary
with field or the temperature as shown in figure (iii) If a paramagnetic liquid is filled in a narrow U-tube
and one limb is placed in between the pole pieces of
χm
an electromagnet such that the level of the liquid is
χ ∝ T°
in line with the field, then the liquid will rise in the
limb as the field is switched ON.
T
O
N S
Fig. 5.33 χ m versus T graph for diamagnetic substance
(vi) Here, intensity of magnetisation varies inversely

with magnetic field strength, i.e. − I ∝ H as shown
in figure.
Fig. 5.37
H→
−I (iv) For paramagnetic substances, the relative

↓ permeability µ r is slightly greater than one.
(v) Magnetic susceptibility is positive.
Fig. 5.34 I versus H graph for diamagnetic substance
(vi) I-H curve can be given as
Note Diamagnetism is a universal property, but in most of the ↑
substances, the effect is so weak that they behave like I
paramagnetic or ferromagnetic, etc.
I∝H
2. Paramagnetic substances
Paramagnetic substances are those which are attracted by H→
a magnetic field. Examples of such substances are Fig. 5.38 I versus H graph for paramagnetic substance
platinum, aluminium, chromium, manganese, CuSO 4
solution, etc. Curie’s law
They have the following properties According to this law, the magnetic susceptibility of
(i) These substances when placed in a magnetic field, paramagnetic substances is inversely proportional to its
acquire a feeble magnetisation in the same sense as absolute temperature, i.e.
the applied field. 1 C
χm ∝ ⇒ χm =
Thus, the magnetic lines of induction inside the T T
substance is slightly greater than outside to it. where, C is Curie constant and T = absolute temperature in
Paramagnetic kelvin. On increasing temperature, the magnetic
substance B > B0 susceptibility of paramagnetic material decreases and
vice-versa as shown is figure. This variation can be shown as
χm
Fig. 5.35 Magnetic field inside a
paramagnetic substance
(ii) These substances are attracted towards regions of

stronger magnetic field when placed in a T
non-uniform magnetic field. Fig. 5.39 χ m versus T graph for paramagnetic substance
Example 5.47 The magnetic susceptibility of a paramagnetic Curie temperature, the ferromagnetic substances
material at −73°C is 0.0075. Find its value at −173° C. become paramagnetic. It is 1000°C for iron, 770°C
Sol. Magnetic susceptibility, for steel, 360°C for nickel and 1150°C for cobalt.
χ m1 = 0.0075, T1 = −73° C = (−73 + 273) K = 200 K (vi) Its I-H curve can be drawn as
χ m2 = ?, T2 = −173° C = (−173 + 273) K = 100 K
1
According to Curie’s law, χ m ∝ IS
T
χm T 200
∴ Ratio of magnetic susceptibilities, 2 = 1 = =2 ↑
χ m1 T2 100 I
⇒ χ m2 = 2χ m1 = 2 × 0.0075 = 0.015
H
Example 5.48 A solenoid having 5000 turns/m carries a HS
current of 2A. An aluminium ring at temperature 300K Fig. 5.41 I versus H curve for ferromagnetic substance
inside the solenoid provides the core. (i) If the magnetisation
I is 2 × 10 −2 A/m, find the susceptibility of aluminium at Curie-Weiss law
300K. (ii) If temperature of the aluminium ring is 320K,
When temperature increases above the Curie temperature,
what will be the magnetisation?
a ferromagnetic substance becomes an ordinary
Sol. (i) Here, H = ni = 5000 × 2 = 104A/m paramagnetic substance whose magnetic susceptibility
Q I = χH obeys the Curie-Weiss law as given below
2 × 10−2
C′
∴ χ=
I
= = 2 × 10−6 χm =
H 104 T − TC
(where, I = intensity of magnetisation) where, TC = Curie temperature and C ′ = constant.
(ii) According to Curie law, Variation of χ m versus T is shown below in the figure
C χ T χm
χ= ⇒ 2 = 1
T χ1 T2
T1 300
χ2 = χ1 = × 2 × 10−6 = 1.875 × 10−6
T2 320
T
Magnetisation at 320 K, T = Tc
I = χ 2H = 1.875 × 10−6 × 104 = 1.875 × 10−2A/m Fig. 5.42 χ m versus T graph for a magnetic substance
3. Ferromagnetic substances Atomic model of magnetism

Ferromagnetic substances are those which are strongly
We are familiar with the model of an atom which has a
attracted by a magnetic field. Examples of such substances
nucleus that contains the protons and neutrons and electron
are iron, nickel, steel, cobalt and their alloys. These
in the orbit around the nucleus. Within the atom, the
substances resemble to a higher degree with paramagnetic
electrons behave as a magnetic dipole having permanent
substances as regard with their behaviour.
dipole moment, hence atoms are like a tiny bar magnet.
They have the following properties
The three properties of atoms that give rise to magnetic
(i) These substances are strongly magnetised by even a dipole moment are discussed below.
weak magnetic field.
(i) The electrons moving around the nucleus in the
(ii) The relative permeability is very large and is of the
orbits act as small current loop and contribute
order of hundreds and thousands. Here, B >> B 0 .
magnetic moments.
Ferromagnetic
(ii) The spinning electron has an intrinsic magnetic
substances dipole moment.
(iii) The nucleus contribute to magnetic moment due to
Fig. 5.40 Magnetic field inside ferromagnetic substance the motion of charge within the nucleus.
(iii) The susceptibility is positive and very large. The magnitude of nuclear moments is about 10 − 3 times that
(iv) Magnetic susceptibility of ferromagnetic substance of electronic moments or the spin magnetic moments as the
does not change according to Curie law. later two are of the same order. Major contribution in
(v) Susceptibility decreases steadily with the rise in magnetic moment of an atom is produced by electron spin as
temperature. Above a certain temperature known as the net contribution of the orbital revolution is very small.
This is because most of the electrons pair are in such a Thus, the whole substance is magnetised in the direction
way that they produce equal and opposite orbital magnetic of the external magnetic field.
moment and so, they cancel out. Although, these electrons
also try to pair up with their opposite spins but in case of
spin motion of an electron, it is not always possible to
form equal and opposite pairs.
Fig. 5.44 In presence of external magnetic field
Explanation of magnetism in magnetic As the temperature of substance is increased, the thermal
substances agitation disturbs the magnetic alignment of the atoms. Thus,
On the basis of the above discussed properties, we can we can say that paramagnetism is temperature dependent.
explain the origin of magnetism in the magnetic materials
as follow (iii) Ferromagnetism
Iron like elements and their alloys are known as
(i) Diamagnetism ferromagnetic substances. The susceptibility of these
The property of diamagnetism is generally found in those substances is in several thousands.
substances whose atoms (or molecules) have even number Like paramagnetic substances, atoms of ferromagnetic
of electrons in outermost orbit which form pairs. “The net substances have a permanent magnetic moment and behave
magnetic moment of an atom of a diamagnetic substance is like tiny magnets. But in ferromagnetic substances, the
thus zero.” When a diamagnetic substance is placed in an atoms form innumerable small effective regions called
external magnetic field, the spin motion of electrons is so domains.
modified that the electrons which produce the magnetic
moments in the direction of external field slow down
while the electrons which produce magnetic moments in Domains
opposite direction get accelerated.
Thus, a net magnetic moment is induced in the opposite
direction of applied magnetic field. Hence, the substance is
Fig. 5.45 Unmagnetised material
magnetised opposite to the external field.
Note Diamagnetism is temperature independent. The size of the domain vary from about 10 −6 cm3 to
(ii) Paramagnetism 10 −2 cm3 . Each domain has 10 17 to 10 21 atoms whose
magnetic moments are aligned in the same direction. In an
The property of paramagnetism is found in those unmagnetised ferromagnetic specimen, the domains are
substances, whose atoms or molecules have an excess of oriented randomly, so that their resultant magnetic
electrons, spinning in the same direction. moment is zero.
Hence, atoms of paramagnetic substances have a When the specimen is placed in a external magnetic field,
permanent magnetic moment and behave like tiny bar then the resultant magnetisation may increase in two
magnets. In the absence of external magnetic field, the different ways.
tiny bar magnets are randomly oriented and net magnetic Strong B0
Weak B0
moment is, thus zero. Domains External field
Tiny bar magnets
(a) Magnetisation by (b) Magnetisation by

domain growth domain rotation
Fig. 5.43 In the absence of external magnetic field Fig. 5.46 Ferromagnetic substance in (a) weak B0 and (b) strong B0
When paramagnetic substance is placed in an external (a) The domains which are oriented favourably with
magnetic field, then each atomic magnet experiences a torque respect to the field will increase in size, whereas
which tends to turn the magnet in the direction of the field. those oriented opposite to the external magnetic field
The atomic magnets are thus, aligned in the direction of the will reduce.
field. (b) The domains rotate towards the direction of
magnetic field.
Comparative study of magnetic materials

S.No. Diamagnetic substances Paramagnetic substances Ferromagnetic substances
(i) These substances when placed in a magnetic These substances when placed in a magnetic These substances when placed in a magnetic
field, acquire feeble magnetism opposite to the field, acquire feeble magnetism in the field are strongly magnetised in the direction
direction of the magnetic field. direction of the magnetic field. of the field.
(ii) These substances are repelled by a magnet. These substances are feebly attracted by a These substances are strongly attracted by a
magnet. magnet.
(iii) When a diamagnetic solution is poured into a The level of the paramagnetic solution in that No liquid is ferromagnetic.
U-tube and one arm is placed between the arm rises.
poles of strong magnet, then the level of
solution in that arm is lowered.
N S
N S
Paramagnetic
solution
Diamagnetic solution
(iv) If a rod of diamagnetic material is suspended In case of paramagnetic rod, its axis becomes Also, in case of ferromagnetic rod, its axis
freely between two magnetic poles, then its parallel to the magnetic field. becomes parallel to the magnetic field.
axis becomes perpendicular to the
magnetic field.
N S N S
N S B B
Axis Axis
B
Axis
(v) In non-uniform magnetic field, the In non-uniform magnetic field, they move In non-uniform magnetic field, they move
diamagnetic substances are attracted towards from weaker to stronger part of the magnetic from weaker to stronger magnetic field
the weaker fields, i.e. they move from stronger field slowly. rapidly.
to weaker magnetic field.
(vi) Their permeability is less than one (µ < 1). Their permeability is slightly greater than one Their permeability is much greater than one
0 < µ r < 1, µ < µ 0 (µ > 1). 1< µ r < 1 + ε,µ > µ 0 (µ >> 1). µ r >> 1, µ >> µ 0
(vii) Their susceptibility is small and negative Their susceptibility is small and positive Their susceptibility is large and positive
[−1< χ m < 0]. It is independent of (0 < χ m < ε). It is inversely proportional to (χ m >> 1). They also follow Curie’s law,
temperature. absolute temperature which is Curie’s law, i.e. 1
1 i.e. χ ∝ .
χ∝ . T − TC
T
At Curie temperature, ferromagnetic substances
change into paramagnetic substances.
(viii) Shape of diamagnetic liquid in a glass crucible Shape of paramagnetic liquid in a glass No liquid is ferromagnetic.
and kept over two magnetic poles crucible and kept over two magnetic poles
Diamagnetic liquid Paramagnetic liquid
N S N S
(ix) In these substances, the magnetic lines of In these substances, the magnetic lines of In these substances, magnetic lines of force
force are farther than in air. force are closer than in air. are much closer than in air.
(x) The resultant magnetic moment of these These substances have a permanent magnetic These substances also have a permanent
substances is zero. moment. magnetic moment.
(viii) The area enclosed by the loop represents loss of

Hysteresis energy during a cycle of magnetisation and
The word hysteresis means delayed. The phenomenon of demagnetisation.
the lagging of magnetic induction behind the magnetising
field is called hysteresis. (ix) Unit of area of I-H loop is A 2 m −2 .
(i) The plot of intensity of magnetisation (I) of (x) Unit of area of BH loop
ferromagnetic substances versus magnetic intensity = µ 0 × unit of area of I-H loop
(H) for a complete cycle of magnetisation and (xi) Area under B-H loop is equal to the energy loss per
demagnetisation is called hysteresis loop. cycle per unit volume.
I Example 5.49 The hysteresis loss for a specimen of iron
A weighing 15 kg is equivalent to 300 Jm −3 cycle −1.
B Find the loss of energy per hour at 25 cycle s −1. Density of
Retentivity
iron is 7500 kg m −3 .
C
H Sol. Let Q be the energy dissipated per unit volume per
O F
hysteresis cycle in the given sample, then the total energy lost
by the volumeV of the sample in time t will be
E W = Q ×V × ν × t
D where, ν is the number of hysteresis cycles per second.
Coercivity Here, Q = 300 Jm −3 cycle −1, ν = 25 cycle s−1, t = 1h = 3600 s
Fig. 5.47 Hysteresis loop for a ferromagnetic substance Mass 15
Volume, V = = m3
Density 7500
(ii) It is clear from the above figure that if intensity of
 15 
magnetising field (H ) is increased, the intensity of ∴ Hysteresis loss, W = 300 × × 25 × 3600 J = 54000 J
 7500 
magnetisation also increases. This is because, more
and more domains are aligned in the direction of
applied field. Example 5.50 The coercivity of a certain permanent magnet
(iii) When all domains are aligned, material is is 4.0 × 10 4 Am −1. The magnet is placed inside a solenoid
20 cm long and having 700 turns and a current is passed in
magnetically saturated. Beyond this, if intensity of the solenoid to demagnetise it completely. Find the value of
magnetising field (H ) is increased, then intensity of current.
magnetisation (I ) does not increase.
Sol. The coercivity of 4 × 104 Am −1 of the permanent magnet
(iv) When intensity of magnetising field (H ) is decreased implies that a magnetic intensity H = 4 × 104 Am −1 is
intensity of magnetisation also decreases but it lags required to be applied in opposite direction to demagnetise the
behind H. Therefore, H becomes zero but I does not magnet.
reduce to zero, i.e. the curve does not retrace itself. 700 700
Here, n= = = 3500 turns/m
(v) Now this value of intensity of magnetisation (I ) 20 cm 20 × 10−2 m
which is left in the material at H = 0, is called As, H = ni
retentivity or remanence (BO ). This occurs because H 4 × 104
all domains do not dealign even, if H = 0. ∴ Current, i = = = 11.43 11.5 A
n 3500
(vi) When the magnetising field is applied in reverse
direction and its intensity H is increased. The Magnetic properties of soft Iron and steel
material starts demagnetising. The value of reverse A comparison of the magnetic properties of ferromagnetic
magnetising field needed to reduce magnetisation to substances can be made by the comparison of the shapes and
zero is called coercivity (OC ). sizes of their hysteresis loops.
(vii) If reverse magnetising field is increased, further the There are two types of ferromagnetic materials
material becomes saturated. Now, if the magnetising (i) Soft magnetic materials These are those materials
field is reduced after attaining the reverse saturation, which have low retentivity, coercivity and small
the cycle repeats itself. hysteresis loss. e.g. Soft iron.
(ii) Hard magnetic materials These are those materials (ii) Electromagnets The materials for the construction
which have high retentivity, coercivity and large of electromagnets should have
hysteresis loss. e.g. Steel. (a) high initial permeability
Hysteresis loop for soft iron and steel can be drawn (b) and low hysteresis loss.
as below From the view point of these facts, soft iron is an
I Soft iron
ideal material for this purpose.
(iii) Transformer cores and telephone diaphragms As,
B′ Steel the magnetic material used in these cases is
B subjected to cyclic changes. Thus, the essential
requirements for the selection of the material are
C (a) high initial permeability
H
C′ O (b) and low hysteresis loss to prevent the breakdown.
Electromagnet
As we know that, a current carrying solenoid behaves like a
bar magnet. If we place a soft iron rod in the solenoid, then
the magnetism of the solenoid increases hundreds of times
Fig. 5.48 Hysteresis loop for soft iron and steel and the solenoid is called an electromagnet. It is a
temporary magnet.
Following three conclusions can be drawn from their An electromagnet is made by winding closely a number of
hysteresis loops turns of insulated copper wire over a soft iron straight rod
(i) Retentivity of soft iron is greater than the retentivity or a horse shoe rod. On passing current through this
of steel. solenoid, a magnetic field is produced in the space within
the solenoid.
(ii) Coercivity of soft iron is less than the coercivity of
steel.
(iii) Area of hysteresis loop (i.e. hysteresis loss) in soft N S
iron is smaller than that in steel. N S
Choice of magnetic materials

The choice of a magnetic material for different uses is (a)
decided from the hysteresis curve of a specimen of the
material.
(i) Permanent magnets The materials for a permanent
magnet should have
(a) high retentivity (so that the magnet is strong) and (b)
(b) high coercivity (so that the magnetisation is not Fig. 5.49 Electromagnets
wiped out by stray magnetic fields).
Applications of electromagnets
As the material in this case is never put to cyclic
changes of magnetisation, hence hysteresis is (i) Electromagnets are used in electric bell, transformer,
immaterial. From the point of view of these facts telephone diaphragms, etc.
steel is more suitable for the construction of (ii) In medical field, they are used in extracting bullets
permanent magnets than soft iron. from the human body.
Modern permanent magnets are made of cobalt-steel, (iii) Large electromagnets are used in cranes for lifting
alloys like ticonal. and transferring big machines and their parts.
CHECK POINT 5.3

1. Which one of the following is a non-magnetic substance? 9. Which of the following is true?
(a) Iron (b) Nickel (a) Diamagnetism is temperature dependent
(c) Cobalt (d) Brass (b) Paramagnetism is temperature dependent
2. The SI unit of magnetic permeability is (c) Paramagnetism is temperature independent
(a) A m−1
(b) A-m 10. Magnetic permeability is maximum for
(c) Henry m−1 (a) diamagnetic substance (b) paramagnetic substance
(d) No unit, it is a dimensionless number (c) ferromagnetic substance (d) All of these
3. The unit of magnetic susceptibility is 11. The temperature at which a ferromagnetic material
(a) H (b) Wb/m becomes paramagnetic is called a
(c) A/m (d) None of these (a) neutral temperature (b) Curie temperature
(c) inversion temperature (d) critical temperature
4. The relation between B, H and I in SI system is
(a) B = H + I (b) B = H − I 12. Substances in which the magnetic moment of a single atom
(c) B = µ 0 (H + I) (d) B = µ 0 (H − I) is not zero, is known as
(a) diamagnetism (b) ferromagnetism
5. An example of a diamagnetic substance is (c) paramagnetism (d) ferrimagnetism
(a) aluminium (b) copper
(c) iron (d) nickel 13. Liquid oxygen remains suspended between two pole faces
of a magnet because it is
6. The universal property of all substances is (a) diamagnetic (b) paramagnetic
(a) diamagnetism (c) ferromagnetic (d) anti-ferromagnetic
(b) ferromagnetism
(c) paramagnetism 14. The only property possessed by ferromagnetic substance is
(d) All of the above (a) hysteresis
(b) susceptibility
7. Which magnetic materials have negative susceptibility?
(c) directional property
(a) Diamagnetic materials (b) Paramagnetic materials
(c) Ferromagnetic materials (d) All of these (d) attracting magnetic substances
8. Identify the paramagnetic substance. 15. The permanent magnet is made from which one of the
following substances?
(a) Iron (b) Aluminium
(c) Nickel (d) Hydrogen (a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic
(c) Ferromagnetic (d) Electromagnetic
Chapter Exercises
1 A magnet is placed in iron powder and then taken 11 Unit of magnetic flux density (or magnetic induction) is
out, then maximum iron powder is at (a) tesla (b) weber/metre2
(a) some distance away from north pole (c) newton/ampere-metre (d) All of these
(b) some distance away from south pole
(c) the middle of the magnet 12 Magnetic field intensity is defined as
(a) magnetic moment per unit volume
(d) the end of the magnet
(b) magnetic induction force acting on a unit magnetic
2 A permanent magnet pole
(a) attracts all substances (c) number of lines of force crossing per unit area
(b) attracts only magnetic substances (d) number of lines of force crossing per unit volume
(c) attracts magnetic substances and repels all
13 Permeability is defined as the ratio between
non-magnetic substances
(d) attracts non-magnetic substances and repels magnetic (a) magnetic induction and susceptibility
substances (b) magnetic induction and magnetising field
(c) magnetising field and magnetic induction
3 Magnetic field is measured by (d) magnetising field and susceptibility
(a) pyrometer (b) hydrometer
(c) thermometer (d) fluxmeter 14 Hysteresis loss for steel is .......... that for iron.
(a) lesser than (b) equal to
4 Lines which represent places of constant angle of dip
(c) greater than (d) Either (b) or (c)
are called
(a) isobaric lines (b) isogonic lines 15 Hysteresis is exhibited by a .......... substance.
(c) isoclinic lines (d) isodynamic lines (a) paramagnetic
5 A line passing through places having zero value of (b) ferromagnetic
magnetic dip is called (c) diamagnetic
(a) isoclinic line (b) agonic line (d) All of the above
(c) isogonic line (d) aclinic line
16 Which of the following materials has got the
6 Aclinic lines are the lines joining places of maximum retentivity?
(a) zero dip (b) equal dip (a) Copper (b) Zinc
(c) zero declination (d) equal declination (c) Soft iron (d) Hard iron
7 The arms of a deflection magnetometer in the tan B
17 The area enclosed by a hysteresis loop is a measure of
position are placed
(a) retentivity (b) susceptibility
(a) east-west (b) north-south
(c) permeability (d) energy loss per cycle
(c) north-east (d) south-west
18 Which of the following is the most suitable material
8 If the current is doubled, the deflection is also
for making permanent magnet?
doubled in
(a) Steel (b) Soft iron
(a) a tangent galvanometer
(c) Copper (d) Nickel
(b) a moving coil galvanometer
(c) Both (a) and (b) 19 The materials suitable for making electromagnets
(d) None of the above should have
(a) high retentivity and high coercivity
9 Which of the following is diamagnetic?
(b) low retentivity and low coercivity
(a) Aluminium (b) Quartz (c) Nickel (d) Bismuth
(c) high retentivity and low coercivity
10 The permeability of paramagnetic substance is (d) low retentivity and high coercivity
(a) slightly more than vacuum 20 Which of the following is most suitable for the core
(b) slightly less than vacuum of electromagnets?
(c) much more than vacuum (a) Iron (b) Steel (c) Soft iron (d) Cu-Ni alloy
21 A magnetic needle kept in a non-uniform magnetic 29 Due to earth’s magnetic field, charged cosmic ray
field experiences particles
(a) a force and torque (a) require greater kinetic energy to reach the equator than
(b) a force but not a torque pole
(c) a torque but not a force (b) require less kinetic energy to reach the equator than pole
(d) Neither a torque nor a force (c) can never reach the pole
(d) can never reach the equator
22 The variation of magnetic susceptibility (χ ) with
temperature for a diamagnetic substance is best 30 A magnetic needle, suspended horizontally by an
represented by unspun silk fibre, oscillates in the horizontal plane,
χ χ because of a restoring force originating mainly from
(a) the torsion of the silk fibre
(b) the force of gravity
(a) O T (b) O T (c) the horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
(d) All the above factors
31 An electron moving around the nucleus with an
χ χ angular momentum L has a magnetic moment
e e 2e e
(a) L (b) L (c) L (d) L
m 2m m 2πm
(c) (d)
32 A vibration magnetometer is placed at the south
pole, then the time period will be
O T O T (a) zero
(b) infinity
23 The angle between the earth’s magnetic axis and the (c) same as at magnetic equator
earth’s geographic axis is (d) same as at any other place on earth
(a) zero (b) 11.5°
(c) 23° (d) None of these 33 Which of the following statements are true about
the magnetic susceptibility χ m of paramagnetic
24 If a magnet is hanged with its magnetic axis, then it substance?
stops in (a) Value of χ m is inversely proportional to the absolute
(a) magnetic meridian (b) geometric meridian temperature of the sample.
(c) angle of dip (d) None of these (b) χ m is zero at all temperature.
25 A dip needle in a plane perpendicular to magnetic (c) χ m is negative at all temperature.
meridian will remain (d) χ m does not depend on the temperature of the sample.
(a) vertical 34 Resultant force acting on a diamagnetic material in a
(b) horizontal magnetic field is in direction
(c) in any direction (a) from stronger to the weaker part of the magnetic field
(d) at an angle of dip to the horizontal (b) from weaker to the stronger part of the magnetic field
26 A dip circle is at right angles to the magnetic (c) perpendicular to the magnetic field
meridian. What will be the apparent dip? (d) in the direction making 60° to the magnetic field
(a) 0° (b) 30° 35 The mathematical equation for magnetic field lines
(c) 60° (d) 90° of force is
27 A compass needle which is allowed to move in a (a) ∇ ⋅ B = 0 (b) ∇ ⋅ B ≠ 0.1(c) ∇ ⋅ B > 0 (d) ∇ ⋅ B < 0
horizontal plane is taken to a geomagnetic pole. It will 36 Two lines of force due to a bar magnet
(a) stay in north-south direction only (a) intersect at the neutral point
(b) stay in east-west direction only (b) intersect near the poles of the magnet
(c) become rigid showing no movement (c) intersect on the equatorial axis of the magnet
(d) stay in any position (d) do not intersect at all
28 When the N-pole of a bar magnet points towards the 37 What happens to the force between magnetic poles
south and S-pole towards the north, the null points when their pole strength and the distance between
are at the them both gets doubled?
(a) magnetic axis (a) Force increases to two times the previous value
(b) magnetic centre (b) No change
(c) perpendicular divider of magnetic axis (c) Force decreases to half the previous value
(d) N and S poles (d) Force increases to four times the previous value
38 If a magnet of pole strength m is divided into four 45 A dip circle is taken to geomagnetic equator. The
parts such that the length and width of each part is needle is allowed to move in a vertical plane
half that of initial one, then the pole strength of each perpendicular to the magnetic meridian. The needle
part will be will stay in
(a) m / 4 (b) m / 2 (c) m / 8 (d) 4m (a) horizontal direction only
(b) vertical direction only
39 Two magnets have the same length and the same (c) any direction except vertical and horizontal
pole strength. But one of the magnets has a small (d) None of the above
hole at its centre. Then
46 At the magnetic north pole of the earth, the values of
(a) both have equal magnetic moment
(b) one with hole has smaller magnetic moment
the horizontal component H and the angle of dip θ are
(a) H = 0, θ = 45° (b) H = B e , θ = 0°
(c) one with hole has larger magnetic moment
(c) H = 0, θ = 90° (d) H = B e , θ = 90°
(d) one with hole loses magnetism through the hole
47 When the magnetic inclination (dip) was measured at
40 The magnetic field at a distance d from a short bar various places on earth, in one of the following
magnet in longitudinal and transverse positions are countries it was found to be zero. Which one was it?
in the ratio (a) Pakistan (b) Brazil (c) Scotland (d) Canada
(a) 1:1 (b) 2:3 (c) 2:1 (d) 3:2
48 In a deflection magnetometer, the needle is short and
41 When a diamagnetic substance is brought near north the pointer is long, because the
or south pole of a bar magnet, it is (a) needle cannot be made long
(a) attracted by the poles (b) circular scale cannot be made short
(b) repelled by the poles (c) needle must be in a uniform field
(c) attracted by the north pole and repelled by the south pole (d) pointer must be in a non-uniform field
(d) repelled by the north pole and attracted by the south pole 49 A curve between magnetic moment and temperature
42 The magnetic field lines due to a bar magnet are of magnet is
correctly shown in M M
N N (a) (b)
(a) (b)
T T
S S
M M
(c) (d)
N N
(c) (d) T T
S S 50 The tangents deflection produced in tan A and tan B

positions by a short magnet at equal distances are in
the ratio
43 Susceptibility is positive and large for a (a) 1 : 1 (b) 2 : 1
(a) paramagnetic substance (c) 1 : 2 (d) None of these
(b) ferromagnetic substance 51 The relative permeability is represented by µ r and
(c) non-magnetic substance
the susceptibility is denoted by χ for a magnetic
(d) diamagnetic substance
substance. Then, for a paramagnetic substance
44 Torques τ 1 and τ 2 are required for a magnetic needle (a) µ r < 1, χ < 0 (b) µ r < 1, χ > 0
to remain perpendicular to the magnetic fields B1 (c) µ r > 1, χ < 0 (d) µ r > 1, χ > 0
and B 2 at two different places. The ratio of B1 / B 2 is 52 When a piece of a ferromagnetic substance is put in
τ τ a uniform magnetic field,the flux density inside it is
(a) 2 (b) 1
τ1 τ2 four times the flux density away from the piece. The
τ1 + τ 2 τ − τ2 magnetic permeability of the material is
(c) (d) 1
τ1 − τ 2 τ1 + τ 2 (a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
53 Which of the four graphs may best represent the (a) paramagnetic (b) diamagnetic
current- deflection relation in a tangent (c) ferromagnetic (d) None of these
galvanometer? 61 A magnet of magnetic moment M and pole strength
θ m is cut in two equal parts along the axis of magnet,
π then magnetic moment of each part will be
2
d
(a) M (b) M / 2 (c) M / 4 (d) 2M
c b
62 Two identical thin bar magnets each of length l and
a pole strength m are placed at right angles to each
i other with north pole of one touching south pole of
the other. Magnetic moment of the system is
(a) d (b) a (c) c (d) b
1
(a) ml (b) 2ml (c) 2ml (d) ml
54 If a diamagnetic solution is poured into a U-tube and 2
one arm of this U-tube placed between the poles of a
63 A short bar magnet placed with its axis at 30° with a
strong magnet with the meniscus in a line with the
uniform external magnetic field of 0.16 T
field, then the level of the solution will
experiences a torque of magnitude 0.032 J. The
(a) rise (b) fall
(c) oscillate slowly (d) remain as such
magnetic moment of the bar magnet will be
(a) 0.23 JT −1 (b) 0.40 JT −1
55 A paramagnetic liquid is filled in a U-tube, of which (c) 0.80 JT −1 (d) zero
one limb is placed between the pole pieces of an
electromagnet. When the field is switched on, the 64 A bar magnet when placed at an angle of 30° to the
liquid in the limb which is placed between the field direction of magnetic field induction of 5 × 10 −2 T,
will experiences a moment of couple 25 × 10 −6 N-m. If
(a) rise (b) fall the length of the magnet is 5 cm, its pole strength is
(c) remain stationary (d) first rise and then fall (a) 2 × 10−2 A-m (b) 5 × 10−2 A-m
56 The magnetic moment of a magnet of length 10 cm (c) 2 A-m (d) 5 A-m
and pole strength 4.0 A-m will be 65 A bar magnet of magnetic moment 3 A-m2 is placed
(a) 0.4 A-m2 (b) 1.6 A-m2 (c) 20 A-m2 (d) 8.0 A-m2
in a uniform magnetic field induction of 2 × 10 −5 T.
57 All the magnetic materials lose their magnetic If each pole of the magnet experiences a force of
properties when 6 × 10 −4 N, the length of the magnet is
(a) dipped in water
(a) 0.5 m (b) 0.3 m (c) 0.2 m (d) 0.1 m
(b) dipped in oil
(c) brought near a piece of iron 66 A toroid of n turns, mean radius R and
(d) strongly heated cross-sectional radius a carries current I. It is placed
58 A ferromagnetic material is heated above its Curie on a horizontal table taken as XY -plane. Its magnetic
temperature. Which one is a correct statement? moment m [NCERT Exemplar]
(a) Ferromagnetic domains are perfectly arranged. (a) is non-zero and points in the z-direction by symmetry
(b) Ferromagnetic domains become random. (b) points along the axis of the toroid (m = m φ )
(c) Ferromagnetic domains are not influenced. 1
(c) is zero, otherwise there would be a field falling as 3
(d) Ferromagnetic material changes into diamagnetic r
material. at large distances outside the toroid
59 Above the Curie temperature, the susceptibility of a (d) is pointing radially outwards
ferromagnetic substance varies 67 A magnet of magnetic moment M is situated with its
(a) directly as the absolute temperature axis along the direction of a magnetic field of
(b) inversely as the absolute temperature strength B. The work done in rotating it by an angle
(c) inversely as the square of absolute temperature of 180° will be
(d) directly as the square of absolute temperature (a) − MB (b) + MB (c) zero (d) + 2MB
60 The given figure represents a material which is 68 A magnet of magnetic moment 2 J/T is aligned in
the direction of magnetic field of 0.1 T. What is the
net work done to bring the magnet normal to the
magnetic field?
(a) 0.1 J (b) 0.2 J (c) 1 J (d) 2 J
69 A planar coil having 15 turns carries 20 A current. 76 A dip needle lies initially in the magnetic meridian
The coil is oriented with respect to the uniform when it shows an angle of dip θ at a place. The dip
magnetic field B = 0.5$i T such that its directed area circle is rotated through an angle x in the horizontal
is A = − 0.04 $i m2 . The potential energy of the coil plane and then it shows an angle of dip θ′. Then
tan θ ′
in the given orientation is is
(a) 0 (b) + 0.72 J tan θ
(c) 6 J (d) −1.44 J (a) 1 / cos x (b) 1 / sin x (c) 1 / tan x (d) cos x
70. The magnetic field of the earth can be modelled by 77 For different substances hysteresis (B-H ) curves are
that of a point dipole placed at the centre of the given as shown in figure. For making temporary
earth. The dipole axis makes an angle of 11.3° with magnet which of the following is best?
the axis of the earth. At Mumbai, declination is B B
nearly zero. Then, [NCERT Exemplar]
(a) the declination varies between 11.3° W to 11.3° E
(b) the least declination is 0° (a) H (b) H
(c) the plane defined by dipole axis and the earth axis
passes through Greenwich
(d) declination averaged over the earth must be always
negative
B B
71 The magnetic field on the axis of a short bar magnet
at a distance of 10 cm is 0.2 oersted. What will be
the field at a point, distant 5 cm on the line
(c) H (d) H
perpendicular to the axis and passing through the
magnet?
(a) 0.025 oersted (b) 0.2 oersted
(c) 0.4 oersted (d) 0.8 oersted
78 A bar magnet is oscillating in the earth’s magnetic
72 If the angles of dip at two places are 30° and 45°
field with time period T. If its mass is increased four
respectively, then the ratio of horizontal components times, then its time period will be
of earth’s magnetic field at the two places will be (a) 4T (b) 2T (c) T (d) T/2
(a) 3: 2 (b) 1 : 2
79 When 2A current is passed through a tangent
(c) 1 : 3 (d) 1 : 2
galvanometer, it gives a deflection of 30°. For 60°
73 The earth’s magnetic field at a certain place has a deflection, the current must be
horizontal component 0.3 G and the total strength (a) 1 A (b) 2 3 A
0.5 G. The angle of dip is (c) 4 A (d) 6 A
 3  3
(a) tan−1   (b) sin−1   80. Two tangent galvanometers having coils of the same
 4  4 radius are connected in series. A current flowing in
 4  3 them produces deflections of 60° and 45°,
(c) tan−1   (d) sin−1  
 3  5 respectively. The ratio of the number of turns in the
74 At a certain place, the angle of dip is 30° and the
coils is
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field is (a) 4 3 (b) ( 3 + 1) / 1
0.50 oersted. The earth's total magnetic field (in 3 +1 3
(c) (d)
oersted) is 3 −1 1
(a) 3 (b) 1
81 A bar magnet of length 3 cm has points A and B
1
(c) 1 / 3 (d) along its axis at distances of 24 cm and 48 cm on the
2
opposite sides. Ratio of magnetic fields at these
75 In a permanent magnet at room temperature, points will be
[NCERT Exemplar] A S N B
(a) magnetic moment of each molecule is zero O
(b) the individual molecules have non-zero magnetic 24 cm 48 cm
moment which are all perfectly aligned 1
(c) domains are partially aligned (a) 8 (b) (c) 3 (d) 4
2 2
(d) domains are all perfectly aligned
S
82 The magnetic moment produced in a substance of 1g
is 6 × 10 −7 Am2 . If its density is 5 g/cm 3 , then the
intensity of magnetisation in A/m will be N S
(a) 8.3 × 106 (b) 3.0
. × 10−7
(c) 12 (d) 3 × 10−6
83 A short bar magnet is arranged with its north pole d N
pointing geographical north. It is found that, the µ0 M µ0 2 M
horizontal component of earth’s magnetic induction (a) (b)
4π d 3 4π d 3
(BH ) is balanced by the magnetic induction of the
µ 2 2M µ 2M
magnet at a point which is at a distance of 20 cm (c) 0 (d) 0 3
from its centre. The magnetic moment of the magnet 4π d 3 4π d
is ( if H = 4 × 10 − 5 Wbm−2 ) 89 Two bar magnets of the same mass, length and
(a) 3.2 Am 2
(b) 1.6 Am 2
(c) 6.4 Am 2
(d) 0.8 Am 2 breadth having magnetic moments M and 2M are
joined together pole-to-pole and suspended in a
84 A long magnetic needle of length 2L, magnetic vibration magnetometer. The time period of
moment M and pole strength m units is broken into oscillation is 3 s. If the polarity of one of the
two at the middle. The magnetic moment and pole magnets is reversed, the time period of oscillation
strength of each piece will be will be
(a) M /2, m / 2 (b) M, m /2
(a) 3s (b) 3 3 s (c) 3 s (d) 6 s
(c) M /2, m (d) M, m
85 Consider the two idealised systems (i) a parallel plate 90. A thin rectangular magnet suspended freely has a
capacitor with large plates with small separation and period of oscillation 4 s. If it is broken into two
(ii) a long solenoid of length L >> R, radius of halves each having half their initial length, then
cross-section. In (i) E is ideally treated as a constant when suspended similarly, the time period of
between plates and zero outside. In (ii) magnetic oscillation of each part will be
field is constant inside the solenoid and zero outside. (a) 4 s (b) 2 s (c) 1 s (d) 2 2 s
These idealised assumptions, however contradict 91 For ferromagnetic material, the relative permeability
fundamental laws as below [NCERT Exemplar] (µ r ) versus magnetic intensity (H) has the following
(a) Case (i) contradicts Gauss’s law for electrostatic fields shape
(b) Case (ii) contradicts Gauss’s law for magnetic fields
µr µr
(c) Case (i) agrees with ∫ E ⋅ d l = 0
(d) Case (ii) contradicts ∫ H ⋅ d l = I em (a) (b)
86 Due to a small magnet, intensity at a distance x in

the end on position is 9 G. What will be the H H
x µr µr
intensity at a distance on broadside on position?
2
(a) 9 G (b) 4 G (c) 36 G (d) 4.5 G (c) (d)
87 A magnet oscillating in a horizontal plane has a time
period of 2 s at a place where the angle of dip is 30° H H
and 3 s at another place where the angle of dip is 92 Two magnets of same size and mass make
60°. The ratio of resultant magnetic fields at the two respectively 10 and 15 oscillations per minute at
places is certain place. The ratio of their magnetic moments is
4 3 4 (a) 4 : 9 (b) 9 : 4 (c) 2 : 3 (d) 3 : 2
(a) (b)
7 9 3
93 Two like magnetic poles of strength 10 and 40 SI
9 9
(c) (d) units are separated by a distance 30 cm. The
4 3 3 intensity of magnetic field is zero on the line joining
88 Two short magnets of equal dipole moments M are them
fastened perpendicularly at their centres (figure). (a) at a point 10 cm from the stronger pole
The magnitude of the magnetic field at a distance d (b) at a point 20 cm from the stronger pole
from the centre on the bisector of the right angle is (c) at the mid-point
(d) at infinity
94 A magnet makes 40 oscillations per minute at a place 100 Two short magnets of magnetic moment 1000 Am 2
having magnetic field intensity of 01. × 10 −5 T. At are placed as shown at the corners of a square of
another place, it takes 2.5 s to complete one vibration. side 10 cm. The net magnetic induction at P is
The value of earth’s horizontal field at that place is
(a) 0 .25 × 10−6 T (b) 0 .36 × 10−6 T N S
−8 −6
(c) 0 . 66 × 10 T (d) 1.2 × 10 T
95 A circular coil of radius 20 cm and 20 turns of wire
is mounted vertically with its plane in magnetic P N S
meridian. A small magnetic needle is placed at the
centre of the coil and it is deflected through 45° (a) 0.1 T (b) 0.2 T
when a current is passed through the coil. Horizontal (c) 0.3 T (d) 0.4 T
component of earth’s field is 0.37 × 10 −4 T. The
current in coil is 101 Two magnets are held together in a vibration
(a) 0.6 A (b) 6 A magnetometer and are allowed to oscillate in the
(c) 6 × 10−3 A (d) 0.06 A earth's magnetic field. With like poles together
96 A dip circle is so that its needle moves freely in the 12 oscillations per minute are made but for unlike
magnetic meridian. In this position, the angle of dip poles together only 4 oscillations per minute are
is 40°. Now, the dip circle is rotated so that the executed. The ratio of their magnetic moments is
plane in which the needle moves makes an angle of (a) 3 : 1 (b) 1 : 3 (c) 3 : 5 (d) 5 : 4
30° with the magnetic meridian. In this position, the 102 A magnet is suspended in such a way that it
needle will dip by an angle
oscillates in the horizontal plane. It makes
(a) 40° (b) 30°
(c) more than 40° (d) less than 40°
20 oscillations per minute at a place where dip angle
is 30° and 15 oscillations per minute at a place
97 An iron rod of 0.2 cm 2 cross-sectional area is where dip angle is 60°. The ratio of earth’s magnetic
subjected to a magnetisting field of 1200 Am −1. The fields at two places is
susceptibility of iron is 599. The magnetic flux (a) 3 3 : 8 (b) 16 : 9 3
produced is
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 2 2 : 3
(a) 0.904 Wb (b) 1.81 × 10−5 Wb
(c) 0.904 × 10−5 Wb (d) 5.43 × 10−5 Wb 103 Two identical short bar magnets, each having
magnetic moment M, are placed a distance of 2d
98 A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of apart with axes perpendicular to each other in a
8 Am−1, when placed in an external magnetic field of horizontal plane. The magnetic induction at a point
0.6 T at a temperature of 4 K. When the same mid-way between them is
sample is placed in an external magnetic field of µ0 M
(a) ( 2) 3
0.2 T at a temperature of 16 K, the magnetisation 4π d
will be [NCERT Exemplar] µ M
(b) 0 ( 3 ) 3
32 2 4π
(a) Am−1 (b) Am−1 d
3 3  2µ  M
(c)  0  3
(c) 6 Am−1 (d) 2.4 Am−1  π  d
99 The figure shows the various positions (labelled by µ M
(d) 0 ( 5 ) 3
subscripts) of small magnetised needles P and Q. The 4π d
arrows show the direction of their magnetic moment. 104 A short magnet oscillating in vibration magnetometer
Which configuration corresponds to the lowest with a frequency 10 Hz. A downward current of
potential energy of all the configurations shown? 15 A is established in a long vertical wire placed
Q4 20 cm to the west of the magnet. The new
frequency of the short magnet is (the horizontal
component of earth’s magnetic field is 12µ)
Q5 Q1 P Q2 Q3
(a) 4 Hz (b) 25 Hz
(c) 9 Hz (d) 15 Hz
105 Two bar magnets having same geometry with
Q6 magnetic moments M and 2M are placed in such a
(a) PQ 3 (b) PQ 4 (c) PQ 5 (d) PQ 6 way that their similar poles are on the same side,
then its time period of oscillation is T1. Now, if the in a vibration magnetometer is 2 s. The magnet is
polarity of one of the magnets is reversed, then time cut along its length into three equal parts and three
period of oscillation is T 2 , then parts are then placed on each other with their like
(a) T1 < T2 (b) T1 > T2 poles together. The time period of this combination
(c) T1 = T2 (d) T1 = ∞, T1 = 0 will be
106 The length of a magnet is large compared to its 2 2
(a) 2 s (b) s (c) 2 3 s (d) s
width and breadth. The time period of its oscillation 3 3

Assertion and reason making a permanent magnet, then which of the
following statement(s) is/are correct?
Directions (Q. Nos. 1-5) These questions consist of two
statements each linked as Assertion and Reason. While B
answering these questions you are required to choose any P
one of the following four responses. Q
(a) If both Assertion and Reason are true and Reason is the R
B0
correct explanation of Assertion. O
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not
the correct explanation of Assertion. S
(d) If Assertion is false but Reason is true.
(a) OQ should be large and OR should be small.
1 Assertion The poles of a magnet cannot be (b) OQ and OR should both be large.
separated by breaking it into two pieces. (c) OQ should be small and OR should be large.
Reason The magnetic moment will be reduced to (d) OQ and OR should both be small.
half when a magnet is broken into two equal pieces. 2 I. When radius of a circular wire carrying current is
2 Assertion The net magnetic flux coming out of a doubled, its magnetic moment becomes four times.
closed surface is always zero. II. Magnetic moment is directly proportional to area of
Reason Unlike poles of equal strength exist together. the loop.
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
3 Assertion Relative magnetic permeability has no
(a) Only I (b) Only II
units and no dimensions. (c) Both I and II (d) None of these
Reason µ r = µ / µ 0 , where the symbols have their
3 I. The properties of paramagnetic and ferromagnetic
standard meaning.
substances are not affected by heating.
4 Assertion χ m -T graph for a diamagnetic material II. As temperature rises, the alignment of molecular
is a straight line parallel to T-axis. magnets gradually decreases.
Reason This is because susceptibility of a Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
diamagnetic material is not affected by temperature. (a) Only I (b) Only II
(c) Both I and II (d) None of these
5 Assertion A magnet suspended freely in a uniform
4 I. The ferromagnetic substances do not obey Curie’s
magnetic field experiences no net force, but a torque
law.
that tends to align the magnet along the field.
II. At Curie point, ferromagnetic substances start
Reason Net force, mB − mB = 0. But the forces on
north and south poles being equal, unlike and parallel, behaving as a paramagnetic substances.
make up a couple that tends to align the magnet, along Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
the field. (a) Only I (b) Only II
(c) Both I and II (d) None of these
Statement based questions 5 I. A soft iron core is used in a moving coil
1 The figure illustrates how B, the flux density inside galvanometer to increase the strength of magnetic
a sample of unmagnetised ferromagnetic material field.
varies with B 0 , the magnetic flux density in which II. From soft iron, more number of the magnetic lines
the sample is kept. For the sample to be suitable for of force passes.
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct? Codes

(a) Only I (b) Only II A B C A B C
(c) Both I and II (d) None of these (a) p r q (b) r q p
(c) r p q (d) p q r
Match the columns 3 Match the terms of Column I with the items of
1 With reference to magnetic dipole, match the terms Column II and choose the correct option from the
of Column I with the terms of Column II and choose codes given below.
the correct option from the codes given below.
Column I Column II
Column I Column II
(A) Negative susceptibility (p) Ferromagnetic
(A) Dipole moment (p) − M⋅ B
(B) Positive and small (q) Diamagnetic
(B) Equatiorial field for a short dipole (q) M × B
susceptibility
(C) Axial field for a short dipole (r) − µ 0 M / 4 πr 3
(C) Positive and large susceptibility (r) Paramagnetic
(D) External field : Torque (s) M
(E) External field : Energy (t) µ 0 2M / 4 πr 3 Codes
A B C A B C
Codes (a) p r q (b) p q r
A B C D E (c) q p r (d) q r p
(a) s t r q p
4 Match the terms of Column I with the items of
(b) s r t q p
Column II and choose the correct option from the
(c) s p q r t
codes given below.
(d) s t r q p
2 Consider the expression for magnetic potential energy Column I Column II
Um = m ⋅ B, match the terms of Column I with the (A) Diamagnetic (p) µ >> µ 0 ,µ r >> 1 and χ >> 1
terms of Column II and choose the correct option from (B) Paramagnetic (q) −1≤ χ < 0, 0 ≤ µ r < 1 and µ < µ 0
the codes given below.
(C) Ferromagnetic (r) 0 < χ < ε, 1< µ r < 1+ ε and
Column I Column II µ >µ0
(A) Potential energy at θ = 90° (p) Minimum Codes
(B) Potential energy at θ = 0° (q) Maximum A B C A B C
(a) q r p (b) r p q
(C) Potential energy at θ = 180° (r) Zero
(c) p q r (d) q r p

Collection of questions asked in NEET & various medical entrance exams
1 An iron rod of susceptibility 599 is subjected to a We can interpret that
magnetising field of 1200 Am −1. The permeability of (a) A is located in the southern hemisphere and B is
the material of the rod is located in the northern hemisphere
(Take, µ 0 = 4π × 10 −7 T m A −1) [NEET 2020] (b) A is located in the northern hemisphere and B is
located in the southern hemisphere
(a) 8.0 × 10−5 T m A −1 (b) 2.4π × 10−5 T m A −1
(c) A and B are both located in the southern hemisphere
−7 −1
(c) 2.4π × 10 TmA (d) 2.4π × 10−4 T m A −1 (d) A and B are both located in the northern
hemisphere
2 A wire of length L metre carrying a current of I
ampere is bent in the form of a circle. Its magnetic 4 The relations amongst the three elements of earth’s
moment is [NEET 2020]
magnetic field, namely horizontal component H,
vertical component, V and dip angle δ are
(a) (I L2 / 4)A - m 2 (b) (I πL2 / 4) A - m 2
(BE = total magnetic field) [NEET (Odisha) 2019]
(c) (2I L2 / π ) A - m 2 (d) (I L2 / 4π ) A - m 2 (a) V = BE tan δ, H = BE
3 At a point A on the earth’s surface, the angle of dip δ (b) V = BE sin δ , H = BE cos δ
is 25º. At a point B on the earth’s surface, the angle (c) V = BE cos δ , H = BE sin δ
of dip δ is − 25º. [NEET 2019] (d) V = BE , H = BeE tan δ
5 Assertion Paramagnetic substances get poorly 12 The variation of magnetic susceptibility with the
attracted in magnetic field. temperature of a ferromagnetic material can be
Reason Because magnetic dipoles are aligned along plotted as [AIIMS 2015]
external magnetic field weakly. [AIIMS 2019]
χ χ
(a) Both Assertion and Reason are correct and Reason is the
correct explanation of Assertion. (a) (b)
(b) Both Assertion and Reason are correct but Reason is not
the correct explanation of Assertion. T T
(c) Assertion is true but Reason is incorrect.
(d) Both Assertion and Reason are incorrect. χ χ
6 Coercivity and retentivity of soft iron is [JIPMER 2019] (c) (d)
(a) high coercivity, high retentivity
(b) low coercivity, high retentivity T T
(c) low coercivity, low retentivity
13 If the magnetising field on a ferromagnetic material
(d) high coercivity, low retentivity
is increased, its permeability [AIIMS 2015]
7 The horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic (a) decrease (b) increase
field at any place is 0.36 × 10 −4 Wbm −2 . If the (c) is unaffected (d) may be increase or decrease
angle of dip at that place is 60°, then the value of
14 If r be the distance of a point on the axis of a
vertical component of the earth’s magnetic field
magnetic dipole from its centre, then the magnetic
will be (in Wbm −2 ) [AIIMS 2018]
field at such a point is proportional to [UK PMT 2015]
(a) 0.12 × 10−4 (b) 0.24 × 10−4 1 1
−4 (a) (b)
(c) 0.40 × 10 (d) 0.622 × 10−4 r r2
1
8 Assertion The magnetism of magnet is due to the (c) 3 (d) None of these
r
spin motion of electrons.
Reason Dipole moment of electron is smaller than 15 A bar magnet has a coercivity of 4 × 10 3 Am −1. It is
that due to orbit motion around nucleus. [AIIMS 2017] placed inside a solenoid of length 12 cm having
(a) Both Assertion and Reason correct and Reason is the 60 turns in order to demagnetise it. The amount of
correct explanation of Assertion. current that should be passed through the solenoid is
(b) Both Assertion and Reason correct but Reason is not [EAMCET 2015]
the correct explanation of Assertion. (a) 16A (b) 8A (c) 4A (d) 2A
(c) Assertion is correct but Reason is incorrect. 16 The effective length of magnet is 31.4 cm and its
(d) Assertion is incorrect but Reason is correct. pole strength is 0.8 Am. The magnetic moment, if it
9 If θ 1 and θ 2 be the apparent angles of dip observed is bent in the form of a semicircle is ..... A-m 2 .
in two vertical planes at right angles to each other, [Guj. CET 2015]
then the true angle of dip θ is given by [JIPMER 2017] (a) 1.2 (b) 1.6 (c) 0.16 (d) 0.12
(a) cot2 θ = cot2 θ1 + cot2 θ 2 (b) tan2 θ = tan2 θ1 + tan2 θ 2 17 A tangent galvanometer has a coil of 50 turns and a
radius of 20 cm. The horizontal component of earth’s
(c) cot2 θ = cot2 θ1 − cot2 θ 2 (d) tan2 θ = tan2 θ1 − tan2 θ 2
magnetic field is BH = 3 × 10 −5 T. What will be the
10. A bar magnet is hung by a thin cotton thread in a current which gives a deflection of 45°?[Guj. CET 2015]
uniform horizontal magnetic field and is in (a) 0.39 A (b) 0.29 A (c) 0.19 A (d) 0.09 A
equilibrium state. The energy required to rotate it by
18 The correct curve between intensity of
60° is W. Now the torque required to keep the
magnetisation (I ) and magnetic field (H ) for a
magnet in this new position is [NEET 2016]
ferromagnetic substance is given by [UP CPMT 2015]
W 3W 2W
(a) (b) 3W (c) (d) I I
3 2 3
(a) (b)
11 The magnetic susceptibility is negative for [AIPMT 2016]
(a) paramagnetic material only H H
I I
(b) ferromagnetic material only
(c) paramagnetic and ferromagnetic materials (c) (d)
H
(d) diamagnetic material only
H
19 A bar magnet with magnetic moment 2.5 × 10 3 JT −1 26 The intensity of magnetisation of a bar magnet is
is rotating in horizontal plane in the space containing 5 × 10 4 Am−1. The magnetic length and the area of
magnetic induction B = 4 × 10 −5 T. The work done in cross-section of the magnet are 12 cm and 1 cm −2,
rotating the magnet slowly from a direction parallel respectively. The magnitude of magnetic moment of
to the field to a direction 45° from the field, is (in this bar magnet (in SI unit) is [WB JEE 2014]
joule) [UP CPMT 2015] (a) 0.6 (b) 1.3
(a) 0.0 (b) 0.2 (c) 0.03 (d) 0.02 (c) 1.2 (d) 2.4
20 Core of electromagnets are made of ferromagnetic 27 The magnetic susceptibility of a material of a rod is 299
material which has [KCET 2015] and permeability of vacuum µ 0 is 4π × 10 −7 Hm −1.
(a) low permeability and high retentivity Absolute permeability of the material of the rod is
(b) high permeability and low retentivity [EAMCET 2014]
(c) low permeability and low retentivity (a) 3771 × 10−7 Hm−1 (b) 3771 × 10−5 Hm−1
(d) high permeability and high retentivity (c) 3770 × 10−6 Hm−1 (d) 3771 × 10−8 Hm−1
21 Following figures show the arrangement of bar 28 An electron in a circular orbit of radius 0.05 nm
magnets in different configurations. Each magnet has performs 10 16 revolutions per second. The magnetic
magnetic dipole moment m. Which configuration has moment due to this rotation of electron is (in A-m 2 )
highest net magnetic dipole moment? [WB JEE 2014]
[CBSE AIPMT 2014] (a) 2.16 × 10−23 (b) 3.21 × 10−22
N (c) 3.21 × 10−24 (d) 1.26 × 10−23
N S
(a) (b)
S N
29 A bar magnet of length l and magnetic dipole
S S N moment M is bent in the form of an arc as shown in
figure.
N N
30° 60° 60°

l
(c) S N (d) S N
l
22 A bar magnet of moment M and pole strength m is
cut into parts of equal lengths. The magnetic
moment and pole strength of either part is
[UK PMT 2014]
M m m M The new magnetic dipole moment will be [NEET 2013]
(a) , (b) M, (c) , m (d) M, m 3 2 M
2 2 2 2 (a) M (b) M (c) M (d)
π π 2
23 A susceptibility of a certain magnetic material is
400. What is the class of the magnetic material? 30 The horizontal and vertical components of earth’s
[KCET 2014]
magnetic field at a place are 0.3 G and 0.52G. The
earth’s magnetic field and the angle of dip are
(a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic [J&K CET 2013]
(c) Ferromagnetic (d) Ferroelectic (a) 0.3 G and δ = 30° (b) 0.4 G and δ = 40°
24 A paramagnetic sample shows a net magnetisation of (c) 0.5 G and δ = 50° (d) 0.6 G and δ = 60°
0.8 Am −1, when placed in an external magnetic field 31 A bar magnet of pole strength 10 A-m is cut into
of strength 0.8 T at a temperature 5K. When the two equal parts breadthwise. The pole strength of
same sample is placed in an external magnetic field each magnet is [J&K CET 2013]
of 0.4 T at a temperature of 20K. The (a) 5 A-m (b) 10 A-m
magnetisation is [EAMCET 2014] (c) 15 A-m (d) 20 A-m
(a) 0.8 Am −1 (b) 0.8 Am2 32 A short magnet of magnetic moment M is placed on
(c) 0.1 Am−2 (d) 0.1 Am−1 a straight line. The ratio of magnetic induction fields
25 Nickel shows ferromagnetic property at room B1, B 2, B 3 values on this line at points which are at
temperature. If the temperature is increased beyond distance 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm respectively from
Curie temperature, then it will show [UK PMT 2014] the centre of the magnet is [EAMCET 2013]
(a) paramagnetic (b) anti-ferromagnetism (a) 27 : 3.37 : 1 (b) 373 . : 1 : 27
(c) diamagnetism (d) no magnetic property (c) 27 : 8 : 3.37 (d) 1 : 2 : 3
33 A bar magnet of moment of inertia I is vibrated in a 39 If a magnet is suspended at an angle 30° to the
−4
magnetic field of induction 0. 4 × 10 T. The time magnetic meridian, the dip needle makes angle of
period of vibration is 12 s. The magnetic moment of 45° with the horizontal. The real dip is [Manipal 2012]
the magnet is 120 Am2 . The moment of inertia of (a) tan−1 ( 3 /2) (b) tan−1 ( 3 )
the magnet is (in kg-m2 ) approximately (c) tan−1 (3 / 2 ) (d) tan−1 (2 / 3 )
[EAMCET 2013]
40 If a steel wire of length l and magnetic moment M is
(a) 172.8 × 10−4 (b) 2.1 × 10−2
bent into a semicircular arc, then the new magnetic
(c) 1.57 × 10−2 (d) 1728 × 10−2 moment is [JCECE 2012]
34 On heating a ferromagnetic substance above curie M 2M
(a) M × l (b) (c) (d) M
temperature, it [MP PMT 2013] l π
(a) becomes paramagnetic 41 An iron rod of volume 10 −4 m3 and relative
(b) becomes diamagnetic permeability 1000 is placed inside a long solenoid
(c) remains ferromagnetic with constant
having 5 turns/cm. If a current of 0.5 A is passed
magnetic susceptibility
(d) becomes electromagnetic
through the solenoid, then the magnetic moment of
the rod is [BCECE 2012]
35 Assertion Susceptibility is defined as the ratio of (a) 20 Am2 (b) 25 Am2
intensity of magnetisation I to magnetic intensity H.
(c) 30 Am2 (d) 35 Am2
Reason Greater the value of susceptibility smaller
the value of intensity of magnetisation I. [AIIMS 2012] 42 Two tangent galvanometers A and B have coils of
(a) If both Assertion and Reason and true and Reason is the radii 8 cm and 16 cm respectively and resistance
correct explanation of Assertion 8 Ω each. They are connected in parallel with a cell
(b) If both Assertion and Reason are true but Reason is not of emf 4V and negligible internal resistance. The
the correct explanation of Assertion deflections produced in the tangent galvanometers A
(c) If Assertion is true but Reason is false and B are 30° and 60°, respectively. If A has 2 turns,
(d) If both Assertion and Reason are false
then B must have [Manipal 2012]
36 A dip needle vibrates in a vertical plane (a) 18 turns (b) 12 turns
perpendicular to magnetic meridian. The time of (c) 6 turns (d) 2 turns
vibration is found to be 2s. The same needle is then 43 There are four light-weight-rod samples A, B, C and
allowed to vibrate in the horizontal plane and the D separately suspended by threads. A bar magnet is
time period is again found to be 2s, then the angle of slowly brought near each sample and the following
dip is [UPCPMT 2012]
observations are noted. [CBSE AIPMT 2011]
(a) 0° (b) 30° (c) 45° (d) 90°
(i) A is feebly repelled.
37 If the dipole moment of a short bar magnet is (ii) B is feebly attracted.
1.25 A-m2 , the magnetic field on its axis at a (iii) C is strongly attracted.
distance of 0.5 m from the centre of the magnet is (iv) D remains unaffected.
[BCECE 2012]
44 At a place on earth, the vertical component of earth’s
(a) 1 × 10−4 NA−1m−1
magnetic field is 3 times its horizontal component.
(b) 2 × 10−6 NA−1m−1
The angle of dip at this place is [J&K CET 2011]
(c) 4 × 10−2 NA−1m−1
(a) 60° (b) 30°
(d) 6.64 × 10−8 NA−1m−1 (c) 45° (d) 0°
38 The horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field Which one of the following is true?
−4 −1  4  (a) C is of diamagnetic material
at a place is 3 × 10 T and the dip is tan   .
3 (b) D is of a ferromagnetic material
A metal rod of length 0.25 m is placed in N-S (c) A is of a non-magnetic material
direction and is moved at a constant speed of (d) B is of a paramagnetic material
10 cms −1 towards the east. The emf induced in the 45 A magnetic wire of dipole moment 4π A-m2 is bent in
rod will be [BCECE Mains 2012] the form of semicircle. The new magnetic moment is
(a) 1 µV (b) 5 µV (a) 4π A-m2 (b) 8 A-m2 [J&K CET 2011]
(c) 7 µV (d) 10 µV (c) 4 A-m 2
(d) None of these
46 The magnetic field due to short bar magnet of a vertical plane perpendicular to the geographic
magnetic dipole moment M and length 2l, on the axis meridian. The apparent dip angle is δ 2 . The
at a distance z (where, z >> l ) from the centre of the declination θ at the plane is
magnet is given by formula [J&K CET 2011] (a) θ = tan–1 (tan δ1 tan δ 2 ) [Punjab PMET 2011]
µ M $ 2 µ 0M $ (b) θ = tan–1 (tan δ1 + tan δ 2 )
(a) 0 3 M (b) M
4 πz 4 πz 3  tan δ1 
4µ 0M $ µ M $ (c) θ = tan–1  
(c) M (d) 0 3 M  tan δ 2 
µ 0z 3 πz
(d) θ = tan–1 (tan δ1 – tan δ 2 )
47 The angle which the total magnetic field of earth
makes with the surface of the earth is called
[J&K CET 2011]
49 The magnetic moment produced in a substance of 1g
(a) declination (b) magnetic meridian is 6 × 10 –7 Am2. If its density is 5 g cm −3 , then the
(c) geographic meridian (d) inclination intensity of magnetisation (in Am −1) will be
[Haryana PMT 2011]
48 The plane of a dip circle is set in the geographic (a) 83×10 6 (b) 3.0
meridian and the apparent dip is δ 1. It is then set in (c) 1.2 × 10–7 (d) 3 × 10–6
ANSWERS
CHECK POINT 5.1
1. (a) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d) 5. (b) 6. (d) 7. (b) 8. (a) 9. (a) 10. (a)
11. (a) 12. (a) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (a)
CHECK POINT 5.2

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (a) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (d) 9. (a) 10. (d)
11. (b) 12. (b) 13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (c)
CHECK POINT 5.3

1. (d) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (b) 9. (b) 10. (c)
11. (b) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (a) 15. (c)

1. (d) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (c) 5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (b) 9. (d) 10. (a)
11. (d) 12. (c) 13. (b) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (b) 24. (a) 25. (a) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (a) 29. (d) 30. (c)
31. (b) 32. (b) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (a) 36. (d) 37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (b) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (d) 43. (b) 44. (b) 45. (d) 46. (c) 47. (b) 48. (c) 49. (c) 50. (b)
51. (d) 52. (d) 53. (c) 54. (b) 55. (a) 56. (a) 57. (d) 58. (b) 59. (b) 60. (b)
61. (b) 62. (c) 63. (b) 64. (a) 65. (d) 66. (c) 67. (d) 68. (b) 69. (c) 70. (a)
71. (d) 72. (a) 73. (c) 74. (c) 75. (d) 76. (a) 77. (d) 78. (b) 79. (d) 80. (d)
81. (a) 82. (b) 83. (a) 84. (c) 85. (b) 86. (c) 87. (c) 88. (b) 89. (b) 90 (b)
91. (d) 92. (a) 93. (b) 94. (b) 95. (a) 96. (d) 97. (b) 98. (b) 99. (d) 100. (a)
101. (d) 102. (b) 103. (d) 104. (d) 105. (a) 106. (b)

1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (a) 5. (a)

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (c) 5. (c)
l Match the columns

1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (d) 4. (a)

1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b) 5. (a) 6. (c) 7. (d) 8. (c) 9. (a) 10. (b)
11. (d) 12. (b) 13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (b) 16. (c) 17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (d) 25. (a) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (d) 29. (b) 30. (d)
31. (a) 32. (a) 33. (a) 34. (a) 35. (c) 36. (c) 37. (b) 38. (d) 39. (d) 40. (c)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (a) 45. (b) 46. (b) 47. (d) 48. (c) 49. (b)
l CHECK POINT 5.1 11 (a) As, τ = MB sin θ = (m × 2l ) × 2 × 10 −5 sin 30 °
2 (a) Magnetic lines of force due to a bar magnet do not 1
= 15 × 10 × 10 −2 × 2 × 10 −5 ×
intersect because a point on magnetic lines always has a 2
single net magnetic field. If they intersect then it means, = 1.5 × 10 −5 N-m
there are two directions of magnetic field intensity at that
point, which is impossible. 12 (a) As, τ = MB sin θ
4 (d) Initial magnetic moment = M1 where, θ = 90 ° ⇒ τ = MB
When cut in two parts, magnetic moment of each part 1 1
Given, τ 2 = τ1 ⇒ MB sin θ = MB
M 2 2
M′ = 1 1
2 ⇒ sinθ = ⇒ θ = 30 °
When these pieces are placed perpendicular, effective 2
magnetic moment, ∴ Angle of rotation = 90 °−30 ° = 60 °
M2 = 2M′ = 2 × 1
M 13 (d) Work done is rotating the magnet through an angle θ from
2 initial position (i. e . θ1 = 0 ° ) is given by
M1 2 W = MB (cos θ1 − cos θ ) = MB(cos 0 °− cos θ ) = MB(1− cos θ )
∴ = = 2
M2 2
15 (a) According to Gauss’ theorem in magnetism, surface integral
7 (b) Since, for magnet P, axis lies along X-axis and for magnet of magnetic field intensity over a surface (closed or open) is
Q, axis is along Y-axis. The point R is along axial line w.r.t. always zero, i.e. ∫ B ⋅ dA = 0.
magnet P and is along equatorial line w.r.t. magnet Q.
Hence, magnetic field due to magnet Q, l CHECK POINT 5.2
µ M
BQ = 0 3 = B [R at equatorial point] …(i) 1 (d) The strength of earth’s magnetic field at the surface of the
4π x earth ranges from 0.25 G to 0.65 G.
Magnetic field due to magnet P,
6 (a) Magnetic dip or magnetic inclination is given by
µ 2M
BP = 0 3 = 2 B [R at axial point] …(ii) V
4π x tanθ = …(i)
H
As, at point R magnetic field due to P and Q magnet are
where,V and H are vertical and horizontal components of
perpendicular to each other
earth’s magnetic field, respectively.
and BR = net magnetic field at R due to magnet P and Q, i.e. 1 V
Given, H = V⇒ = 3 …(ii)
BR = BP 2 + BQ2 = B 2 + (2B )2 = 5B 3 H
9 (a) The relation between magnetic moment (µl ) and angular
tanθ = 3 ⇒ θ = 60 °
momentum (L) is
tan δ tan 45°
q µ q 8 (d) As, tan δ′ = =
µl = − L⇒ l =− cos θ cos 30 °
2m L 2m
1 2
The negative sign indicates that the angular momentum of the tan δ′ = =
electron is opposite in direction to the magnetic moment. 3/2 3
 2 
10 (a) When a bar magnet of magnetic moment M is placed in a ⇒ δ′ = tan−1 
 3
magnetic field of induction B, then net force on it is
FR = mB + (−m )B = 0 V V
9 (a) As, tanδ = and tan δ1 =
H H cos(90 ° − θ )
+m mB tan δ
= = tan δ cosec θ
cos(90 °− θ )
12 (b) As, the current and the other factors are same for both the
−mB
–m B galvanometers, so
While torque, τ = mB × 2l sin θ = MB sin θ (as, M = 2 ml ) N tan 60 ° N 3
N ∝ tan θ ⇒ 1 = or 1 = = 3:1
i.e. τ = M× B N 2 tan 30 ° N 2 1/ 3
I 25 (a) A dip needle in a plane perpendicular to magnetic

14 (c) As, time period T = 2π
MB meridian will always remain vertical.
I M 28 (a) If the N-pole of a bar magnet points south, the fields of the
Q T = 2 s, I′ = , M′ =
2 2 magnet and the earth will point in opposite directions along
⇒ T′ = T = 2 s the axis of the magnet. So, two neutral points are obtained
which are equidistant from the magnet on its axis.
I
15 (c) As, the time period, T = 2π
MB
1 T B1
or T∝ ⇒ 2=
B T1 B2 S
T2 1
or = ⇒ T2 = 1.5 s N
3 4
l CHECK POINT 5.3

2 (c) Magnetic permeability,
B 31 (b) An electron moving around the nucleus has a magnetic
µ= e
H moment given by µ = L
2m
Wb/m2 Wb 1  Wb 
Its SI unit is = ⋅ = Henry m−1 Q = H (Henry) where, L is the magnitude of the angular momentum of the
A/m A m  A 
circulating electron around the nucleus. The smallest value of
14 (a) Some peculiar properties of ferromagnetic materials are µ is called the Bohr magneton µ B and its value is
commonly displayed by curve of B against H, which is called µ B = 9.27 × 10 −24 JT −1.
B-H curve or hysteresis loop. Diamagnetic and paramagnetic 35 (a) From Gauss's law ∫ B ⋅ d S = 0
substances do not show these properties.
15 (c) If a magnet retains its attracting power for a long time it is or divergence of B = ∇ ⋅ B = 0
said to be permanent, otherwise temporary. Permanent 37 (b) Let pole strength be m1 and m 2 and distance between them
magnets are made of ferromagnetic substances. mm
is r, then force between magnetic poles, F ∝ 12 2
r
(A) Taking it together (2m1)(2m 2 ) m1m 2
In second case, F ′ ∝ ,∝ 2
(2r )2 r
1 (d) Magnetic pole strength is stronger at end part of magnet,
so maximum iron powder is collected at the end point of ∴ F′ = F
magnet. 38 (b)
2 (b) A permanent magnet has large retentivity and coercivity, S N S N A/2
so it attracts only magnetic substances.
S N S N S N A/2
5 (d) A line passing through places having zero value of
L
magnetic dip is called aclinic line. At all places upon this line, L/2 L/2
a freely suspended magnet will remain horizontal. The situation is summarised in figure, we see that magnetic
11 (d) SI unit of magnetic induction is pole strength of each part becomes half, i.e. m/2.
Unit of φ Wb 39 (b) Due to hole, the effective length of magnet (2l ) is
B= = = tesla
Unit of ∆A m2 decreased, so magnetic moment of one with hole is smaller.
Also, SI unit of B is weber/metre 2 and newton/ampere-metre. 2M
40 (c) For longitudinal position, magnetic field will be B1 ∝ 3
d
12 (c) Magnetic moment per unit volume is intensity of
M
magnetisation, and number of lines of force crossing per unit For transverse position, magnetic field will be B2 ∝ 3
area is intensity of magnetic field. So correct option is (c). d
B1
∴ = 2:1
18 (a) Steel has more retentivity and coercivity, so it is used for B2
making permanent magnet.
44 (b) Torque, τ = MB sin θ
21 (a) In non-uniform magnetic field, a magnetic needle ∴ τ1 = MB1 sin 90 º = MB1
experiences a force and a torque. MB1 τ1
and τ 2 = MB2 sin 90 º = MB2 or =
22 (b) For a diamagnetic substance, χ is small, negative and MB2 τ 2
independent of temperature. B1 τ1
∴ =
24 (a) A freely hanged magnet stays with its magnetic axis B2 τ 2
parallel to magnetic meridian.
46 (c) At the magnetic north pole, angle of dip, θ = 90 ° 65 (d) Force experienced by each pole of bar magnet is given by
∴ H = B cos θ = B cos 90 ° = 0 F = mB
49 (c) Magnetism of a magnet falls with rise of temperature and where, m is pole strength of bar magnet.
becomes practically zero above curie temperature as shown in But M = mL
Fig. (c). M 3
∴ F = × B ⇒ 6 × 10 −4 = × 2 × 10 −5
tan A 2d (d 2 + l 2 )3/ 2 2d × d 3 (l + l 2 / d 2 )3/ 2 L L
50 (b) = =
tan B (d 2 − l 2 )2 2 ∴ L = 0.1 m
4 l2 
d 1 − 2 
 d  66 (c) In case of toroid, the magnetic field is only confined inside
the body of toroid in the form of concentric magnetic lines of
2
l tan A force and there is no magnetic field outside the body of
Q l>> 2
⇒ = 2:1
d tan B toroid. This is because, the loop encloses no current. Thus,
the magnetic moment of toroid is zero.
52 (d) Given, B = 4B0
In general, if we take r as a large distance outside the toroid,
B  B 1
∴ = 4 ⇒ µr = 4 Q µ r = B  then m ∝ 3 .
B0  0 r
53 (c) Hint i = K tanθ, i.e. i ∝ tanθ, at θ = 90 °, i = ∞ 67 (d) Work done in rotating the magnet from angle θ1 to angle θ 2
So, the curve c represents this relation correctly. is given by
W = MB (cos θ1 − cos θ 2 )
56 (a) As, we know, M = m (2l )
Here, θ1 = 0 ° and θ 2 = 180 °
∴ M = 4 × 10 × 10 −2 = 0.4 A-m2
W = MB (cos 0 ° − cos 180 ° ) = 2MB
59 (b) Above the Curie temperature, ferromagnetic substance
68 (b) Work done in rotating the magnet in uniform magnetic
become paramagnetic in nature. So, its susceptibility varies
field is given by
inversely as the absolute temperature.
W = MB (cos θ1 − cos θ 2 )
61 (b) If magnet is cut along the axis of magnet of length 2l, then
m Here, θ1 = 0 °, θ 2 = 90 °
new pole strength becomes half, i.e. m′ = and new length
2 ∴ W = 2 × 0.1 (cos 0 ° − cos 90 ° )
remains same, i.e. 2l′ = 2l. S N = 2 × 0.1 (1 − 0 ) = 0.2 J
∴New magnetic moment, S N 69 (c) Here, B = 0.5 T; I = 20 A; N = 15; A = − 0.04 $i m2
m 2l M 2l
m
M′ = × 2l = = Magnetic moment of the coil,
2 2 2 M = NIA
62 (c) Net magnetic moment of the system is given by = (15)(20 )(−0.04 $i) = − 12$i Am2
The potential energy of the coil in the given orientation,
N U = − M⋅ B = − (−12$i) ⋅ (0.5$i) = + 6 J
M l
70 (a) For the earth's magnetism, the magnetic field lines of the
S l M earth resemble that of a hypothetical magnetic dipole located
at the centre of the earth.
N S
The axis of the dipole does not coincide with the axis of
Mnet
M
M rotation of the earth but is presently tilted by approximately
11.3° with respect to the later. This results into two situations
M = M 2 + M 2 = 2M = 2 ml as given in the figures below
N N
63 (b) Magnetic moment of the bar magnet is given by
τ
11
°
.3
M= (Q τ = MB sin θ) S
.3
S
11
°
B sin θ
W E W E
0.032 0.032 × 2
= = = 0.4 J T −1 N
0.16 × sin 30 ° 0.16 N
64 (a) As, τ = MB sin θ S S
τ = m (2L ) B sin θ Hence, the declination varies between 11.3° W to 11.3° E.

τ 25 × 10 −6 B M /(5)3 (10 / 5)3
∴ m= = 71 (d) ∴ = = = 4G
(2l ) B sin θ (0.05)(5 × 10 −2 ) sin 30 ° 0.2 2M /(10 )3 2
= 2 × 10 −2 A-m ⇒ B = 4 × 0.2 = 0.8 oersted
H1 B cos θ1 cos θ1 cos 30 ° 3 3 82 (b) Intensity of magnetisation, I =

M
=–
M
72 (a) ∴ = = = = × 2=
H 2 B cos θ 2 cos θ 2 cos 45° 2 2 V mass/density
Given, mass = 1 g = 10 −3 kg
73 (c) Total strength of magnetic field, B 2 = H 2 + V 2
5 × 10 −3kg
∴ V = B 2 − H 2 = (0.5)2 − (0.3)2 = 0.4 G and density = 5g/cm3 = = 5 × 10 3kg/m3
(10 −2 )3
V 0.4 4
tan φ = = = 6 × 10 −7 × 5 × 10 3
H 0.3 3 Hence, I= = 3 A/ m
10 −3
 4
∴ φ = tan−1   µ M M
 3 83 (a) QH = 0 ⋅ 3 ⇒ 4 × 10 −5 = 10 −7 ×
4π r (20 )3 × 10 –6
74 (c) As, H = Be cos θ (20 )3 × 4 × 10 −5 × 10 −6
M=
1 3 10 −7
∴ = Be
2 2 ∴ M = 3.2 A-m2
1 q
Be = oersted 85 (b) As, Gauss’ law states that, ∫ E ⋅ d S = for electrostatic
3 S
ε 0
75 (d) As, we know a permanent magnet is a substance which at field. It does not contradicts for electrostatic fields as the
room temperature retain ferromagnetic property for a long electric field lines do not form continuous closed path.
period of time. According to Gauss’ law in magnetism, ∫ B ⋅ d S = 0.
The individual atoms in a ferromagnetic material possess a S
dipole moment as in a paramagnetic material. Which means that the number of magnetic field lines entering
However, they interact with one another in such a way that the Gaussion surface is equal to the number of field lines
they spontaneously align themselves in a common direction leaving it.
over a macroscopic volume called domain. Thus, we can say It contradicts for magnetic field, because there is a magnetic
that in a permanent magnet at room temperature, domains are field inside the solenoid and no field outside the solenoid
all perfectly aligned. carrying current but the magnetic field lines form the closed paths.
B µ 2M
76 (a) As, tanθ = V 86 (c) In CGS, Baxial = 9 = 0 3 …(i)
BH 4π x
tan θ′ =
BV µ M µ 8M
Bequatorial = 0 = 0 …(ii)
BH cos x 4π  x  2 4π x 3
tan θ′ 1  
∴ =  2
tan θ cos x
77 (d) For a temporary magnet, the hysteresis loop should be Bequatorial = 4Baxial = 36 G
long and narrow.
1
87 (c) As, T ∝ and H = B cos θ
78 (b) T ∝ I H
By increasing mass to four times, the moment of inertia will T1 B 2 cos θ 2
also increase four times. Then T ′ = 4I = 2 I = 2T ⇒ =
T2 B1 cos θ1
79 (d) For a tangent galvanometer, if I ampere current flows 2 B2 cos 60 ° B
through coil, then this current is proportional to tangent of ⇒ = ⋅ = 2
3 B1 cos 30 ° 3B1
angle of deflection (of the needle), i.e.
I ∝ tan θ ⇒
4
=
B2
⇒
B1
=
9
I1 tan θ1 2 tan 30 ° 9 3B1 B2 4 3
∴ = ⇒ =
I2 tan θ 2 I2 tan 60 ° µ0 M
88 (b) B=
∴ I2 = 6A 4π d 3
80 (d) In series, current is same. B
M1 tan θ1 N1 tan 60 °
⇒ = or = = 3
M2 tan θ 2 N 2 tan 45°
81 (a) Magnetic field due to a bar magnet at a distance r from the
centre of magnet on axial position is
µ 2M
B= 0⋅ 3
4π r Bnet
B
3 3
B1  r2   48 8 µ 2M
∴ =  =  = =8 ∴ Bnet = B 2 + B 2 = 2B = 0
B2  r1   24 1 4π d 3

Arihant NEET Objective Physics Volume 2 by DC Pandey 2022 Edition (1) - Unlocked-Compressed-Part - 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Arihant NEET Objective Physics Volume 2 by DC Pandey 2022 Edition (1) - Unlocked-Compressed-Part - 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

190 OBJECTIVE Physics Vol.

A E Sol. At points A and D, a series combination of 2 Ω, 2 Ω

As per the dotted region, 1 Ω, 1 Ω and 1 Ω are in series,

In dotted region, 2 W, 3W and (15/8) W are in series,

In dotted region, resistances are in parallel,

Sol. The given circuit can be redrawn as

All resistances in the circuit are in parallel,

current through a circuit. The work done by the cell in r

Internal resistance of a cell depends on the following factors ε

Potential difference (V ) across the Sol. Total resistance = 10 + 2 + r = (12 + r ) Ω

Fig. 3.16 Mixed grouping

(iv) potential difference across external resistance,V = IR . V

E1 r1 E2 Example 3.39 Two identical cells of emf 1.5 V each joined in

From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get

CHECK POINT 3.2

KIRCHHOFF’S LAWS Kirchhoff’s loop rule

Fig. 3.21 Fig. 3.24

1 joule = 1volt × 1ampere × 1second = 1watt × 1second. 5Ω

An electric current through a resistor increases its thermal V2 (4)2 (2) 32

Electricity consumption Power consumption in a

Example 3.47 In the following figure, find V

CHECK POINT 3.3

Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter Fig. 3.28 Voltmeter

Sol. Given, ig = 1mA = 10 –3 A , G = 20 Ω

On mutually changing the position of cell and galvanometer, 2Ω 4Ω

Q Now, the circuit represents a balanced Wheatstone bridge.

Fig. 3.31 Measuring unknown resistance using meter bridge

Principle of potentiometer Now, to compare emfs of two cells having a constant

(i) To compare the emfs of two cells

110 − 100 0.3 V

CHECK POINT 3.4

R2 R4 19. A resistance of 4 Ω and a wire of length 5 m and resistance

16. AB is a wire of uniform resistance. The galvanometer G 3m

(a) T1 > T2 (b) T1 < T2

44 A cell supplies a current i1 through a resistance R 1

7 7 83 In the below circuit, the battery E 1 has an emf of 12 V

resistances r1 and r 2 respectively are connected in 4Ω

91. In the circuit shown below, the readings of the

114 In the arrangement shown, the magnitude of each (a) 3R (b) 4R

A (a) 5 A (b) 2.5 A (c) 1 A (d) 7.5 A

(B) Medical entrance special format questions

3 Consider the following statements regarding the

R A. Potential difference across 6 Ω resistance (p) 30 V

(C) Medical entrances’ gallery

The values of resistance and tolerance respectively, R1

T T 9 Six similar bulbs are connected as shown in the

(a) 0.2A (b) 0.1A (c) 0.3A (d) 0.4A 4Ω

The equivalent resistance between a and b is

A 6Ω 80 In Wheatstone bridge, three resistors P, Q and R are

(a) resistance R = 46 Ω (a) −1 V (b) +1 V

CHECK POINT 3.2

CHECK POINT 3.3

CHECK POINT 3.4

(A) Taking it together

(B) Medical entrance special format questions

l Statement based questions

l Match the columns

(C) Medical entrances’ gallery

6 (b) The order of drift velocity of electrons is A C

Alternative solution So, equivalent resistance across battery,

Current through 5 Ω resistance

l CHECK POINT 3.3 V 2 25 × 25

5 (a) In series, i is same, so H = i 2Rt. Therefore, H ∝ R. = 9P